CA2494886C - Calibration for wireless location system - Google Patents
Calibration for wireless location system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CA2494886C CA2494886C CA002494886A CA2494886A CA2494886C CA 2494886 C CA2494886 C CA 2494886C CA 002494886 A CA002494886 A CA 002494886A CA 2494886 A CA2494886 A CA 2494886A CA 2494886 C CA2494886 C CA 2494886C
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- wireless
- location
- scs
- location system
- signal
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Expired - Lifetime
Links
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/10—Position of receiver fixed by co-ordinating a plurality of position lines defined by path-difference measurements, e.g. omega or decca systems
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W64/00—Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/0205—Details
- G01S5/021—Calibration, monitoring or correction
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/0284—Relative positioning
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/06—Position of source determined by co-ordinating a plurality of position lines defined by path-difference measurements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S1/00—Beacons or beacon systems transmitting signals having a characteristic or characteristics capable of being detected by non-directional receivers and defining directions, positions, or position lines fixed relatively to the beacon transmitters; Receivers co-operating therewith
- G01S1/02—Beacons or beacon systems transmitting signals having a characteristic or characteristics capable of being detected by non-directional receivers and defining directions, positions, or position lines fixed relatively to the beacon transmitters; Receivers co-operating therewith using radio waves
- G01S1/022—Means for monitoring or calibrating
- G01S1/026—Means for monitoring or calibrating of associated receivers
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S2205/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S2205/001—Transmission of position information to remote stations
- G01S2205/006—Transmission of position information to remote stations for emergency situations
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S2205/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S2205/001—Transmission of position information to remote stations
- G01S2205/008—Transmission of position information to remote stations using a mobile telephone network
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S2205/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S2205/01—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations specially adapted for specific applications
- G01S2205/06—Emergency
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/0205—Details
- G01S5/0215—Interference
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/0205—Details
- G01S5/0218—Multipath in signal reception
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/0205—Details
- G01S5/0221—Receivers
- G01S5/02213—Receivers arranged in a network for determining the position of a transmitter
- G01S5/02216—Timing or synchronisation of the receivers
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/0205—Details
- G01S5/0244—Accuracy or reliability of position solution or of measurements contributing thereto
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/0246—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves involving frequency difference of arrival or Doppler measurements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/0252—Radio frequency fingerprinting
- G01S5/02521—Radio frequency fingerprinting using a radio-map
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01S—RADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
- G01S5/00—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations
- G01S5/02—Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more direction or position line determinations; Position-fixing by co-ordinating two or more distance determinations using radio waves
- G01S5/0257—Hybrid positioning
- G01S5/0268—Hybrid positioning by deriving positions from different combinations of signals or of estimated positions in a single positioning system
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
- H04W4/90—Services for handling of emergency or hazardous situations, e.g. earthquake and tsunami warning systems [ETWS]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/50—Connection management for emergency connections
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
- Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
- Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks
Abstract
An internal calibration method may be employed to mitigate the effects of transfer function variations on subsequent time measurements, in a wireless location system. The inventive method includes the steps of injecting a stable, known wideband signal into a receiver system of the wireless location system; using the wideband signal to estimate the transferfunction across a prescribed bandwidth of the receiver system; and using the estimate to mitigate the variation of the transferfunction on subsequent time measurements. The wideband signal maybe a comb signal characterized by multiple discrete frequencies and consistent amplitude and spacing between the discrete frequencies, and the estimate of the transfer function may be weighted by a quality factor prior to mitigation of the effects of the transfer function.
Description
CALIBRATION FOR WIRELESS LOCATION SYSTEM
This is a divisional of application Serial No. 2,359,797 filed December 13, 1999.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates generally to methods and apparatus for locating wireless transmitters, such as those used in analog or digital cellular systems, personnel communications systems (PCS), enhanced specialized mobile radios (ESMRs), and other types of wireless communications systems. This field is now generally known as wireless location, and has application for Wireless E9-l-I, fleet management, RF
optimization., and other valuable applications.
io BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Early work relating to the present invention has been described in U.S. Patent Number 5,327,144, July 5, 1994, "Cellular Telephone Location System," which discloses a system for locating cellular telephones using novel time difference of arrival (TDOA) techniques. Further enhancements of the system disclosed in the'I44 patent <<:e disclosed in U.S. Patent Nuinber 5,608,410, Marcl. 4, 1997, System for Locating a So;irce of Bursty Transmissions." Both patents are owned by the assignee of the currer_:
invention, The present inventors have continued to develop significant enhancements to the original inventive concepts and have developed techniques to further improve the accuracy of Wireless Location Systems while significantly reducing the cost of these systems:
Over the past few years, the cellular industry has increased the number of air interface protocols available for use by wireless telephones, increased the number of f eqt:ency bands in which wireless or mobile telephones may operate, and expanded thc number of terms that refer or relate to mobile telephones to include "personal communications services", "wireless", and others. The air interface protocols now include A12S, N-AMPS, TDMA, CDMA, GSM,TACS, ESMR, and others. The changes in te::_ainology and increases in the number of air interfaces do ndt change the basic principi:;s and inventions discovered and enhanced by the inventors. However, in keeping %~-ith the current terminology of the industry, the inventors now call the system described herein a Wireless Location System.
The inventors have conducted extensive experiments with the Wireless Location System technology disclosed herein to demonstrate both the viability and value of the technology. For example, several experiments were conducted during several months of 1995 and 1996 in the cities of Philadelphia and Baltimore to verify the system's ability to mitigate multipath in large urban environments. Then, in 1996 the inventors constructed a system in Houston that was used to test the technology's effectiveness in that area and its lo ability to interface directly with E9-1-1 systems. Then, in 1997, the system was tested in a 350 square mile area in New Jersey and was used to locate real 9-1-1 calls from real people in trouble. Since that time, the system test has been expanded to include 12f; cell sites covering an area of over 2,000 square miles. During all of these tests, techniques discussed and disclosed herein were tested for effectiveness and further developed, and the system has been demonstrated to overcome the limitations of other approaches that have been proposed for locating wireless telephones. Indeed, as of December, 1998, no other wireless location system has been installed anywhere else in the world that is capable of locating live 9-1-1 callers. The innovation of the Wireless Location System disclosed herein has been acknowledged in the wireless industry by the extensive amount of media coverage given to the system's capabilities, as well as by awards.
For example, the.prestigious Wireless Appy Award was granted to the system by the Cellular Telephone Industry Association in October, 1997, and the Christopher Columbus Fellowship Foundation and Discover Magazine found the Wireless Location System to be one of the top 4 innovations of 1998 out of 4,000 nominations submitted.
The value and importance of the Wirekss Location System has been acknowledged by the wireless communications industry. In June 1996, the Federal Com.munications Commission issued requirements for ths wireless communications industry to deploy location systems for use in locating wirc:less 9-1-1 callers, with a deadline of October 2001. The location of wireless E9-1-1 callers will save response time, save lives, and save enormous costs because of reduced use of emergency responses :esources.
In
This is a divisional of application Serial No. 2,359,797 filed December 13, 1999.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates generally to methods and apparatus for locating wireless transmitters, such as those used in analog or digital cellular systems, personnel communications systems (PCS), enhanced specialized mobile radios (ESMRs), and other types of wireless communications systems. This field is now generally known as wireless location, and has application for Wireless E9-l-I, fleet management, RF
optimization., and other valuable applications.
io BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Early work relating to the present invention has been described in U.S. Patent Number 5,327,144, July 5, 1994, "Cellular Telephone Location System," which discloses a system for locating cellular telephones using novel time difference of arrival (TDOA) techniques. Further enhancements of the system disclosed in the'I44 patent <<:e disclosed in U.S. Patent Nuinber 5,608,410, Marcl. 4, 1997, System for Locating a So;irce of Bursty Transmissions." Both patents are owned by the assignee of the currer_:
invention, The present inventors have continued to develop significant enhancements to the original inventive concepts and have developed techniques to further improve the accuracy of Wireless Location Systems while significantly reducing the cost of these systems:
Over the past few years, the cellular industry has increased the number of air interface protocols available for use by wireless telephones, increased the number of f eqt:ency bands in which wireless or mobile telephones may operate, and expanded thc number of terms that refer or relate to mobile telephones to include "personal communications services", "wireless", and others. The air interface protocols now include A12S, N-AMPS, TDMA, CDMA, GSM,TACS, ESMR, and others. The changes in te::_ainology and increases in the number of air interfaces do ndt change the basic principi:;s and inventions discovered and enhanced by the inventors. However, in keeping %~-ith the current terminology of the industry, the inventors now call the system described herein a Wireless Location System.
The inventors have conducted extensive experiments with the Wireless Location System technology disclosed herein to demonstrate both the viability and value of the technology. For example, several experiments were conducted during several months of 1995 and 1996 in the cities of Philadelphia and Baltimore to verify the system's ability to mitigate multipath in large urban environments. Then, in 1996 the inventors constructed a system in Houston that was used to test the technology's effectiveness in that area and its lo ability to interface directly with E9-1-1 systems. Then, in 1997, the system was tested in a 350 square mile area in New Jersey and was used to locate real 9-1-1 calls from real people in trouble. Since that time, the system test has been expanded to include 12f; cell sites covering an area of over 2,000 square miles. During all of these tests, techniques discussed and disclosed herein were tested for effectiveness and further developed, and the system has been demonstrated to overcome the limitations of other approaches that have been proposed for locating wireless telephones. Indeed, as of December, 1998, no other wireless location system has been installed anywhere else in the world that is capable of locating live 9-1-1 callers. The innovation of the Wireless Location System disclosed herein has been acknowledged in the wireless industry by the extensive amount of media coverage given to the system's capabilities, as well as by awards.
For example, the.prestigious Wireless Appy Award was granted to the system by the Cellular Telephone Industry Association in October, 1997, and the Christopher Columbus Fellowship Foundation and Discover Magazine found the Wireless Location System to be one of the top 4 innovations of 1998 out of 4,000 nominations submitted.
The value and importance of the Wirekss Location System has been acknowledged by the wireless communications industry. In June 1996, the Federal Com.munications Commission issued requirements for ths wireless communications industry to deploy location systems for use in locating wirc:less 9-1-1 callers, with a deadline of October 2001. The location of wireless E9-1-1 callers will save response time, save lives, and save enormous costs because of reduced use of emergency responses :esources.
In
2 addition, numerous surveys and studies have concluded that various wireless applications, such as location sensitive billing, fleet management, and others, will have great commercial values in the coming years.
Background on Wireless Conununications Systems There are many different types of air interface protocols used for wireless communications systems. These protocols are used in different frequency bands, both in the U.S. and intemationally. The frequency band does not iunpact the Wireless Location System's effectiveness at locating wireless telephones.
All air interface protocols use two types of "channels". The first type includes control channels that are used for conveying information about the wireless telephone or transmitter, for initiating or terminating calls, or for transferring bursty data. For example, sc me types of short messaging services transfer data over the control channel. In different air interfaces, control channels are known by different terminology, but the use of the control channels in each air interface is similar. Control channels generally have identifying information about the wireless telephone or traasmitter contained in the transmission.
The second type includes voice channels that are typically used for conveying voice communications over the air interface. These channels are only used after a call has been set up using the control channels. Voice channels will typically use dedicated resources within the wireless communications system whereas control channels will use shared resources. This distinction will generally make the use of control char.nels for wireless location purposes more cost effective than the use of voice channels, although there are some applications for which regular location on the voice channel is desired.
Voice channels generally do not have identifying information about the wireless telephone or transmitter in the transmission. Some of the differences in the air interface protocols are discussed below:
Background on Wireless Conununications Systems There are many different types of air interface protocols used for wireless communications systems. These protocols are used in different frequency bands, both in the U.S. and intemationally. The frequency band does not iunpact the Wireless Location System's effectiveness at locating wireless telephones.
All air interface protocols use two types of "channels". The first type includes control channels that are used for conveying information about the wireless telephone or transmitter, for initiating or terminating calls, or for transferring bursty data. For example, sc me types of short messaging services transfer data over the control channel. In different air interfaces, control channels are known by different terminology, but the use of the control channels in each air interface is similar. Control channels generally have identifying information about the wireless telephone or traasmitter contained in the transmission.
The second type includes voice channels that are typically used for conveying voice communications over the air interface. These channels are only used after a call has been set up using the control channels. Voice channels will typically use dedicated resources within the wireless communications system whereas control channels will use shared resources. This distinction will generally make the use of control char.nels for wireless location purposes more cost effective than the use of voice channels, although there are some applications for which regular location on the voice channel is desired.
Voice channels generally do not have identifying information about the wireless telephone or transmitter in the transmission. Some of the differences in the air interface protocols are discussed below:
3 AMPS - This is the original air interface protocol used for cellular communications in the U.S. In the AMPS system, separate dedicated channels are assigned for use by control channels (RCC). According to the TIABIA Standard IS-553A, every control channel block must begin at cellular channel 333 or 334, but t_he block may be of variable length.
In the U.S., by. convention, the AMPS control channel block is 21 channels wide, but the use of a 26-channel block is also known. A reverse voice channel (RVC) may occupy any channel that is not assigned to a control channel. The control channel modulation is FSK
(frequency shift keying), while the voice channels are modulated using FM
(frequency modulation).
N-AMPS - This air interface is an expansion of the AMPS air interface protocol, and is defined in EIAffIA standard IS-88. The control channels are substantially the same as for AMPS, however, the voice channels are different. The voice channels occupy less than 10 KHz of bandwidth, versus the 30 KHz used for AMPS, and the modulation is FM.
TDMA - This interface is also known D-AMPS, and is defined in EIA/TIA standard IS-136. This air interface is characterized by the use of both frequency and time separation.
Control channels are known as Digital Control Channels (DCCH) and are transmitted in bursts in timeslots assigned for use by DCCH. Unlike A:MPS, DCCH may be assigned anywhere in the frequency band, although there are generally some frequency assignments that are more attractive than others based upon the use of probability blocks.
Voice channels are known as Digital Traffic Channels (DTC). DCCH and DTC may occupy the same frequency assignments, but not the same timeslot assignment in a given frequency assignment. DCCH and DTC use the same modulation scheme, known as n/4 DQPSK (differential quadrature phase shift keying). In the cellular band, a carrier may use both the AMPS and TDMA protocols, as long as the frequency assignrnents for each protocol are kept separated.
CDMA - This air interface is defined by EIAlTIA standard IS-95A. This air interface is characterized by the use of both frequency and code separation. However, because adjacent cell sites may use the same frequency sets, CDMA is also characterized by very
In the U.S., by. convention, the AMPS control channel block is 21 channels wide, but the use of a 26-channel block is also known. A reverse voice channel (RVC) may occupy any channel that is not assigned to a control channel. The control channel modulation is FSK
(frequency shift keying), while the voice channels are modulated using FM
(frequency modulation).
N-AMPS - This air interface is an expansion of the AMPS air interface protocol, and is defined in EIAffIA standard IS-88. The control channels are substantially the same as for AMPS, however, the voice channels are different. The voice channels occupy less than 10 KHz of bandwidth, versus the 30 KHz used for AMPS, and the modulation is FM.
TDMA - This interface is also known D-AMPS, and is defined in EIA/TIA standard IS-136. This air interface is characterized by the use of both frequency and time separation.
Control channels are known as Digital Control Channels (DCCH) and are transmitted in bursts in timeslots assigned for use by DCCH. Unlike A:MPS, DCCH may be assigned anywhere in the frequency band, although there are generally some frequency assignments that are more attractive than others based upon the use of probability blocks.
Voice channels are known as Digital Traffic Channels (DTC). DCCH and DTC may occupy the same frequency assignments, but not the same timeslot assignment in a given frequency assignment. DCCH and DTC use the same modulation scheme, known as n/4 DQPSK (differential quadrature phase shift keying). In the cellular band, a carrier may use both the AMPS and TDMA protocols, as long as the frequency assignrnents for each protocol are kept separated.
CDMA - This air interface is defined by EIAlTIA standard IS-95A. This air interface is characterized by the use of both frequency and code separation. However, because adjacent cell sites may use the same frequency sets, CDMA is also characterized by very
4 careful power control. This careful power control leads to a situation known to those skilled in the art as the near-far problem, which makes wireless location difficult for most approaches to function properly. Control channels are known as Access Channels, and voice channels are known as Traffic Channels. Access and Traffic Channels may share the same frequency band, but are separated by code. Access and Traffic Channels use the same modulation scheme, known as OQPSK.
GSM - This air interface is defined by the international standard Global System for Mobile Communications. Like TDMA, GSM is characterized by the use of both frequency and time separation. The channel bandwidth is 200 KHz, which is wider than the 30 KHz used for TDMA. Control channels are known as Standalone Dedicated Control Channels (SDCCH), and are transmitted in bursts in timeslots assigned for use by SDCCH. SDCCH may be assigned anywhere in the frequency band. Voice channels are known as Traffic Channels (TCH). SDCCH and TCH may occupy the same frequency assignments, but not the same timeslot assignment in a given frequency assignment.
SDCCH and TCH use the same modulation scheme, known as GMSK.
Within this specification the reference to any one of the air interfaces shall automatically refer to all of the air interfaces, unless specified otherwise. Additionally, a reference to control channels or voice channels shall refer to all types of control or voice channels, whatever the preferred tenninology for a particular air interface. Finally, there are many more types of air interfaces used throughout the world, and there is no intent to exclude any air interface from the inventive concepts described within this specification. Indeed, those skilled in the art will recognize other interfaces used elsewhere are derivatives of or =
similar in class to those described above.
GSM - This air interface is defined by the international standard Global System for Mobile Communications. Like TDMA, GSM is characterized by the use of both frequency and time separation. The channel bandwidth is 200 KHz, which is wider than the 30 KHz used for TDMA. Control channels are known as Standalone Dedicated Control Channels (SDCCH), and are transmitted in bursts in timeslots assigned for use by SDCCH. SDCCH may be assigned anywhere in the frequency band. Voice channels are known as Traffic Channels (TCH). SDCCH and TCH may occupy the same frequency assignments, but not the same timeslot assignment in a given frequency assignment.
SDCCH and TCH use the same modulation scheme, known as GMSK.
Within this specification the reference to any one of the air interfaces shall automatically refer to all of the air interfaces, unless specified otherwise. Additionally, a reference to control channels or voice channels shall refer to all types of control or voice channels, whatever the preferred tenninology for a particular air interface. Finally, there are many more types of air interfaces used throughout the world, and there is no intent to exclude any air interface from the inventive concepts described within this specification. Indeed, those skilled in the art will recognize other interfaces used elsewhere are derivatives of or =
similar in class to those described above.
5 The preferred embodiments of the inventions disclosed herein have many advantages over other techniques for locating wireless telephones. For example, soine of these other techniques involve adding GPS functionality to telephones, which requires that significant changes be made to the telephones. The preferred embodiments disclosed herein do not require any changes to wireless telephones, and so they can be used in connection with the current installed base of over 65 million wireless telephones in the U.S. and 250 million wireless telephones worldwide.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Accordingly, a primary object of the present invention is to provide methods and apparatus for calibrating a wireless location system (WLS) to enable the system to make highly accurate time difference of arrival (TDOA) and frequency differe?ice of arrival (FDOA) measurements. In a presently preferred embodiment of the invention, the instrumentation error is reduced by a calibration process whereby multiple wireless transmitters, such as cellular telephones, are placed at known locations t:iroughout the coverage territory of the wireless location system. These phones malce transmissions, such as periodic registrations or page responses, in a manner similar to any other phone.
However, because their location and the theoretical TDOA values for any pair of SCS's are known a priori, the TLP 12 can determine the exact error in the TDCA
measurements made in connection with a particular pair of SCS's. In addition, because the phones are in fixed locations and there is no Doppler shift, the theoretical FDOA valuc is zero. .Any measured error will be due to drifts in the oscillators at each of the SCS': , changes in the characteristics of analog components (e.g., the antennas, cabling, and filt.rs), and environmental factors such as multipath. Rather than attempting to dyna;
_iically alter these individual error sources, which would introduce additional phase n-iise into the system, the extemal calibration method of the present invention corrects '~he computed TDOA and FDOA values in the digital signal processing stages of the SCS's and 'TLP's, which does not introduce such phase noise.
An external calibration method in accordance with the present invention comprises the steps of transmitting a fnst reference signal from a reference transmitter, receiving the
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Accordingly, a primary object of the present invention is to provide methods and apparatus for calibrating a wireless location system (WLS) to enable the system to make highly accurate time difference of arrival (TDOA) and frequency differe?ice of arrival (FDOA) measurements. In a presently preferred embodiment of the invention, the instrumentation error is reduced by a calibration process whereby multiple wireless transmitters, such as cellular telephones, are placed at known locations t:iroughout the coverage territory of the wireless location system. These phones malce transmissions, such as periodic registrations or page responses, in a manner similar to any other phone.
However, because their location and the theoretical TDOA values for any pair of SCS's are known a priori, the TLP 12 can determine the exact error in the TDCA
measurements made in connection with a particular pair of SCS's. In addition, because the phones are in fixed locations and there is no Doppler shift, the theoretical FDOA valuc is zero. .Any measured error will be due to drifts in the oscillators at each of the SCS': , changes in the characteristics of analog components (e.g., the antennas, cabling, and filt.rs), and environmental factors such as multipath. Rather than attempting to dyna;
_iically alter these individual error sources, which would introduce additional phase n-iise into the system, the extemal calibration method of the present invention corrects '~he computed TDOA and FDOA values in the digital signal processing stages of the SCS's and 'TLP's, which does not introduce such phase noise.
An external calibration method in accordance with the present invention comprises the steps of transmitting a fnst reference signal from a reference transmitter, receiving the
6 WO 00/41403 PCTiUS99/29505 first reference signal at first and second receiver systems; determining a first error value by comparing a measured TDOA (and/or FDOA) value with a theoretica: TDOA (or FDOA) value associated with the known locations of the receiver systeir: i and the known location of the reference transmitter, and utilizing the first error value to correct subsequent TDOA (or FDOA) measurements associated with a mobile tr._I-.smitter to be located. A preferred implementation of this method further includes trans.iiitting a second reference signal from a second reference transmitter, receiving the secor.r reference signal at the first and second receiver systems; determining a second erro~-value by comparing a second measured TDOA (or FDOA) value with a second thcoretical TDOA
(or FDOA) value associated with the known locations of the receiver systems and the known location of the second reference transmitter; and utilizing the second error value in combination with the first error value to correct subsequent TDOA (or FDOA) measurements associated with the mobile transmitter to be located. The first and second error values are preferably combined in a weighted average.
In presently preferred embod'unents of the external calibration aspect of tzv invention, the error values are stored in tabular form for each baseline in the location sy: -~em; the error values are combined in a time series weighted averaging method prior to '_.
eing used to correct subsequent TDOA measurements; and the time series weighted av--raging method is based on a Kalman filter. Preferably, the error values are weighted by a quality factor prior to being used to correct subsequent TDOA measurements, wherein t41c quality factor is based upon the output of a cross-correlation function of a.reference signal received by the first and second receivers, and the error values are used by the location system only if the quality factor exceeds a prescribed threshold value. Tn addition, in preferred embodiments the location system monitors the rate of change of the error values and changes the rate of calibration, or time interval between calibr ~tions, to ensure that the calibration rate exceeds the rate of change of the error values. The rate of calibration may be controlled, e.g., by automatically paging the reference transmitters.
(or FDOA) value associated with the known locations of the receiver systems and the known location of the second reference transmitter; and utilizing the second error value in combination with the first error value to correct subsequent TDOA (or FDOA) measurements associated with the mobile transmitter to be located. The first and second error values are preferably combined in a weighted average.
In presently preferred embod'unents of the external calibration aspect of tzv invention, the error values are stored in tabular form for each baseline in the location sy: -~em; the error values are combined in a time series weighted averaging method prior to '_.
eing used to correct subsequent TDOA measurements; and the time series weighted av--raging method is based on a Kalman filter. Preferably, the error values are weighted by a quality factor prior to being used to correct subsequent TDOA measurements, wherein t41c quality factor is based upon the output of a cross-correlation function of a.reference signal received by the first and second receivers, and the error values are used by the location system only if the quality factor exceeds a prescribed threshold value. Tn addition, in preferred embodiments the location system monitors the rate of change of the error values and changes the rate of calibration, or time interval between calibr ~tions, to ensure that the calibration rate exceeds the rate of change of the error values. The rate of calibration may be controlled, e.g., by automatically paging the reference transmitters.
7 An internal calibration method in accordance with the present invention is utilized to calibrate a first receiver system within an SCS of a wireless location system that is operative to determine the location of a mobile transmitter; this is accomplished, in part, by determining a difference in time of arrival of a signal transmitted by a mobile transmitter and received by the first receiver system and another receiver system. The first receiver system is -7a-WO 00/41403 PCT1.'JS99/29505 characterized by a time- and frequency-varying transfer function. The tra:n:sfer function defines how the amplitude and phase of a received signal will be altered b1 the first receiver system, and the accuracy of a location estimate is dependent, in pzrt, upon the accuracy of time measurements made by the receiver systems. The inventive method comprises the steps of injecting an internally generated wideband signal with known and stable signal characteristics into the first receiver system; utilizing the generated wideband signal to obtain an estimate of the manner in which the transfer function varies across the bandwidth of the first receiver system; and utilizing the estimate to mitigate the effects of the variation of the first transfer function on the time and freque.:cy measurements made by the first receiver system. One such example of a stable wideband signal used for internal calibration is kr;own as a comb signal, which is co:aprised of' multiple individual frequency elements of equal amplitude and at a known spacing, such as 5 KHz.
In presently preferred embodiments of the intemal calibration aspect of thc invention, the estimate of the manner in which the tra.*isfer function varies across the bandwidth of the first receiver system is weighted by a quality factor prior to being usea to ;.iitigate the effects of the transfer function. The quality factor may be based upon the o;:tput of a cross-correlation function of the internally generated calibration signal and the same signal after it has passed through the tr:aisfer function. In addition, the an:ma is first isolated from the receiver system prior to the injection of the internaIly ger:crated calibration signal. An electronically controlled RF relay is preferably used :o automatically isolate the antenna from the receiver system.
Other features and advantages of the invention are disclosed below.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE Di2AWINGS
Figures 1 and lA schematically depict a Wireless Location System in accordance with -Lhe present invention.
In presently preferred embodiments of the intemal calibration aspect of thc invention, the estimate of the manner in which the tra.*isfer function varies across the bandwidth of the first receiver system is weighted by a quality factor prior to being usea to ;.iitigate the effects of the transfer function. The quality factor may be based upon the o;:tput of a cross-correlation function of the internally generated calibration signal and the same signal after it has passed through the tr:aisfer function. In addition, the an:ma is first isolated from the receiver system prior to the injection of the internaIly ger:crated calibration signal. An electronically controlled RF relay is preferably used :o automatically isolate the antenna from the receiver system.
Other features and advantages of the invention are disclosed below.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE Di2AWINGS
Figures 1 and lA schematically depict a Wireless Location System in accordance with -Lhe present invention.
8 WO 00/41403 PCT/~:S99/29505 Figure 2 schematically depicts a Signal Collection System (SCS) 10 in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 2A schematically depicts a receiver module 10-2 employed by the S:gnal Collection System. -Figures 2B and 2C schematically depict altemative ways of coupling the receiver module(s) 10-2 to the antennas 10-1.
Figure 2C-1 is a flowchart of a process employed by t_ne Wireless Location System when using narrowband receiver modules.
Figure 2D schematically depicts a DSP module 10-3 employed in the Sign-al Collection System in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 2E is a flowchart of the operation of the DSP module(s) 10-3, and F:gure 2E-1. is a flowchart of the process employed by the DSP modules for detecting active channels.
Figure 2F schematically depicts a Control and Communications Module 10-5 in accordance with the present invention.
Figures 2G-2J depict aspects of the presently preferred SCS calibration metaods. Figure 2G is a schematic illustration of baselines and error values used to explain ari external calibration method in accordance with the present invention. Figure 2H is a flowchart of an internal calibration method. Figure 21 is an exemplary transfer function cl'an AMPS
control channel and Figure 2J depicts an exemplary comb signal.
Figures 2K and 2L are flowcharts of two methods for monitoring perform4:_ce of a Wireless Location System in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 2A schematically depicts a receiver module 10-2 employed by the S:gnal Collection System. -Figures 2B and 2C schematically depict altemative ways of coupling the receiver module(s) 10-2 to the antennas 10-1.
Figure 2C-1 is a flowchart of a process employed by t_ne Wireless Location System when using narrowband receiver modules.
Figure 2D schematically depicts a DSP module 10-3 employed in the Sign-al Collection System in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 2E is a flowchart of the operation of the DSP module(s) 10-3, and F:gure 2E-1. is a flowchart of the process employed by the DSP modules for detecting active channels.
Figure 2F schematically depicts a Control and Communications Module 10-5 in accordance with the present invention.
Figures 2G-2J depict aspects of the presently preferred SCS calibration metaods. Figure 2G is a schematic illustration of baselines and error values used to explain ari external calibration method in accordance with the present invention. Figure 2H is a flowchart of an internal calibration method. Figure 21 is an exemplary transfer function cl'an AMPS
control channel and Figure 2J depicts an exemplary comb signal.
Figures 2K and 2L are flowcharts of two methods for monitoring perform4:_ce of a Wireless Location System in accordance with the present invention.
9 WO 00/41403 PCTi US99/29505 Figure 3 schematically depicts a TDOA Location Processor 12 in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 3A depicts the structure of an exemplary network map maintained by the TLP
controllers in accordance with the present invention.
Figures 4 and 4A schematically depict different aspects of an Applications Processor 14 in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 5 is a flowchart of a central station-based location processing method in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 6 is a flowchart of a station-based location processing method in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 7 is a flowchart of a method for detetmining, for= each transmissior:
for which a location is desired, whether to employ central or station-based processing.
Figure 8 is a flowchart of a dynamic process used to select cooperating antennas and SCS's 10 used in location processing.
Figure 9 is diagram that is referred to below in explaining a method for selecting a candidate list of SCS's and antennas using a predetermined set of criteria.
Figures l0A and lOB are flowcharts of altemative methods for increasing the bandwidth of a transmitted signal to improve location accuracy.
Figures 11A-11C are signal flow diaQrams and Figure 11D is a flowchart, and they are used to explain an inventive method for combining multiple statistically i~::dependent location estimates to provide an estimate with improved accuracy.
WO 00/41403 PCT/1;S99/29505 Figures 12A and 12B are a block diagrani and a graph, respectively, for explaining a bandwidth synthesis method.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PI:EITERRED EMBODIMEN"I'S
The Wireless Location System (Wireless Location System) operates as a passive overlay to a wireless conununications system, such as a cellular, PCS, or ESiVIlt system, although the concepts are not limited to just those types of communications systems.
Wireless communications systems are generally not suitable for locating wireless devices because the designs of the wireless transmitters and cell sites do not include the necessary functionality to achieve accurate location. Accurate location in this application is defined as accuracy of 100 to 400 feet RMS (root mean square). This is distinguished from the location accuracy that can be achieved by existing cell sites, which is gene:Ily limited to the radius of the cell site. In general, cell : ites are not designed or prograrr~~.ied to cooperate between and among themselves to detemzine wireless transmitte:
location.
Additionally, wireless transmitters such as cellular and PCS telephones are:
:Iesigned to be low cost and therefore generally do not have locating capability built-in.
T:_L Wireless Location System is designed to be a low cost addition to a wireless commu:.acations system that involves minimal changes to cell sites and no changes at all to :andard wireless transmitters. The Wireless Location System is passive because the it does not contain transmitters, and therefore cannot cause interference of any kind to the wireless communications system. The Wireless Lo,.ataon System uses only its own _>>,cialized receivers at cell sites or other receiving locations.
Overview of Wireless Location System (Wireless Location System) As shown in Figure 1, the Wireless Location System has four major kinds c:
subsystems:
the Signal Collection Systems (SCS's) 10, the TDOA Location Processors ,TLP's) 12, the Application Processors (AP's) 14, and the Network Operations Consolc;
(NOC) 16.
Each SCS is responsible for receiving the :2F signals transmitted by the wircless transmitters on both control channels and iloice channels. In general, each SCS is preferably installed at a wireless carrier's cell site, and therefore operates in parallel to a base station. Each TLP 12 is responsible for managing a network of SCS's 10 and for WO 00/41403 PCT/:1S99/29505 providing a centralized pool of digital sigilal processing (DSP) resources .hat can be used in the location calculations. The SCS's 10 and the TLP's 12 operate toge::zer to determine the location of the wireless transmitters, as will be discussed more fully b--low. Digital signal processing is the preferable manner in which to process radio signals because DSP's are relatively low cost, provide consistent performance, and are ea::ily re-programmable to handle many different t2sks. Both the SCS's 10 and TLi''s 12 contain a significant amount of DSP resources, and the software in these systems cr:n operate dynamically to detemzine where to perfonn a particular processing function based upon tradeoffs in processing time, communications time, queuing time, a11 covt.
Each TLP 12 exists centrally primarily to reduce the ove.rall cost of implementing the Wireless Location System, although the techniques discussed herein are not limited to the preferred architecture shown. That is, DSP resources can be relocated within the Wireless Location System without changing the ba-ic concepts and functional;ty disclosed.
IS The AP's 14 are responsible for managing all of the resources in the Wimless Location System, including all of the SCS's 10 and TLP's 12. Each AP 14 also co...ains a specialized database that,contains "triggers" for the Wireless Location Sy.:tem. In order to conserve resources, the Wireless Location System can be programmed Lo locate only certain pre-determined types of transmissions. When a transmission of a l::e-detennined type occurs, then the Wireless Location System is triggered to begin location processing.
Otherwise, the Wireless Location System may be programmed to ignore tr.ie transmission.
Each AP 14 also contains applications interfaces that permit a variety of applications to securely access the Wireless Location System. These applications may, for example, access location records in real time or non-real time, create or delete certr::n type of triggers, or cause the Wireless Location S ystem to take other actions. Each AP 14 is also.
capable of certain post-processing functions that allow the AP 14 to com~ine a number of location records to generate extended reports or analyses useful for applications such as traffic monitoring or RF optimization.
The NOC 16 is a network management system that provides operators of the Wireless Location System easy access to the prognunming parameters of the 'Wire:ess Location WO 00/41403 PC'1YuS99/29505 System. For example, in some cities, the Wireless Location System may coniain many hundreds or even thousands of SCS's 10. 'he NOC is the most effective way to manage a large Wireless Location System, using graphical user interface capabilities.
The NOC
will also receive real time alerts if certain iunctions within the Wirel~ss Location System are not operating properly. These real time alerts can be used by the operator to take corrective action quickly and prevent a degradation of location service.
Experience with trials of the Wireless Location System siio=w that the ability of the system to maintain good location accuracy over time is directly related to the operator's ability to keep the system operating within its predetermined parameters.
Readers of U.S. Patents 5,327,144 and 5,608,410 and this specification will note similarities between the respective systems. Indeed, the system disclosed herein is significantly based upon and also significantly enhanced from the system described in those previous patents. For example, the SCIS 10 has been expanded and enhanced from the Antenna Site System described in 5,608,410. The SCS 10 now has the capability to support many more antennas at a single cetI site, and further can support the use of extended antennas as described below. This enables the SCS 10 to operate with the sectored cell sites now commonly used. Ttte SCS 10 can also transfer data from multiple antennas at a cell site to the TLP 12 instcaii of always combining data from multiple antennas before transfer. Additionally, the SCS 10 can support multiple ai:
interface protocols thereby allowing the SCS 10 to function even as a wireless carrier continually changes the configuration of its system.
The TLP 12 is similar to the Central Site System disclosed in 5,608,410, but has also been expanded and enhanced. For example, the TLP 12 has been made scaleable so that the amount of DSP resources required by each TLP 12 can be appropriate:y scaled to match the number of locations per second required by customers of the Wireless Location System. In order to support scaling for dif:erent Wireless Location Syster::
capacities, a networl.Qng scheme has been added to the TLP 12 so that multiple TLP's :2 can cooperate to share RF data across wireless communication system network boundaries.
Additionally, the TLP 12 has been given control means to determine the CS's
Figure 3A depicts the structure of an exemplary network map maintained by the TLP
controllers in accordance with the present invention.
Figures 4 and 4A schematically depict different aspects of an Applications Processor 14 in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 5 is a flowchart of a central station-based location processing method in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 6 is a flowchart of a station-based location processing method in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 7 is a flowchart of a method for detetmining, for= each transmissior:
for which a location is desired, whether to employ central or station-based processing.
Figure 8 is a flowchart of a dynamic process used to select cooperating antennas and SCS's 10 used in location processing.
Figure 9 is diagram that is referred to below in explaining a method for selecting a candidate list of SCS's and antennas using a predetermined set of criteria.
Figures l0A and lOB are flowcharts of altemative methods for increasing the bandwidth of a transmitted signal to improve location accuracy.
Figures 11A-11C are signal flow diaQrams and Figure 11D is a flowchart, and they are used to explain an inventive method for combining multiple statistically i~::dependent location estimates to provide an estimate with improved accuracy.
WO 00/41403 PCT/1;S99/29505 Figures 12A and 12B are a block diagrani and a graph, respectively, for explaining a bandwidth synthesis method.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF PI:EITERRED EMBODIMEN"I'S
The Wireless Location System (Wireless Location System) operates as a passive overlay to a wireless conununications system, such as a cellular, PCS, or ESiVIlt system, although the concepts are not limited to just those types of communications systems.
Wireless communications systems are generally not suitable for locating wireless devices because the designs of the wireless transmitters and cell sites do not include the necessary functionality to achieve accurate location. Accurate location in this application is defined as accuracy of 100 to 400 feet RMS (root mean square). This is distinguished from the location accuracy that can be achieved by existing cell sites, which is gene:Ily limited to the radius of the cell site. In general, cell : ites are not designed or prograrr~~.ied to cooperate between and among themselves to detemzine wireless transmitte:
location.
Additionally, wireless transmitters such as cellular and PCS telephones are:
:Iesigned to be low cost and therefore generally do not have locating capability built-in.
T:_L Wireless Location System is designed to be a low cost addition to a wireless commu:.acations system that involves minimal changes to cell sites and no changes at all to :andard wireless transmitters. The Wireless Location System is passive because the it does not contain transmitters, and therefore cannot cause interference of any kind to the wireless communications system. The Wireless Lo,.ataon System uses only its own _>>,cialized receivers at cell sites or other receiving locations.
Overview of Wireless Location System (Wireless Location System) As shown in Figure 1, the Wireless Location System has four major kinds c:
subsystems:
the Signal Collection Systems (SCS's) 10, the TDOA Location Processors ,TLP's) 12, the Application Processors (AP's) 14, and the Network Operations Consolc;
(NOC) 16.
Each SCS is responsible for receiving the :2F signals transmitted by the wircless transmitters on both control channels and iloice channels. In general, each SCS is preferably installed at a wireless carrier's cell site, and therefore operates in parallel to a base station. Each TLP 12 is responsible for managing a network of SCS's 10 and for WO 00/41403 PCT/:1S99/29505 providing a centralized pool of digital sigilal processing (DSP) resources .hat can be used in the location calculations. The SCS's 10 and the TLP's 12 operate toge::zer to determine the location of the wireless transmitters, as will be discussed more fully b--low. Digital signal processing is the preferable manner in which to process radio signals because DSP's are relatively low cost, provide consistent performance, and are ea::ily re-programmable to handle many different t2sks. Both the SCS's 10 and TLi''s 12 contain a significant amount of DSP resources, and the software in these systems cr:n operate dynamically to detemzine where to perfonn a particular processing function based upon tradeoffs in processing time, communications time, queuing time, a11 covt.
Each TLP 12 exists centrally primarily to reduce the ove.rall cost of implementing the Wireless Location System, although the techniques discussed herein are not limited to the preferred architecture shown. That is, DSP resources can be relocated within the Wireless Location System without changing the ba-ic concepts and functional;ty disclosed.
IS The AP's 14 are responsible for managing all of the resources in the Wimless Location System, including all of the SCS's 10 and TLP's 12. Each AP 14 also co...ains a specialized database that,contains "triggers" for the Wireless Location Sy.:tem. In order to conserve resources, the Wireless Location System can be programmed Lo locate only certain pre-determined types of transmissions. When a transmission of a l::e-detennined type occurs, then the Wireless Location System is triggered to begin location processing.
Otherwise, the Wireless Location System may be programmed to ignore tr.ie transmission.
Each AP 14 also contains applications interfaces that permit a variety of applications to securely access the Wireless Location System. These applications may, for example, access location records in real time or non-real time, create or delete certr::n type of triggers, or cause the Wireless Location S ystem to take other actions. Each AP 14 is also.
capable of certain post-processing functions that allow the AP 14 to com~ine a number of location records to generate extended reports or analyses useful for applications such as traffic monitoring or RF optimization.
The NOC 16 is a network management system that provides operators of the Wireless Location System easy access to the prognunming parameters of the 'Wire:ess Location WO 00/41403 PC'1YuS99/29505 System. For example, in some cities, the Wireless Location System may coniain many hundreds or even thousands of SCS's 10. 'he NOC is the most effective way to manage a large Wireless Location System, using graphical user interface capabilities.
The NOC
will also receive real time alerts if certain iunctions within the Wirel~ss Location System are not operating properly. These real time alerts can be used by the operator to take corrective action quickly and prevent a degradation of location service.
Experience with trials of the Wireless Location System siio=w that the ability of the system to maintain good location accuracy over time is directly related to the operator's ability to keep the system operating within its predetermined parameters.
Readers of U.S. Patents 5,327,144 and 5,608,410 and this specification will note similarities between the respective systems. Indeed, the system disclosed herein is significantly based upon and also significantly enhanced from the system described in those previous patents. For example, the SCIS 10 has been expanded and enhanced from the Antenna Site System described in 5,608,410. The SCS 10 now has the capability to support many more antennas at a single cetI site, and further can support the use of extended antennas as described below. This enables the SCS 10 to operate with the sectored cell sites now commonly used. Ttte SCS 10 can also transfer data from multiple antennas at a cell site to the TLP 12 instcaii of always combining data from multiple antennas before transfer. Additionally, the SCS 10 can support multiple ai:
interface protocols thereby allowing the SCS 10 to function even as a wireless carrier continually changes the configuration of its system.
The TLP 12 is similar to the Central Site System disclosed in 5,608,410, but has also been expanded and enhanced. For example, the TLP 12 has been made scaleable so that the amount of DSP resources required by each TLP 12 can be appropriate:y scaled to match the number of locations per second required by customers of the Wireless Location System. In order to support scaling for dif:erent Wireless Location Syster::
capacities, a networl.Qng scheme has been added to the TLP 12 so that multiple TLP's :2 can cooperate to share RF data across wireless communication system network boundaries.
Additionally, the TLP 12 has been given control means to determine the CS's
10, and WO 00/41403 PCT/US99i29505 more importantly the antennas at each oj'the SCS's 10, from which the TLP 12 is to receive data in order to process a specifir location. Previously, the Antenna Site Systems automatically forwarded data to the Central Site System, whether requested or not by the Central Site System. Furthermore, the SCS 10 and TLP 12 combined have been designed with additional means for removing mullipath from the received transmissions.
The Database Subsystem of the Central Site System has been expanded and developed into the AP 14. The AP 14 can support a greater variety of applications tl:an previously disclosed in 5,608,410, including the abi:ity to post-process large volumes of location records from multiple wireless transmitters. This post-processed data can vield, for example, very effective maps for use by wireless carriers to improve and optimize the RF
design of the communications systems. This can be achieved, for example, by plotting the locations of all of the callers in an area and the received signal strengths wt a number of cell sites. The carrier can then determine whether each cell site is, in fact, serving the exact coverage area desired by the carrier. The AP 14 can also now store location records anonymously, that is, with the MIN and/or other identity information removed from the location record, so that the location record can be used for RF optimization or traffic monitoring without causing concerns abcut an individual user's privacy.
As shown in Figure lA, a presently preferred implementation of the Wireless Location System includes a plurality of SCS regions each of which comprises multiple SCS's 10.
For example, "SCS Region1" includes SCS's l0A and IOB (and preferably others, not shown) that are located at respective cell sites and share antennas with the base stations at those cell sites. Drop and insert units I lA, and 1 IB are used to interface fractional T1/E1 lines to full TI/El lines, which in turn are coupled to a digital access and control system (DACS) 13A. The DACS 13A and anothi:r DACS 13B are used in the maiiner described more fully below for communications between the SCS's IOA, l OB, etc., and multiple TLP's 12A, 12B, etc. As shown, the TLP's are typically collocated and intcrconnected via an Ethernet network (backbone) and a second, redundant Ethemet networl.. Also coupled to the Ethernet networks are multiple AP's 14A and 14B, multiple NOC's 16A and 16B, and a terminal server 15. Routers 19A an3 19B are used to couple one Wireless Location System to one or more other Wireless Lo -.ation System(s).
Signal Collection System 10 Generally, cell sites will have one of the iollowing antenna configurations:
(i) an omnidirectional site with 1 or 2 receive antennas or (ii) a sectored site with 1, 2, or 3 sectors, and with 1 or 2 receive antennas iised in each sector. As the number of cell sites has increased in the U.S. and internationally, sectored cell sites have become the predominant configuration. However, the::e are also a growing number of micro-cells and pico-cells, which can be omnidirectional. Therefore, the SCS 10 has been designed to be configurable for any of these typical cell ites and has been provided with mechanisms to employ any number of antennas at a cell ite.
The basic architectural elements of the SCS 10 remain the same as for the Antenna Site System described in 5,608,410, but sever-Ul enhancements have been made to increase the flexibility of the SCS 10 and to reduce the: commercial deployment cost of the system.
The most presently preferred embodimeni of the SCS 10 is described herein. The SCS 10, an overview of which is shown in Figure ?, includes digital receiver modules through 10-2C; DSP modules 10-3A through 10-3C; a serial bus 10-4, a control and communications module 10-5; a GPS module 10-6; and a clock distribution module 10-7.
The SCS 10 has the following external connections: power, fractional Tl/E1 communications, RF connections to antennas, and a GPS antenna connection for the timing generation (or clock distribution) niodule 10-7. The architecture and packaging of the SCS 10 permit it to be physically collocated with cell sites (which is the most conunon installation place), located at other types of towers (such as FM, AM, two-way emergency communications, television, etc.), or located at other building structures (such as rooftops, silos, etc.).
Timing Generation The Wireless Location System depends upon the accurate determination of time at all SCS's 10 contained within a network. Several different timing generation systems have been described in previous disclosures, however the most presently preferred embodiment is based upon an enhanced (iPS receiver 10-6. The enhanced GPS
receiver differs from most traditional GPS receivers in that the receiver contains algorithms that remove some of the timing instability of the GPS signals, and guarantees that any two SCS's 10 contained within a network can receive timing pulses that are within approximately ten nanoseconds of each oiher. These enhanced GPS receivers are now commercially available, and further reduce some of the time reference related errors that were observed in previous implementations of wireless location systems. While this enhanced GPS receiver can produce a very accurate time reference, the output of the receiver may still have an unacceptable pliase noise. Therefore, the output of the receiver is input to a low phase noise, crystal oscil:.ator-driven phase locked loop circuit that can now produce 10 MHz and one pulse per s,:cond (PPS) reference signals with less than 0.01 degrees RMS of phase noise, and with the pulse output at any SCS 10 in a Wireless Location System network within ten nanoseconds of any other pulse at another SCS 10.
This combination of enhanced GPS receiver, crystal oscillator, and phase locked loop is now the most preferred method to produce stable time and frequency reference signals with low phase noise.
The SCS 10 has been designed to support multiple frequency bands and multiple carriers with equipment located at the same cell si-:e. This can take place by using multiple receivers interaal to a single SCS chassis, or by using multiple chassis each with separate receivers. In the event that multiple SCS chassis are placed at the same cell site, the SCS's 10 can share a single timing generation/clock distribution circuit 10-7 and thereby reduce overall system cost. The 10 MHz and one PPS output signals from the timing generation circuit are amplified and buffered internal to the SCS 10, and tl:;,n made available via external connectors. Therefo;-e a second SCS can receive its timing from a first SCS using the buffered output and the extemal connectors. These signals can also be made available to base station equipment collocated at the cell site. This might be useful to the base station, for example, in improving the frequency re-use pattern of a wireless communications system.
WO 00141403 PCT,US99/29505 Receiver Module 10-2 (Wideband Embodiment) When a wireless transmitter makes a transmission, the Wireless Location System must receive the transmission at multiple SCS's 10 located at multiple geographically dispersed cell sites. Therefore, each SCS 10 has the ability to receive a transmission on any RF channel on which the transmission may originate. Additionally, since the SCS 10 is capable of supporting multiple air interface protocols, the SCS 10 also supports multiple types of RF channels. This is in ,-.ontrast to most current base station receivers, which typically receive only one type of c:hannel and are usually capable of receiving only on select RF channels at each cell site. For example, a typical TDMA base station receiver will only support 30 KHz wide channels, anC each receiver is progranuned to receive signals on only a single channel vvhose frequency does not change often (i.e. there is a relatively fixed frequency plan). Therefore, very few TDMA base station receivers would receive a transmission on any given frequency. As another example, even though some GSM base station receivers are capable of frequency hopping, the receivers at multiple base stations are generally not capable of sirnultaneously tuning to a single frequency for the purpose of perfonning location processing. In fac:, the receivers at GSM base stations are programmed to frequency hop to avoid using an RF channel that is being used by another transmitter so as to minimize interference.
The SCS receiver module 10-2 is preferably a dual wideband digital rece:ver that can receive the entire frequency band and all of the RF channels of an air interface. For cellular systems in the U.S., this receiver module is either 15 MHz Nvide or 25 MHz wide so that all of the channels of a single cartier or all of the channels of both carriers can be received. This receiver module has many of the characteristics of the receiver previously described in Patent Number 5,608,410, aiid Figure 2A is a block diagrar.: of the currently preferred embodiment. Each receiver module contains an RF tuner secticn 10-2-1, a data interface and control section 10-2-2 and zn analog to digital conversion section 10-2-3.
The RF tuner section 10-2-1 includes twt. full independent digital receivers (including Tuner # 1 and Tuner #2) that convert the ~malog RF input from an external connector into a digitized data stream. Unlike most base station receivers, the SCS receiver module does not perform diversity combining or switching. Rather, the digitized signEl from each WO 00/41403 C"r/uS99/29505 independent receiver is made available to the location processing. The present inventors have detemiined that there is an advantage to the location processing, and especially the multipath mitigation processing, to inde;~endently process the signals from each antenna rather than perform combining on the re-.eiver module.
The receiver module 10-2 performs, or is coupled to elements that perform, the following functions: automatic gain control (to support both nearby strong signals and far away weak signals), bandpass filtering to remove potentialiy interfering signals from outside of the RF band of interest, synthesis of frecuencies needed for mixing with the RF signals to create an IF signal that can be sampled, :nixing, and analog to digital conversion (ADC) for sampling the RF signals and outputting a digitized data stream having an appropriate bandwidth and bit resolution. The freque:ncy synthesizer locks the synthesized frequencies to the 10 MHz reference sigial from the clock distribution/tir:iing generation module 10-7 (Figure 2). All of the circuits used in the receiver module maintain the low phase noise characteristics of the timing reference signal. The receiver module preferably has a spurious free'dynamic range of at least 80 dB.
The receiver module 10-2 also contains,-.ircuits to generate test frequencies and calibration signals, as well as test ports tivhere measurements can be made by technicians during installation or troubleshooting. Various calibration processes are described in further detail below. The intemally generated test frequencies and test ports provide an easy method for engineers and technicians to rapidly test the receiver module and diagnose any suspected problems. This is also especially useful during the manufacturing process.
One of the advantages of the Wireless Location System described hcrein is that no new antennas are required at cell sites. The V'lireless Location System can us::
the existing antennas already installed at most cell sites, including both omni-directional and sectored antennas. This feature can result in significant savings in the installation and maintenance costs of the Wireless Location System versus other approaches that havc been described in the prior art. The SCS's digital receivers 10-2 can be connected to the existing antennas in zwo ways, as shown in Figutes 2B and 2C, respectively. In Figure 2B, the SCS receivers 10-2 are connected to the existing cell site multi-coupier or RF
splitter. In this manner, the SCS 10 uses the cell site's existing low noise pre-air:pliner, band pass filter, and multi-coupler or RF splitter. This type of connection usually limits the SCS 10 to supporting the frequency band of a sir.;gle carrier. For example, an A-side cellular carrier will typically use the band pass filter to block signals from customers of the B-side carrier, and vice versa.
In Figure 2C, the existing RF path at the cell site has been interrupted, and a new pre-amplifier, band pass filter, and RF splitter has been added as part of the Wireless Location System. The new band pass filter will pass multiple contiguous frequency bands, such as both the A-side and B-side cellular carriers, thereby allowing the Wireless Location System to locate wireless transinitters using both cellular systems but using the antennas from a single cell site. In this configuration, the Wireless Location System uses matched RF components at each cell site, so that the phase versus frequency responses are identical. This is in contrast to existing RF components, which may t.
from different manufacturers or using different model numbers at various cell sites. Matching the response characteristics of RF componer..ts reduces a possible source of c_;or for the location processing, although the Wireless Location System has the capZ'::ility to compensate for these sources of error. Finally, the new pre-amplifier ins:~lled with the Wireless Location System will have a very low noise figure to improve t::e sensitivity of the SCS 10 at a cell site. The overall noi::e figure of the SCS digital rece:
: ers 10-2 is dominated by the noise figure of the low noise amplifiers. Because the <<iireless Location System can use weak signals in location processing, whereas the base station typically cannot process weak signals, the Wireless Location System can significantly benefit from a high quality, very low noise amplif er.
In order to improve the ability of the Wii-eless Location System to acc-urately determine TDOA for a wireless transmission, the p:lase versus frequency response of the cell site's RF components are detennined at the tinte of installation and updated at other certain times and then stored in a table in the Wireless.Location System. This can be important WO 00l41403 PCT/US99129505 because, for example, the band pass filteis and/or multi-couplers made by some manufacturers have a steep and non-linear phase versus frequency response near the edge of the pass band. If the edge of the pass band is very near to or coincident with the reverse control or voice channels, then th: Wireless Location System would make incorrect measurements of the transmitted signal's phase characteristics if the Wireless Location System did not con:ect the measurements using the stored characteristics. This becomes even more important if a carrier has installed multi-couplers and/or band pass filters from more than one manufacturer, because the characteristics at each site may be different. In addition to measuring the phase versus frequency response, other environnlental factors may cause changes to the RF path prior to the ADC.
These factors require occasional and sometimes periodic calibration in the SCS 10.
Alternative Narrowband Embodiment of :2eceiver Module 10-2 In addition or as an altemative to the wideband receiver module, the SCS 10 also supports a narrowband embodiment of the receiver module 10-2. In contrast to the wideband receiver inodule that can simultaneously receive all of the RF
channels in use by a wireless communications system, the: narrowband receiver can only receive one or a few RF channels at a time. For example, the SCS 10 supports a 60 KHz narrowband receiver for use in AMPS/TDMA system:c, covering two contiguous 30 KFLz channels.
This receiver is still a digital receiver as described for the wideband module, however the frequency synthesizing and mixing circuils are used to dynamically tune the receiver module to various RF channels on commiaid. This dynamic tuning can typically occur in one millisecond or less, and the receiver can dwell on a specific RF channel for as long as required to receive and digitize RF data for location processing.
The purpose of the narrowband receiver is to reduce the implementation cost of a Wireless Location System from the cost that is incurred with wideband receivers. Of course, there is some loss of perfonnance, but the availability of these multiple receivers permits wireless carriers to have more cost/performance options. Additional inventive functions and enhancements have been added to the Wireless Location System to support this new type of narrowband receiver. When the wideband receiver is being used, all RF
WO 00/41403 PCT/US991"29505 channels are received continuously at all I--,CS's 10, and subsequent to the transmission, the Wireless Location System can use the DSP's 10-3 (Figure 2) to dynamically select any RF channel from the digital memory. 'With the narrowband receiver, the Wireless Location System must ensure a priori that the narrowband receivers at multiple cell sites are simultaneously tuned to the same RF c.aannel so that all receivers can simultaneously receive, digitize and store the same wirele:s transmission. For this reason, the narrowband receiver is generally used cnl)= for locating voice channel transmissions, which can be known a priori to be making a transmission. Since control channel transmissions can occur asynchronously at any time, the narrowband receiver may not be tuned to the correct channel to receive the lransmission.
When the narrowband receivers are used for locating ANfPS voice channel transmissions, the Wireless Location System has the abilily to temporarily change the modulation characteristics of the AMPS wireless transinitter to aid location processing.
This may be necessary because AMPS voice channels we only FM modulated with the addition of a low level supervisory tone known as SAT. As is known in the art, the Cramer-Rao lower bound of AMPS FM modulation is significantly worse than the Manchester encoded FSK
modulation used for AMPS reverse channels and "blan_k and burst"
transrnissions on the voice channel. Further, ANg'S wireless transmitters may be transmitting with significantly reduced energy if there is no r.7odulating input signal (i.e., no one is speaking). To improve the location estimatr by improving the modulation characteristics without depending on the existence or amp:.itude of an input modulating signal, the Wireless Location System can cause an AIAPS wireless transmitter to transmit a "blank and burst" message at a point in time when the naiTowband receivers at multiple SCS's 10 are tuned to the RF channel on which thi.- message will be sent. This is further described later.
The Wireless Location System performs the following steps when using the narrowband receiver module (see the flowchart of Figure 2C-1):
a first wireless transmitter is a priori engaged in transmitting on a particular RF
channel;
the Wireless Location System trigge;-s to make a location estimate of the first wireless transmitter (the trigger may occur either internally or externally via a command/response interface);
the Wireless Location System deterrnines the cell site, sector, RF channel, timeslot, long code mask, and encryption key (all information elements may not be necessary for all air interface protocols) currently in use by the first wireless transmitter, the Wireless Location System tunes an appropriate first narrrowband r::ceiver at an appropriate first SCS 10 to the RR? channel and timeslot at the des:;nated cell site and sector, where appropriate typically means both available and collocated or in closest proximity;
the first SCS 10 receives a time segir::ent of RF data, typically ranging from a few microseconds to tens of milliseconds, from the first narrowband receiver and evaluates the transmission's powi:r, SNR, and modulation charac,.:::stics;
if the transmission's power or SNR is below a predetermined thresho:d, the Wireless Location System waits a predetermined length of time and then ret-aa-ns to the above third step (where the Wireless Location System determines :he cell site, sector, etc.);
if the transmission is an AMPS voice channel transmission and the mUdulation is below a threshold, then the Wireless Location System commands the wireless communications system to send a, command to the first wireless transmitter to cause a "blank and burst" on the J:1rst wireless transmitter, the Wireless Location System requests the wireless communications system to prevent hand-off of the wireless tcansmitter to another RF channel for a predetermined length=of time;
the Wireless Location System receives a response from the wireless communications system indicating the time period during which the first wireless t:ansmitter will be prevented from handing-off, and if commanded, the time period during which the wireless communications system will send a command to the :irst wireless transmitter to cause a "blank and burst";
WO 00/41403 PCTl .,J99/29505 the Wireless Location System deterniines the list of antennas that will oc used in location processing (the antenna selection process is described below);
the Wireless Location System deterrriines the earliest Wireless Location System timestamp at which the narrowband receivers connected to the sei.I-ted antennas are available to begin simultaneo-isly collecting RF data from the :u channel currently in use by the first wireless transmitter, based upon the earliest Wireless Location System timestamp and Lhe ~::ne periods in the response from the wireless communications system, the V'ire' css Location System commands the narrowbar..d receivers connected to the ant::ru-las that will be used in location processing to tune to the cell site, sector, and 1-:-channel currently in use by the first wireless transmitter and to receive RF ::ata for a predetermined dwell time (based upon the bandwidth of the signs:, SNR, and integration requirements);
the RF data received by the narrowband receivers are written into the .::ial port memory;
location processing on the received RF data commences, as described :-, Patent Nos.
5,327,144 and 5,608,410 and in sixtions below;
the Wireless Location System again cletertnines the cell site, sector, :'~.::
channel, timeslot, long code mask, and encryption key currently in use by u: first wireless transmitte.r, if the cell site, sector, RF channel, tinieslot, long code mask, and encr}
ption key currently in use by the first wireless transmitter has changed betwe:a queries (i.e.
before and after gathering the R.F data) the Wireless Location Syst:::n ceases location processing, causes an alert message that location processi:..,-failed because the wireless transmitter changed transmission status durir.; the period of time in which RF data was being received, and re-triggers this entiic process;
location processing on the received RF data completes in accordance with the steps described below.
The determination of the information elements including cell site, sector, RF
channel, timeslot, long code mask, and encryption key (all information elements may not be WO 00/41403 PCT/~JS99/29505 necessary for all air interface protocols) is typically obtained by the Wireless Location System through a command / response i:iterface between the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications systenL.
The use of the narrowband receiver in the manner described above is known as random tuning because the receivers can be directed to any RF channel on command from the system. One advantage to random tuning is that locations are processed o:ily for those wireless transmitters for which the Wire:.ess Location System is triggere:-".
One disadvantage to random tuning is that various synchronization factors, including the interface between the wireless communic.ations system and the Wireless Location System and the latency times in scheduling the necessary receivers throughout the system, can limit the total location processing throughput. For example, in a TDMA system, random tuning used throughout the Wireless Location System will typically limit location processing throughput to about 2.5 locati ons per second per cell site sector.
Therefore, the narrowband receiver also supports another mode, lmov,rn r::>
automatic sequential tuning, which can perform location processing at a higher throughput. For example, in a TDMA system, using simifar assumptions about dwell tim, and setup time as for the narrowband receiver operation described above, sequential :unir.g can achieve a location processing throughput of about =41 locations per second per cell site sector, meaning that al1395 TDMA RF channels can be processed in about 9 seconds. This increased rate can be achieved by taking advantage of, for example, the. two contiguous RF channels that can be received simultaneously, location processing all three* TDMA
timeslots in an RF channel, and eliminating the need for synchronization with the wireless communications system. When the Wireless Location System is using the narrowband receivers for sequential tuning, the Wireless Location System has no knowledge of the identity of the wireless transmitter because the Wireless Location System does not wait for a trigger, no does the Wireless Location Systern query the wireless conununications system for t.he identity information prior to receiving the transmission. In this method, the Wireiess Location System sequences through every cell site, RF channel and time slot, perforras location processing, and reports a location record WO 00/41403 :'CTfUS99/29505 identifying a time stamp, cell site, RF channel, time slot, and location.
Subsequent to the location record report, the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system match the location records to the tivireless communications system's data indicating which wireless transmitters we:-e in use at the time, and which cell sites, RF
channels, and time slots were used by each wireless transnlitter. Then, the Wireless Location System can retain the location re:cords for wireless transmitters of interest, and discard those location records for the remaining wireless transmitters.
Digital Signal Processor Module 10-3 The SCS digital receiver modules 10-2 output a digitized RF data stream having a specified bandwidth and bit resolution. Fcr example, a 15 MHz embodiment of the wideband receiver may output a data stream containing 60 million samples per second, at a resolution of 14 bits per sample. This RF data stream will contain all of the RF channels that are used by the wireless communications system. The DSP modules 10-3 receive the digitized data stream, and can extract any individual RF channel through digital mixing and filtering. The DSP's can also reduce tie bit resolutio.n upon command from the Wireless Location System, as needed to re:duce the bandwidth requirements between the SCS 10 and TLP 12. The Wireless Location System can dynamically selec:'the bit resolution at which to forward digitized baseband RF data, based upon the processing requirements for each location. DSP's are used for these functions to reduce the systemic errors that can occur from mixing and filtE ring with analog components. 71::e use of DSP's allows perfect matching in the processing between any two SCS's : 0.
A block diagram of the DSP module 10-3 is shown is Figure 2D, and the operation of the DSP module is depicted by the flowchart of Figure 2E. As shown in F:2D, the DSP
module 10-3 comprises the following elenients: a pair of DSP elemenw i u-3-IA
and 10-3-IB, referred to collectively as a "first" DSP; serial to parallel conver.c..: 10-3-2; dual port memory elements 10-3-3; a second DSP 10-3-4; a parallel to seri~
c,riverter, a FIFO
buffer, a DSP 10-3-5 (including RAM) fo:- detection, another DSP 10-3-6 for demodulation, and another DSP 10-3-7 for notmalization and control; and an address generator 10-3-8. In a presently preferred rmbodiment, the DSP module 1 0-3 receives the WO 00/41403 PC T/t1S99/29505 wideband digitized data stream (Figure 2E, step S 1), and uses the first DSP
(10-3-1 A and 10-3-1B) to extract blocks of channels (step S2). For example, a first DSP
programmed to operate as a digital drop receiver can extract four blocks of channels, where each block includes at least 1.25 MHz of bandwidth. This bandwidth can include 42 channels of AMPS or TDMA, 6 channels of GSM, or 1 channel of CDMA. The DSP does not require the blocks to be contiguous, as the DSP can independently digitally tune to any set of RF
channels within the bandwidth of the wideband digitized data stream. The DSP
can also perform wideband or narrow band energy detection on aIl or any of the channels in the block, and report the power levels by channel to the TLP 12 (step S3). For example, every 10 ms, the DSP can perform wideband energy detection and create an RF
spectral map for all channels for all receivers (see step S9). Because this spectral map can be sent from the SCS 10 to the TLP 12 every 1C ms via the communications linlc connecting the SCS 10 and the TLP 12, a significant data overhead could exist. Therefore, the DSP
reduces the data overhead by compandirtg the data into a finite number of levels.
Normally, for example, 84 dB of dynamic range could require 14 bits. In the companding process implemented by the DSP, the data is reduced, for example, to only 4 bits by selecting 16 important RF spectral levels to send to the TLP 12. The choice of the number of levels, and therefore the num':)er of bits, as well as the representation of the levels, can be automatically adjusted by the Wireless Location System. These adjustments are performed to maximize the inforrnation value of the RF
spectral messages sent to the TLP 12 as well as o optimize the use of the bandwidth available on the communications link between the SC:S 10 and the TLP 12.
After conversion, each block of RF channels (each at least 1.25 MHz) is passed through serial to parallel converter 10-3-2 and th,.-n stored in dual port digital memory 10-3-3 (step S4). The digital memory is a circular memory, which means that th:. DSP
module begins writing data into the first memory address and then continues sequentially until the last memory address is reached. Whe:n the last memory address is reached, the DSP
returns to the first memory address and continues to sequentially write data into memory.
Each DSP module typically contains enough memory to store several seconds of data for each block of RF channels to support the latency and queuing times in t;he location process.
In the DSP module, the memory address at which digitized and converted 1'.F
data-is written into memory is the time stamp used throughout the Wireless Location System and which the location processing references in deterniining TDOA. In order to ensure that the time stamps are aligned at every SCS 10 in the Wireless Location System, the address generator 10-3-8 receives the one pulse per second signal from the timing generation/clock distribution module 1 C-7 (Figure 2). Periodically, the address generator at all SCS's 10 in a Wireless Location System will simultaneously reset themselves to a known address. This enables the location processing to reduce or eliminate accumulated timing errors in the recording of time st.unps for each digitized data element.
The address generator 10-3-8 controls both writing to and reading from the dual port digital memory 10-3-3. Writing takes places continuously since the ADC is continuously sampling and digitizing RF signals and,he first DSP (10-3-1A and 10-3-IB) is continuously perfonning the digital drop receiver function. However, reading occurs in bursts as the Wireless Location System :-equests data for performing demodulation and location processing. The Wireless Location System may even perform location processing recursively on a single transmission, and therefore requires access to the same data multiple times. In order to service tae many requirements of the Wireless Location System, the address generator allows the: dual port digital memory to be read at a rate faster than the writing occurs. Typically., reading can be performed eight times faster than writing.
The DSP module 10-3 uses the second DSP 10-3-4 to read the data from the digital memory 10-3-3, and then performs a second digital drop receiver functiun to extract baseband data from the blocks of RF channels (step S5). For example, th;, second DSP
can extract any single 30 KHz AMPS or TDMA channel from any block of RF
channels that have been digitized and stored in the memory. Likewise, the second DSP
can extract any single GSM channel. The second DSP is not required to extract a CDMA
channel, since the channel bandwidth occupies the full bandwidth of the stored RF data.
The combination of the first DSP 10-3-1A, :.0-3-1B and the second DSP 10-3-4 allows the DSP module to select, store, and recover any single RF channel in a wireless communications system. A DSP module typically will store four blocks of channels. In a dual-mode AMPS/TDMA system, a sin.gle DSP module can continuously and simultaneously monitor up to 42 analog reverse control channels, up to 84 digital control channels, and also be tasked to monitor and locate any voice channel transmission. A
single SCS chassis will typically support up to three receiver modules 10-2 (Figure 2), to cover three sectors of two antennas eacl:, and up to nine DSP modules (three DSP
modules per receiver permits an entire 15 MHz bandwidth to be simultaneously stored into digital memory). Thus, the SCS 10 is a very modular system than can be easily scaled to match any type of cell site con:Hguration and processing load.
The DSP module 10-3 also performs other functions, including automatic detection of active channels used in each sector (step S6), demodulation (step S7), and station based location processing (step S8). The Wireless Locatior. System maintains an active map of the usage of the RF channels in a wireless communications system (step S9), which enables the Wireless Location System to manage receiver and processing resources, and to rapidly initiate processing when a particular transmission of interest has occurred. The active map comprises a table maintained within the Wireless Location System that lists for each antenna connected to an SCS 10 the primary channels assigned to that and the protocols used in those channels. A primary channel is an RF control channel assigned to a collocated or nearby base station which the base station uses for communications with wireless transmitters. For exarriple, in a typical cellular system with sectored cell sites, there will be one RF control channel frequency assigned for use in each sector. Those control channel freqw:ncies would typically be assigned as primary channels for a collocated SCS 10.
The same SCS 10 may also be assigned to monitor the RF control chanriels of other nearby base stations as primary channels., even if other SCS's 10 also have the same primary channels assigned. In this manne:r, the Wireless Location Systerr.
implements a WO 00/41403 PCT/i;S99/29505 system demodulation redundancy that (:nsures that any given wireless transmission has an infinitesimal probability of being missed. When this demodulation redundancy feature is used, the Wireless Location System will receive, detect, and demodulate the same wireless transmission two or more times at more than one SCS 10. The Wi: eiess Location System includes means to detect when :his multiple demodulation has occurred and to trigger location processing only once. This function conserves the processing and communications resources of the Wi*eless Location System, and is further described below. This ability for a single SCS 10 to detect and demodulate wireless transmissions occurring at cell sites not collocated wi::h the SCS 10 permits operators o~"the Wireless Location System to deploy more efficient Wireless Location System net\, o,ks.
For example, the Wireless Location System may be designed such that the W':eless Location System uses much fewer SCS's 10 than the wireless communications sy..em has base stations.
In the Wireless Location System, primary channels are entered and maintained in the table using two methods: direct progranuning and automatic detection. Direc' , programming comprises entering primary channel data into the table using one of the Wireless Location System user interfaca:s, such as the Network Operations Console 16 (Figure 1), or by receiving channel assi;3nment data from the Wireless Location System to wireless communications system interface. Alternatively, the DSP module 10-3 also runs. a background process known as automatic detection in which the DSP uses spare or scheduled processing capacity to detect transmissions on various possible RF
channeis and then attempt to demodulate those transmissions using probable protocols.
The DSP
module can then confitm that the primary channels directly programmed are correct, and can also quickly detect changes made ta channels at base station and send an alert to the operator of the Wireless Location System.
The DSP module performs the following steps in automatic detection (see Figure 2E-1):
for each possible control and/or voice channel which may be used in the coverage area of the SCS 10, peg counters -re established (step S7-1);
at the start of a detection period, all peg counters are reset to zero (step S7-2);
each time that a transmission occun; in a specified RF channel, and the received power level is above a particular pre-set threshold, the peg counter for that channel is incremented (step S7-3);
each time that a t:ransmission occurs in a specified RF channel, and the received power level is above a second parlicular pre-set threshold, the DSP module attempts to demodulate a certain portion of the transmission.using a first preferred protocol (step S7-4);
if the demodulation is successful, a second peg counter for that channel is incremented (step S7-5);
if the demodulation is unsuccessful, the DSP module attempts to demodulate a portion of the transmission using a. second preferred protocol (step S7-6);
if the demodulation is successful, a third peg counter for that channel is incremented (step S7-7);
at the end of a detection period, the Wireless Location System reads all peg counters (step S7-8); and the Wireless Location System autoatatically assigns primaiy charuzels based upon the peg counters (step S7-9).
The operator of the Wireless Location System can review the peg counters and the automatic assignment of-primary channels and demodulation protocols, and override any settings that were performed automatically. In aiddition, if more than two preferred protocols may be used by the wireless carrier, then the DSP module 10-3 can be downloaded with software to detect the idditional protocols. The architecture of the SCS
10, based upon wideband receivers 10-2, DSP modules 10-3, and downloadable software permits the Wireless Location System tci support multiple demodulation protocols in a single system. There is a significant cosi: advantage to supporting multiple protocols within the single system, as only a singb: SCS 10 is required at a cell site.
This is in contrast to many base station architectuies, which may require different transceiver modules for different modulation protocols. For example, while the SCS 10 could support AMI'S, TDMA, and CDMA simultaneoisly in the same SCS 10, there is no base station cuaently available that can support this functionality.
The ability to detect and demodulate m=ildple protocols also includes the ability to independently detect the use of authentacation in messages transmitted over the certain air interface protocols. The use of authentication fields in wireless transmitters started to become prevalent within the last few years as a means to reduce the occurrence of fraud in wireless communications systems. However, not all wireless transmitters have implemented authentication. When authentication is used, the protocol generally inserts an additional fieid into the transmitted message. Frequently this field is inserted between the identity of the wireless transtnitter and the dialed digits in the transmitted message.
When demodulating a wireless transmission, the Wireless Location System determines the number of fields in the transmitted r.:iessage, as well as the message type (i.e.
registration, origination, page response, etc.). The Wireless Location System demodulates all fields and if extra fields appear to be present, giving consideration to the type of message transmitted, then the Wireless :-ocation System tests all fields for a trigger condition. For example, if the dialed diExts "911" appear in the proper place in a field, and the field is located either in its prop,vr place without authentication or its proper place with authentication, then the Wireless Location System triggers normally. In this example, the digits "911" would be required to appear in sequence as "911" or 4C*911 ", with no other digits before or after either sequence. This functionality reduces or eliminates a false trigger caused by the digits "911" appearing as part of an authentication field.
The support for multiple demodulation protocols is important for the Wireless Location System to successfully operate because location processing must be quickly triggered when a wireless caller has dialed "911". The Wireless Location System can trigger location processing using two methods: the Wireless Location System will independently demodulate control channel transmissio:zs, and trigger location processing using any number of criteria such as dialed digits, or the Wireless Location System may receive triggers from an external source such as the carrier's wireless communications system.
The present inventors have found that independent demodulation by the SCS 10 results in the fastest time to trigger, as measured fi-om the moment that a wireless user presses the "SEND" or "TALK" (or similar) button on a wireless transmitter.
Control and Communications Module 10-5 The control and communications modula- 10-5, depicted in Figure 2F, iricludes data buffers 10-5-1, a controller 10-5-2, memory 10-5-3, a CPU 10-5-4 and a T1/El communications chip 10-5-5. The modu;.e has many of the characteristics previously described in Patent Number 5,608,410. Several enhancements have been added in the present embodiment. For example, the S CS 10 now includes an automatic remote reset capability, even if the CPU on the contrcl and communications module ceases to execute its programmed software. This capability can reduce the operating costs of the Wireless Location System because technicians are not required to travel to a cell site to reset an SCS 10 if it fails to operate normally. The automatic remote reset circuit operates by monitoring the communications interfacc between the SCS 10 and the TLP 12 for a particular sequence of bits. This sequence of bits is-a sequence that does not occur during normal communications between the SCS 10 and the TLP 12. This sequence, for example, may consist.of an all ones patteTn. The reset circuit operates independently of the CPU so that even if the CPU has placed itself in a locked or other non-operating status, the circuit can still achieve the reset of the SCS 10 and return the CPU to an operating status.
This module now also has the ability to record and report a wide variety of statistics and variables used in monitoring or diagnosing the performance of the SCS 10. For example, the SCS 10 can monitor the percent capacity usage of any DSP or other processor in the SCS 10, as well as the conununications i:nterface between the SCS 10 and the TLP 12.
These values are reported regularly to thie AP 14 and the NOC 16, and are used to determine when additional processing and communications resources are required in the system. For example, alarm thresholds m.ay be set in the NOC to indicate to an operator if any resource is consistently exceeding a-.3reset threshold. The SCS 10 can also monitor the number of times that transmissions hhive been successfully demodulated, as well as the number of failures. This is useful in.allowing operators to determine whether the signal thresholds for demodulation have been set optimally.
This module, as well as the other modulm, can also self-report its identity to the TLP 12.
As described below; many SCS's 10 cart be connected to a single TLP 12.
Typically, the communications between SCS's 10 and TLP's 12 is shared with the communications between base stations and MSC's. It is frequently difficult to quickly determine exactly which SCS's 10 have been assigned to particular circuits. Therefore, the SCS
10 contains a hard coded identity, which is recorded at the time of installation. This identity can be read and verified by the TLP 12 to positively deterrnine which SCS 10 has been assigned by a carrier to each of several different c ommunications circuits.
The SCS to TLP communications supports a variety of messages, including:
commands and responses, software download, status and heartbeat, parameter download, diagnostic, is spectral data, phase data, primary channel demodulation, and RF data. The communications protocol is designed to optimize Wireless Location System operation by minimizing the protocol overhead and the protocol includes a message priority scheme.
Each message type is assigned a priority, and the SCS 10 and the TLP 12 will queue messages by priority suc}i that a higher priority message is sent before a lower priority message is sent. For example, demodulation messages are generally set at a high priority because the Wireless Location System niust trigger location processing on certain types of calls {i.e., E9-1-1} without delay. Altltough higher priority messages are queued before lower priority messages, the protocol generally does not preempt a message that is already in traasit. That is, a message in the process of being sent across the SCS 10 to TLP 12 communications interface will te completed fully, but then the next message to be sent will be the highest priority message with the earliest time stamp. In order to minimize the latency of high priority mcxsages, long messages, such as RF
data, are sent in segmcnts. For example, the RF data for a full 100-millisecond AIvtPS
transmission may be separated into 10-millisecond segments. In :his manner, a high 'priority message may be queued in between segments of the RF data.
WO 00/41403 PCT/L'S99/29505 Calibration and Performance Motutori-~ig The architecture of the SCS 10 is heavily based upon digital technologies including the digital receiver and the digital signal p:-ocessors. Once RF signals have been digitized, timing, frequency, and phase differances can be carefully controlled in tl:c various processes. More importantly, any timu-g, frequency, and phase differences can be perfectly matched between the various receivers and various SCS's 10 used in the Wireless Location System. However, Frior to the ADC, the RF signals pass through a number of RF components, including zntennas, cables, low noise amplifiers, filters, duplexors, multi-couplers, and RF splitters. -Each of these RF component;, has .10 characteristics important to the Wirele:cs Location System, including delay and phase versus frequency response. When the F:F and analog components are perfectly matched between the pairs of SCS's 10, such as SCS 10A and SCS lOB in Figurc _G, then the effects of these characteristics are automatically eliminated in the locatio::
processing.
But when the characteristics of the components are not matched, then th--iocation i s processing can inadvertently include ir.savmental errors resulting from tl': ; niismatch.
Additionally, many of these RF compcnents can experience instability vvith power, time, temperature, or other factors that can a3d instaunental errors to the deteri.,.ination of location. Therefore, several inventive techniques have been developed to ~;aiibrate the RF
components in the Wireless Location .Iystem and to monitor the perforr,:~.cc of the 20 Wireless Location System on a regular basis. Subsequent to calibration, the Wireless Location System stores the values of these delays and phases versus frequency response (i.e. by RF channel number) in a table :in the Wireless Location System for use in correcting these instrumental errors. Figures 2G-2J are referred to below in explaining these calibration methods.
External Calibration Method Referring to Figure 2G, the timing statiility of the Wireless Location System is measured along baselines; where each baseline is, comprised of two SCS's, l0A and I OB, and an imaginary line (A - B) drawn between thecn. In a TDOA / FDOA type of Wireless Location System, locations of wireless transmitters are calculated by measuring the differences in the times that each SCS 10 records for the arrival of the signal from a wireless transnzitter. Thus, it is important that the differences in times measured bv SCS's along any baseline are largely attribute:d to the transmission time of the signal from the wireless transmitter and minimally attribi.ted to the variations in the RF and analog components of the SCS's 10 themselvcs. To meet the accuracy goals of the Wireless 5 Location System, the timing stability for ,iny pair of SCS's 10 are maintained at much less than 100 nanoseconds RMS (root mean square). Thus, the components of the Wireless Location System will contribute less than 100 feet RMS of instrumentation ertor in the estimation of the location of a wireless tt=ansmitter. Some of this etror is allocated to the ambiguity of the sigial used to calibrate the system. This ambiguity can be.
io determined from the well-known Cramer==Rao lowe:rbound equation. In thc case of an AMPS reverse control channel, this error is approximately 40 nanoseconds RIviS. The remainder of the error budget is allocated to the components of the Wireless Location System, primarily the RF and analog coaiponents in the SCS 10.
i5 In the external calibration method, the Wireless Location Systetn uses a network of calibration transamitters whose signal char-acteristics match those of the target wireless transmittcrs. These calibration transrnitters may be ordinary wireless telephones emitting periodic registration signals and/or page =ponse signaLs. Each usable SCS-to-SCS
baseline is preferably calibrated periodic,illy using a calibration transmitter that has a relatively clear and unobstructed path to both SCS's 10 associated with the baseline. The calibration signal is processed identically to a siuaa.l from a target wireless transmitter.
Since the TDOA values are known a priori, any etrors in the calculations are due to systemie errors in the Wireless Location System. These systemic errors car, then be removed in the subsequent location calctilations for target transmitters.
Figure 2G illustrates the external calibrai:ion method for minimizing timing .;Trors. As shown, a first SCS I UA at a point "A" and a second SCS 1 UA at a point "B"
have an associated baseline A-B. A calibration sigual emitted at time Ta by a calibration transmitter at point "C" will theoretically reach first SCS I OA at time To +
TAC. TAC is a measmue of the amount of time required.for the calibration signal to travel from the antenna on the calibration transmitter to the dual port digital memory in a digital receiver.
I I .
Likewise, the same calibration signal will reach second SCS lOB at a thec:etical time To + TBO. Usually, however, the calibration signal will not reach the digital memory and the digital signal processing components of the respective SCS's 10 at exactly the correct times. Rather, there will be eaors el and e2 in the amount of time (TAC, T;;c) it takes the calibration signal to propagate from the calibration transmitter to the SCSs 10, respectively, such that the exact times of arrival are actually To + TAC + e i and To + TBC
+ e2. Such errors will be due to some extmt to delays in the signal propag-ation through the air, i.e., from the calibration transmitter's antenna to the SCS antennas;
however, the etrors will be due primarily to time varyiag characteristics in the SCS front end components. The errors e 1 and e2 cannot be detennined per se because th.:
system does not know the exact time (To) at which the calibration signal was transmitt:.3.
The system can, however, determine the error in the dif ference in the time of arrival o:
the calibration signal at the respective SCS's 10 of any given pair of SCS's 10. This TDC A
error value is defined as the difference between the rneasured TDOA value and the t.;oretical TDOA value so, where t4 is the theoretical differences between the &;eo- 'ical delay values TAc and Tgc. Theoretical TDOA values for each pair of SCS's 1 C -.nd each calibration transmitter are known becaus. the positions of the SCS's 10 a*_:d calibration transmitter, and the speed at which the c,-aibration signal propagates, are :_ :own. The measured TDOA baseline (TDOAA.a) can be represented as TDOAA.s =:,? + E, where e = e 1- e2. In a similar manner, a calibrati on signal from a second calibr ::.
)n transmitter at point "D" will have associated errors e3 ,and e4. The ultimate value of Etlo be subtracted from TDOA measurements for a target t:ansmitter will be a function (e.s-., weighted average) of the e values derived for one or more calibration transmitters.
Therefore, a given TDOA measurement (TDOA.4) for a pair of SCS's 10 at poir_,s "X" and "Y"
and a target wireless transmitter at an uricnown location will be correcte::
as follows:
TDOAx.y = TDOA,,...,,.d - E
k1E1+k2e2+....kNEN, where kl, k2, ete., are weighting factors and E 1, e2, etc., are the errors caermined by subtracting the measured TDOA values :from the theoretical values for e:.ch calibration transmitter. In this example, error value e:1 may the error value associated with the calibration transmitter at point "C" in the drawing. The weighting factors are determined by the operator of the Wireless Location System, and input into the configzation tables for each baseline. The operator will take into consideration the distance from each calibration transmitter to the SCS's 10 at points "X" and "Y", the empiricaIly determined line of sight from each calibmtion transmitter to the SCS's 10 at points "X"
and "Y", and the contribution that each SCS "X" and "Y" would have made to a location estimate of a wireless tansmitter that might be located in the vicinity of each calibration transmitter. In general, calibration transmitters that are r..earer to the SCS's 10 at points "X" and "Y"
will be weighted higher than calibration transmitters that are farthcr away, and calibration transmitters with better line of sight to the SCS's 10 at points "X" and "Y"
will be weighted higher than calibration transmitters with worse line of sight.
Each error component el, e2, etc., and therefore the resulting etror component E, can is vary widely, and wildly, over time because some of the error component is due to multipath reflection from the calibration transmitter to each SCS 10. The inultipath reflection is very much path dependent aad therefore will vary from meas:.:c:nent to measurement and from path to path. It is not an object of this method to d_.tcTrnine the multipath reflection for these calibration paths, but rather to determine thc portion of the errors that are attributable to the components of the SCS's 10. Typically, "acrefore, error values ei and e3 will have a common component since they relate to the same first SCS
10A. Likewise, error values e2 and e4 w:ill also have a common compont. ait since they relate to the second SCS I OB. It is known that while the multipath components can vary wildly, the component errors vary slowly and typically vary sinusoidally.
Therefore, in the external calibration method, the error values E are filtered using a weighted, time-based filter that decreases the weight of -:he wildly varying multipath con:ponents while preserving the relatively slow changing .'rror components attributed to the SCS's 10. One such exemplary filter used in the extera2l calibration method is the Kalrrm filter.
The period between calibration transmissions is varied depcnding on the ;.
rtor drift rates determined for the SCS components. The period of the drift rate should ::c much longer WO 00/41403 PCT,'US99/29505 than the period of the calibration interial. The Wireless Location System monitors the period of the drift rate to determine co:stinuously the rate of change, and may periodically adjust the calibration interval, if needed. Typically, the calibration rate for a Wireless Location System such as one in accordance with the present invention is between 10 and 30 minutes. This corresponds well witli the typical time period for the reg=istration rate in a wireless communications system. If the Wireless Location System werc to determine that the calibration interval must be ad;usted to a rate faster than the regi.~ttation rate of the wireless communications system, tien the AP 14 (Figure 1) would au:omatically force the calibration transmitter to tian:nnit by paging the transmitter at t:.v prescribed interval. Each calibration transmitter is individually addressable and then:fore the calibration interval associated with eacin calibration iz-ansmitter can be di:_erent.
Since the calibration transmitters used :n the extetnal calibration method _se standard telephones, the Wireless Location Syst= must have a mechanism to distinguish those telephones from the other wireless tran.mnitters that are being located for various application purposes. The Wireless Location System maintains a list of t'::e identities of the calibration transmitters, typically in the TLP 12 and in the AP 14. In :
cellular system, the identity of the calibration transmitter can be the Mobile Ident:
.y Number, or MIN When the calibration transmitter makes a transmission, the transmission is received 2o by each SCS 10 and demodulated by the appropriate SCS 10. The Wirelc;ss Location System compares the identity of the transmission with a pre-stored tasking list of identities of all calibrationtiattsmitters. If the Wireless Location Systcm determines that the transmission was a calibration transmission, then the Wireless Loc::tiaz System initiates external calibration processing.
Internal Calibration Method In addition to the external calibration a.ethod, it is an object of the presc:<_. invention to calibrate all channels of the wideband digital receiver used in the SCS 10 of a Wireless Location System. The exteinal calibration method will typically calibrate only a single channel of the multiple channels used by the wideband digital receiver. This is because the fixed calibration transmitters will typically scan to the highest-power control channel, WO 00/41403 PC'I, JS99129505 which will typically be the same control channel each time. The transfer tunction of a wideband digital receiver, along with the other associated components, d4..-s not remain perfectly constant, however, and will vary with time and-temperature.
Thc:refore, even though the external calibration method can successfully calibrate a single ;.hannel; there is no assurance that the remaining channels will also be calibrated.
The internal calibration method, repres:nted in the flowchart of Figure 2H, is particularly suited for calibrating an individual first receiver system (i.e., SCS 10) that is characterized by a time- and frequency-varying transfer function, wherein the transfer function defines how the amplitude ancl phase of a received signal will bc.
altered by the receiver system and the receiver systern is utilized in a location system to determine the location of a wireless transmitter by, in part, determining a difference in t:me of arrival of a signal transmitted by the wireless transmitter and received by the receivz:r system to be calibrated and another receiver system, and wherein the accuracy of the location estimate is dependent, in part, upon the accuracy of TDOA measurements made by the system. An example of a AMPS RCC transfer function is depicted in Figure 21, whic.i depicts how the phase of the transfer function varies across the 21 control channels sF
_.nning 630 ICHz Referring to Figure 2H, the internal calibration method includes the step:: of temporarily and electronically disconnecting the ancenna used by a receiver system fr:)m the receiver system (step S-20); injecting an internally generated wideband signal wi:illmown and stable signal characteristics into the fir:T receiver system (step S-21);
util;zing the generated wideband signal to obtain an estimate of the manner in which :he transfer function varies across the bandwidth oi'the first receiver system (step S-222); and utilizing the estimate to mitigate the effects of the variation of the first transfer fu.lction on the time and frequency measurements made by the first receiver system (stc;, S-23). One example of a stable wideband signal used for internal calibration is a co:,;b signal, which is comprised of multiple individual, eqaal-amplitude frequency element: at a known spacing, such as 5 KHz. An example o:Esuch a signal is shown in Figure '-1 1.
WO 00/41403 PCTltJS99129505 The antenna must be temporarily disconnected during the internal calibration process to prevent exteraal signals from entering the wideband receiver and to guarantee that the receiver is only receiving the stable wideband sigaal. The antenna is electronically disconnected only for a few milliseconds to mi*-1mi= the chance of missing too much of a signal from a'wireless transmitter. In adciition, inte7nal calibration is typically performed immediately after external calibration to minimize the possibility that the any component in the SCS 10 drifts during thc interval between external and intemal calibration. The antenna is disconnected finm the wideband receiver using two electronically controlle.d RF relays (not shown). An RF relay cannot provide perfect isolation between input and output even w=hen in the "off"position, but it can provide up to 70 dB of isolation. Two relays may be tised in series to increase the amount of isolation and to further assure that no signal is leaked from the antenna to the wideband receiver during calibration. Similarly, whe:n the internal calibration function is not being used, the internal calibration signal is turaed of~ and the two RF relays are also turned off to prevcnt leakage of the internal calibration signals into the wideband receiver when the receiver is collecting signals from wirelcx,s transmitters.
The exteraal calibration method provides an absolute calibration of a single channel and the interaal calibration method then calibrates each other channel relative to the channel that had been absolutely calibrated. The comb signal is particularly suited as a stable wideband signal because it can be easily generated using a stored replica of the signal and a digital to analog converter.
External Calibration Using Wideband Calibration Signal The external calibration method described, next may be used in connection with an SCS
10 receiver system characterized by a timi.- and frequency-varying transfer function, which preferably includes the antennas, filte:rs, amplif ers, duplexors, multi-couplers, splittcrs, and cabling associated with the SCS receiver system. The method includes the step of transmitting a stable; known wideband calibration signal from an external uansmitter. The wideband calibration sigual is then used to estimate the transfer function across a prescribed bandwidth of the SCS receiver system. The estimate of the transfer WO 00/41403 .CT/US99/29505 function is subsequently employed to mitigate the effects of variation of che transfer function on subsequent TDOA/FDOA measurements. The external transrnission is preferably of short duration and low poweT to avoid interference with the wireless communications system hosting the Wire;.ess Location System.
In the preferred method, the SCS receiver system is synchronized with the external transmitter. Such synchronization may be performed using GPS timing units.
Moreover, the receiver system may be programmed to receive and process the entire wideband of the calibration signal only at the time that the calibration sigaal is being sent. The receiver system will not perform calibration processing at any time other than when in synchronization with the extetnal calibrat.on transmissions. In addition, a wireless communications link is used between the receiver system and the ext:,rnal calibration transmitter to exchange commands and responses. The external transmitter may use a directional antenna to direct the wideband signal only at the antennas of the SCS receiver system. Such as directional antenna may be a Yagi antenna (i.e. linear end-fire array).
The calibration method preferably includes making the external transmission only when the directional antenna is aimed at the rexaiver system's antennas and the risk of multipath reflection is low.
Calibrating for Station Biases Another aspect of the present invention concerns a calibration method to correct for station biases in a SCS receiver system. The "station bias" is defined as the finite delay betwetm when an RF signal from a wireless transmitter reaches the antenna and when that same signal reached the wideband receiver. The inventive method includes the step of measuring the length of the cable from tha; antennas to the filters and determining the corresponding delays associated with the ;,able length. In addition, the method includes injecting a known signal into the filter, duplexor, multi-coupler, or RF
splitter and measuring the delay and phase response versus frequency re sponse from the input of each device to the wideband receiver. The delay and phase valu.ea are then combined and used to correct subsequent location measurements. When used w:th the GPS based timing generation described above, the method preferably includes correcting for the GPS cable lengths. Moreover, an externally generated reference signal is preferably used to monitor changes in station bias that may arise due to aging and weather. Finally, the station bias by RF channel and for each receiver system in the Wireless Location System is preferably stored in tabular form in the Wireless Location System for use in correcting subsequent location processing.
Performance Monitoring The Wireless Location System uses meti:ods similar to calibration for performance monitoring on a regular and ongoing basis. These methods are depicted in the flowcharts of Figure 2K and 2L. Two methods of performance monitoring are used: fixed phones and drive testing of surveyed points. The :ixed phone method comprises the following steps (see Figure 2K):
standard wireless transmitters are perrzanently placed at various points within the coverage area of the Wireless Locadon System (these are then known as the fixed phones) (step S-30);
the points at which the fixed phones have been placed are surveyed so that their location is precisely known to with:n a predetermined distance, for example ten feet (step S-31);
the surveyed locations are stored in a table in the AP 14 (step S-32);
the fixed phones are permitted to register on the wireless conununications system, at the rate and interval set by the wireless communications system for all wireless transmitters on the system (step S-:;3);
at each registration transmission by a:axed phone, the Wireless Location System locates the fixed phone using normal location processing (as wiLh the calibration trazismitters, the Wireless Location System can identify a transmission as being from a fixed phone by storing the identides in a table) (step S-34);
the Wireless Location System computes an error between the calculated location determined by the location process:.ag and the stored location dcte-,.nined by survey (step S-35);
the location, the error value, and othe= measured parametLrs are stored along with a time stamp in a database in the AP 14 (stcp S-36);
the AP 14 monitors the instant error and other measured parameters (collectively referred to as an extended location: record) and additionally computes various statistical values of the error(s) and other measured parameters (step S-37);
and if any of the error or other values ex;eed a pre-determined threshold or a historical statistical value, either instaataneously or after performing statistical filtering over a prescribed number of location estimates, the AP 14 signals an alarm to the operator of the Wireless Location System (step S-38).
The extended location record includes a large number of ineasured parameters usefully for analyzing the instant and historical performance of the Wireless Location System.
These parameters include: the RF channel used by the wireless transmitter, the antenna port(s) used by the Wireless Location System to demodulate the wireless transmission, the antenna ports from which the Wirelc:ss Location System requested RF data, the peak, average, and variance in power of the Ir.3nsmission over the interval used for location i5 processing, the SCS 10 and antenna port chosen as the reference for location processing, the correlation value from the cross-spe,tra correlation between every other SCS 10 and antenna used in location processing and the reference SCS 10 and antenna, the delay value for each baseline, the multipath mitigation parazneters, and the residual values remaining after the multipath mitigation. calculations. Any of these measured parameters can be monitored by the Wireless Location System for the pu=pose of determining how the Wireless Location System is performing. One example of the type of monitoring performed by the Wireless Location Sys-tem may be the variance between the instant value of the correlation on a baseline and the historical range of the correlation value.
Another may be the variance between the instant value of the received power at a particular antenna and the historical range of the received power. Many other statistical values can be calculated and this list is not exhaustive.
The ntunber of fixed phones placed inta the coverage area of the Wireless Location System can be determined based upon the density of the cell sites, the difficulty of the terrain, and the historical ease with which wireless communications systems have performed in the area. Typically the rati.o is about one fixed phone for every six cell sites, however in some areas a ratio of one to one may be required. The fixed phones provide a continuous means to monitor the perfor.nance of the Wireless Location System.
as well as the monitor any changes in the frequ:mcy plan that the carrier may have made. Many times, changes in the frequency plan will cause a variatioa in the performance of the Wireless Location System and the perfennance monitoring of the fixed phones provide an isnniediate indication to the Wireless Location System operator.
Drive testing of surveyed points is very similar to the fixed phone monitoring. Fixed phones typically can only be located incioors where access to power is available (i.e. the 1o phones must be continuously powered on to be effective). To obtain a more complete measurement of the performance of the location performance, drive testing of outdoor test points is also performed. Referring :o Figure 2L, as with the fixed phones, prescribed test points throughout the coverage area of the Wireless Location System are surveyed to within ten feet (step S-40). Each test po:int is assignesi a code, where the code consists of either a"*" or a'W", followed by a sequence number (step S-41). For example, "*1001"
through "* 1099" may be a sequence of 99 codes used for test points. These codes should be sequences, that when dialed, are meaningless to the wireless communications system (i.e. the codes do not cause a feaittre or other translation to occur in the MSC, except for an intercept message). The AP 14 stores the code for each test point along with the surveyed location (step S-42). Subsequimt to these initial steps, any wireless transmitter dialing any of the codes wil1be triggered and located using normal location processing (steps S-43 and S-44). The Wireless Location System automatically,computes an error betwecn the caleulated location determined by the location processing and the stored =
location detennined by survey, and the location and the error value are stored along with a time statap in a database in the AP 14 (steps S-45 and S-46). The AP 14 monitors the instant error, as well as various historicad statistical values of the error.
If the error values exceed a pre-determined threshold or a historical statistical value, either instantaneously or afterperforming statistical filtering over a prescribed nttmber of location estimates, the AP 14 signals an adarm to the operator of the Wireless Location System (step S-47).
WO 00/41403 PC :'/US99/295t75 TDOA Location Processor (TLP) The TLP 12, depicted in Figures 1, 1A and 3, is a centralized digital signal processing system that manages many aspects of ihe Wireless Location System, especially the SCS's 10, and provides control over the location processing. Because location proccssing=is DSP intensive; one of the major advantages of the TLP 12 is that the DSP
resources can be shared among location processing initiated by transmissions at any of the SCS's 10 in a Wireless Location System. That is, the additional cost of DSP's at the SCS's 10 is reduced by having the resource centrally available. As shown in Figure 3, there are three major components of the TLP 12: DSF, modulcs 12-1, T1/EI communications modules 12-2 and a controller module 12-3.
The T1/E1 communications modules 12-2 provide the communications interface to the SCS's 10 (Ti and El are standard communications speeds availablc throughout the world). Each SCS 10 communicates to a TLP 12 using one or more DSO's (which are typically 56Kbps or 64 Kbps). Each SCS 10 typically connects to a frfracr;onal TI or E1 cirtuit, using, e.g., a drop and insert urit or channel bank at the cell site.
Frequently, this circuit is shared with the base station, which communicates with the MSC. At a central site, the DSO's assigned to the base station are separated from the DSO's assigned to the SCS's 10. This is typically accomplished extenzal to the TLP 12 using a;Iigital access and control system (DACS) 13A that r..ot only separates the DSO's but a!so grooms the DSO's from multiple SCS's 10 onto fu lI TI or El circuits. These circuits-then connect from the DACS 13A to the DACS 13E. and then to the TI/El communications module on the TLP 12. Each TI/El communications module contains sufficient digital memory to buffer packets of data to and from each SCS 10 communicating with the module.
A
single TLP chassis may support one or more TI/E1 communications modules.
The DSP modules 12-1 provide a pool.d resource for location processing. A
single module may typically contain two to eight digital signal processors, each of which are equally available for location processiuzg. Two types of location processing are supported:
central based and station based, which are described in further detail below.
The TLP
controller 12-3 manages the DSP modiile(s)12-1 to obtain optimal thro::ghput.
Each DSP
module contains sufficient digital memori to store all of the data necessary for location processing. A DSP is not engaged until al l of the data necessary to begin location processing has been moved from each of ihe involved SCS's 10 to the digiL.l memory on the DSP module. Only then is a DSP give;a the specif c task to locate a specific wireless transmitter. Using this technique, the DSP's , which are an expensive resource, are never kept waiting. A single TLP chassis may support one or more DSP modules.
The controller module 12-3 provides the r.al time management of all location processing within the Wireless Location System. The AP 14 is the top-level management entity io within the Wireless Location System, however its database architecture is not sufficiently fast to conduct the real time decision ma:'ting when transmissions occur. The controller module 12-3 receives messages from the ~SCS's 10, including: status, spectral energy in various channels for various antennas, deniodulated messages, and diagnosacs.
This enables the controller to continuously determine events occurring in the Wi:
:less Location System, as well as to send commands to take certain actions. Whc.i a controller module receives demodulated messages &3m SCS's 10, the controller moc:-:ile decides whether location processing is required for a particular wireless transnzission. The controller module 12-3 also determines which SCS's 10 and antennas to use in location processing, including whether to use centril based or station based location processing.
The controller module commands SCS's 10 to return the necessary data, aad commands the communications modules and DSP modules- to sequentially perform their necessary roles in location processing. These steps ai-e described below in further detail.
The controller module 12-3 maintains a table lmown as the Signal of Interest Table (SOIT}. This table contains all of the criteiia that may be used to trigger location processing on a parucular wireless transmission. The criteria may include, for example, the Mobile Identity Number, the Mobile Sration ID, the Electronic Serial Number, dialed digits, System ID, RF channel number, cell site number or sector number, type of transmission, and other types of data elcmcnts. Some of the trigger events may have higher or lower priority levels associated ariththem for use in determining the order of processing. Higher priority location triggeas will always be processing bef~re lower prioriry location triggers. However, a Iovrer priority trigger that has already begun location processing will complete the processing before being assigned to a higher priority task. The master Tasking List for the Wireless Location System is maintained on the AP 14, and copies of the Tasking Lis;: are automarically downloaded to the Signal of Interest Table in each TLP 12 in the Wire:less Location System. The full Signal of Interest Table is downloaded to a TLP 12 when the TLP 12 is reset or first starts.
Subsequent to those two events, only changes are down:oaded from the AP 14 to each TLP 12 to conserve communications bandwidth. The TLP 12 to AP 14 communications protocol preferably contains sufficient redundancy and error checking to prevent incorrect data from ever being entered into the Signal o.: Interest Table. When the AP 14 and periodically have spare processing capacity available, the AP 14 reconfirms entries in the Signal of Interest Table to ensure that all Signal of Interest Table entries in the Wireless Location System are in full synchronizati:)n.
Each TLP chassis has a maximum capaci-.y associated with the chassis. For example, a single TLP chassis may only have sufficient capacity to support between 48 and SCS's 10. When a wireless communications system is larger that the capacity of a single TLP chassis, multiple TLP chassis are coimected together using Ethernet networking.
The controller module 12-3 is responsible. for inter-TLP communications and networking, and communicates with the controller modules in other TLP chassis and with Application Processors 14 over the Ethernet network. Inter-TLP communications is required when location processing requires the use of SC'S's 10 that are connected to differcnt TLP
chassis. Location processing for each wireless transmission is assigned to a single DSP
module in a single TLP chassis. The controller modules 12-3 in TLP chassis select the DSP module on which to pexform location processing, and then route all of the RF data =
used in location processing to that DSP module. If RF data is required fro,n the SCS's 10 connected to more that one TLP 12, then ihe controller modules in all necessary TLP
chassis communicate to move the RF data. from all necessary SCS's 10 to their respective connected TLP's 12 and then to the DSP inodule and TLP chassis assigned to the location processing. The controller module supports two fully independent Ethernet nerworks for redundancy. A break or failure in any one network causes the affected TLP's 12 to immediately shift all comrriunications to the other network.
The controller modules 12-3 maintain a complete network map of the Wireless Location System, including the SCS's 10 associa:ed with each TLP chassis. The network map is a table stored in the controller module containing a list of the candidate SCS/antennas that may be used in location processing, and various parameters associated with each of the SCS/antennas. The structure of an exemplary network map is depicted in Figure 3A.
There is a separate entry in the table for each antenna connected to an SCS
10. When a wireless transmission occurs in an area that is covered by SCS's 10 communicating with more than one TLP chassis, the controllcr modules in the involved TLP chassis determine which TLP chassis will be the "master" TLP chassis for the purpose of managing location processing. Typically, the TLP chassis associated with the SCS 10 that has the primary channel assignment for the wireless transmission is assigned to be the master.
However, another TLP chassis may be assigned iartead if that TLP temporarily has no DSP
resources available for location processilg, or if most of the SCS's 10 involved in location processing are connected to ancther TLP chassis and the controller modules are minimizing inter-TLP communications. This decision making process is fully dynamic, but is assisted by tables in the TLP 12 that pre-determine the preferred TLP
chassis for every primary channel assignment. The -:ables are created by the operator of the Wireless Location System, and programmed usinl; the Network Operations Console.
The networking described herein functions for both TLP chassis associated with the same wireless carrier, as well as for chassis th.it overlap or border the coverage area between two wireless carriers. Thus it is possible for a TLP 12 belonging to a fust wireless carrier to be networked and therefore receive Rl? data from a TLP 12 (and the SCS's 10 associated with that TLP 12) belonging to a second wireless cairier. This networking is particularly valuable in rural areas, where the performance of the Wireless Location System can be enhanced by deploying SCS's 10 at cell sites of multiple wireless carriers.
Since in many cases wireless carriers do not collocate cell sites. this feature enables the Wireless Location System to access more geographically diverse antennas than might be available if the Wireless Location Syst,yrtt used only the cell sites from a single wireless carrier. As described below, the proper selection and use of antennas for location processing can enhance the perfonnanre of the Wireless Location System.
The controller module 12-3 passes mary messages, including location records, to the AP
14, many of which are described below. Usually, however, demodulated data is not passed from the TLP 12 to the AP 14. I& however, the TLP 12 receives der.zodulated data from a particular wireless transmitter aitd the TLP 12 identifies the wireless transmitter as being a registered customer of a second wireless carrier in a different coverage area, the TLP 12 may pass the demodulated data to the first (serving) AP 14A. This will enable the first AP 14A to communicate with a second AP 14B associated with the second wireless carrier, and determine whether the particular wireless transmitter has registered for any type of location services. If so, the second AP 14B may instruct the first AP
14A to place the identity of the particular wireless trwsmitter into the Signal of Interest Table so that the particular wireless transmitter will be located for as long as the particular wireless transmitter is in the coverage area of thr, first Wireless Location System associated with the first AP 14A. When the first Wirele ss Location System has detected that the particular wireless transmitter has not registered in a time period exceeding a pre-determined threshold, the first AP 14A may instruct the second AP 14B that the identity of the particular wireless transmitter is being removed from the Sismal of Interest Table for the reason of no longer being present in the coverage area associated with the first AP
14A.
Diagnostic Port The TLP 12 supports a diagnostic port that is highly useful in the operation and diagnosis of problems within the Wireless Location Systenz. This diagnostic port can be accessed either locally at a TLP 12 or remotely over the Ethernet network connecting the TLP's 12 to the AP's. The diagnostic port enable:, an operator to write to a file all of the demodulation and RF data received froin the SCS's 10, as well as the intcrmediate and final results of all location processing. This data is erased from the TLP 12 after processing a location estimate, and then:fore the diagnostic port provides the means to save the data for later post-processing arid analysis. The inventor's experience in operating large scale wireless location systems is that a very small number of location estimates can occasionally have very larõe errors, and these large errors can dominate the overall operating statistics of the Wirele:,s Location System over any measurement period. Therefore, it is important to provide the operator with a set of tools that enable the Wireless Location System to detect and irap the cause of the very large errors to diaenose and mitigate those errors. The diagnostic port can be set to save the above information for all location estimates, for location estimates from particular wireless transmitters or at particular test points, or for location estimates that meet a certain criteria. For example, for fixed phones or drive testing of surveyed points, the diagnostic port can determine the error in the location estimate in real time and then write the above des;,-libed information only for those location estimates whose error exceeds a predetermineci i:ireshold. The diagnostic p= determines the error in re.al time by storing the surveycL' latitude, longitude coordLrate of each fixed phone and drive test point in a tabl-1., ynd then calculating a radial error when a location estimate for the correspond:.:~
tcst point is made.
Redundancy The TLP's 12 implement redundancy usiag several inventive techniqL,~s, allowing the Wireless Location System to support an 14 plus N redundancy method. M plus N
redundancy means that N redundant (or standby) TLP chassis are used to provide full redundant backup to M online TLP chassis. For example, M may be t:,r_ and N
may be two.
First, the controller modules in different TLP chassis continuously exchange status and "heartbeat" messages at pre-detemzined time intervals between themselves and with every AP 14 assigned to monitor the TLF chassis. Thus, every controller module has continuous and full status of every other controller module in the Wireless Location System. The controller modules in differcmt TLP chassis periodically select one controller module in one TLP 12 to be the master controller for a group of TLP chassis.
The master controller may decide to place a first TLF' chassis into off-line status if the first TLP 12A
WO 00/41403 PCT/'JS99/29505 reports a failed or degraded condition in its status message, or if the first TLP 12A fails to report any status or heartbeat messages within its assigned and pre-determincd time. If the master controller places a first TLP 12A into off-line status, the master controller may assign a second TLP 12B to perform a redundant switchover and assume the tasks of the off-line first TLP 12A. The second TLP MB is automatically sent the configuration that had been loaded into the first TI.P 12A; this configuration may be downloaded from either the master controller or from an AP 14 connected to the TLP's 12. The master controller may be a controller module on z,ny one of the TLP's 12 that is not in off-line status, however there is a preference that tie master controller be a controller module in a stand-by TLP 12. When the master contro:,Ier is the controller module in a stand-by TLP
12, the time required to detect a failed firsi: TLP 12A, place the first TLP
12A into of1=
Iine status, and then perform a redundant switchover can be accelerated.
Second, all of the Ti or El communications between the SCS's 10 and each of the TLP
i5 TI/EI communications modules 12-2 are ;Preferably routed through a high-reliability DACS that is dedicated to redundancy cozitrol. The DACS 13B is connected to every groomed TI/EI circuit containing DSO's from SCS's 10 and is also connected to every Tl/E1 commuaications module 12-2 of every TLP 12. Every controller module at every TLP 12 contains a map of the DACS 13B that describes the DACS' connection list and port assignments. This DACS 13B is conr;ected to the Etheraet network described above and can be controlled by any of the controller modules 12-3 at any of the TLP's 12.
When a second TLP 12 is placed into off-::ine status by a master controller, the master controller sends commands to the DACS ::3B to switch the groomed Ti/EI circuit communicating with the first TLP 12A to a second TLP 12B which had been in standby status. At the same time; the AP 14 downloads the complete configuration file that was being used by the second (and now off l.ine) TLP 12B to the third (and now online) TLP
12C. The time from the first detection of a failed first TLP chassis to the complete switch-over and assumption of processing responsibilities by a third TZ.P
cliassis is typically less than few seconds. In many cases, no RF data is lost by the SCS's 10 associated with the failed first TLP chassis, and location processing can continue without intetTUption. At the time of a TLP fail- vc:r when a first TLP 12A is placed into off-line status, the NOC 16 creates an alert to notify the Wireless Location System operator that the event has occurred.
Third, each TLP chassis contains redunciant power supplies, fans, and other components.
s A TLP chassis can also support multiple: DSP modules, so that the failure of a single DSP
module or even a single DSP on a DSP :nodule reduces the overall amount of processing resources available but does not cause the failure of the TLP chassis. In all of the cases described in this paragraph, the failed camponent of the TLP 12 can be replaced without placing the entire TLP chassis into off-line status. For example, if a single power supply fails, the redundant power supply has sufficient capacity to singly support the load of the chassis. The failed power supply contairis the necessary circuitry to remove itself from the load of the chassis and not cause furiher degradation in the chassis.
Similarly, a failed DSP module can also remove itself frotn the active portions of the chassis, so as to not cause a failure of the backplane or other modules. This enables the remainder of the chassis, including the second DSP modc.Ieti to continue to function normally.
Of course, the total processing throughput of the chassis is reduced but a total failure is avoided.
Application Processor (AP) 14 The AP 14 is a centralized database system, comprising a number of software processes that manage; the entire Wireless Location System, provide interfaces to external users and applications, store location records and c:onfigurations, and support various application-related functionality. The AP 14 uses a commercial hardware platform that is sized to match the throughput of the Wireless Lccation System. The AP 14 also uses a commercial relational database system (ltDBMS), which has been significantly customized to provide the functionality described herein. While the SCS 10 and TLP 12 preferably operate together on a purely real time basis to detennine location and create location records, the AP 14 can ope:rate on both a real time basis to store and forward location records and a non-real time bas:is to post-process location records and provide access and reporting over time. The ability to store, retrieve, and post-process location records for various types of system and ,application analysis has proven to be a powerful advantage of the present invention. The inain collection of software processes is known as the ApCore, which is shown in Figure 4 and includes the following functions:
The AP Perfornaance Guardian (ApPerf(iuard) is a dedicated software process that is responsible for starting, stopping, and monitoring most other.ApCore processes as well as ApCore conzmunications with the NOC 16. Upon receiving a configuration update command from the NOC, ApPerfUuard =ipdates the database and notifies all other processes of the change. ApPerfGuard starts and stops appropriate processes when the NOC directs the ApCore to enter specifi. run states, and constantly monitors other lo software processes scheduled to be runn::ng to restart them if they have exited or stopping and restarting any process that is no longer properly responding. ApPerfGuard is assigned to one of the highest processing priorities so that this process cannot be blocked by another process that has "rua away". ApPerfGuard is also assigned dedicated memory that is not accessible by other software Frocesses to prevent any possible co:ruption from other software processes.
The AP Dispatcher (ApMnUsptch) is a:coftware process that receives location records from the TLP's 12 and forwards the loc:ttion records to other processes. This process contains a separate thread for each phys:ical TLP 12 configured in the system, and each thread receives location records from that TLP 12. For system reliability, the ApCore maintaias a list containing the last location record sequence number received from each TLP 12, and sends this sequence number to the TLP 12 upon initial connection.
Thereafter, the AP 14 and the TLP 12 rL;aintain a protocol whereby the TLP 12 sends each location record with a unique identifier. ApMnDsptch forwards location records to multiple processes, including Ap911, ApDbSend, ApDbRecvLoc, and ApDbFileRecv.
The AP TasIQng Process (ApDbSend) controls the Tasking List within the Wireless Location System. The Tasldng List is ttte master list of all of the trigger criteria that determines which wireless traansmitters will be located, which applications created the critcria, and which applications can recaive location record information. The ApDbSend process contains a separate thread for c.ich TLP 12, over which the ApDbSend synchronizes the Tasking List with the S ignal of Interest Table on each TLP
12.
ApDbSend does not send application information to the Signal of Interest Table , only the trigger criteria. Thus the TLP 12 does nc t know why a wireless transmitter must be located. The Tasidng List allows wireless transmitters to be located based upon Mobile Identity Number (MIN), Mobile Station Identifier (MSID), Electronic Serial Number (ESN) and other identity numbers, dialeci sequences of characters and / or digits, home System ID (SID), originating cell site and sector, originating RF channel, or message type. The Taslcing List allows multiple applications to receive location records from the same wireless transmitter. Thus, a single location record from a wireless transmitter that has dialed "911" can be sent, for example, to a 911 PSAP, a fleet management application, a traffic management application, and to an RF
optimization,application.
The Tasking List also contains a variety of flags and field for each trigger criteria, some of which are described elsewhere in this specification. One flag, for example, specifies i5 the maximum time limit before which the Wireless Location System must provide a rough or final estimaic of the wireless trinsmitter. An4ther flag allows location processing to be disabled for a particular trigger criteria such as the identity of the wireless transmitter. Another field contains the authcntication required to make changes to the criteria for a particular trigger, aulhentication enables the operator of the Wireless Location System to specify which applications are authorized to add, delete, or make changes to any trigger criteria and associated fields or flags. Another field contains the Location Grade of Service associated with the trigger criteria; Grade, of Service indicates to the Wireless Location System the accuracy level and priority level desired for the location processing associated with a particular trigger criteria. For example, some applications may be satisfied with a rough location estimate (perhaps for a reduced location processing fee), while other applications may be satisfied with low priority processing that is not guaranteed to cotrplete for any given transmission (and which may be pre-empted for high priority processing tasks). The Wireless Locatioii System also includes means to support the use of wiidcards for trigger criteria in the Tasking List. For example, a trigger criteria can be entere3 as "MIN = 215555**"'*". This will cause the Wireless Location System to trigger location processing for any wireless transmitter whose MIN begins with the six digits 215555 and ends with any following four digits.
The wildcard characters can be placed into any position in a trigger criteria.
This feature can save on the number of inemory locations required in the Tasking List and Signal of Interest Table by grouping blocks of relatcd wireless transmitters together.
ApDbSend also supports dynamic tasking. For example, the MIN, ESN, MS]D, or other identity of any wurelsss +.rssmitter that !+?s dialed "911" will automatically be placed onto the Tasking List by ApDbSend for one hour. Thus, any further transmissions by the wireless transmitter that dialed "911" will also be located in case of further emergency.
For example, if a PSAP calls back a wireless transu;itter that had dialed "911" within the last hour, the Wireless Location System vvill trigger on the page rcsponse message from the wireless transmitter, and can make this new location record zvzilable to the PSAP.
This dynamic tasking can be set for any interval of time after an initiation event, and for any type of trigger criteria. The ApDbSend process is also a server for receiving tasking requests fronm other applications. These 2.pplications, such as fleet management, can send tasking requests via a socket connection, for examp'.e. These applications can either place or remove uigger criteria. ApDbSend co:nducts an authentication process with each application to verify that that the application has bcc,,n authorized to place or remove trigger criteria, and each application can only change trigger criteria related to that application:
The AP 911 Process (Ap911) manages each interface between the Wireless Location System and E9-1-1 network elements, stch as tandem switches, selective routers, ALI
databases and/or PSAPs. The Ap911 process contaias a separate thread for each connection to a E9-1-1 network element, and can support more thaiz one thread to each network element. TheAp9I I process can simultaneously operate in many modes based upon userconfiguration, and as described herein. The timely processing of E9-1-location records is one of the highest prcicessing priorities in the AP 14, and therefore the Ap911 executes entirely out of random access memory (RAM) to avoid the delay associated with first storing and then ret:ieving a location record from any type of disk.
When ApMnDsptch forwards a location record to aap9l 1, Ap911 immediately makes a WO 00/41403 PCilU599/29505 routing detemzination and forwards the location record over the appropriate interface to a E9-1-1 network element. A separate process, operating in parallel, records the location record into the AP 14 database.
The AP 14, through the Ap911 process and other processes, supports two modes of providing location records to applications, including E9-1-1: "push" and "pull" modes.
Applications requesting push,mode receive a location record as soon as it is available from the AP 14. This mode is especially effective for E9-1-1 which has a very time critical need for location records, since E9-1-1 networks must route wireless 9-1-1 calls to the correct PSAP within a few seconds: aRer a wireless caller has dialed "91 I".
Applications requesting pull mode do no:: automatically receive location records, but rather must send a query to the AP 14 regarding a particular wireless transmittex in order to receive the last, or any other location n:cord, about the wireless transmitter. The query from the application can specify the last location record, a series of location records, or all location records meeting a specific tiurce or other criteria, such as type of transmission.
An example of the use of pul2 mode in thc; case of a"91I call is the E9-1-1 network first receiving the voice portion of the "911" call and then querying the AP 14 to receive the location record associated with that calL
' When the Ap9I I process is connected to :aany E9-1-1 networks elements, Ap9I
1 must determine to which E9-1-1 network element ta push the location record (assuming that "push" mode has been selected). The AP 14 malces this dctermination using a dynamic routing table. The dynaniic routing table is used to divide a geographic region into cells.
Each cell, or cntry, in the dynamic routing table contains the routing instructions for that cell. It is well known that one minute of latitude is 6083 feet, which is about 365 feet per millidegree. Additionally, one minute of longitude is cosine(latitude) times 6083 feet, which for the Philadelphia area is about 4659 feet, or about 280 feet per nullidegrec. A
table of size one thousand by one thousanc3, or one million cells, can contain the routing instructions for an area that is about 69 miles by 53 nziles; which is larger than the area of Philadelphia in this example, and each cel:: could contain a geographic arca of 365 feet by 280 fect. The number of bits allocated to each entry in the table must only be enough to support the maximurn number of routing possibilities. For example, if the total number of routing possibilities is sixteen or less, then the memory for the dynamic routing table is one million times four bits, or one-half megabyte. Using this scheme, an area the size of Pennsylvania could be contained in a table of approximately twenty megabytes or less, with ample routing possibilities available. Given the relatively inexpensive cost of memory, this inventive dynaniic routing table provides the AP 14 with a means to quickly push the location records for "911" calls only to the appropriate E9-1-1 network element.
The AP 14 allows each entry in dynamic routing to be populated using manual or automated means. Using the automated muans, for example, an electronic map application can create a polygon definitior.. of the coverage area of a specific E9-1-1 network element, such as a PSAP. The polygon definition is then translated into a list of latitude, longitude points contained within the polygon. The dynamic routing table cell corresponding to each latitude, longitude point is then given the routing instruction for that E9-1-1 network element'that is respor.,sible for that geographic polygon.
When the Ap911 process receives a "911" location record for a specific wireless transmitier, Ap911 converts the latitude, longitude into the address of a specinc cell in the dynamic routing table. Ap911 then quaies the call to determine the routing instructions, which may be push or pull mode and the identity of the E9-I -1 network element responsible for serving the geographic area in which the "911" call occurred. If push mode has been selected, then Ap9I 1 automatically pushes the location record to that E9-1-1 network element. If pull mode has been selected, then Ap911 places the location record into a circular table of "911" location records and awaits a query.
The dynamic routing means described above entails the use of a geographically defined database that may be applied to other app:iications in addition to 911, and is therefore supported by other processes in addition to Ap911. For example, the AP 14 can automatically determine the=billing zone iiom which a wireless call was pla,;ed for a Location Sensitive Billing application. In addition, the AP 14 may automatically send an alert when a particular wireless transmitter has entered or exited a prescribed geographic area defined by an application. The use of particular geographic databases, dynamic routing actions, any other location triggixed actions are defined in the fields and flags associated with each trigger criteria. The Wireless Location System includes means to easily manage these geographically defined databases using an electronic map that can create polygons encompassing a prescribed geographic area. The Wireless Location System extracts from the electronic map a table of latitude, longitude points contained with the polygon. Each application can iise its own set of polygons, and can define a set of actions to be taken when a location re:cord for a triggered wireless transmission is contained within each polygon in the set..
The AP Database Receive Process (ApDbRecvLoc) receives all location records from ApMnDsptch via shared memory, and places the location records into the AP
location database. ApDbRecvLoc starts ten threads that each retrieve location records from shared i s memory, validate each record before inserting the records into the database, and then inserts the records into the correct location record partition in the database. To preserve integrity, location records with any type of error are not written into the location record database but are instead placed into an error file that can be reviewed by the Wireless Location System operator and then manaally entered into the database after error resolution. If the location database has failed or has becn placed into off-Iine status, location records are written to a flat file where they can be later processed by ApDbFileRecv.
The AP File Receive Process (ApDbFilc:Recv) reads flat files containing location records and inserts the records into the location -iatabase. Flat files are a safe mechanism used by the AP 14 to completely preserve the integrity of the AP 14 in all cases except a complete failure of the hard disk drives. There are several different types of flat files read by ApDbFileRecv, including Database Down, Synchronization; Overflow, and Fixed Error.
Database Down flat files are written by -che ApDbRecvLoc process if the location database is temporarily inaccessible; thi,i file allows the AP 14 to ensure that location records are preserved during the occurrence of this type of problem.
Synchronization flat WO 00/41403 PCT1i1S99/29505 files are written by the ApLocSync process (described below) when transferring location records between pairs of redtmdant AP :ystems. Overflow flat files are written by ApMnDsptch when location records are arriving into the AP 14 at a rate faster than ApDbRecvLoc can process and insert the records into the location database.
This may occur during very high peak rate periodLs. The overflow files prevent any records from being lost during peak periods. The Fixed Error flat files contain location records that had errors but have now been fixed, and can now be inserted into the location database.
Because the AP 14 has a critical centralized role in the Wireless Location System, the AP
14 architecture has been designed to be :ully redundant. A redundant A.P 14 system includes fully redundant hardware platfc nns, fully redundant RDBMS, redundant disk drives, and redundant networks to each other, the TLP's 12, the NOC's 16, and external applications. The software architecture af the AP 14 has also been designed to support fault tolerant redundancy. The following examples illustrate functionality supported by the redundant AP's. Each TLP 12 sends location records to both the primary and the redundant AP 14 when both AP's are in an online state. Only the primary AP 14 will process incoming tasking requests, and only the pri:.~my AP 14 will accept configuration change rex}uests from the NOC 16. The primary AP 14 then synchronizes the redundant AP 14 under careful control. Both the primary and redundant AP's will accept basic startup and shutdown commands from the NOC. Both AP's constantly monitor their own system parameters and application healtli and monitor the corresponding pa,--ameters for the other AP 14, and then decide which AP 14 will be primary and which will be redundant based upon a composite score. This composite score is determined by compiling errors reported by various processes to a shared memory area, and monitoring swap space and disk space. There are several processes dedicated to supporting redundancy.
The AP Location Synchronizaiion Process (ApLocSync) runs on each AP 14 and detects the need to synchronize location records between AP's, and then eicates "sync records"
that list the location records that need to be transferred from one AP 14 to another AP 14.
The location records are then transferred between AP's using a socket connection.
ApLocSync compares the location record.partitions and the location record sequence numbers stored in each location database. :vormally, if both the priinary and redundant AP 14 are operating properly, syncbronizaaon is not needed because both AP's are receiving location records simultaneously :Erom the TLP's 12. However, if one fails or is placed in an off-line mode, then synchronization will later be required.
ApLocSync is notified whenever ApMnDsptch connects to a TLP 12 so it can determine whether synchronization is required.
The AP Tasking Synchronization Process iApTaskSync) runs on each AP 14 and synchronizes the taslang information between the primary AP 14 and the redundant AP
14. ApTaskSync on the primary AP 14 receives tasking information from ApDbSend, and then sends the tasking information to the ApTaskSync process on the redundant AP
14. If the primary AP 14 were to fail before ApTaskSync had completed replicating tasks, then ApTaskSync will perform a complete tasking database synchronization when the failed AP 14 is placed back into an online state.
The AP Configutation Synchronization Prxess (ApConfigSync) rtms on each AP 14 and synchronizes the configuration informatio:a between the primary AP 14 and the redundant AP 14. ApConfigSync uses a RDBMS replication facility. The configuration information includes all information needed by the SCS's 10, TLP's 12, and AP's 14 for proper operation of the Wireless Location Systent in a wireless canier's network.
In addition to the core functions described above, the AP 14 also supports a large number of processes, functions, and interfaces useful in the operation of the Wireless Location Systen=, as well as uscful for various applications that desire location information. While the processes, functions, and interfaces described herein are in this section pertaining to the AP 14, the implementation of many of'these processes. functions, and interfaces permeates the entire V'7ireless Location System and therefore their inventive value should be not read as being limited only to the A? 14.
I I
Roazning The AP 14 supports "roaming" between -wireless location systems located in different cities or operated by differcnt wireless caaiers. If a first wireless transmitter has subscribed to an application on a first Wireless Location System, and therefore has an entry in the Tasking List in the first AP 14 in the first Wireless Location System, then the first wireless traasmitter may also subscribe to roaming. Each AP 14 and TLP
12 in each Wireless Location System contains a tab ie in which a list of valid "home"
subscriber identities is maintained. The list is typically a range, and for example, for current cellular telephones, the range can be determined by the NPA/NXX codes (or area code and exchange) associated with the MIAt or MSID of cellular telephones. When a wireless transmitter meeting the "home" criteria riakes a trazmission, a TLP 12 receives demodulated data from one or more SCS's 10 and checks the trigger information in the Signal of Interest Table. If any trigger citerion is met, the location processing begins on that transmission; otherwise, the transmission is not processed by the Wireless Location is System.
When a first wireless transmitter not meeting the "home" critc:rion makes a transmission in a second Wireless Location System, tlie second TLP 12 in he second Wireless Location System checks the Signal of Interest Table for a trigger. One of three actions then occurs: (i) if the transmission meets an already existing criteria in the Signal of Interest Table , the transmitter is located and'the location record is forwarded from the second AP 14 in the second Wireless Location System to the firn AP 14 in the first Wireless Location System; (ii) if the first wireless ttanstnitter has a"roamer" entry in the Signal of Interest Table indicating that the first wireless nansmitter has "registered" in the second Wireless Location System btt has no trigger criteria, then the iransmission is-not processed by the second Wireless Location System and the expiration timestamp is adjusted as described below; (iii) if the first wireless transmitter has no "roamer" entry and therefore has not "registered", then the demodulated data is passed from the TLP 12 to the second AP 14.
In the third case above, the second AP 14 uses the identity of the first wireless transmitter to identify the first AP 14 in the first Wireless Location System as the "home" Wireless Location System of the first wireless transmitter. The second AP 14 in the second Wireless Location System sends a query to the first AP 14 in the first Wireless Location System to determine whzther the first wireless transmitter has subscribed to any location application and therefore has any trigger criteria in the Tasking List of the first A.P 14. If a trigger is present in the first AP 14, the trigger criteria, along with any associated fields and flags, is sent from the first A.P 14 to the second AP 14 and entered in the Tasking List and the Signal of Interest Table as a"roamer" entry with trigger criteria. If the first AP 14 responds to the second AP 14 indicating that the first wireless transmitter has no trigger criteria, then the second AP 14 "registers" the first wireless transmitter in the Tasking List and the Signal of Interest Table as a "roamer" with no trigger criteria.
Thus both current and future transmissions from the first wireless transmitter can be positively identified by the TLP 12 in the second Wireiess Location System as being registered without trigger criteria, and the second AP 14 is not required to make additional queries to the first AP 14.
When the second AP 14 registers the fus: wireless transmitter with a roamer cntry in the Taslcing List and the Signal of Interest Tg:ble with or without trigger criteria, the roamer entry is assigned an expiration timestamp. The expiration timestamp is set to the current time,plus a predetermined first interval. Every time the first wireless transmitter makes a transmission, the expiration timestamp oi'the roamer entry in the Tasking List and the Signal of Interest Table is adjusted to the current time of the most recent m-ismission plus the predetermined first interval. If the first wireless transmitter makes no further transmissions prior to the expiration time:stamp of its roamter entry, then the roamer entry. =
is automatically deleted. If, subsequent to the deletion, the first wireless tran.,mitter makes another transmission, then the process of registcring occurs again.
The first AP 14 and second AP 14 maintain communications over a wide area network.
The network may be based upon TCP/IP or upon a protocol similar to the most recent version of IS-41. Each AP 14 in communications with other AP's in other wireless ' I I CA 02494886 1999-12-13 location systems maintains a table that provides.the identity of each AP 14 and Wireless Location System corresponding to each valid range of identities of wireless transmitters.
Multiple Pass Location Records s Certain applications may require a very fast estimate of the general location of a wireless transmitter, followed by a more accurate estimate of the location that can be sent subsequently. This can be valuable, for cacample, for E9-1-1 systems that handle wireless calls and must make a call routing decision very quickly, but can wait a little longer for a more exact location to be displayed upon the E9-1-1 call-taker's electronic map terminal.
i.o. The Wireless Location System supports these applications with an inventive multiple pass location processing mode, described later. The AP 14 supports this mode with multiple pass location records. For eertai:i entries, the Tasking List in the AP 14 contains a flag indicating the maximum time limit before which a particular application must receive a rough estimate of location, and a second maximum time limit in which a 15 particular application must receive a final location estunate. For these certain applications, the AP 14 includes a flag in the location record indicating the status of the location estimate contained in the record, which may, for example, be set to first pass estimate (i.e. rough) or final pass estimate. The Wireless Location System will generally determine the best location estimate witbin the time limit set by the application, that is the 20 Wireless Location System wili process the most amount of.RF data that can be supported in the time Iimit. Given that any particular wireless transmission can trigger a location record for one or more applications, the'JVireless Location System supports multiple modes simultaneously. For example, a wireless transmitter with a particular MIN can dial "911". This may trigger a two-pass location record for the E9-1-1 application, but a 25 single pass location record for a fleet management application that is monitoring that particular MIN. This can be extended to any number of applications.
Multiple Demodulation and Triggers In wireless communications systems in urban or dense suburban areas, frequencies or 30 channels can be re-used several times within relatively close dis=mes.
Since the Wireless Location System is capable of :mdependently detecting and demod=alating wireless transmissions without the aid of the wireless communications system.
a single wireless transmission can frequently be detected and successfully demodulated at multiple SCS's 10 within the Wireless Location System. This can happen both intentionally and unintentionally. An unntentional occurrence is caused by a close frequency re-u'se, such that a particular v,rireless transmission can be received above a predetermined threshold at more than one SCS 10, when each SCS 10 believes it is monitoring only transmissions that occui- only within the cell site collocated with the SCS
10. An intentional occurrence is caused by progranuning more than one SCS 10 to detect and demodulate transmissions that occur at a particular cell site and on a particular frequency. As described earlier, this is gi:nerally used with adjacent or nearby SCS's 10 to provide system demodulation redundancy to further increase the probability that any particular wireless transnussion is succe:sful detected and demodulated.
Either type of event could potentia.IIy lead to multiple triggers within the Wireless Location System, causing location processing to be initiated several times for the same transmission. This causes an excess and :.nefficient use of processing and communications resources. Therefore, the Wireless Location System includes means to detect when the same transmission has b:en detected and demodulated more than once, and to select the best demodulating SCS 10 as the starting point for location processing.
When the Wireless Location System detects and successfully demodulates the same transmission multiple times at multiple SCS/antennas, the Wireless Location System uses the following criteria to select the one demodulating SCS/antenna to.use to continue the process of determining whether to trigge- and possibly initiate location processing (again, these criteria may be weighted in determ:;ning the final decision): (i) an SCS/antenna collocated at the cell site to which a particular frequency has been assigned is preferred over another SCS/antenna, but this preference may be adjusted if there is no operating and on-line SCS/antenna collocated at th.e cell site to which the particular frcquency has been assigned, (ii) SCS/antennas with higher average SNR are preferred over those with lower average SNR, and (iii) SCS/antenr.as with fewer bit errors in demodulating the transmission are preferred over those with higher bit etrors. The weighting applied to each of these preferences may be adjusted by the operator of the Wireless Location System to suit the particular design of each system;
Interface to Wireless Communications ~~ sy tem The Wireless Location System contains means to communicate over an interface to a wireless communications system, such zs a mobile switching center (MSC) or mobile positioning controller (MPC). This interface may be based, for example, on a standard secure protocol such as the most recent,rersion of the IS-41 or TCP/IP
protocols. The fonnats, fields, and authentication aspects of these protocols are well known.
The Wireless Location System supports a vazety of command / response and informational messages over this interface that are des:.gned to aid in the successful detection, demodulation, and triggering of wireless transmissions, as well as providing means to pass location records to the wireless corrmunications system. In particular, this interface provides means for the Wireless Location System to obtain information about which wireless transtnitters have been assigned to particular voice channel pararneters at particular cell sites. Example messages supported by the Wireless Location System over this interface to the wireless commtuiicz:ions system include the following:
Query on MIN / MDN / MSID / IMS I/ TMSI Mapping - Certain types of wireless transmitters will transmit their identi-.y in a familiar form that can be dialed over the telephone networlc. Other types of wirelesi transmitters transmit an identity that cannot be dialed, but which is translated into a number that can be dialed using a table inside of the wireless communications system. The transmitted identity is permanent in most cases, but can also be temporary. Users of location applications connected to the AP 14 typically prefer to place triggers onto the Tasldng List using identities that can be dialed. Identities that can be dialed are typically known as Mobile Directory Numbers (1VIDN). The other types of identities for which translation may be required includes Mobile Identity Number (M[N), Mobile Subscriber Identity (MSID), International Mobile Subscriber ldeniity (IMSI), and Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI). If the wireless comnzunications system has enabled the use of encryption for any of the data fields iz the messages tiansmitted by wireless =
transmitters, the Wireless Location System may also query for encryption information along with the identity information. 7he Wireless Location System includes means to query the wireless communications system for the altenzate identities for a trigger identity that has been placed onto the Tasking List by a location application, or to query the wireless communications system for alternate identities for an identity that has been demodulated by an SCS 10. Other events can also trigger this type of query.
For this type of query, typically the V'lireless Location System initiates the command, and the wireless communications system responds.
Query / Command Change on Voice :2F Channel Assignment - Many wireless transmissions on voice channels do not contain identity information.
Therefore, when the Wireless Location System is triggered to perform location processing on a voice channel transmission, the Wireless Location System queries the wireless coinmunication system to obtain the current voice channel assignment information for the particular u=ansmitter for which the Wireless Location System has becn triggered.
For an AlVII'S transmission, for example, the Wireless Location System preferably requires the cell site, sector, and RF channel number currently in use by the wireless transmitter. For a TDMA transmission, for example, the Wireless Location System preferably requires the cell site, sectorr, RF channel number, and timeslot currently in use by the wireless uansmitter. Other information elements that may be needed includes long code mask and encryption keys. In generat, the Wireless Location System will initiate the conunand, and. the wireless conununications system will respond. However, the Wireless Location System will also accept a trigger command from the wireless communications system that contains the information detailed herein.
The timing on this command I response message set is very critical since voice channel handoffs can occur quite frequently in wireless communications systems.
That is, the Wireless Location System will locate any wireless transmitter that is transmitting on a particular channel -iherefore the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system must jointly be certain that the identity of the wireless transmitter and the voice i:hannel assignment information are in perfect synchronization. The Wireless Location System uses several means to achieve this objective. The Wireless Location 11-ystem may, for example, query the voice channel assignment information for a particular wireless transmitter, receive the necessary RF
data, then again query the voice channel assignment information for that same wireless transmitter, and then verify that the status of the wireless transmitter did not change during the time in which the RF data was being collected by the Wireless Location System. Location processing is not required to complete before the second query, since it is only important to verify that the correct RF data was received: The = 10 Wireless Location System nlay also, for example, as part of the first query command the wireless communications system to prevent a handoff from occurring for the particular wireless umLsmitter duriitg the time period in which the Wireless Location System is receiving the RF data. Tlten, subsequent to collccting the RF data, the Wireless Location System will a,,7a;n query the voice channel assignment information for that same wireless transmit[er, c:ommand the wireless communications system to again peraiit handoffs for said wireless transmitter and then verify that the status of the wireless t-msnitter did not change during the time in which the RF data was being collected by the Wireless Location System.
For various reasons, either the Wirc:less Location System or the wireless communications system may prefe:= that the wireless transmitter be assigned to another voice RF channel prior to performing location processing. Therefore, as part of the command / response sequence, the wireless communications system may instruct the Wireless Location Sysu:rn to temporarily suspend location processing until the wireless communications system has completed a handoff sequence with the wireless tramsmitter, and the wireless conununications system has notified the Wireless Location System that RF ciata can be received, and the voice RF
channel upon which the data can be receiveci. Alternately, the Wireless Location System may determine that the particular voice 1tF channel which a particular wireless transmitter is currently using is unsuitable for obtaining an acceptable location estimate, and request that the wireless communications system command the wireless transmitter to handoff. Alternately, the Wireless I.ocation System may request that the wireless conununications system command the wireless transmitter to handoff to a series of voice RF channels in sequence in oider to perform a series of location estimates, whereby the Wireless Location System can improve upon the accuracy of the location estimate through the series ofhandoffs; this method is further described later.
The Wireless Location System can Llso use this command / response message set to query the wireless communications system about the identity of a wireless transmitter that had been using a particular voic: channel (and tuneslot, etc.) at a particular cell site at a particular time. This enables the Wireless Location System to first perform location processing on transmissions without Iatowing the identities, and then to later determine the identity of the wireless, tt-ansmitters making the transmissions and append this information to the location record. This particular inventive feature enables the use of automatic sequential location of voice channel transmissions.
Receive Triggers - The Wireless Location System can receive triggers from the wireless communications system to perform location processing on a voice channel transmission without knowing the identity of the wireless transmitter. This message set bypasses the Tasidng List, and does not use the triggering mechanisms within the Wireless Location Systcm. Rather, the wireless communications system alone determines which wireless transtnissions to locate, and then send a cotnmand to the Wireless Location System to coliect RF data from a particular voice channel at a particular cell site and to perfortn loGition processing. The Wireless Location System responds with a con5rrnation containing a timestamp when the RF data was collected.
The Wireless Location System also remponds with an appropriate format location record whea location processing has completed. Based upon the time of the command to Wireless Location System and the response with the RF data collection timestamp, the wireless communications system determines whether the wireless transmitter status changed subsequent to the command and whetherthere is a good probability of successful RF data collection.
WO 00/41403 PC":; JS99/29505 Make Transmit - The Wireless Location System can command the wseless communications system to force E. particular wireless transmitter to n:.: ke a transmission at a particular time, or within a prescribed range of time.s. The wireless communications system responds with a confumation and a time or time range in which to expect the uwsmission. The types of t7-ansmissions that the -Wireless Location System can force include, for example, audit responses and ~:ge responses.
Using this message set, the Wireless Location System can also comrr_-:1d the wireless communications system to force the wireless transmitter to transmit v.sing a higher power level setting. In many cases, wireless transmitters will attempt to use the lowest power level settings when transmitting in order to conscrve ba:.ery life. In order improve the accuracy of the location estimate, the Wireless Lo:.:ation System may prefer that the wireless transniitter use a higher power level settiThe wireless communications system will respcnd to the Wireless Location Systeia with a confirmation that the higher power level setting will be used and a tii :w or time range in which to expect the transmissio:z.
Delay Wireless Communications System Response to Mobile Access - Some air interface protocols, such as CDMA, use a mechanism in which the w ireless tiansmitter initiates transmissions on a channel, such as an Access C:.a:nnel, for example, at the lowest or a very low power level setting, and thrn en:::rs a sequence of steps in which (i) the wireless transmitter makes an access transmi::s-ion;
(ii) the wireless transmitter waits for a res:)onse from the wireless communications system;
(iii) if no response is received by the wireless transmitter from the wireless communications system within a predetemined time, the wireless trzinsmitter increases its power level setting by a predetermined amount, and the:; returns to step (i); (iv) if a response is received by the wireless transmitter from the -wireless communications system within a predetermined time, the wireless =smitter then enters a normal message exchange. This mechanism is useful to ensure that the wireless transmitter uses only the lowest useful power level setting for transmitting and does not further waste energy or battery life. It is possible, however, that the lowest power level setting at which the wireless tiansmitter can succassfully communicate with the wireless communications system is not sufficient to obtain an acceptable location estirnate. Therefbre, the Wireless Location Systenc can command the wireless communications systenc to delay its response to these trar:smissions by a predetermined time or amount. This delaying action will cause the wi:eless transmitter to repeat the sequence of'steps (i) through (iii) one or more ,;mes than normal with the result that one or more of the access transmissions will be at a higher power level than normal. The higher= power level may preferably enable the Wireless Location System to determine a more accurate location estimate. The Wireless Location System may command this type of delaying action for either a particular wireless transmitter, for a particular type of wireless transmission (for example, for all '911' calls), for wireless transmitter:c that are at a specified range frol_i the base station to which the transmitter is attempting to communicate, or for all wireless transmitters in a particular area.
Send Confirmation to Wireless Transmitter- The Wireless Location "ystem does not include means within to notify the wireless transmitter of an action bccause the Wireless Location Systcm cannot transmit; as described earlier the Wireless Location System can only receive transmissio:ns. Therefore, if the Wireless Loe..,don System desires to send, for example, a corfumation tone upon the compiction of a certain action, the Wireless Location Systeni commands the wireless commuiucations system to transmit a particular message. The= mesiage may include, for exam;,le, an audible confirmation tone, spoken message, or synthesized message to the w:reless.
transmitter, or a text message sent via a short messaging service or a._,age.
The Wireless Location Systern receives confirmation from the wireless cornmunications system that the message has been accepted and sent to the wireless transmitter.'This command / response message set is important in mabling the Wireless Location System to support ccrtain end-user application fiuictions such as f'rol>ibit Location Processing Report Location Records - The Wire:less Location System autornatically reports location records to the wireless comraunications system for those wi;-eless WO 00/41403 PC -L,"/US99/29505 transmitters tasked to report to the wireless communications system, as well as for those transmissions that the wireless communications system initiated triggers. The Wireless Location System also reports on any historical location record queried by the wireless communications system and which the wireless communications system is authorized to receive.
Monitor Internal Wireless Communica.tions System Interfaces, State Table In addition to this above interface between the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system, the Wireless Location System also includes means to monitor lo existing interfaces within the wireless communications system for the purpose of intercepting messages important to the Wireless Location System for identifying wireless transmitters and the RF channels in use by these transmitters. These interfaces may include, for example, the "a-interface" and "a-bis interface" used in wireless communications systems employing the GSM air interface protocol. These interfaces are well-known and published in various standards. By monitoring the bi-directional messages on these interfaces between base stations (BTS), base station controllers (BSC), and mobile switching centers (MSC), 2md other points, the Wireless Location System can obtain the same information about the assignment of wireless transmitters to specific channels as the wireless communications system itself knows. The Wireless Location System includes means to monitor the;;e interfaccs at various points. For example, the SCS 10 may monitor a BTS to BSC in:erface. Alternately, a TLP 12 or AP 14 may also monitor a BSC where a number of BT;i to BSC interfaces have been concentrated.
The interfaces intemal to the wireless comr.aunications system are not encrypted and the layered protocols are known to those fsuniliarwith the art. The advantage to the Wireless Location Symrn to monitoring these interfaces is that the Wireless Location System may not be required to independently deteci: and demodulate control channel messages from wireless transiaitters. In addition, the NVireiess Location System may obtain all necessary voicc channel assignment information from these interfaces.
Using these means for a control channi.-I transmission, the SCS 10 :eceives the transmissions as described earlier and ;-ecords the control channel n,F data into memory WO 00/41403 PCT;ii~;99/29505 without performing detection and demodulation. Separately, the Wireless Location Svstem monitors the messages occurring over prescribed interfaces within the wireless communications system, and causes a trigger in the Wireless Location Sys:en when the Wireless Location System discovers a message containing a trigger event.
Initiated by the trigger event, the Wireless Location System detetmines the approximately time at which the wireless transmission occurred, and commands a first SCS 10 and a second SCS l OB
to each search its memory for the start of transmission. This fzrst SCS I OA
chosen is an SCS that is either collocated with the t-ase station to which the wireless transmitter had communicated, or an SCS which is adjacent to the base station to which the wireless transmitter had communicat:ed. That is., the first SCS 10A is an SCS which would have been assigned the control channel as a primary channel. If the first SCS l0A
successfully determines and reports the start of the transmission, then location processing proceeds normally, using the means described beIow. If the first SCS l0A cannot successfully detennine the start of transmission, then the second SCS lOB reports the start of transmission, and then location processing proceeds normally.
The Wireless Location System also uses these means for voice channel transmissions.
For all triggers contained in the Taskin:3 List, the Wireless Location System monitors the prescribed interfaces for messages pertniining to those triggers. The messages of interest include, for example, voice channel assignment messages, handoff messages, frequency hopping messages, power up / power down messages, directed re-try messages, termination messages, and other simila3- action and status messages. The Wireless Location Svstem continuously maintairs a copy of the state and status of these wireless transmitters in a State Table in the AP 14. Each time that the Wireless Location System detects a message pertaining to one of tne entries in the Tasking List, the Wireless Location System updates its own State 'Table. Thereafter, the Wireless Location System may trigger to perform location processing, such as on a regular time interval, and access the State Table to determine precisely which cell site, sector, RF channel, and timestot is presently being used by the wireless traasmitter. The example contained' herein described the means by which the Wireless Locataon System interfaces to a GSM based wireless %V 00/41403 PCTi US99/29505 communications system. The Wireless Location System also supports similar functions with systems based upon other air intexfaces.
For certain air interfaces, such as CDI-ZA, the Wireless Location System also keeps certain identity information obtained from Access bursts in the control channel in the State Table; this information is later u:ced for decoding the masks used for voice channels.
For example, the CDMA air interface protocol uses the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) of a wireless transmitter to, in part, determine the long code mask used in the coding of voice channel transmissions. The Wireless Location System maintains this information in the State Table for entries in the Taskiztg List because many wireless transmitters may transmit the information only once; for example, many CDMA mobiles will only transmit their ESN during the first Access burst after the wireless transmitter become active in a geographic area. This ability to independently determine the long code mask is very useful in cases where an interface betwaen the Wirelcss Location System and the wireless conununications system is not operativi; andlor the Wireless Locatior~ System is not able to monitor one of the interfaces intenlal to the wireless conununications system. The operator of the Wircless Location System may optionally set the Wireiess Location System to maintain the identity information for all wireless transmitters. In addition to the above reasons, the Wireless Location Svstem can provide the voice channel tracking for all wireless transmitters that trigger loca.tion processing by calling "911 ".
As described earlier, the Wireless Location System uses dynamic tasking to provide Iocation to a wireless transmitter for a prescribed time after dialing "911 ", for example.
By maintaining the identity information for all wireless transmitters ir. the State Table, the Wireless Location System is able to provide voice channei tracking for all transmitters in the event of a prescribed triggcr event, aad not just those with prior entries in the Tasking List.
Applications Interface Using the AP 14, the Wireless Location ;iystem supports a variety of standards based interfaces to end-user and carrier location applications using secure protocols such as TCP/IP, X.25, SS-7, and IS-41. Each inte:rface between the AP 14 and an extcrn.al application is a secure and authenticated connection that permits the AP 14 to positivelv verify the identity of the application ttLat is connected to the AP 14. This is necessary because each connected application is granted only limited access to location records on a real-time and/or historical basis. In addition, the AP 14 supports additional command /
response, real-time, and post-processiiig functions that are further detailed below. Access to these additional functions also requires authentication. The AP 14 maintains a user list and the authentication means associated with each user. No application can gain access to location records or functions for whictt the application does not have proper authentication or access rights. In addiaon, the AP 14 supports full logging of all actions taken by each application in the event -:hat problems arise or a later investigation into actions is required. For each command or function in the list below, the AP 14 preferably supports a protocol in which each action or the result of each is confirmed, as appropriate.
Edit Tasldng List - This command pe:rmits external applications to add, remove, or edit entries in the Tasidng List, ine;:uding any fields and flags associated with each entry. This command can be supported on a single entry basis, or a batch entry basis where a list of entries is included irL a single command. The Iatter is useful, for example, in a bulk application sucb. as location sensitive billing whereby larger volumes of wireless transmitters ar. being supported by the external application, and it is desired to minimize protocol o-verhead. This command can add or delete applications for a particular entry in the Tasking List, however, this command cannot delete an entry entirely if the entry also contains other applications not associated with or authorized by the application issuing the command.
Set Location interval - The Wirele;cs Location System can be set to perform location processing at any interval for a particular wireless transmitter, on eithc;;
control or voice channels. For example, certain applications may require the location of a wireless transmitter every few seco:ads when the transmitter is engaged on a voice channel. When the wireless transnnittermake an initial transtnission, the Wireless Location System initially triggers using a standard entry in the Tasking List.
If one of WO 00/41403 PCr/LJS99/29505 the fields or flags in this entry specifies updated location on a set interval, then the Wireless Location System creates ,i dynamic task in the Tasking List that is triggered by a timer instead of an identity or other transmitted ctiteria Each time the timer expires, which can range from 1 second to several hours, the Wireless Location System will automatically trigger ti) locate the wireless transmitter. The Wireless Location System uses its interface i:o the wireless communications system to query status of the wireless transmitter, ir.cluding voice call parameters as described earlier.
If the wireless transnitter is engage.d on a voice channel, then the Wireless Location System performs location processuig. If the wireless transmitter is not engaged in any existing transmissions, the Wireless Location System will command the wireless communications system to make the wireless transmitter immediately transmit.
When the dynamic task is set, the Wireless Location System also sets an expiration time at which the dynamic task ceasex.
End-User Addition / Deletion - This command can be executed by an end-user of a wireless transmitter to place the ideatity of the wireless transrnitter onto the Tasking List with location processing enabled, to remove the identity of the wireless transmitter from the Tasking List atui thetefore ciiminate identity as _-trigger, or to place the identity of the wireless transmitter onto the Tasking List with location proccssing disabled. When location processing has been disabled by the end-user, known as Prohibit Location Processing then no location processing will be performed for the wireless uansmitter. The ope=or of the Wireless Location System can optionally select one of several actions by the Wireless Location System in response to a Prohibit Location Processing command by the end user. (i) the disabling action can override all other triggers in the Tasking List, including a trigger due to an emergency call such as "911", (ii) tlie disabling.action can override any other trigger in the Tasldng List, eatcept a trigger due to an emergency call such as "911 ", (iii) the disabling action can be overridden by other select triggers in the Tasking List. In the first case, the end user is granted complete control over the privacy of the aansmissions by the wireless transmitter, as no location processing will be performed on that transmitter for any reason. In the second case, the end usrr may still receive the benefits of location during an cmergency, but at no other times. In an example of the third case, an employer who is the real owner of a particular wireless transmitter can override an end-user action by an employee who is using the wireless transmitter as part of the job but who may not desire to be located. The Wireless Location System may query the wireless co-,nmunications system, as describLd above, to obtain the mapping of the identity contaiited in the wireless transmission to other identities.
The additions and deletions by the end-user are effected by dialed sequences of characters and digits and pressing the "SEND" or equivalent button on the wireless transmitter. These sequences may be optionally chosen and made known by the operator of the Wireless Location :3ystem. For exatnple, one sequence may be "*55 SEND" to disable location processing. Other sequences are also possible. When the ena-user can dialed this prescribed. sequence, the wireless transmitter will transmit the' sequence over one of the prescribed control channels of the wireless communications system. Since the Wireless Location System independently detects and demodulates all reverse control channel ttansmissions, the Wireless Location System can independently interpret the prescribed dialed sequence and make the appropriate feature updates to the Tasldng List; as described above. When the urireless Location System has completed the update to the Tasking List, the Wireless Location System commands the wireless communications system to send a confirrnation to the end-user. As described earlier, this ma e take the form of an audible tone, recorded or synthesized voice, or a text message: This command is executed over the interface between the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system.
Command Transmit - This command allows exteraal applications to cause the Wireless Location System to send a command to the wireless cc:nmunications system to make a particular wireless transmitter, or group of wireless trartsmitters, transmit.
This command may contain a flag or field that the wireless transmitter(s) should transnit immediately or at a presc.dbed time. This comnzand has the effort of locating the wireless transmitter(s) upon ccammand, since the transnnissions will be detected, demodulated, and triggered, causing location processing and the generation of a location record. This is useful in eliminating or reducing any delay in determining location such as waiting for the next registration time period for the wireless traasmitter or waiting for an independent transmission to occur.
External Database Query and Update - The Wireless Location Systtr.l includes means to access an external databiLse, to query the said external database using the identity of the wireless transmittet' or other parameters contained in the transmission or the trigger criteria, and to merg,, the data obtained from the external database with the data generated by the Wireless Location Systern to create a new enhanced = 10 location record. The enhanced location record may then be forwarded to requesting applications. The extemal database may contain, for example, data elements such as customer information, medical infarmation, subscribed features, application related information, customer account inf ormation, contact information, or sets of prescribed actions to take upon a location trigger event. The Wireless Location System may also cause updates to the external database, for example, to increment or decrement a billing counter associated with the provision of location services, or to update the external database with the latest iacation record associated with the particular wireless transmitter. The Wireless Location System contains means to performed the actions described herein on more ihan one external database. The list and sequence of extemal databases to access and the subsequent actions to take are contained in one of the fields contained in the trigger c.riteria in the Tasking List.
Random Anonymous Location Pmcessing - The Wireless Location System includes means to perform large scale random anonymous location processin~. This function is valuable to certai.n types of applic.ations that require the gathering of a large volume' of data about a population of wireless transmitters without consideration to the specific identities of the individual transmitters. Applications of this type include: RF
Optimization, which enables wireless ca:riers to measure the performance of the wireless communications system by simultaneously deternining location and other parameters of a transmission; Traffic Management, which enables government agencies and commercial concerns to monitor the flow of traffic on various highways WO 00/41403 PC'i'/US99/29505 using statistically significant santples of wireless transmitters travelling in vehicles;
and Local Traffic Estimation, wfiich enables commercial enterp:iZes to estimate the flow of traffic around a particular area which may help detennine the viability of particular businesses.
Applications requesting random anonymous location processing optionally receive location records from two sources: (i) a copy of location records generated for other applications, and (ii) location records which have been triggered randomly by the Wireless Location System without regard to any specific criteria. All of the location records generated from either source are forwarded with all of the identity and trigger criteria information removed from the location records; however, t1hc requesting application(s) can determine whether the record was =enerated from the fully random process or is a copy from anothei= trigger criteria. The random location records are generated by a low priority task within the. Wireless Location System that performs location processing on randomly selected transmissions whenever processing and communications resources are available and would otherwise be unused at a particular instant in time. The rec.uesiing application(s) can specify whether the random location processing is performed over the entire coverage arca of a Wireless Location System, over specific gcographic areas such as along prescribed highways, or by the coverage areas of speci:5c cell sites. Thus, the requestir;
application(s) can direct the resources of the Wireless Location System to those arr--- of greatest interest to each application. Depending o:n the randomness desired by the application(s), the Wireless Location System can adjust preferences for randomly selecting certain types of transmissions, for example, rejostration messages, origination messages, page response messages, or voice chaznel transrnissions.
AnonymmLs Tracking of a Geographic Group - The Wireless Location System includes mcans to trigger locataon processing on a repetitive basis for anonymous groups of s,+ireless transmitters within a prescribed geographic area. For example, a particular -_xation application may desire to monitor the trave4 route of a wireless transmitte.~ over a prescribed period of time, but without the Wireless Location WO 00/41403 PCT/US99/2.9505 System disclosing the particular idE:nrity of the wireless transmitter. The period of time may be many hours, days, or weeks. Using the means, the Wireless Location System: randomly selects a wireless transmitter that initiates a transmission in the geographic area of interest to the application; performs location processing on the transmission of interest; irreversibly translates and encrypts the identity of the wireless transmitter into a new codad identifier, creates a location record using only the new coded identifier as an identifying means; forwards the location record to the requesting location application(s); ~md creates a dynamic task in the Tasking List for the wireless transmitter, where the tiynamic task has an associated expiration time.
Subsequently, whenever the prescribed wireless transmitter initiates transmission, the Wireless Location System shall triÃ;ger using the dynamic task, perform location processing on the transmission of interest, irreversibly translate and encrypt the identity of the wireless transmitter into the new coded idendfier using the same means as prior such that the coded identifier is L%e same, create a location record using the coded identifier, and forward the location record to the requesting location application(s). The means describecl herein can be combined with other functions of tha. Wireless Location System to perform this type of monitoring use either control or voice chaunel transmissions. Further, the means desccibed herein completely preserve the private identity of the wireless traasmitter, yet enables another class of applications that can monitor the travel patterns of wireless transmitters.
This class of applications can be of great value in dete:mining the planning and design of new roads, alternate route planning, or tae construction of commercial and retail space.
Location Record Grouping, Sorting, and Labeling - The Wireless Location System include means to post-process the location records for certain requesting applications to group, sorz; or label the location records. For each interface supported by the Wireless Location System, the Wireless Location System stores a profile of the types of data for which the application is both authoti.zed and requesting, and the types of filters or post-processing actions desired by the appiication. Many applications, such as the examples contained herein, c;o not require individual location records or the specific identities of individual trarLsmitters. For example, an RF
optimization application derives more value from a large data set of location records for a particular cell site or channel than it can from any individual location record. For another example, a traffic monitoring application requires only location records from tran.smitters that are on prescribed roads or highways, and additionally requires that these records be grouped by secticn of road or highway and by direction of travel.
Other applications may request th<u the Wireless Location System forward location records that have been formatted t:) enba.nce visual display appeal by, for example, adjusting the location estimate of !he transmitter so that the transmitter's location appears on an electronic map directly on a drawn road segment rather than adjacent to the road segment. Therefore, the SJireless Location System preferably "snaps"
the location estimate to the nearest drawn road segment.
The Wireless Location System can filter and report location records to an application for wireless transmitters communicating only on a particular cell site, sector, RF
channel, or group of RF channels. Before forwarding the record to the requesting application, the Wireless I.ocation. System first verifies that the appropriate fields in the record satisfy the requiretnenm Records not matching the requirements are not forwarded, and records matching the requirements are forwarded. Some filters are geographic and must be calculated by the Wireless Location System. For example, the Wireless Location System can process a location record to determine the closest road segment and direction of travel of the wireless transmitter on the road segment.
The Wireless Location System c-iz then forward only records to the application that are determined to be on a particular road segment, and can further enhance the location record by adding a field containing the determined road segment. In order to determine the closest road segmazlt, the Wireless Location System is provided with a database of road segments of intemst by the requesting application. This database is stored in a table where each road ;segment is stored with a latitude and longitude coordinate defining the end point of each segment. Each road segment can be modeled as a straight or curved Iine, and can be modeled to support one or two directions of travel. Then for eacl=; location record detetmined by the Wireiess Location System, the Wireless Lc cation System compares the latitude and longitude ao in the location record to each road segment stored in the database, and determines the shortest distance from a modeled line connecting the end points of the segment to the latitude and longitude of the locatian record. The shortest distance is a calculated imaginary line orthogonal to the line connecting the two end points of the stored road segment. When the closest road segment has been determined, the Wireiess Locauon System can further determine the d:rection of travel on the road segment by comparing the direction of travel oi'the wireless transmitter reported by the location processing to the orientation of the road segment. The direction that produces the smallest error with respect to the orientation of the road segments is then reported by the Wireless Location System.
Network Operations Console (NOC) 1 ti The NOC 16 is a network management system that permits operators of the Wireless Location System easy access to the pragramming parameters of the Wireless Location is System. For example, in some cities, the Wireless Location System may contain many hundreds or even thousands of SCS's 10. The NOC is the most effective way to manage a large Wireless Location System, using graphical user interface capabilities.
The NOC
will also receive real time alerts if cert<<in functions within the Wireless Location System are not operating propcrly. These real time alerts can be used by the operator to take conwdve action quickly and prevent a degradation of location service.
Experience with trials of the Wireless Location Systcm .;how that the ability of the system to maintain good location accuracy over time is dirxtly related to the operator's ability to kecp the system operating within its predetemiried parameters.
Location Processing The Wireless Location System is capable of performing location processing i sing two different methods known as central based processing and station based processing. Both techniques were first disclosed in Patei:.t Number 5,327,144, and are fin=ther enhanced in this specification. Location processing depends in part on the ability to accurately determine certain phase characteristics of the signal as received at multiple antennas and at multiple SCS's 10. Therefore, it is an object of the Wireless Location System to si CA 02494886 1999-12-13.
identify and remove sources of phase: error that impede the ability of the location processing to determine the phase characteristics of the received signal. One source of phase error is inside of the wireless =smitter itself, namely the oscillator (typically a crystal oscillator) and the phase lock loops that allow the phone to tune to specific channels for transmitting. Lower cost crystal oscillators will generally have higher phase noise. Some air interface specificaticns, such as IS-136 and IS-95A, have specifications covering the phase noise with which a wireless telephone can transmit. Ott=,er air interface specifications, such as IS-553A, do riot closely specify phase noise. It is therefore an object of the present invention to automatically reduce and/or eliminate a wireless . 1o transmitter's phase noise as a source of phase error in location processing, in part by automatically selecting the use of ce:itral based processing or station based processing.
The automatic selection will also consider the efficiency with which thc communications link between the SCS 10 and the TLP 12 is used, and the availability of DSP
resources at each of the SCS 10 and TLP 12.
When using central based processing, the TDOA and FDOA determination and the multipath processing are performed in thc TLP 12 along with the position and speed deterinination. This method is prefeized when the wireless transmitter has a phase noise that is above a predetermined threshold. In these cases, central based processing is most effective in reducing or eliminating the phase noise of the wireless transmitter as a source of phase error because the TDOA estimate is performed using a d:gital representation of the actual RF transrnission from twc- antennas, which may be at thc; same SCS
10 or different SCS's 10. In this method, those skilled in the an will recognize that the phase noise of the transmitter is a common mode noise in the TDOA processing, and therefore is self-canceling in the TDOA determination process. This method works best, for example, with many very low cost 4WS cellular telephones that havc a high phase noise. The basic steps in central based processing include the steps recited below and represented in the flowchart of Figure 6:
a wireless transmitter initiates a ttansmission on either a control channel or a voice channel (step S50);
the transmission is received at multiple antennas and at multiple SCS's 10 in the Wireless Location System (step S:i 1);
the transmission is converted into a digital format in the receiver connected to each SCS/antenna (step S52);
the digital data is stored in a memory in the receivers in each SCS 10 (step S53);
the transmission is demodulated (step S54);
the Wireless Location System detennines whether to begin location processing for the aansmission (step S55);
if triggered, the TLP 12 requescs copies of the digital data from the memory in receivers at multiple SCS's 10 (step S56);
digital data is sent from multiple SCS's 10 to a selected TLP 12 (step S57);
the TLP 12 performs TDOA, FDOA., and multipath mitigation on the digital data from pairs of antennas (step S58);
the TLP 12 performs position and speed determination using the TDOA data, and then creates a location record and forwards the location record to the AP 14 (step S59).
The Wireless Location System uses a variable number of bits to represent the transmission when sending digital data from the SCS's 10 to the TLP 12. As discussed earlier, the SCS receiver digitizes wireless tcansmissions with a high resolution, or a high number of bits per digital sample in order to achieve a sufficient dynamic range. This is especially required when using wideband digital receivers, which may be simultaneously receiving signals near to the SCS 10A. and far from the SCS I OB. For example, up to 14 bits may be required to represent a dynamic range of 84 dB. Location processing does not always require the high resolution per digital sample, however. Frequently, locations of sufficient accuracy are achievable by the Wireless Location System using a fewer number of bits per digital sample. Therefore, -:o minimize the implementation cost of the Wireless Location System by conserving bandvvidth on the communication Iir.ks between each SCS 10 and TLP 12, the Wireless Lo:ation System determines the f4west number of bits required to digitally represent a tranmnission while still maintaining a desired accuracy level. This determination is based, fo:c example, on the particular air interfa-,e protocol used by the wireless umLsmitter, the SNR of the transmission, the degree to, which the I. . .
transmission has been perturbed by fading and/or multipath, and the current state of the processing and communication queues in each SCS 10. The number of bits sent from the SCS 10 to the TLP 12 are reduced in tnvo ways: the number of bits per sample is minimized, and the shortest length, or iewest segments, of the u-ansmission possible is used for location processing. The TLP 12 can use this minimal RF data to perfonm location processing and then compare the result with the desired accuracy level. This comparison is performed on the basis af a confidence interval calculation. If the location estimate does not fall within the desiral accuracy limits, the TLP 12 will recursively request additional data from selected S CS's 10. The additional data may include an to additional number of bits per digital sample and/or may include more segments of the transmission. This process of requesting additional data may continue recursively until the TLP 12 has achieved the prescribecl location acettracy.
There are additional details to the basic: steps described above. These details are described in prior Patent Numbers 5,327,144 and. 5,608,410 in other parts of this specification. One enhancement to the processes described in earlier patents is the selection of a single reference SCS/anteima that is used for each baseline in the location processing. In prior art, baselines,were determined using pairs of antenna sites around a ring. In the present Wireless Location System, the single reference SCS/antenna used is generally the highest SNR signal, although other criteria are also used as described below. The use of a high SNR reference aids central based location processing when the other SCS/anteanas used in the location processing are very wm1c, such as at or below the noise floor (i.e. zero or negative signal to noise ratio). When s;ation based location processing is used, the reference signal is a re-modulated signal, which is intentionally created to have a very high signal to noise ratio, further aiding location processing for very weak signals at other SCS/antenuas. The actual selection of the reference SCS/antenna is described below.
The Wireless Location System mitigates multipath by first recursively estimating the components of multipath received in addition to the direct path component and then subtracting thc5e components from the: received signal. Thus the Wireless Location System models the received signal ancl compates the model to the actual received signal and attempts to minimize the difference between the two using a weighted least square difference. For each transmitted signa:, x(t) from a wireless transmitter, the received signal y(t) at each SCS/antenna is a complex combination of signals:
y(t)=Ex(t-Tõ)aõforaIln==0toN;
where x(t) is the signal as traasmitted by the wireless transmitter, aõ and ~r,, are the complex amplitude and delays of the multipath components;
N is the total number of multipath contponents in the received signal; and ao and zo are constants for the most dir-eet path component.
The operator of the Wireless Location System empirically determines a set of constraints for each component of multipath that applies to the specific environment in which each Wireless Location Systeui is operatin& The purpose of the constraints is to limit the amount of processing time that the Wireless Location System spends optimizing the results for each multipath mitigation calculation. For example, the Wireless Location System may be set to determine only ibur components of muitipath: the first component may be assumed to have a time delay :in the range ilA to T1Bi the second component may be assumed to have a time delay in the: range T2A to z2B; the third component may be assumed to have a time delay in the range t3A to z38; and similar for the fourth component; however the fourth component is a single value that effectively represents a complex combination of many tens of individual (and somewhat diffuse) multipath components whose time delays exceed the range of the third- component. For ease of processing, the Wireless Location System transforms the prior equation into the frequency domain,'and then solves for the individual components such that a weighted least squares differeatce is minimized.
When using station based processing, the TDOA and FDOA detenninatic:: and multipath mitigation are performed in the SCS's 10, while the position and speed ":.tennination are typically performed in the TLP 12. Tl:.e main advantage of station based processing, as described in Patent Number 5,327,14-4, is reducing the'aznount of data that is sent on the WO 00/41403 PCT/LiS99/29505 communication link between each SCS-10 and TLP 12. However, there may be other advantages as well. One new objective of the present invention is increasing the effective signal processing gain during the TDOA processing. As pointed.out earlier, central based processing has the advantage of elimin,ating or reducing phase error caused by the phase s noise in the wireless=transmitter. However, no previous disclosure has addressed 'now to eliminate or reduce the same phase noise error when using station based processing. The present invention reduces the phase error and increases the effective signal processing gain using the steps recited below and ;lhown in Figure 6:
a wireless transmitter initiates a transmission on either a control channel or a voice channel (step S60);
the transmission is received at multiFile antennas and at multiple SCS's 10 in the Wireless Location Sysum (step S61);
the transmission is converted into a ciigital format in the receiver connected to each antenna (step S62);
the digital data is stored in a memory in the SCS 10 (step S63);
the transmission is demodulated (steo S64);
the Wireless Location System deterniines whether to begin location processing for the transmission (step S65);
if triggered, a first SCS 10A demodulatos the transmission and detemines an appropriate phase correction inten-A (step S66);
for each such phase correction inten-al, the first SCS l0A calculates an appropriate phase con-ection and amplitude carrection, and encodes this phase correction parameter and amplitude correction parameter along with the demodulated data (step S67);
the demodulated data and phase con=ection and amplitude con-ection parameters are sent from the f rst SCS 10A to a TLP 12 (step S68);
the TLP 12 determines the SCS's 10 and receiving antennas to use in the locarion processing (step S69);
I= I i the TLP 12 sends the demodulated data and phase correction and amplitude correction parameters to each second SCS l OB that will be used in the location processing (step S70);
the first SCS 10 and each second SCS 10B creates a first re-modulated signal based 5. upon the demodulated data and the phase correction and amplitude correction parameters (step S71);
the first SCS 10A and each second SCS lOB perfonns TDOA, FDOA, and multipath mitigation using the digital data stored in memory in each SCS 10 and the first re-modulated signal (step S72);
the TDOA, FDOA, and multipath initigation data are sent from the first SCS l0A
and each second SCS l OB to the TLF' 12 (step S73);
the TLP 12 perfonns position and speed detennination using the TDOA data (step S74); and the TLP 12 creates a location record, and forwards the location record to the (step S75).
The advantages of deteanining phas,e correction and amplitude correction parameters are most obvious in the location of CD11SA wireless transmitters based upon IS-95A. As is well known, the reverse uaasmissions from an IS-95A transmitter are sent using non-coherent modulation. Most CDMA base stations only integrate over a single bit interval because of the non-coherent modulation. For a CDMA Access Channel, with a bit rate of 4800 bits per second, there are 256 chips sent per bit, which permits an intcaration gain of 24 dB. Using the technique descrbed above, the TDOA processing in each SCS
may integrate, for example, over a fii11160 millisecond burst (196,608 chips) to produce an integration gain of 53 dB. This aciditional processing gain enables the present invention to detect and locate CDM4 transinissions using multiple SCS's 10, even if the base stations collocated with the SCS's 10 cannot detect the same CDMA
transrnission.
For a particular transmission, if either the phasc correction parazneters or the amplitude correction parameters are calculaia. to be zero, or are not needed, then these parameters are not sent in order to conserve on the number of bits transmitted on the communications link between each SCS 10 and TLP 12. In another embodiment of the invention, the Wireless Location System may use a fi:ted phase correction interval for a particular transmission or for all transmissions of a particular air interface protocol, or for all transmissions made by a particular type of wireless transaiitter. This may, for example, be based upon empirical data gathered 43ver some period of time by the Wireless Location System showing a reasonable consistency in the phase noise exhibited by various classes of transmitters. In these cases, the SCS 10 may save the processing step of dctermining the appropriate phase correction intervz:l.
Those skilled in the art will recognize tzat there are many ways of measuring the phase noise of a wireless transmitter. In one embodiment, a pure, noiseless re-modulated copy of the signal received at the first SCS l 0A may be digitally generated by DSP's in the SCS, then the received signal may be compared against the pure signal over each phase correction interval and the phase differimce may be measured directly. In this embodiment, the phase correction paraneter will be calculated as the negative of the phase difference over that phase correction interval. Thc number of bits required to represent the phase correction pararneter will vary with the magnitude of the phase correction parameter, and the number c-f bits may vary for each phase correction interval.
It has been observed that some transmissions, for example, exhibit greater phase noise early in the transmission, and less phase noise in the middle of and later in the transmissioa Station based processing is most usefu:i for wireless transmittcrs that have relatively low phase noise. Although not necessarily required by their respective air interface standards, wireless telephones that use the TDW-, CDMA, or GSM protocols will typically exhibit lower phase noise. As the phase noise of a wireless transmitter increases, the length of a phase corrextion interval may decrease and/or the number of bits required to represent the phase correction parameters increases. Station based processing is not effective when the number of bits required to represent the demodulated data plus the phase correction and amplitude parameters exceeds a predetermined proportion of the number of bits required to perform central based processing. It is therefore an object of the present invention to I I
automatically determine for each transniission for which a location is dcsired whether to process the location using central based processing or station based processing. The steps in maidng this determination are recited below and shown in Figure 7:
a wireless transmitter initiates a tranmiission on either a control channel or a voice channel (step S80);
the transmission is received at a first S CS l0A (step S81);
the transmission is converted into a di?.;ital format in the receiver com-.ected to each.
antenna (step S82);
the Wireless Location System detenni:ies whether to begin location p:ocessing for the transmission (step S83);
if triggered, a first SCS I OA demodulates the umLsmission and estirnates an appropriate phase correction interval and the nunaber of bits required to encode the phase correction and amplitude correction parameters (step S84);
i5 the first SCS 10A then estimates the muaber of bits required for ceri:.al based processing;
based upon the number of bits requirec, for each respective method, the SCS 10 or the TLP 12 determine whether to use ceiural based processing or station based processing to perform the Iocapion processing for this transmission (step S85).
In another embodiment of the invention, the Wireless Location System may always use central based processing or station based processing for all transmissions of a particular air interface protocol, or for all transmissions made by a particular kind of w=.reIess transmitter. This may, for example, be b2sed upon empirical data gathered over some period of time by the Wireless Location System showing a reasonable consistency in the phase noise exhibited by various classes of transmitters. In these cases, the SCS 10 and/or the TLP 12 may be saved the processing step of deteanining the appropriate processing method_ A further enhancement of the pre.saat invention, used for both central based processing and station based processing, is the use o f threshold ciiteria for including baselines in the final determination of location and velocity of the wireless transmitter. For each baseline, the'JVireless Location System calculates a number of parameters that include:
the SCS/antenna port used with the refemzce SCS/antenna in calculating the baseiine, the peak, avcrage, and variance in the power of the transmission as received at the SCS/antenna port used in the baseline and over the interval used for location processing, the correlation value from the cross-spectra correlation between the SCS/antenna used in the baseline and the reference SCS/antcnna, the dciay value for the baseline, the multipath mitigation parameters, the residual values remaining after th:, multipath mitigation calculations, the contributicn of the SCS/antenna to the weighted GDOP in the final location solution, and a measure of the quality of fit of the baseline if included in the fuzal location solution. Each baseline i:s included in the final location solution is each meets or exceeds the threshold criteria for each of the parameters described herein. A
baseline may be excluded from the location solution if it fails to meet one or more of the threshold criteria. Therefore, it is freqL.ently possible that the number of SCS/antennas actually used in the final location solution is less than the total number considered.
Previous Patent Numbers 5,327,144 and 5,608,410 disclosed a method by which the location processing n,inimi2ed the leas.t square difference (LSD) value of the following equation:
LSD = [Q12(Delay_T12-Deiay_OIZ)''+ QI3(D'elay_T23-DeIay_013)2+...+
Qx,,(Delay_Txy-Delay_Oxy)Z
In the present implementation, this eqt.ation has been rearranged to the following form in order to make the location processing code more efficient:
LSD = E(TDO&- - ti + ia)Zw;'; over idl i=1 to N-1 whcre N number of SCS/antennas used in the location processing;
TDOAo; = the TDOA to the i~' site frotn reference site 0;
z; = the theoretical line of sight propagation time from the wireless transmitter to the i'h site;
Ta = the theoretical line of sight propagation time from the transautter to the reference;
and w; = the weight, or quality factor, applied to the i'h baseline.
In the present impleTnentation, the Wireless Location System also uses another alternate form of the equation that can aid in de:ermining location solutions when the reference signal is not very strong or when it is likely that a bias would exist in the location solution using the prior form of the equation:
LSD' = (TDOAo; - t;)Zw;Z - b2 E w;Z ; over all i=O to N-1 Where N = number of SCS/antennas used in the location processing;
TDOAoi = the TDOA to the ih site froin reference site 0;
TDOAoo = is assumed to be zero;
Ti = the theoretical line of sight propagation time from the wireless transmitter to the i~' site;
b = a bias that is separately calculated for each theoretical point that minimizes LSD' at that theoretical point; and wi ==the weight, or quality factor, applied to the i'h baseline The LSD' form of the equation offers an easier means of removing a bias in location solutions at the reference, site by maldt:g wo equal to the maximum value of the other weights or basing wo on the relative signal strength at the reference site.
Note that if wo is much larger than the other weights, then b is approximately equal to to. In general, the weights, or quality factors are based or.i similar criteria to that discussed above for the threshold criteria in including baselines. That is, the results of the criteria calculations are used for weights and when the criteria falls below threshold the weight is then set to zero and is effectively not included in the daernvnation of the final location solution.
Antenna Selection Process for Locatiort Processing Previous inventions and disclosures, su ,h as those listed above, have described techniques in which a first, second, or possibly third antenna site, celI
site, or base station are required to determine location. Patent number 5,608,410 further discloses a Dynamic Selection Subsystan (DSS) that is respimsible for determining which data frames from which antenna site locations will be used to calculate the location of a responsive transaiitter. In the DSS, if data frames are received from more than a threshold number of sites, the DSS determines which are candidates for retention or exclusion, and then dynamically organizes data frames for location processing. The DSS prefers to use more than the minimum number of antenna sites so that the solution is over-determined.
Additionally, the DSS assures that all transmissions used in the location processing were received from the same transmitter and from the same transmission.
The prefeired embodiments of the prior inventions had several limitations, however.
First, either only one antenna per antemia site (or cell site) is used, or the data from two orfour diversity antennas were first consbined at the antenna site (or cell site) prior to transmission to the central site. Additionaily, aII antenna sites that rcceived the iransmission sent data frames to the central site, even if the DSS later discarded the data frames. Thus, some communications bandwidth may have been wasted sending data that was not used.
The present inventors have determined that while a minimum of two, or three sites are required in order determine location, the actual selection of antennas and SCS's 10 to use in location processing can have a signifi.cant effect on the results of the location processing. In addition, it is advantageous to include the means to use more than one antenna at each SCS 10 in the location processing. The reason for using data from multiple antennas at a cell site independently in the location processing is that the signal received at each antenna is uniquely affxud by multipath, fading, and other disturbances. It is well known in the fie:.d that when two antenaas are separated in distance by more than one wavelength, then each antenna will receive the signal on an independent path. Therefore, there is frequently additional and unique information to be gained about the location of the wireless umismitter by using multiple antennas, and the ability of the Wireless Location Syster.z to mitigate multipath is enhanced accordingly.
It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide an improved method for using the signals received from more than or.:e antenna at ar. SCS 10 in the location processing.
It is a further object to provide a methcid to improve the dynamic process used to select the cooperating antennas and SCS's 10 used in the location processing: The first object is achieved by providing means within the SCS 10 to select and use any segment of data collected from any number of antenna;; at an SCS in the location processing.
As described eariier, each antenna at a eel ( site is connected to a receiver intemal to the SCS
10. Each receiver converts signals received from the antenna into a digital forrs, and then stores the digitized signals temporarily in a memory in the receiver. The TLP
12 has been p: ovided with means to direct any SC.S 10 to retrieve segments of data from the temporary memory of any receiver, an+i to provide the data for use in location processing.
The second object is achieved by prov, ding means within the Wireless Location System to monitor a large number of antennas for reception of the traztsmission that the Wireless Location System desires to locate, and then selecting a smaller set of antennas for use in location processing based upon a predeteanined set of parameters. One example of this selection process is represented by the flowchart of Figure 8:
a wireless transmitter initiates a tran:anission on either a control channel or a voice channel (step S90);
the transmission, is received at multiple antennas and at multiple SCS's 10 in the Wireless Location System (step S51);
the transmission is converted into a cligital format in the receiver connected to each antenna (step S92);
the digital data is stored in a memory in each SCS 10 (step S93);
the transmission is demodulated at a: least one SCS 10A and the channel number on which the transmission occurred attd the cell site and sector serving the wireless transmitter is determined (step S94);
I I
based upon the serving cell site and sector, one SCS l0A is designated as the 'primary SCS 10 for processing that transmi;ssion (step S95);
the primary SCS I OA determines a tinnestamp associated with the demodulated data (step S96);
the Wireless Location System deteradnes whether to begin location processing for the tzansmission (step S97);
if location processing is triggered, the Wireless Location System determines a candidate list of SCS's 10 and antennas to use in the location processing (step S98);
each candidate. SCS/antenna measures and reports several parameters in the channel number of the transmission and at the time of the timestanmp detennii.:ed by the primary SCS l0A (step S99);
the Wireless Location System orders the candidate SCS/antennas using specified criteria and selects a reference SCS/antenna and a processing list of SCS/antennas to use in the location processing (step S 100); and the Wireless Location System proceeds with location proccssing as described earlier, using data from the processing list of SCS/antennas (step S101).
Selecting Primarv SCS/Antenna The process for choosing the 'primary' SCS/antenna is critical, because the candidate list of SCS's 10 and antennas 10-1 is determined in part based upon the designation of the primary SCS/antenna.. When a wireles:. transtnitter makes a transmission on a particular RF channel, the transmission frequently can propagate many miles before the signal attenuates below a level at which it can be demodulated. Therefore, there are frequently many SCS/antennas capable of demodulating the signal. This especially occurs is urban and suburban areas where the frequency re-use pattem of many wireless cornmunications systems can be quite dense. For example, because of the high usage rate of wireless and the dense eell site spacing, the present inventors have tested wireless communications systems in which the same RF control channel and digital color code were used on cell sites spaced about one mile apart. Because the Wireless Location System is independently demodulating these transmissions, the Wireless Location System frequently can demodulate the same trinsmission at two, three, or more separate SCS/antennas. The Wireless Location System detects that the same transmission has been demodulated multiple times at multiple SCS/antennas when the Wireless Location System receives multiple demodulated data fratnes sent from different SCS/antenr:as, each with a number of bit errots below a predetermined bit error threshold, and with the demodulated data matching within an acceptable limit of bit errors, and all occurring within a predetermined interval of tinzc:.
When the Wireless Location System detects demodulated data from multiple SCS/antennas, it examines the followirig parameters to determine which SCS/anterina shall be designated the primary SCS: average SNR over the transmission interval used for location processing, the variance in the SNR over the same interval, correlation of the beginning of the received transmission against a pure pre-cursor (i.e. for ANiPS, the dotting and Barker code), the number af bit errors in the demodulated data, and the magnitude and rate of change of the Sr1R from just before the on-set of the transmission to the on-set of the transmission, as well as other similar parameters. The average SNR is typically detcrtnined at each SCS/anteima either over the entire length of the transr:-tission to be used for location processing, or over a shorter interval. The average SNR ovcr the shorter interval can be determined by r erforming a correlation with the dotting secuence and/or Barker code and/or sync word, clepending on the particular air interface protocol, and over a short range of time before, during, and after the timestamp reported by cach SCS 10. The time range may typically be +/-200 microseconds centered at the timestamp, for example. The Wireless Location System will eenerally order the SCS/antennas using the following criteria, each of which may be weighted (multiplied by an appropriate factor) when combining the criteria to determine the final decision:
SCS/antennas with a lower number of bit errors are preferraj to SCS/antennas with a higher number of bit errors, average SNR for a given SCS/aitenna must be greater than a predetemzined threshold to be designattd as the primary; SCS/antennas with highcr average SNR are preferred over those with lower averagc SNR; SCS/antennas with lower SNR
vari..nce are preferred to those with higher SNR variance; and SCS/antennas with a faster SNR
rate of change at the on-set of the transaiission are preferred to those with a slower rate of change. The weighting applied to each of these criteria may be adjusted by the operator of the Wireless Location System to suit the particular design of each system.
The candidate list of SCS's 10 and anteaznas 10-1 are selected using a predetcrmined set of criteria based,= for example, upon knowledge of the types of cell sites, types of antennas at the cell sites, geometry of the antennas, and a weighting factor that weights certain antennas more than other antennas. The weighting factor takes into account knowledge of the terrain in which the VL''ireless Location System is operating, past empirical data on the contribution of each antenna has made to good location estimates, and other factors that may be specific to each different WLS installation. In one embodiment, for example, the Wireless Location System may select the candidate list to include all SCS's 10 up to a maximum r.umber of sites (max number of sites) that are closer than a predefined maximum radius from the primary site (max_radius_fromPrim,ary). For example, in an urban or suburban environment, where there may be a large number of cell sites, the max number of sitcs may be limited to nineteen. Nineteen sites would include the primary, the,frst ring of six sites surrounding the primary (assuming a classic hexagonal distribution of cell sites), and the next ring of twelve sites surrounding the first ring. This is depicted in Figure 9. In another embodiment, in a suburban or rural enviromnent, max tadius from_primary may be set to 40 miles to ensure that the widest possible set of candidate SCS/antennas is available.
The Wireless Location System is providrd with=means to limit the total number of candidate SCS's 10 to a maximum nuinixer (max_number candidates), although each candidate SCS may be permitted to choose the best port from among its available antennas. This lunits the maximum time spent by the Wireless Location System processing a partieular location. Max nrunber candidates may be set to thirty-two, for example, which means that in a typical lhree sector wireless cotnmunications system with diversity, up to 32*6 = 192 total antenwLs could be considered for location processing for a particular transmission. In order to limit the time spent processing a particular location, the Wireless Location System is provided with means to limit the number of antennas used in the location processing to max nttmber antennasprocessed.
Max_number antennas_processed is geiierally less than max number candidates, and is typically set to sixteen.
While the Wireless Location System is provided with the ability to dynamically determine the candidate list of SCS's 10 and antennas based upon the predetermined set of criteria described above, the Wireless Location System can also store a fixed candidate list in a table. Thus, for each cell site anc, sector in the wireless communications system.
the Wireless Location System has a separate table that defines the candidate list of SCS's and antennas 10-1 to use whenever a wireless transmitter initiates a transmission in 10 that cell site and sector. Rather than dynatnically choose the candidate SCSiantennas each time a location request is triggered, the Wireless Location System reads the candidate list directly from the table when location prccessing is initiated.
In general, a large number of candidate SCS's 10 is chosen to provide the Wi~
eless Location System with sufficient opportulity and ability to measure and rritigate multipath. On any given transmission, aiiy one or more particular antennas at one or more SCS's 10 may receive signals that have been affected to varying degrecs by multipath.
Therefore, it is advantageous to provide -:his means within the Wire:ess Location System to dynamically select a set of antennas which may have received less multipath than other antennas. The Wireless Location System uses various techniques to mitigate as much muitipath as possible from any received signal; however it is frequently prudent to choose a set of antennas that contain the least amount of multipath..
Choosing Reference and Cooperating SC'S/Antennas In choosing the set of SCS/anteanas to use in location processi.~g, the Wireless Locatioii System orders the candidate SCS/antennas using several criteria, including for example:
average SNR over the transmission interval used for location processing, the variance in the SNR over the same interval, correlad on of the beginning of the received transmission against a pure pre-cursor (i.e. for AMPS., the dotting and Barker code) and/or demodulated data from the primary SCS/antenna, the time of the on-set of the transmission relative to the on-set report:d at the SCS/antenna at which.the transmission WO 00/41403 PCTiUS99r_9505 was demodulated, and the magnitude aid rate of change of the SNR from just before the on-set of the transmission to the on-set of the transrnission, as well as other similar parameters. The average SNR is typically determined at each SCS, and for each antenna in the candidate list either over the entfi-e length of the transnission to be used for-location processing; or over a shorter interval. The average SNR over the shorter interval can be determined by performing a correlation with the dotting sequence and/or Barker code and/or sync word, depending on the particular air interface protocol, and over a short range of time before, during, and after the timestamp reported by the primary SCS
10. The time range may typically be +/== 200 microseconds centered at the timestamp, for 1.0 example. The Wireless Location Systern will generally order the candidate SCS/antennas using the following criteria, each of which may be weighted when combining the criteria to detennine the final decision: averagt, SNR for a given SCS/antenna must be greater than a predetermined threshold to be used in location processing; SCS/antennas with higher average SNR are preferred over those with lower average SNR;
SCS/antennas with lower SNR variance are preferred to those with higher SNR variance;
SCS/antennas with an on-set closer to the on-set reported by the demodulating SCS/antcnna are prefcrned to those with an on-set more ciistant in time; SCS/antennas with a faster SNR
rate of change are preferred to those with a slower rate of change;
SCS/antennas with lower incremental weighted GDOP are preferred over those with higher incremental weighted GDOP, where the weighting ::s based upon estimated path loss from the primary SCS. The weighting applied to each of these preferences may be adjusted by the operator of the Wireless Location System to sui1. the particuIar design of each system.
The number of different SCS's 10 used in the location processing is maximized up to a predetermined limit; the number of antennas used at each SCS 10 in limited to a predeternined limit;
and the total number of SCS/antennas ttsed is limited to max number antennasnrocessed. The: SCS/antenna with the highest ranking using the above described process is designated ws the reference SCS/antenaa for location processing.
Best Port Selection Within an SCS 10 Frequently, the SCS/antennas in the candidate list or in the list to use in location processing will include only one or two arLtennas at a particular SCS 10. In these cases, the Wireless Location System may permit the SCS 10 to choose the "best port"
from all or some of the antennas at the particular S CS 10. For example, if the Wireless Location System chooses to use only one antenna ai: a first SCS 10, then the first SCS
10 may select the best antenna port from the typical six antenna ports that are connected to that SCS 10, or it may choose the best antenna port from among the two antenna ports ofjust one sector of the cell site. The best antcnn,i port is chosen by using the same process and comparing the same parameters as described above for choosing the set of SCS/antennas to use in location processing, except that all of the antennas being considered for best port are all in the same SCS 10. In comparing z.ntennas for best port, the SCS 10 may also optionally divide the received signal into segments, and then measure the SNR
separately in each segment of the received signal. Thm, the SCS 10 can optionally choose the best antenna port with highest SNR either by (i) using the antenna port with the most segments with the highest SNR, (ii) averal;ing the SNR in all segments and using the antenna port with the highest average SNP:4 or (iii) using the antenna port with the highest SNR in any one segmenL
Detection and Recoverv From Collisions Because the Wireless Location System wil l use data from many SCS/antenna ports in location processing, there is a chance that -he received signal at one or more particular SCS/antenna ports contains energy that is co-channel interference from another wireless transmitter (i.e. a partial or full collision between two separate wireless transmissions has occurred). There is also a reasonable probability that the co-channel interference has a much higher SNR than the signal from the target wireless transmitter, and if not detected by the Wiieless Location System, the co-c:aannel interference may cause an incorrect choice of best antenna port at an SCS 10, teference SCS/antenna, candidate SCS/antenna, or SCS/antenna to be used in location processing. The co-channel interferencL
may also cause poor TDOA and FDOA results, leading to a failed or poor location estimate. The probability of collision increases with the density of cell sites in the host wireless communications system; especially in- dense suburban or rural environments where the frequencies are re-used often and wireless usage by subscribers is high.
Therefore, the Wireless Location System includes means to detect and recover from the s types of coIlisions described above. Foi- example, in the process of selecting a best port, reference SCS/antenna, or candidate SC:S/antenna, the Wireless Location System determines the average SNR of the received signal and the variance of the SNR
over the inteival of the transmission; when the variance of the SNR is above a predetermined threshold, the Wireless Location Systeni assigns a probability that a collision has occurred. If the signal received at an SCS/antenna has increased or decreased its SNR in a single step, and by an amount greater than a predetermined thresrold, the Wireless Location System assigns a probability that a collision has occurred. Further, if the average SNR of the signal received at a renzote SCS is greater than the average SNR that would be predicted by a propagation madel, given the cell site at which the wireless transmitter initiated its transmission and, the known uansrnit power levels and anteana patterns of the transmitter and receive antennas, the Wireless Location System assigns a probability that a collision has occurred. If the probability that a collision has occun-ed is above a predetermined threshold, then ttie Wireless Location System performs the further processing described below to verify whether and to what extent a collision may have impaired the received signal at an SCS/2ntcnna. T"ne advantage of assigning probabilities is to. reduce or eiiminate extra processinl; forthe majority of transmissions for which collisions have not occurred. It should b; noted that the threshold levels, assigned probabilities, and other details of the collision detection and recovery processes described herein are configurable, i.e., selected based on the particular application, environment, system variables, etc., that would affect iheir selection.
For received transrnissions at an SCS/antenna for which the probability of a collision is above the predetermined threshold and before using RF data from a particular antenna port in a reference SCS/antenna determination, best port deterniination or in location processing, the Wireless Location Systerz preferably verifies that the RF data from each antenna port is from the correct wireless transmitter. This is determined, for Oxample, by WO 00/41403 PCT/tiS99/29505 demodulating segments of the received signal to verify, for example, that the MIN, MSID, or other ident7fying information is correct or that the dialed digits or other message characteristics match those rtsceived by the.SCS/antenna that initially demodulated the transmission. The Wireless Location System may also correlate a short segment of the received signal at an aittenna port with the signal received at the primary SCS 10 to verify that the correlation result is above a predetermined threshold. If the Wireless Location System detects that the variance in the SNR over the entire length of the transmission is above a pre-detennined threshold, the Wireless Location System may divide the t:ransmission into segments and test each segment as described herein to determine whether the energy in that segment is primarily from the signal from the wireless transmitter for which -location processing has been selected or from an interfering transmitter.
The Wireless Location System may choose to use the RF data from a particular SCS/antenna in location processing ev:n if the Wireless Location System has detected that a partial collision has occun-ed at that SCS/antenna. In these cases, the SCS 10 uses the means described above to identify,:hat portion of the received transr.ussion which represents a signal from the wireless transmitter for which location processing has been selected, and that portion of the receivtx} transmission which contains co-channel interference. The Wireless Location System may comtnand the SCS 10 to send or use only selected segments of the received transmission that do not contain the co-channel interference. When determining the TDOA and FDOA for a baseline using only selected segments from an SCS/antenna, the Wireless Location System uses only the , corresponding segments of the tTansmission as received at the reference SCS/antenna.
The Wireless Location System may continue to use all segments for baselines in which no collisions were detected. In many c<<ses, the Wireless Location System is able to complete location processing and achieve an acceptable location error using only a portion of the transmission. This inventive ability to select the appropriate subset of the received tm+s**+ission and perform locasion processing on a segment by scg:nent basis enables the Wireless Location System to successfully complete location precessing i.n cases that might have failed using previ ous techniques.
WO 00/41403 PCT/'US99/29505 Multiple Pass Location Processing Certain applications may require a verr fast estimate of the general location of a wireless transmitter, followed by a more accurate estimate of the location that can be sent subsequently. This can be valuable, for example, for E9-1-1 systems that handle wireless calls and must make a call routing decision very quickly, but can wait a little longer for a more exact location to be displayed upon the E9-1-1 call-taker's electronic map terminal.
The Wireless Location System supports these applications with an inventive multiple pass location processing mode.
.10 In many cases, location accuracy is enhanced by using longer segments of the transmission and increasing the processing gain through longer integration intervals. But longer segments of the transmission require longer processing periods in the SCS 10 and TLP 12, as well as longer time periods for transmitting the RF data across the communications interface from the SCS 10 to the TLP 12. Therefore, the Wireless Location System includes means to identify those transmissions that require a fast but rough estimate of the location followed. by more complete location processing that produces a better location estimate. Th+: Signal of Interest Table includes a flag for each Signal of Interest that requires a multiple pass location approach. This flag specifies the maximum amount of time permitted by the requesting location k,;plication for the first estimate to be sent, as well as the maxi~num amount of time permitted by the requesting location application for the final location estimate to be sent. The Wireless Location System performs the rough location estimate by selecting a subset of the transmission for which to perform location processing. "'he Wireless Location System may choose, for example, the segment that was identified at the primary SCS/antenna with the highest average SNR. After the rough location estimate has been determined, using the methods described earlier, but with only a subse: of the transmission, the TLP 12 forwards the location estimate to the AP 14, which then forwards the rough estimate to th;-. requesting application with a flag indicating that the estimate is only rough. The Wirelc::ss Location System then performs its standard location processing using all of the aforci nentioned methods, and forwards this location estimate with a flag_indicating the final status of this WO 00/41403 PCT/'uS99/29505 location estimate. The Wireless Location System may perform the rough location estimate and the final location estimate sequentially on the same DSP in a TLP
12, or may perform the location processing in, parallel on different DSP's. Parallel processing may be necessary to meet the maximu=n time requirements of the requesting location applications. The Wireless Location System supports different maximum time requirements from different location applications for the same wireless transmission.
Very Short Baseline TDOA
The Wireless Location System is dcsigaed to operate in urban, suburban, and rural areas.
io In rural areas, when there are not sufficient cell sites available from a single wireless carrier, the Wireless Location System can be deployed with SCS's 101ocated at the cell sites of other wireless carriers or at othcr types of towers, including AM or FM radio station, paging, and two-way wireless towers. In these cases, rather than sharing the existing antennas of the wireless carrie; the Wireless Location System may require the installation of appropriate antennas, filters, and lownoise amplifiers to match the frequency band of the wireless transmilxers of interest to be located. For example, an AM
radio station tower may require the addition of 800 MHz antennas to locate cellular band transmitters. There may be cases, however, where no additional towers of any type are available at reasonable cost and the Wixless Location System must be deployed on just a few towers of the wireless carrier. In these cases, the Wireless Location System supports an antenna mode known as very short t-asefine TDOA. This antenna mode becomes active when additional anteanas are installed on a single cell site tower, whereby the antennas are placed at a distance of less, than one wavelength apart. This may require the addition ofjust one antenna per cell site: sector such that the Wireless Locat:on System uses one existing receive antenna in a sector and one additional antenna that has been placed next to the existing receive anteama. Typically, the two antennas in the sector are oriented such that the primary axes, or :,ine of direction, of the main beams are parallel and the spacing between the two antenna elements is known with precision. In addition, the two RF paths from the antenna elentents to the receivers in the SCS 10'are calibrated.
WO 00/41403 PCT/L'S99/29505 In its normal mode, the Wireless Location System determines the TDOA and FDOA
for pans of antenna that are separated by rriany wavelengths. For a TDOA on a baseline using antennas from two difference cell sites, the pairs of antennas are separated by thousands of wavelengths. For a TDOA. on a baseline using antennas at the same cell site, the pairs of antennas are separated by tc:ns of wavelengths. In either case, the TDOA
determination effectively results in a hyperbolic line bisecting the baseline and passing through the location of the wireless transnaitter. When antennas are separated by multiple wavelengths, the received signal has taken independent paths from the wireless transmitter to each antenna, including experiencing different multipath and Doppler shifts. However, when two antennas are closer than one wavelength, the two received signals have taken essentially the same .:)ath and experienced the same fading, multipath, and Doppler shift. Therefore, the TDOA, and FDOA processing of the Wireless Location System typically produces a Doppler shift of zero (or near-zero) hertz, and a time difference on the order of zero to one n2nosecond. A time difference that short is equivalent to an unambiguous phase difference between the signals received at the two antetma.s on the very short baseline. For example, at 834 MHz, the wavelength of an AMFS reverse control channel transmission is about 1.18 feet. A time difference of 0.1 nanoseconds is equivalent to a received phase difference of about 30 degees.
In this case, the TDOA measurement produces a hyperbola that is essentially a straight line, still passing through the location of the wire;.ess transmitter, and in a direction that is rotated degrees from the direction of the parallel lines formed by the two antcnnas on the very short baseline. When the results of this very short baseline TDOA at the single cell site are combined with a TDOA measuremeit on a baseline between two cell sites, the Wireless Location System can determine. a location estimate using only two cell sites.
Bandwidth Monitoring Method For InlprovinQ Location Accuracy AMPS cellular transmitters presently co mprise the large majority of the wireless transmitters used in the U.S. and AM.PS reverse voice channel u-ansmissions are generally FM signals modulated by both. voice and a supervisory audio tone (SAT). The voice modulation is standard FM, and is directly proportional to the speaking voice of the person using the wireless transmitter. In a typiczl conversation, each person speaks less that 35% of the time, which means that.most of the time the reverse voice channel is not being modulated due to voice. With or without voice, the reverse channel is continuously modulated by SAT, which is used by tlie wireless communications system to monitor channel status. The SAT modulation rue is only about 6 KHz. The voice channels support in-band nmessages that are usec: for hand-off control and for other reasons, such as for establishing a 3-way call, for answering a second incoming call while already on a first call, or for responding to an 'audil' message from the wireless communications system. All of these messages, though carried on the voice channel, have characteristics similar to the control channel messages. These messages are transmitted infrequently, and i o location systems have ignored these msssages and focused on the more prevalent SAT
transmissions as the signal of interest.
In view of the above-described difficulties presented by the limited bandwidth of the FM
voice and SAT reverse voice channel signals, an object of the present invention is to provide an improved method by whicb reverse voice channel (RVC) signals may be utilized to locate a wireless transmitter, particuiarly in an emergency situation. Another object of the invention is to provide a location method that allows the location system to avoid making location estimates using RVC signals in situations in which it is likely that the measurement will not meet prescribed accuracy and reliability requirements. This saves system resources and improves the location system's overall efficiency.
The improved method is based upon two techniqtus. Figure 1 OA is a flowchart of a first method in accordance with the present invention for measuring location using reverse voice channel signals. The method cor.zprises the following steps:
(i) It is first assumed that a user with a wireless transmitter wishes to be located, or wishes to have his location upc.ated or improved upon. This may be the case, for example; if the wireless user hiL.s dialed "911" and is setlaing emergency assistancm It is therefore also assumed that the user is coherent and in communication with a centrally located dispatcher.
1 I i (ii) When the dispatcher desires a location update for a particular wireless transmitter, the dispatcher sends a location =spdate command with the identity of the wireless transmitter to the Wireless Location Systeni over an application interface.
(iii) The Wireless Location System responds to the dispatcher with a confirmation that the Wireless Location Systsnn has queried the wireless communications system and has obtained the voice channel assignmcnt for the wireless transmitter.
(iv) The dispatcher instructs the wireless user to dial a 9 or more digit number and then the "SEND" button. This s:quence may be something like "123456789" or "911911911 ". Two funetions happen to the reverse voice channel when the wireless user dial a sequence of at least 9 digits and then the "SEND" button.
First, especially for an AMPS collular voice channel, the dialing of digits causes the sending of dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) tones over the voice channel.
The modulation index of DTNIF tones is very high and during the sending of each digit in the DTMF sequence wiLE typically push the bandwidth of the transmitted signal beyond +/- 10 KHz. The :;econd function occurs at the pressing of the "SEND" button. Whether or not the wireless user subscribes to 3-way calling or other special featvres, the wireless transmitterwill send a message over the voice using a"blank and burst" mode where the transmitter briefly stops sending the FM voice and SAT, and instead sends a bursty message modulated in the same manner as the control channel (10 Kbits Manchester). If the wireless user dials less than 9 digits, the message will be comprised of approximately 544 bits.
If the wireless user dials 9 or more digits, the message is comprised of approximately 987 bits.
(v) After notification by the dispatcl:.er, the Wireless Location System monitors the bandwidth of the tiansmitted sig:-lal in the voice channel. As discussed earlier, when only-the SAT is being transmitted, and even if voice and SAT are being transmitted, there may not be suiEcient bandwidth in the transmitted signal to calculate a high quality location estimate: Therefore, the Wireless Location System conserves location processing resources and waits until the transmitted signal exceeds a predetermined tiandwidth. This may be, for example, set somewhere in the range of 8 KHz to 12 KHz. When the DTMF dialed digits are WO 00/41403 PC'T/US99/29505 sent or when the bursty message is sent, the bandwidth would typically exceed the predetermined bandwidth. In fact, if the wireless transmitter does transmit the DTI~g' tones during dialing, the bandwidth would be expected to exceed the predetermined bandwidth multiple times. This would provide multiple opportunities to perfonn a location estimate. If the DTNIF tones are not sent during dialing, the bursty message is still sent at the time of pressing "SEND", and the bandwidth would typicaly exceed the predetermined threshold.
(vi) Only when the transmitted bandwidth of the signal exceeds the predetermined bandwidth, the 'Vireless Location System initiates location processing.
'10 Figure l OB is a flowchart of another method in accordance with the present invention for measuring location using reverse voice -hannel signals. The method comprises the following steps:
(i) It is first assumed that a user with a wireless transmitter wishes to be located, or wishes to have their location upciated or improved upon. This may be the case, for example, if the wireless user has dialed "911" and is seeking emergency assistance. It is assumed that the user may not wish to dial digits or may not be able to dial any digits in accordance with the previous method.
(ii) When the dispatclter desires a location update for a particular wireless transmitter user, the dispatcher sends a locaaon update command to the Wireless Location System over an application intaface with the identity of the wireless transmitter.
(iii) The Wireless Location Systcm :;esponds to the dispatcher with a confirmation.
(iv) The Wireless Location Systcm commands the wireless communications system to make the wireless transmitter trmsnit by sending an "audit" or similar message io the wireless traasmitter. The auclit message is a mechanism by which the wireless communications system can obtain a response from the wireless transmitter without requiring an action by tlie end-user and without causing.the wireless traasmitter to ring or othawise ,tlert. The receipt of an audit message causes the wireless transmitter to respond with an "audit response" message on the voice charmel.!.
(v) After notification by the dispatche:-, the Wireless Location System monitors the bandwidth of the transmitted sign2l in the voice channel. As discussed earlier, when only the SAT is being transazitted, and even if voice and SAT are being transmitted, there may not be sufficient bandwidth in the transmitted signal to calculate a high quality location estimate. Therefore, the radio location conserves location processing resources and -waits until the tiansmitted signal exceeds a predetermined bandwidth. This may be, for example, set somewhere in the range of 8 KHz to 12 KHz. When the audit response message is sent, the bandwidth would typically exceed the predetc:rnzined bandwidth.
(vi) Only when the transmitted bandwidth of the signal exceeds the predetermined bandwidth, the Wireless Location Systetn initiates location processing.
Estimate Combination Method For Improving_Location Accuracy The accuracy of the location estimate provided by the WireIess Location System may be improved by combining multiple statistic,-dly-independaat location estimates made while the wireless transmitter is maintaining its position. Even whea a wireless transmitter is perfectly stationary, the physical and RF emvironment around a wireless transmitter is constantly changing. For example, vehicles may change their position or another wireless transmitter which had caused a collision d.uring one location estimate may have stopped transmitting or changed its position so as to no longer eollide during subsequent location estimates. The location estiinate provided by the=Wireless Location System will therefore change for each transmission, even if con:secutive transmissions are made within a very short period of time, and each location eslimate is statistically independent of the other estimates, particularly with respect to the errors caused by the changing environment.
When several consecutive statistically inc.ependent location estimates are made for a wireless transntitter that has not changed ::ts position, the location estimates will tend to cluster about the true position. The Wireless Location System combines the location estimates using a weighted average or other similar mathematical construct to detennine the improved estimate. The use of a weig;ited average is aided by the assignment of a quality factor to each independent location estimate. This quality factor may be based 1 I- , upon, for example, the correlation values, confidence interval, or other similar measurements derived from the location processing for each independent estimate. The Wireless Location System optionally uses sevcral methods to obtain multiple independent uansmissions from the wireless transmitter, including (i) using its interface to the wireless communieations system for the Make Transmit command; (ii) using multiple consecutive bursts from a time slot basec, air interface protocol, such as TDMA or GSM;
or (iii) dividing a voice channel transmis:sion into multiple segments over a period of time and performing location processing indel3endently for each segment. As the Wirelcss Location System increases the number o:' independent location estimates being combined into the final location estimate, it monitors a statistic indicating the quality of the cluster.
If the statistic is below a prescribed threshold value, then the Wireless Location System assumes that the wireless transmitter is niaintaining its position. If the statistic rises above the prescribed threshold value, the Wireless Location System assume that the wireless transmitter is not maintaining its posit:ion and therefore ceases to perform additional location estimaies..The statistic indicating the quality of the cluster may be, for example, a standard deviation calculation or a root: mean square (RMS) calculation for the individual location estimates being combincd together and with respect to the dynamically calculated combined locatic-n esdmate=. When reporting a location record to a requesting application, the Wireless Location System indicates, using a field in the location record, the number of independ:nt location estimate combined together to produce the reported location estimate_ Another exemplary process for obtaizung and combining multiple location estimates will now be explained with reference to Figures 11A=11D. Figures 11A,11B and 11C
schematically depict the well-known "origination", "page response," and "audit"
sequences of a wireless communication:; systeat. As shown in Figure I lA, the origination sequence (initiated by the wireless phone to make -a call) may require two transmissions from the wireless transmitter, an "originate" signal and an "order confirmation" sipal.
The order confirmation signal is sent in response to a voice channel assignment L-om the wireless communications system (e.g., IriSC). Similarly, as shown in Figure 1 1B, a page sequence may involve two transmissions from the wireless taansmitter. The page WO 00/41403 PCTIti599/29505 sequence is initiated by the wireless communications system, e.g., when the wireless transmitter is called by another.phone. Alter being paged, the wireless transmitter transmits a page response; and then, after being assigned a voice channel, the wireless transmitter transmits an order confumatien signal. The audit process, in conttast, elicits a single reverse transmission, an audit response signal. An audit and audit response sequence has the benefit of not ringing thi. wireless transmitter which is responding.
The manner in which these sequences ma;y be used to locate a phone with improved accuracy will now be explained. According to the present invention, for example, a stolen phone, or a phone with a stolen serial nuniber, is repeatedly pinged with an audit signal, which forces it to respond with multiple audit responses, thus permitting the phone to be located with greater accuracy. To use Lie audit sequence, however, the Wircl,~ss Location System sends the appropriate commands iising its interface to the wireless communications system, which sends the audit message to the wireless transmitter. The is Wireless Location System can also force a call terrnination (hang up) and tiiya call the wireless transmitter back using the standard ANI code. The call can be terr,:iijated either by verbally instructing the mobile user to disconnect the calI, by disconnecti..; the call at the landline end of the call, or by sending an artificial over-the-air disconnect message to the base station. This over-the-air disconnect message simulates the pressing of the "END" button on a mobile unit. The call-back invokes the above-described paging sequence and forces the phone to initiate two transmissions that can be utiliz.-d to make location estimates.
Referring now to Figure I iD, the inventive high accuracy location method vrill now be summarized. First, an initial location estiniate is made. Next, the above-desc:ibed audit or "hang up and call back" process is employed to elicit a responsive transmission from the mobile unit, and then a second location estimate is made. Whether the audit or "hang up and call back" process is used will depend. on whether the wireless communications system and wireless mnsmitter have both implemented the audit functionality.
Steps second and third steps are repeated to obt<<in however many independent location estimates are deemed to be necessary or desirable, and ultimately tha multiple statistically-independent location estima::es are combined in an average, weighted average, or similar mathematical construct to obtain an improved estimate. :
he use of a weighted average is aided by the assignment of a quality factor to each independent location estimate. This quality factor ma,+ be based upon a correlation percentage, confidence interval, or other similar measurements derived from the location calculation process.
Bandwidth Synthesis Method For Improving Location Accuracy The Wireless Location System is further capable of improving the accxacy of location lo estimates for wireless tiransmitters whose bandwidth is relatively narrow using a technique of artificial bandwidth synthesis. This technique can applied, for example, to those transmitters that use the AMPS, NAMPS, TDMA, and GSM air interface protocols and for which there are a large number of individual RF channels available for use by the wireless transmitter. For exemplary purposes, the following description shall refer to AMPS-specific details; however, the desaiption can be easily altered to apply to other protocols. This method relies on the principle that each wireless transmittcr is operative to transnmit only nazrowband signals at frxluencies spanning a predefined wide band of frequencies that is wider than the bandwidth of the individual narrowband signals transmitted by the wireless uananitter. This method also relies on the aforementioned interface between the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system over which the WLS can command the mireless communications system to make a wireless transmitter handoff or switch to another frequency or RF channe:. By issuing a series of commands, the Wireless Location System can force the wireless transmitter to switch sequentially and in a controllcsl manner to a series of RF channels, allowing the WLS effectively to synthesize a wider band received signal from the series of narrowband transmitted signals for the purpose of location processing_ In a presently preferred embodiment of tlie invention, the bandwidth synthesis means includes means for determining a wideband phase versus frequency characteristic of the tansmissions from the wireless transznitter. For example, the narrowband signals typically have a bandwidth of approximately 20 KHz and the predefined wide band of WO 00/41403 PCTlUS99!29505 frequencies spans approximately 12.5 Nfliz, which in this example, is the spectrum allocated to each cellular carrier by the KIC. With bandwidth synthesis, the resolution of the TDOA measurements can be increa.sed to about 1/12.5 MHz; i.e., the available time resolution is the reciprocal of the effecnvi, bandwidth.
A wireless transmitter, a calibration transmitter (if used), SCS's l 0A, l OB
and 10C, and a TLP 12 are shown in Figure 12A. The location of the calibration transmitter and all three SCS's are accurately known a priori. Signals, represented by dashed arrows in Figure 12A, are transmitted by the wireless tr:}nsmitter and calibration transmitter, and received 1o at SCS's 10A, IOB and IOC, and processed using techniques previously described.
During the location processing, RF data fi-om one SCS (e.g. l OB) is cross-correlated (in the time or frequency domain) with the daa stream from another SCS (e.g. l OC) separately for each transmitter and for each pair of SCS's 10 to generate TDOA
estimates TDOA23 and TDOA13. An intermediate output of the location processing is a set of coefficients representing the complex cross-power as a function of frequency (e.g., R23).
For example, if X(f) is the Fourier transfomi of the signal x(t) received at a first site and Y(f) is the Fourier transform of the signal y(t) received at a second site, then the complex cross-power R(f)=X(f )Y*(f), where Y* is the complex conjugate of Y. The phase angle of R(f) at any frequency f equals the phase of X(f) minus the phase of Y(f).
The phase angle of R(f) may be called the fringe phase. In the absence of noise, interference, and other errors, the fiinge phase is a perfectly linear function of frequency within a (contiguous) frequency band observed; and slope of the line is minus t.ne interferometric group delay, or TDOA; the intercept of th: line at the band center frequency, equal to the average value of the phase of R(f), is called "the" fringe phase of the observation when reference is being made to the whole banc:. Within a band, the fringe phase may be considered to be a function of frequency.
The coefficients obtained for the calibration transmitter are combined with those obtained for the wireless transmitter and the combinations are analyzed to obtain calibrated TDOA
measu=ents TDOA23 and TDOA13, respectively. In the calibration process, the fringe I I
phase of the calibration transmitter is su:Otracted from the fringe phase of the wireless transmitter in order to cancel systematic errors that are common to both.
Since each original fringe phase is itself the diffexerLce between the phases of signals received at two SCS's 10, the calibration process is often called double-dff~'erencing and the calibrated result is said to be doubly-dffferenced. TDOA estimate T-ij is a maximum-likelihood estimate of the time difference of arrival (TDOA), between sites i and j, of the signal transmitted by the wireless transmitter, calibrate:d and also corrected for multipath propagation effects on the signals. TDOA estimates from different pairs of cell sites are combined to derive the location estimate. It is well known that more accurate TDOA
estimates can be obtained by observing a. wider bandwidth. It is generally not possible to increase the "instantaneous" bandwidth of the signal transmitted by a wireless transmitter, but it is possible to command a wireless sansmitter to switch from one frequency channel to another so that, in a short time, a wide bandwidth can be observed.
In a typical non-wireline cellulai system, for example, channels 313-333 are control channels and the remaining 395 chamteL, are voice chaanels. The center frequency of a wireless transmitte:r transmitting on voici: RF channel number 1(RVC 1) is 826.030 MHz and the center-to-center frequency spaciitg of successive channels of 0.030 MHz. The number of voice channels assigned to each cell of a typical s--ven-cell frequency-reuse block is about 57 (i.e., 395 divided by 7) and these channels a,re distributed throughout the 395-channel range, spaced every 7 ctmmels. Note then that each cell site used in an AMPS system. has channels that span the entire 12.5 MHz band allocated by the FCC. If, for example, we designate cells of each frequency set in a re-use pattern as cells "A"
through "G", the channel numbers assigned to the "A" cell(s) might be 1, 8, 15, 22, ..., 309; the numbers of the channels assigned to the "B" cells are determined by adding 1 to the "A" channel numbers; and so on thro ugh G.
The method begins when the wireless transmitter has been assigned to a voice RF
channel, and the Wireless Location System has triggeaed location processing for the transmissions from the wireless transmitter. As part of the location processing, the TDOA
estimates TDOA13 and TDOA23 combine:d may have, for example, a standard deviation I I
error of 0.5 microsecond. The method combining measurements from different RF
channels exploits the relation between TDOA, fringe.phase, and radio frequency. Denote the "true" value of the group delay or TE OA, i.e., the value that would be observed in the absence of noise, multipath, and any inst:uniental error, by r; similarly, denote the true value of fringe phase by 0; and denote the radio frequency by f The fringe phase 0 is related to t and f by:
-ft + n (Eq. 1) 1 o where 0 is measured in cycles, f in Hz an.d T in seconds; and n is an integer representing the intrinsic integer-eycle ambiguity of a doubly-differenced phase measurement. The value of n is unknown a priori but is the same for observations at contiguous frequencies, i.e., within any one frequency channel. The value of n is generally different for observations at separated frequencies. t can be estimated from observations in a single frequency channel- is, in effect, by fitting a straight line to the fringe phase observed as a function of frequency within the channel. The slope of the best-fitting line equals minus the desired esiimate of t. In the single-ck.annel case, n is constant and so Eq. 1 can be differentiated to obtain:
do/df = -t (Eq. 2).
Independent estimates of t are obtainabb, by straight-line fitting to ttie observations of vs. f separately for each channel, but whim two separate (non-contiguous) frequency channels are observed, a single straight line will not generally fit the observations of 0 vs.
f from both channels because, in general, the integer n has different vaiues for the two channels. However, under certain conditions, it is possible to detennine and remove the difference between these two integer values and then to fit a single straight line to the entire set of phase data spanning both cbannels. The slope of this straight line will be much better determined because it is based on a wider range of frequencies.
Under certain conditions, the uncertainty of the slope estimate is inversely proportional to the frequency span.
In this example, suppose that the wireies,i transmitter has been assigned to voice RF
channel 1. The radio frequency difference between channels 1 and 416 is so great that initially the differeace between the integt:rs n, and n416 corresponding to these channels cannot be determined. However, from the observations in either or both channels taken separately, an initial TDOA estimate zQ can be derived. Now the Wireless Location System commands the wireless communications system to make the wireless transmitter 1 o to switch from channel 1 to channel8. Tlte wireless transmitter's signal is received in channel 8 and processed to update or refine the estimate Ta. From to, the "theoretical"
fringe-phase Oo as a function of frequency can be computed, equal to (-fra).
T'ne difference between the actually observed phase 0 and the theoretical function Oo can be computed, where the actually observed pliase equals the true phase within a very small fraction, typica.tly 1/50th, of a cycle:
~-~ _-f (t-to) + nt or n8s depending on the chaazmel (Eq. 3) or 0o =-afr-nt or n8, depending on the channel (Eq. 4) wheie ~~ a ~-+ and Ot $ t-To. Equation (4) is graphed in Figure 12B, depicting the difference, Ao, betweea the observed fnn;;e phase 0 and the value ~o computed from the initial TDOA estimate to, versus frequency f for channels 1 and S.
For the 20 KHz-wide band of frequencies corresponding to channel 1, a graph of oo vs. f is typically a horizontal straight line. For ihe 20 KHz-wide band of frequencies corresponding to channel 8, the graph of iio vs. f is also horizontal straight line. The slopes of these line segments are generaliy nearly zero because the quantity (fAt) usually does not vary by a significant fraction of ~i cycle within 20 KHz, because Gs is minus the error of the estimate To. The magnitude of this error typically will not exceed 1.5 microseconds (3 times the standard deviation of 0.5 microsc-conds in this example), and the product of 1.5 microseconds and 20 KHz is under 4% o; a cycle. In Figure 12B, the graph of a~ for channel 1 is displaced vertically from the g:aph of A~ for channel 8 by a relatively large amount because the dif[erence between ni a:d n8 can be arbitrarilylarge.
This vertical displacement, or difference between the average values of 0O for channels 1 aiid 8, will (with extremely high probability) be within 0.3 cycle of the true value of the difference, ni and ng, because the product of the maximum likely magnitude of Oz (1.5 microseconds) and the spacing of chamsels 1 and 8 (210 F.:-iz) is 0.315 cycle.
In other words, the difference ni - n8 is equal to the difference betnreen the average values of Ao for channels 1 and 8, rounded to the nearest integer. After he integer difference ni - n$ is determined by this rounding procedure., the integer 0o is a.:ded for channel 8 or subtracted from eo for cha.nnel. 1. The difference between :::e average values of ao for channels 1 and 8 is generally equal to tae error in the initial TDOA estimat, , 'ro, times 210 KHz. The difference between the average values of d~ for channels I and 8 is divided by 210 KHz and the result is acidtd to -ra to obtain un estimate of r, the true value of the TDOA; this new estimate can be significantly more accurate than -to.
This frequency-stepping and TDOA-refining method can be extended to more widely spaced channels to obtain yet more accurate results. If rI is used to represent the refined result obtained from channels i and S, ta can be replaced by t} in the just-described method; and the Wireless Location System can command the wireless communications system to make the wireless transmitter switch, e.g., from channel 8 to channel 36; then ,ti can be used to determine the integer difference n$ - n36 and a TDOA
estimate can be obtained based on the 1.05 MHz freque:ncy span between channels I and 36. The estimated can be labeled t2i and the wi:reless transmitter switched, e.g., from channel 36 to 112, and so on. In principle, the full range of frequencies allocated to the cellular canier can be spanned. The channel numbers (1, 8, 36,112) used in this e-.:atnple are, of course, arbitrary. The generai principle is that an estimate of the TDOA based on a small frequency span (statting with a single channel) is used to resolve the integer ambiguity of the fringe phase difference betweea more widely separated frequeticies. The latter frequency separation should not be too large; it is limited by the uncertainry of the pni or estimate of TDOA. In general, the worst-case errorin the prior estimate multiplied by the frequency difference may not exceed 0.5 cycle.
If the verysmaliest (e.g., 210 KHz) frequency gap between the most closely spaced channels allocated to a particular ceil cannot be bridged because the worst-case uneertainty ofthe single-channel TDO.A estimate exceeds 2.38 microseconds (equal to 0.5 cycle divided by 0.210 MHz), the 'Vireless Location System commands the wireless communications system to force the wseless transmitter hand-off from one cell site to io another (e.g. from one frequency group to another), such that the frequency step is smaller. There is a possibility of misid:ntifying the integer difference between the phase differences (A~'s) for two channels, e. ;., because the wireless transmitter moved during the handoff from one channel to the otti:ier. Therefore, as a check, the Wireless Location System may reverse each handoff (e.g., a.per switching from channel 1 to channel 8, switch from channel 8 back to channel 1) and confirm that the integer-cycle difference determined has precisely the same magnitude and the opposite sign as for the "forward"
hand-off. A significantly nonzero velo-ity astrmate from the single-channel FDOA
observations can be used to extrapolati: across the time interval involved in a channel change. Ordinarily this time interval c.an be held to a small fraction of I
second. The 2o FDOA estimation error multiplied by the time intetval between channels must be small in comparison with 0.5 cycle. The Wireless Location System preferably employs a variety of redundancies and checks against integet-misidentification.
Directed Retry for 911 Another inventive aspect of the Wireless Location System relates to a "directed retry" method for use in connection w;.th a dual-mode wireless communications system supporting at least a first modt;lation method and a second modulation method. In such a situaiion, the first and second modulation methods are assumed to be used on different RF channels (i.e. channels for the wireless communications system supporting a WLS and the PCS system, respectively). It is also as..~umed that the wireless transmitter to be located is capable of suppotting both modulation WO 00/41403 PCT/'uS99/29505 methods, i.e. is capable ofdialing "911" on the wireless communications system having Wireless Location System support.
For example, the directed retry method could be used in a system in which there are an insufficierit number of base stations to support a Wireless Location System, but which is operating in a region served by a Wireless Location System associated with another wireless communications system. The "first" wireless communications systcm could be a cellular telephone sysi:em and the "second" wireless communications system could be a PCS system operating within the same territory as the firsi system. According to the inve:ntion, when the mobile transmitter is currently using the second (PCS) modulation method and attempts to originate a call to 911, the mobile transmitter is cau;ced to switch automatically to the first modulation method, and then to originate the call to 911 using the first modulation method on one of the set of RF channels prescribed for use by the first wireless communications system. In this manner, location services can be provided to customers of a PCS or like system that does is not serverl by its own Wireless Location System.
Conclusion The true scope the present invention is not limited to the presently preferred embodiments disclosed herein. For example, the foregoing disclosure of a presently preferred embodiment of a Wireless Location System uses explanatory terms, such as Signal Collection System (SCS), TDOA Location Processor (TLP), Applications Processor (AP), and the like, which shoti.d not be construed so as to limit the scope of protection of the following claims, or to otherwise imply that the inventive aspects of the Wireless Location System are limited to ,he particular methods and apparat-as disclosed.
Moreover, as will be understood by thost sicilled in the art, many of the inventive aspects disclosed herein may be applied in location systems=that are not based on TDOA
techniques. For example, the processes b;I which the Wireless Location System uses the Tasking List, etc. can be applied to non-IDOA systems. In such non-TDOA
systems, the TLP's described above would not be required to perform TDOA calculations.
Similarly, I I
the invention is not limited to systems employing SCS's constructed as described above, nor to systems employing AP's meeting a;.l of the particulars described above.
The SCS's, TLP's and AP's are, in essence, prograrnmable data collection and processing devices that could take a variety of forms without depzTting from the inventive concepts disclosed herein. Given the rapidly declining cost oi' digital signal processing and other processing functions, it is easily possible, for example, to transfer the processing for a particular function from one of the functional oiemeiits (such as the TLP) described herein to another fimctional element (such as the SC S or AP) without changing the inventive operation of the systeni. In many cases, thi: place of implementation (i.e.
the functional element) described herein is merely a desi,gner's preference and not a hard requiremcnt.
Accordingly, except as they may be expressly so Iiniited, the scope of protection of the following claims is not intended to be limited to the specific embodimen:s described above.
The Database Subsystem of the Central Site System has been expanded and developed into the AP 14. The AP 14 can support a greater variety of applications tl:an previously disclosed in 5,608,410, including the abi:ity to post-process large volumes of location records from multiple wireless transmitters. This post-processed data can vield, for example, very effective maps for use by wireless carriers to improve and optimize the RF
design of the communications systems. This can be achieved, for example, by plotting the locations of all of the callers in an area and the received signal strengths wt a number of cell sites. The carrier can then determine whether each cell site is, in fact, serving the exact coverage area desired by the carrier. The AP 14 can also now store location records anonymously, that is, with the MIN and/or other identity information removed from the location record, so that the location record can be used for RF optimization or traffic monitoring without causing concerns abcut an individual user's privacy.
As shown in Figure lA, a presently preferred implementation of the Wireless Location System includes a plurality of SCS regions each of which comprises multiple SCS's 10.
For example, "SCS Region1" includes SCS's l0A and IOB (and preferably others, not shown) that are located at respective cell sites and share antennas with the base stations at those cell sites. Drop and insert units I lA, and 1 IB are used to interface fractional T1/E1 lines to full TI/El lines, which in turn are coupled to a digital access and control system (DACS) 13A. The DACS 13A and anothi:r DACS 13B are used in the maiiner described more fully below for communications between the SCS's IOA, l OB, etc., and multiple TLP's 12A, 12B, etc. As shown, the TLP's are typically collocated and intcrconnected via an Ethernet network (backbone) and a second, redundant Ethemet networl.. Also coupled to the Ethernet networks are multiple AP's 14A and 14B, multiple NOC's 16A and 16B, and a terminal server 15. Routers 19A an3 19B are used to couple one Wireless Location System to one or more other Wireless Lo -.ation System(s).
Signal Collection System 10 Generally, cell sites will have one of the iollowing antenna configurations:
(i) an omnidirectional site with 1 or 2 receive antennas or (ii) a sectored site with 1, 2, or 3 sectors, and with 1 or 2 receive antennas iised in each sector. As the number of cell sites has increased in the U.S. and internationally, sectored cell sites have become the predominant configuration. However, the::e are also a growing number of micro-cells and pico-cells, which can be omnidirectional. Therefore, the SCS 10 has been designed to be configurable for any of these typical cell ites and has been provided with mechanisms to employ any number of antennas at a cell ite.
The basic architectural elements of the SCS 10 remain the same as for the Antenna Site System described in 5,608,410, but sever-Ul enhancements have been made to increase the flexibility of the SCS 10 and to reduce the: commercial deployment cost of the system.
The most presently preferred embodimeni of the SCS 10 is described herein. The SCS 10, an overview of which is shown in Figure ?, includes digital receiver modules through 10-2C; DSP modules 10-3A through 10-3C; a serial bus 10-4, a control and communications module 10-5; a GPS module 10-6; and a clock distribution module 10-7.
The SCS 10 has the following external connections: power, fractional Tl/E1 communications, RF connections to antennas, and a GPS antenna connection for the timing generation (or clock distribution) niodule 10-7. The architecture and packaging of the SCS 10 permit it to be physically collocated with cell sites (which is the most conunon installation place), located at other types of towers (such as FM, AM, two-way emergency communications, television, etc.), or located at other building structures (such as rooftops, silos, etc.).
Timing Generation The Wireless Location System depends upon the accurate determination of time at all SCS's 10 contained within a network. Several different timing generation systems have been described in previous disclosures, however the most presently preferred embodiment is based upon an enhanced (iPS receiver 10-6. The enhanced GPS
receiver differs from most traditional GPS receivers in that the receiver contains algorithms that remove some of the timing instability of the GPS signals, and guarantees that any two SCS's 10 contained within a network can receive timing pulses that are within approximately ten nanoseconds of each oiher. These enhanced GPS receivers are now commercially available, and further reduce some of the time reference related errors that were observed in previous implementations of wireless location systems. While this enhanced GPS receiver can produce a very accurate time reference, the output of the receiver may still have an unacceptable pliase noise. Therefore, the output of the receiver is input to a low phase noise, crystal oscil:.ator-driven phase locked loop circuit that can now produce 10 MHz and one pulse per s,:cond (PPS) reference signals with less than 0.01 degrees RMS of phase noise, and with the pulse output at any SCS 10 in a Wireless Location System network within ten nanoseconds of any other pulse at another SCS 10.
This combination of enhanced GPS receiver, crystal oscillator, and phase locked loop is now the most preferred method to produce stable time and frequency reference signals with low phase noise.
The SCS 10 has been designed to support multiple frequency bands and multiple carriers with equipment located at the same cell si-:e. This can take place by using multiple receivers interaal to a single SCS chassis, or by using multiple chassis each with separate receivers. In the event that multiple SCS chassis are placed at the same cell site, the SCS's 10 can share a single timing generation/clock distribution circuit 10-7 and thereby reduce overall system cost. The 10 MHz and one PPS output signals from the timing generation circuit are amplified and buffered internal to the SCS 10, and tl:;,n made available via external connectors. Therefo;-e a second SCS can receive its timing from a first SCS using the buffered output and the extemal connectors. These signals can also be made available to base station equipment collocated at the cell site. This might be useful to the base station, for example, in improving the frequency re-use pattern of a wireless communications system.
WO 00141403 PCT,US99/29505 Receiver Module 10-2 (Wideband Embodiment) When a wireless transmitter makes a transmission, the Wireless Location System must receive the transmission at multiple SCS's 10 located at multiple geographically dispersed cell sites. Therefore, each SCS 10 has the ability to receive a transmission on any RF channel on which the transmission may originate. Additionally, since the SCS 10 is capable of supporting multiple air interface protocols, the SCS 10 also supports multiple types of RF channels. This is in ,-.ontrast to most current base station receivers, which typically receive only one type of c:hannel and are usually capable of receiving only on select RF channels at each cell site. For example, a typical TDMA base station receiver will only support 30 KHz wide channels, anC each receiver is progranuned to receive signals on only a single channel vvhose frequency does not change often (i.e. there is a relatively fixed frequency plan). Therefore, very few TDMA base station receivers would receive a transmission on any given frequency. As another example, even though some GSM base station receivers are capable of frequency hopping, the receivers at multiple base stations are generally not capable of sirnultaneously tuning to a single frequency for the purpose of perfonning location processing. In fac:, the receivers at GSM base stations are programmed to frequency hop to avoid using an RF channel that is being used by another transmitter so as to minimize interference.
The SCS receiver module 10-2 is preferably a dual wideband digital rece:ver that can receive the entire frequency band and all of the RF channels of an air interface. For cellular systems in the U.S., this receiver module is either 15 MHz Nvide or 25 MHz wide so that all of the channels of a single cartier or all of the channels of both carriers can be received. This receiver module has many of the characteristics of the receiver previously described in Patent Number 5,608,410, aiid Figure 2A is a block diagrar.: of the currently preferred embodiment. Each receiver module contains an RF tuner secticn 10-2-1, a data interface and control section 10-2-2 and zn analog to digital conversion section 10-2-3.
The RF tuner section 10-2-1 includes twt. full independent digital receivers (including Tuner # 1 and Tuner #2) that convert the ~malog RF input from an external connector into a digitized data stream. Unlike most base station receivers, the SCS receiver module does not perform diversity combining or switching. Rather, the digitized signEl from each WO 00/41403 C"r/uS99/29505 independent receiver is made available to the location processing. The present inventors have detemiined that there is an advantage to the location processing, and especially the multipath mitigation processing, to inde;~endently process the signals from each antenna rather than perform combining on the re-.eiver module.
The receiver module 10-2 performs, or is coupled to elements that perform, the following functions: automatic gain control (to support both nearby strong signals and far away weak signals), bandpass filtering to remove potentialiy interfering signals from outside of the RF band of interest, synthesis of frecuencies needed for mixing with the RF signals to create an IF signal that can be sampled, :nixing, and analog to digital conversion (ADC) for sampling the RF signals and outputting a digitized data stream having an appropriate bandwidth and bit resolution. The freque:ncy synthesizer locks the synthesized frequencies to the 10 MHz reference sigial from the clock distribution/tir:iing generation module 10-7 (Figure 2). All of the circuits used in the receiver module maintain the low phase noise characteristics of the timing reference signal. The receiver module preferably has a spurious free'dynamic range of at least 80 dB.
The receiver module 10-2 also contains,-.ircuits to generate test frequencies and calibration signals, as well as test ports tivhere measurements can be made by technicians during installation or troubleshooting. Various calibration processes are described in further detail below. The intemally generated test frequencies and test ports provide an easy method for engineers and technicians to rapidly test the receiver module and diagnose any suspected problems. This is also especially useful during the manufacturing process.
One of the advantages of the Wireless Location System described hcrein is that no new antennas are required at cell sites. The V'lireless Location System can us::
the existing antennas already installed at most cell sites, including both omni-directional and sectored antennas. This feature can result in significant savings in the installation and maintenance costs of the Wireless Location System versus other approaches that havc been described in the prior art. The SCS's digital receivers 10-2 can be connected to the existing antennas in zwo ways, as shown in Figutes 2B and 2C, respectively. In Figure 2B, the SCS receivers 10-2 are connected to the existing cell site multi-coupier or RF
splitter. In this manner, the SCS 10 uses the cell site's existing low noise pre-air:pliner, band pass filter, and multi-coupler or RF splitter. This type of connection usually limits the SCS 10 to supporting the frequency band of a sir.;gle carrier. For example, an A-side cellular carrier will typically use the band pass filter to block signals from customers of the B-side carrier, and vice versa.
In Figure 2C, the existing RF path at the cell site has been interrupted, and a new pre-amplifier, band pass filter, and RF splitter has been added as part of the Wireless Location System. The new band pass filter will pass multiple contiguous frequency bands, such as both the A-side and B-side cellular carriers, thereby allowing the Wireless Location System to locate wireless transinitters using both cellular systems but using the antennas from a single cell site. In this configuration, the Wireless Location System uses matched RF components at each cell site, so that the phase versus frequency responses are identical. This is in contrast to existing RF components, which may t.
from different manufacturers or using different model numbers at various cell sites. Matching the response characteristics of RF componer..ts reduces a possible source of c_;or for the location processing, although the Wireless Location System has the capZ'::ility to compensate for these sources of error. Finally, the new pre-amplifier ins:~lled with the Wireless Location System will have a very low noise figure to improve t::e sensitivity of the SCS 10 at a cell site. The overall noi::e figure of the SCS digital rece:
: ers 10-2 is dominated by the noise figure of the low noise amplifiers. Because the <<iireless Location System can use weak signals in location processing, whereas the base station typically cannot process weak signals, the Wireless Location System can significantly benefit from a high quality, very low noise amplif er.
In order to improve the ability of the Wii-eless Location System to acc-urately determine TDOA for a wireless transmission, the p:lase versus frequency response of the cell site's RF components are detennined at the tinte of installation and updated at other certain times and then stored in a table in the Wireless.Location System. This can be important WO 00l41403 PCT/US99129505 because, for example, the band pass filteis and/or multi-couplers made by some manufacturers have a steep and non-linear phase versus frequency response near the edge of the pass band. If the edge of the pass band is very near to or coincident with the reverse control or voice channels, then th: Wireless Location System would make incorrect measurements of the transmitted signal's phase characteristics if the Wireless Location System did not con:ect the measurements using the stored characteristics. This becomes even more important if a carrier has installed multi-couplers and/or band pass filters from more than one manufacturer, because the characteristics at each site may be different. In addition to measuring the phase versus frequency response, other environnlental factors may cause changes to the RF path prior to the ADC.
These factors require occasional and sometimes periodic calibration in the SCS 10.
Alternative Narrowband Embodiment of :2eceiver Module 10-2 In addition or as an altemative to the wideband receiver module, the SCS 10 also supports a narrowband embodiment of the receiver module 10-2. In contrast to the wideband receiver inodule that can simultaneously receive all of the RF
channels in use by a wireless communications system, the: narrowband receiver can only receive one or a few RF channels at a time. For example, the SCS 10 supports a 60 KHz narrowband receiver for use in AMPS/TDMA system:c, covering two contiguous 30 KFLz channels.
This receiver is still a digital receiver as described for the wideband module, however the frequency synthesizing and mixing circuils are used to dynamically tune the receiver module to various RF channels on commiaid. This dynamic tuning can typically occur in one millisecond or less, and the receiver can dwell on a specific RF channel for as long as required to receive and digitize RF data for location processing.
The purpose of the narrowband receiver is to reduce the implementation cost of a Wireless Location System from the cost that is incurred with wideband receivers. Of course, there is some loss of perfonnance, but the availability of these multiple receivers permits wireless carriers to have more cost/performance options. Additional inventive functions and enhancements have been added to the Wireless Location System to support this new type of narrowband receiver. When the wideband receiver is being used, all RF
WO 00/41403 PCT/US991"29505 channels are received continuously at all I--,CS's 10, and subsequent to the transmission, the Wireless Location System can use the DSP's 10-3 (Figure 2) to dynamically select any RF channel from the digital memory. 'With the narrowband receiver, the Wireless Location System must ensure a priori that the narrowband receivers at multiple cell sites are simultaneously tuned to the same RF c.aannel so that all receivers can simultaneously receive, digitize and store the same wirele:s transmission. For this reason, the narrowband receiver is generally used cnl)= for locating voice channel transmissions, which can be known a priori to be making a transmission. Since control channel transmissions can occur asynchronously at any time, the narrowband receiver may not be tuned to the correct channel to receive the lransmission.
When the narrowband receivers are used for locating ANfPS voice channel transmissions, the Wireless Location System has the abilily to temporarily change the modulation characteristics of the AMPS wireless transinitter to aid location processing.
This may be necessary because AMPS voice channels we only FM modulated with the addition of a low level supervisory tone known as SAT. As is known in the art, the Cramer-Rao lower bound of AMPS FM modulation is significantly worse than the Manchester encoded FSK
modulation used for AMPS reverse channels and "blan_k and burst"
transrnissions on the voice channel. Further, ANg'S wireless transmitters may be transmitting with significantly reduced energy if there is no r.7odulating input signal (i.e., no one is speaking). To improve the location estimatr by improving the modulation characteristics without depending on the existence or amp:.itude of an input modulating signal, the Wireless Location System can cause an AIAPS wireless transmitter to transmit a "blank and burst" message at a point in time when the naiTowband receivers at multiple SCS's 10 are tuned to the RF channel on which thi.- message will be sent. This is further described later.
The Wireless Location System performs the following steps when using the narrowband receiver module (see the flowchart of Figure 2C-1):
a first wireless transmitter is a priori engaged in transmitting on a particular RF
channel;
the Wireless Location System trigge;-s to make a location estimate of the first wireless transmitter (the trigger may occur either internally or externally via a command/response interface);
the Wireless Location System deterrnines the cell site, sector, RF channel, timeslot, long code mask, and encryption key (all information elements may not be necessary for all air interface protocols) currently in use by the first wireless transmitter, the Wireless Location System tunes an appropriate first narrrowband r::ceiver at an appropriate first SCS 10 to the RR? channel and timeslot at the des:;nated cell site and sector, where appropriate typically means both available and collocated or in closest proximity;
the first SCS 10 receives a time segir::ent of RF data, typically ranging from a few microseconds to tens of milliseconds, from the first narrowband receiver and evaluates the transmission's powi:r, SNR, and modulation charac,.:::stics;
if the transmission's power or SNR is below a predetermined thresho:d, the Wireless Location System waits a predetermined length of time and then ret-aa-ns to the above third step (where the Wireless Location System determines :he cell site, sector, etc.);
if the transmission is an AMPS voice channel transmission and the mUdulation is below a threshold, then the Wireless Location System commands the wireless communications system to send a, command to the first wireless transmitter to cause a "blank and burst" on the J:1rst wireless transmitter, the Wireless Location System requests the wireless communications system to prevent hand-off of the wireless tcansmitter to another RF channel for a predetermined length=of time;
the Wireless Location System receives a response from the wireless communications system indicating the time period during which the first wireless t:ansmitter will be prevented from handing-off, and if commanded, the time period during which the wireless communications system will send a command to the :irst wireless transmitter to cause a "blank and burst";
WO 00/41403 PCTl .,J99/29505 the Wireless Location System deterniines the list of antennas that will oc used in location processing (the antenna selection process is described below);
the Wireless Location System deterrriines the earliest Wireless Location System timestamp at which the narrowband receivers connected to the sei.I-ted antennas are available to begin simultaneo-isly collecting RF data from the :u channel currently in use by the first wireless transmitter, based upon the earliest Wireless Location System timestamp and Lhe ~::ne periods in the response from the wireless communications system, the V'ire' css Location System commands the narrowbar..d receivers connected to the ant::ru-las that will be used in location processing to tune to the cell site, sector, and 1-:-channel currently in use by the first wireless transmitter and to receive RF ::ata for a predetermined dwell time (based upon the bandwidth of the signs:, SNR, and integration requirements);
the RF data received by the narrowband receivers are written into the .::ial port memory;
location processing on the received RF data commences, as described :-, Patent Nos.
5,327,144 and 5,608,410 and in sixtions below;
the Wireless Location System again cletertnines the cell site, sector, :'~.::
channel, timeslot, long code mask, and encryption key currently in use by u: first wireless transmitte.r, if the cell site, sector, RF channel, tinieslot, long code mask, and encr}
ption key currently in use by the first wireless transmitter has changed betwe:a queries (i.e.
before and after gathering the R.F data) the Wireless Location Syst:::n ceases location processing, causes an alert message that location processi:..,-failed because the wireless transmitter changed transmission status durir.; the period of time in which RF data was being received, and re-triggers this entiic process;
location processing on the received RF data completes in accordance with the steps described below.
The determination of the information elements including cell site, sector, RF
channel, timeslot, long code mask, and encryption key (all information elements may not be WO 00/41403 PCT/~JS99/29505 necessary for all air interface protocols) is typically obtained by the Wireless Location System through a command / response i:iterface between the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications systenL.
The use of the narrowband receiver in the manner described above is known as random tuning because the receivers can be directed to any RF channel on command from the system. One advantage to random tuning is that locations are processed o:ily for those wireless transmitters for which the Wire:.ess Location System is triggere:-".
One disadvantage to random tuning is that various synchronization factors, including the interface between the wireless communic.ations system and the Wireless Location System and the latency times in scheduling the necessary receivers throughout the system, can limit the total location processing throughput. For example, in a TDMA system, random tuning used throughout the Wireless Location System will typically limit location processing throughput to about 2.5 locati ons per second per cell site sector.
Therefore, the narrowband receiver also supports another mode, lmov,rn r::>
automatic sequential tuning, which can perform location processing at a higher throughput. For example, in a TDMA system, using simifar assumptions about dwell tim, and setup time as for the narrowband receiver operation described above, sequential :unir.g can achieve a location processing throughput of about =41 locations per second per cell site sector, meaning that al1395 TDMA RF channels can be processed in about 9 seconds. This increased rate can be achieved by taking advantage of, for example, the. two contiguous RF channels that can be received simultaneously, location processing all three* TDMA
timeslots in an RF channel, and eliminating the need for synchronization with the wireless communications system. When the Wireless Location System is using the narrowband receivers for sequential tuning, the Wireless Location System has no knowledge of the identity of the wireless transmitter because the Wireless Location System does not wait for a trigger, no does the Wireless Location Systern query the wireless conununications system for t.he identity information prior to receiving the transmission. In this method, the Wireiess Location System sequences through every cell site, RF channel and time slot, perforras location processing, and reports a location record WO 00/41403 :'CTfUS99/29505 identifying a time stamp, cell site, RF channel, time slot, and location.
Subsequent to the location record report, the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system match the location records to the tivireless communications system's data indicating which wireless transmitters we:-e in use at the time, and which cell sites, RF
channels, and time slots were used by each wireless transnlitter. Then, the Wireless Location System can retain the location re:cords for wireless transmitters of interest, and discard those location records for the remaining wireless transmitters.
Digital Signal Processor Module 10-3 The SCS digital receiver modules 10-2 output a digitized RF data stream having a specified bandwidth and bit resolution. Fcr example, a 15 MHz embodiment of the wideband receiver may output a data stream containing 60 million samples per second, at a resolution of 14 bits per sample. This RF data stream will contain all of the RF channels that are used by the wireless communications system. The DSP modules 10-3 receive the digitized data stream, and can extract any individual RF channel through digital mixing and filtering. The DSP's can also reduce tie bit resolutio.n upon command from the Wireless Location System, as needed to re:duce the bandwidth requirements between the SCS 10 and TLP 12. The Wireless Location System can dynamically selec:'the bit resolution at which to forward digitized baseband RF data, based upon the processing requirements for each location. DSP's are used for these functions to reduce the systemic errors that can occur from mixing and filtE ring with analog components. 71::e use of DSP's allows perfect matching in the processing between any two SCS's : 0.
A block diagram of the DSP module 10-3 is shown is Figure 2D, and the operation of the DSP module is depicted by the flowchart of Figure 2E. As shown in F:2D, the DSP
module 10-3 comprises the following elenients: a pair of DSP elemenw i u-3-IA
and 10-3-IB, referred to collectively as a "first" DSP; serial to parallel conver.c..: 10-3-2; dual port memory elements 10-3-3; a second DSP 10-3-4; a parallel to seri~
c,riverter, a FIFO
buffer, a DSP 10-3-5 (including RAM) fo:- detection, another DSP 10-3-6 for demodulation, and another DSP 10-3-7 for notmalization and control; and an address generator 10-3-8. In a presently preferred rmbodiment, the DSP module 1 0-3 receives the WO 00/41403 PC T/t1S99/29505 wideband digitized data stream (Figure 2E, step S 1), and uses the first DSP
(10-3-1 A and 10-3-1B) to extract blocks of channels (step S2). For example, a first DSP
programmed to operate as a digital drop receiver can extract four blocks of channels, where each block includes at least 1.25 MHz of bandwidth. This bandwidth can include 42 channels of AMPS or TDMA, 6 channels of GSM, or 1 channel of CDMA. The DSP does not require the blocks to be contiguous, as the DSP can independently digitally tune to any set of RF
channels within the bandwidth of the wideband digitized data stream. The DSP
can also perform wideband or narrow band energy detection on aIl or any of the channels in the block, and report the power levels by channel to the TLP 12 (step S3). For example, every 10 ms, the DSP can perform wideband energy detection and create an RF
spectral map for all channels for all receivers (see step S9). Because this spectral map can be sent from the SCS 10 to the TLP 12 every 1C ms via the communications linlc connecting the SCS 10 and the TLP 12, a significant data overhead could exist. Therefore, the DSP
reduces the data overhead by compandirtg the data into a finite number of levels.
Normally, for example, 84 dB of dynamic range could require 14 bits. In the companding process implemented by the DSP, the data is reduced, for example, to only 4 bits by selecting 16 important RF spectral levels to send to the TLP 12. The choice of the number of levels, and therefore the num':)er of bits, as well as the representation of the levels, can be automatically adjusted by the Wireless Location System. These adjustments are performed to maximize the inforrnation value of the RF
spectral messages sent to the TLP 12 as well as o optimize the use of the bandwidth available on the communications link between the SC:S 10 and the TLP 12.
After conversion, each block of RF channels (each at least 1.25 MHz) is passed through serial to parallel converter 10-3-2 and th,.-n stored in dual port digital memory 10-3-3 (step S4). The digital memory is a circular memory, which means that th:. DSP
module begins writing data into the first memory address and then continues sequentially until the last memory address is reached. Whe:n the last memory address is reached, the DSP
returns to the first memory address and continues to sequentially write data into memory.
Each DSP module typically contains enough memory to store several seconds of data for each block of RF channels to support the latency and queuing times in t;he location process.
In the DSP module, the memory address at which digitized and converted 1'.F
data-is written into memory is the time stamp used throughout the Wireless Location System and which the location processing references in deterniining TDOA. In order to ensure that the time stamps are aligned at every SCS 10 in the Wireless Location System, the address generator 10-3-8 receives the one pulse per second signal from the timing generation/clock distribution module 1 C-7 (Figure 2). Periodically, the address generator at all SCS's 10 in a Wireless Location System will simultaneously reset themselves to a known address. This enables the location processing to reduce or eliminate accumulated timing errors in the recording of time st.unps for each digitized data element.
The address generator 10-3-8 controls both writing to and reading from the dual port digital memory 10-3-3. Writing takes places continuously since the ADC is continuously sampling and digitizing RF signals and,he first DSP (10-3-1A and 10-3-IB) is continuously perfonning the digital drop receiver function. However, reading occurs in bursts as the Wireless Location System :-equests data for performing demodulation and location processing. The Wireless Location System may even perform location processing recursively on a single transmission, and therefore requires access to the same data multiple times. In order to service tae many requirements of the Wireless Location System, the address generator allows the: dual port digital memory to be read at a rate faster than the writing occurs. Typically., reading can be performed eight times faster than writing.
The DSP module 10-3 uses the second DSP 10-3-4 to read the data from the digital memory 10-3-3, and then performs a second digital drop receiver functiun to extract baseband data from the blocks of RF channels (step S5). For example, th;, second DSP
can extract any single 30 KHz AMPS or TDMA channel from any block of RF
channels that have been digitized and stored in the memory. Likewise, the second DSP
can extract any single GSM channel. The second DSP is not required to extract a CDMA
channel, since the channel bandwidth occupies the full bandwidth of the stored RF data.
The combination of the first DSP 10-3-1A, :.0-3-1B and the second DSP 10-3-4 allows the DSP module to select, store, and recover any single RF channel in a wireless communications system. A DSP module typically will store four blocks of channels. In a dual-mode AMPS/TDMA system, a sin.gle DSP module can continuously and simultaneously monitor up to 42 analog reverse control channels, up to 84 digital control channels, and also be tasked to monitor and locate any voice channel transmission. A
single SCS chassis will typically support up to three receiver modules 10-2 (Figure 2), to cover three sectors of two antennas eacl:, and up to nine DSP modules (three DSP
modules per receiver permits an entire 15 MHz bandwidth to be simultaneously stored into digital memory). Thus, the SCS 10 is a very modular system than can be easily scaled to match any type of cell site con:Hguration and processing load.
The DSP module 10-3 also performs other functions, including automatic detection of active channels used in each sector (step S6), demodulation (step S7), and station based location processing (step S8). The Wireless Locatior. System maintains an active map of the usage of the RF channels in a wireless communications system (step S9), which enables the Wireless Location System to manage receiver and processing resources, and to rapidly initiate processing when a particular transmission of interest has occurred. The active map comprises a table maintained within the Wireless Location System that lists for each antenna connected to an SCS 10 the primary channels assigned to that and the protocols used in those channels. A primary channel is an RF control channel assigned to a collocated or nearby base station which the base station uses for communications with wireless transmitters. For exarriple, in a typical cellular system with sectored cell sites, there will be one RF control channel frequency assigned for use in each sector. Those control channel freqw:ncies would typically be assigned as primary channels for a collocated SCS 10.
The same SCS 10 may also be assigned to monitor the RF control chanriels of other nearby base stations as primary channels., even if other SCS's 10 also have the same primary channels assigned. In this manne:r, the Wireless Location Systerr.
implements a WO 00/41403 PCT/i;S99/29505 system demodulation redundancy that (:nsures that any given wireless transmission has an infinitesimal probability of being missed. When this demodulation redundancy feature is used, the Wireless Location System will receive, detect, and demodulate the same wireless transmission two or more times at more than one SCS 10. The Wi: eiess Location System includes means to detect when :his multiple demodulation has occurred and to trigger location processing only once. This function conserves the processing and communications resources of the Wi*eless Location System, and is further described below. This ability for a single SCS 10 to detect and demodulate wireless transmissions occurring at cell sites not collocated wi::h the SCS 10 permits operators o~"the Wireless Location System to deploy more efficient Wireless Location System net\, o,ks.
For example, the Wireless Location System may be designed such that the W':eless Location System uses much fewer SCS's 10 than the wireless communications sy..em has base stations.
In the Wireless Location System, primary channels are entered and maintained in the table using two methods: direct progranuning and automatic detection. Direc' , programming comprises entering primary channel data into the table using one of the Wireless Location System user interfaca:s, such as the Network Operations Console 16 (Figure 1), or by receiving channel assi;3nment data from the Wireless Location System to wireless communications system interface. Alternatively, the DSP module 10-3 also runs. a background process known as automatic detection in which the DSP uses spare or scheduled processing capacity to detect transmissions on various possible RF
channeis and then attempt to demodulate those transmissions using probable protocols.
The DSP
module can then confitm that the primary channels directly programmed are correct, and can also quickly detect changes made ta channels at base station and send an alert to the operator of the Wireless Location System.
The DSP module performs the following steps in automatic detection (see Figure 2E-1):
for each possible control and/or voice channel which may be used in the coverage area of the SCS 10, peg counters -re established (step S7-1);
at the start of a detection period, all peg counters are reset to zero (step S7-2);
each time that a transmission occun; in a specified RF channel, and the received power level is above a particular pre-set threshold, the peg counter for that channel is incremented (step S7-3);
each time that a t:ransmission occurs in a specified RF channel, and the received power level is above a second parlicular pre-set threshold, the DSP module attempts to demodulate a certain portion of the transmission.using a first preferred protocol (step S7-4);
if the demodulation is successful, a second peg counter for that channel is incremented (step S7-5);
if the demodulation is unsuccessful, the DSP module attempts to demodulate a portion of the transmission using a. second preferred protocol (step S7-6);
if the demodulation is successful, a third peg counter for that channel is incremented (step S7-7);
at the end of a detection period, the Wireless Location System reads all peg counters (step S7-8); and the Wireless Location System autoatatically assigns primaiy charuzels based upon the peg counters (step S7-9).
The operator of the Wireless Location System can review the peg counters and the automatic assignment of-primary channels and demodulation protocols, and override any settings that were performed automatically. In aiddition, if more than two preferred protocols may be used by the wireless carrier, then the DSP module 10-3 can be downloaded with software to detect the idditional protocols. The architecture of the SCS
10, based upon wideband receivers 10-2, DSP modules 10-3, and downloadable software permits the Wireless Location System tci support multiple demodulation protocols in a single system. There is a significant cosi: advantage to supporting multiple protocols within the single system, as only a singb: SCS 10 is required at a cell site.
This is in contrast to many base station architectuies, which may require different transceiver modules for different modulation protocols. For example, while the SCS 10 could support AMI'S, TDMA, and CDMA simultaneoisly in the same SCS 10, there is no base station cuaently available that can support this functionality.
The ability to detect and demodulate m=ildple protocols also includes the ability to independently detect the use of authentacation in messages transmitted over the certain air interface protocols. The use of authentication fields in wireless transmitters started to become prevalent within the last few years as a means to reduce the occurrence of fraud in wireless communications systems. However, not all wireless transmitters have implemented authentication. When authentication is used, the protocol generally inserts an additional fieid into the transmitted message. Frequently this field is inserted between the identity of the wireless transtnitter and the dialed digits in the transmitted message.
When demodulating a wireless transmission, the Wireless Location System determines the number of fields in the transmitted r.:iessage, as well as the message type (i.e.
registration, origination, page response, etc.). The Wireless Location System demodulates all fields and if extra fields appear to be present, giving consideration to the type of message transmitted, then the Wireless :-ocation System tests all fields for a trigger condition. For example, if the dialed diExts "911" appear in the proper place in a field, and the field is located either in its prop,vr place without authentication or its proper place with authentication, then the Wireless Location System triggers normally. In this example, the digits "911" would be required to appear in sequence as "911" or 4C*911 ", with no other digits before or after either sequence. This functionality reduces or eliminates a false trigger caused by the digits "911" appearing as part of an authentication field.
The support for multiple demodulation protocols is important for the Wireless Location System to successfully operate because location processing must be quickly triggered when a wireless caller has dialed "911". The Wireless Location System can trigger location processing using two methods: the Wireless Location System will independently demodulate control channel transmissio:zs, and trigger location processing using any number of criteria such as dialed digits, or the Wireless Location System may receive triggers from an external source such as the carrier's wireless communications system.
The present inventors have found that independent demodulation by the SCS 10 results in the fastest time to trigger, as measured fi-om the moment that a wireless user presses the "SEND" or "TALK" (or similar) button on a wireless transmitter.
Control and Communications Module 10-5 The control and communications modula- 10-5, depicted in Figure 2F, iricludes data buffers 10-5-1, a controller 10-5-2, memory 10-5-3, a CPU 10-5-4 and a T1/El communications chip 10-5-5. The modu;.e has many of the characteristics previously described in Patent Number 5,608,410. Several enhancements have been added in the present embodiment. For example, the S CS 10 now includes an automatic remote reset capability, even if the CPU on the contrcl and communications module ceases to execute its programmed software. This capability can reduce the operating costs of the Wireless Location System because technicians are not required to travel to a cell site to reset an SCS 10 if it fails to operate normally. The automatic remote reset circuit operates by monitoring the communications interfacc between the SCS 10 and the TLP 12 for a particular sequence of bits. This sequence of bits is-a sequence that does not occur during normal communications between the SCS 10 and the TLP 12. This sequence, for example, may consist.of an all ones patteTn. The reset circuit operates independently of the CPU so that even if the CPU has placed itself in a locked or other non-operating status, the circuit can still achieve the reset of the SCS 10 and return the CPU to an operating status.
This module now also has the ability to record and report a wide variety of statistics and variables used in monitoring or diagnosing the performance of the SCS 10. For example, the SCS 10 can monitor the percent capacity usage of any DSP or other processor in the SCS 10, as well as the conununications i:nterface between the SCS 10 and the TLP 12.
These values are reported regularly to thie AP 14 and the NOC 16, and are used to determine when additional processing and communications resources are required in the system. For example, alarm thresholds m.ay be set in the NOC to indicate to an operator if any resource is consistently exceeding a-.3reset threshold. The SCS 10 can also monitor the number of times that transmissions hhive been successfully demodulated, as well as the number of failures. This is useful in.allowing operators to determine whether the signal thresholds for demodulation have been set optimally.
This module, as well as the other modulm, can also self-report its identity to the TLP 12.
As described below; many SCS's 10 cart be connected to a single TLP 12.
Typically, the communications between SCS's 10 and TLP's 12 is shared with the communications between base stations and MSC's. It is frequently difficult to quickly determine exactly which SCS's 10 have been assigned to particular circuits. Therefore, the SCS
10 contains a hard coded identity, which is recorded at the time of installation. This identity can be read and verified by the TLP 12 to positively deterrnine which SCS 10 has been assigned by a carrier to each of several different c ommunications circuits.
The SCS to TLP communications supports a variety of messages, including:
commands and responses, software download, status and heartbeat, parameter download, diagnostic, is spectral data, phase data, primary channel demodulation, and RF data. The communications protocol is designed to optimize Wireless Location System operation by minimizing the protocol overhead and the protocol includes a message priority scheme.
Each message type is assigned a priority, and the SCS 10 and the TLP 12 will queue messages by priority suc}i that a higher priority message is sent before a lower priority message is sent. For example, demodulation messages are generally set at a high priority because the Wireless Location System niust trigger location processing on certain types of calls {i.e., E9-1-1} without delay. Altltough higher priority messages are queued before lower priority messages, the protocol generally does not preempt a message that is already in traasit. That is, a message in the process of being sent across the SCS 10 to TLP 12 communications interface will te completed fully, but then the next message to be sent will be the highest priority message with the earliest time stamp. In order to minimize the latency of high priority mcxsages, long messages, such as RF
data, are sent in segmcnts. For example, the RF data for a full 100-millisecond AIvtPS
transmission may be separated into 10-millisecond segments. In :his manner, a high 'priority message may be queued in between segments of the RF data.
WO 00/41403 PCT/L'S99/29505 Calibration and Performance Motutori-~ig The architecture of the SCS 10 is heavily based upon digital technologies including the digital receiver and the digital signal p:-ocessors. Once RF signals have been digitized, timing, frequency, and phase differances can be carefully controlled in tl:c various processes. More importantly, any timu-g, frequency, and phase differences can be perfectly matched between the various receivers and various SCS's 10 used in the Wireless Location System. However, Frior to the ADC, the RF signals pass through a number of RF components, including zntennas, cables, low noise amplifiers, filters, duplexors, multi-couplers, and RF splitters. -Each of these RF component;, has .10 characteristics important to the Wirele:cs Location System, including delay and phase versus frequency response. When the F:F and analog components are perfectly matched between the pairs of SCS's 10, such as SCS 10A and SCS lOB in Figurc _G, then the effects of these characteristics are automatically eliminated in the locatio::
processing.
But when the characteristics of the components are not matched, then th--iocation i s processing can inadvertently include ir.savmental errors resulting from tl': ; niismatch.
Additionally, many of these RF compcnents can experience instability vvith power, time, temperature, or other factors that can a3d instaunental errors to the deteri.,.ination of location. Therefore, several inventive techniques have been developed to ~;aiibrate the RF
components in the Wireless Location .Iystem and to monitor the perforr,:~.cc of the 20 Wireless Location System on a regular basis. Subsequent to calibration, the Wireless Location System stores the values of these delays and phases versus frequency response (i.e. by RF channel number) in a table :in the Wireless Location System for use in correcting these instrumental errors. Figures 2G-2J are referred to below in explaining these calibration methods.
External Calibration Method Referring to Figure 2G, the timing statiility of the Wireless Location System is measured along baselines; where each baseline is, comprised of two SCS's, l0A and I OB, and an imaginary line (A - B) drawn between thecn. In a TDOA / FDOA type of Wireless Location System, locations of wireless transmitters are calculated by measuring the differences in the times that each SCS 10 records for the arrival of the signal from a wireless transnzitter. Thus, it is important that the differences in times measured bv SCS's along any baseline are largely attribute:d to the transmission time of the signal from the wireless transmitter and minimally attribi.ted to the variations in the RF and analog components of the SCS's 10 themselvcs. To meet the accuracy goals of the Wireless 5 Location System, the timing stability for ,iny pair of SCS's 10 are maintained at much less than 100 nanoseconds RMS (root mean square). Thus, the components of the Wireless Location System will contribute less than 100 feet RMS of instrumentation ertor in the estimation of the location of a wireless tt=ansmitter. Some of this etror is allocated to the ambiguity of the sigial used to calibrate the system. This ambiguity can be.
io determined from the well-known Cramer==Rao lowe:rbound equation. In thc case of an AMPS reverse control channel, this error is approximately 40 nanoseconds RIviS. The remainder of the error budget is allocated to the components of the Wireless Location System, primarily the RF and analog coaiponents in the SCS 10.
i5 In the external calibration method, the Wireless Location Systetn uses a network of calibration transamitters whose signal char-acteristics match those of the target wireless transmittcrs. These calibration transrnitters may be ordinary wireless telephones emitting periodic registration signals and/or page =ponse signaLs. Each usable SCS-to-SCS
baseline is preferably calibrated periodic,illy using a calibration transmitter that has a relatively clear and unobstructed path to both SCS's 10 associated with the baseline. The calibration signal is processed identically to a siuaa.l from a target wireless transmitter.
Since the TDOA values are known a priori, any etrors in the calculations are due to systemie errors in the Wireless Location System. These systemic errors car, then be removed in the subsequent location calctilations for target transmitters.
Figure 2G illustrates the external calibrai:ion method for minimizing timing .;Trors. As shown, a first SCS I UA at a point "A" and a second SCS 1 UA at a point "B"
have an associated baseline A-B. A calibration sigual emitted at time Ta by a calibration transmitter at point "C" will theoretically reach first SCS I OA at time To +
TAC. TAC is a measmue of the amount of time required.for the calibration signal to travel from the antenna on the calibration transmitter to the dual port digital memory in a digital receiver.
I I .
Likewise, the same calibration signal will reach second SCS lOB at a thec:etical time To + TBO. Usually, however, the calibration signal will not reach the digital memory and the digital signal processing components of the respective SCS's 10 at exactly the correct times. Rather, there will be eaors el and e2 in the amount of time (TAC, T;;c) it takes the calibration signal to propagate from the calibration transmitter to the SCSs 10, respectively, such that the exact times of arrival are actually To + TAC + e i and To + TBC
+ e2. Such errors will be due to some extmt to delays in the signal propag-ation through the air, i.e., from the calibration transmitter's antenna to the SCS antennas;
however, the etrors will be due primarily to time varyiag characteristics in the SCS front end components. The errors e 1 and e2 cannot be detennined per se because th.:
system does not know the exact time (To) at which the calibration signal was transmitt:.3.
The system can, however, determine the error in the dif ference in the time of arrival o:
the calibration signal at the respective SCS's 10 of any given pair of SCS's 10. This TDC A
error value is defined as the difference between the rneasured TDOA value and the t.;oretical TDOA value so, where t4 is the theoretical differences between the &;eo- 'ical delay values TAc and Tgc. Theoretical TDOA values for each pair of SCS's 1 C -.nd each calibration transmitter are known becaus. the positions of the SCS's 10 a*_:d calibration transmitter, and the speed at which the c,-aibration signal propagates, are :_ :own. The measured TDOA baseline (TDOAA.a) can be represented as TDOAA.s =:,? + E, where e = e 1- e2. In a similar manner, a calibrati on signal from a second calibr ::.
)n transmitter at point "D" will have associated errors e3 ,and e4. The ultimate value of Etlo be subtracted from TDOA measurements for a target t:ansmitter will be a function (e.s-., weighted average) of the e values derived for one or more calibration transmitters.
Therefore, a given TDOA measurement (TDOA.4) for a pair of SCS's 10 at poir_,s "X" and "Y"
and a target wireless transmitter at an uricnown location will be correcte::
as follows:
TDOAx.y = TDOA,,...,,.d - E
k1E1+k2e2+....kNEN, where kl, k2, ete., are weighting factors and E 1, e2, etc., are the errors caermined by subtracting the measured TDOA values :from the theoretical values for e:.ch calibration transmitter. In this example, error value e:1 may the error value associated with the calibration transmitter at point "C" in the drawing. The weighting factors are determined by the operator of the Wireless Location System, and input into the configzation tables for each baseline. The operator will take into consideration the distance from each calibration transmitter to the SCS's 10 at points "X" and "Y", the empiricaIly determined line of sight from each calibmtion transmitter to the SCS's 10 at points "X"
and "Y", and the contribution that each SCS "X" and "Y" would have made to a location estimate of a wireless tansmitter that might be located in the vicinity of each calibration transmitter. In general, calibration transmitters that are r..earer to the SCS's 10 at points "X" and "Y"
will be weighted higher than calibration transmitters that are farthcr away, and calibration transmitters with better line of sight to the SCS's 10 at points "X" and "Y"
will be weighted higher than calibration transmitters with worse line of sight.
Each error component el, e2, etc., and therefore the resulting etror component E, can is vary widely, and wildly, over time because some of the error component is due to multipath reflection from the calibration transmitter to each SCS 10. The inultipath reflection is very much path dependent aad therefore will vary from meas:.:c:nent to measurement and from path to path. It is not an object of this method to d_.tcTrnine the multipath reflection for these calibration paths, but rather to determine thc portion of the errors that are attributable to the components of the SCS's 10. Typically, "acrefore, error values ei and e3 will have a common component since they relate to the same first SCS
10A. Likewise, error values e2 and e4 w:ill also have a common compont. ait since they relate to the second SCS I OB. It is known that while the multipath components can vary wildly, the component errors vary slowly and typically vary sinusoidally.
Therefore, in the external calibration method, the error values E are filtered using a weighted, time-based filter that decreases the weight of -:he wildly varying multipath con:ponents while preserving the relatively slow changing .'rror components attributed to the SCS's 10. One such exemplary filter used in the extera2l calibration method is the Kalrrm filter.
The period between calibration transmissions is varied depcnding on the ;.
rtor drift rates determined for the SCS components. The period of the drift rate should ::c much longer WO 00/41403 PCT,'US99/29505 than the period of the calibration interial. The Wireless Location System monitors the period of the drift rate to determine co:stinuously the rate of change, and may periodically adjust the calibration interval, if needed. Typically, the calibration rate for a Wireless Location System such as one in accordance with the present invention is between 10 and 30 minutes. This corresponds well witli the typical time period for the reg=istration rate in a wireless communications system. If the Wireless Location System werc to determine that the calibration interval must be ad;usted to a rate faster than the regi.~ttation rate of the wireless communications system, tien the AP 14 (Figure 1) would au:omatically force the calibration transmitter to tian:nnit by paging the transmitter at t:.v prescribed interval. Each calibration transmitter is individually addressable and then:fore the calibration interval associated with eacin calibration iz-ansmitter can be di:_erent.
Since the calibration transmitters used :n the extetnal calibration method _se standard telephones, the Wireless Location Syst= must have a mechanism to distinguish those telephones from the other wireless tran.mnitters that are being located for various application purposes. The Wireless Location System maintains a list of t'::e identities of the calibration transmitters, typically in the TLP 12 and in the AP 14. In :
cellular system, the identity of the calibration transmitter can be the Mobile Ident:
.y Number, or MIN When the calibration transmitter makes a transmission, the transmission is received 2o by each SCS 10 and demodulated by the appropriate SCS 10. The Wirelc;ss Location System compares the identity of the transmission with a pre-stored tasking list of identities of all calibrationtiattsmitters. If the Wireless Location Systcm determines that the transmission was a calibration transmission, then the Wireless Loc::tiaz System initiates external calibration processing.
Internal Calibration Method In addition to the external calibration a.ethod, it is an object of the presc:<_. invention to calibrate all channels of the wideband digital receiver used in the SCS 10 of a Wireless Location System. The exteinal calibration method will typically calibrate only a single channel of the multiple channels used by the wideband digital receiver. This is because the fixed calibration transmitters will typically scan to the highest-power control channel, WO 00/41403 PC'I, JS99129505 which will typically be the same control channel each time. The transfer tunction of a wideband digital receiver, along with the other associated components, d4..-s not remain perfectly constant, however, and will vary with time and-temperature.
Thc:refore, even though the external calibration method can successfully calibrate a single ;.hannel; there is no assurance that the remaining channels will also be calibrated.
The internal calibration method, repres:nted in the flowchart of Figure 2H, is particularly suited for calibrating an individual first receiver system (i.e., SCS 10) that is characterized by a time- and frequency-varying transfer function, wherein the transfer function defines how the amplitude ancl phase of a received signal will bc.
altered by the receiver system and the receiver systern is utilized in a location system to determine the location of a wireless transmitter by, in part, determining a difference in t:me of arrival of a signal transmitted by the wireless transmitter and received by the receivz:r system to be calibrated and another receiver system, and wherein the accuracy of the location estimate is dependent, in part, upon the accuracy of TDOA measurements made by the system. An example of a AMPS RCC transfer function is depicted in Figure 21, whic.i depicts how the phase of the transfer function varies across the 21 control channels sF
_.nning 630 ICHz Referring to Figure 2H, the internal calibration method includes the step:: of temporarily and electronically disconnecting the ancenna used by a receiver system fr:)m the receiver system (step S-20); injecting an internally generated wideband signal wi:illmown and stable signal characteristics into the fir:T receiver system (step S-21);
util;zing the generated wideband signal to obtain an estimate of the manner in which :he transfer function varies across the bandwidth oi'the first receiver system (step S-222); and utilizing the estimate to mitigate the effects of the variation of the first transfer fu.lction on the time and frequency measurements made by the first receiver system (stc;, S-23). One example of a stable wideband signal used for internal calibration is a co:,;b signal, which is comprised of multiple individual, eqaal-amplitude frequency element: at a known spacing, such as 5 KHz. An example o:Esuch a signal is shown in Figure '-1 1.
WO 00/41403 PCTltJS99129505 The antenna must be temporarily disconnected during the internal calibration process to prevent exteraal signals from entering the wideband receiver and to guarantee that the receiver is only receiving the stable wideband sigaal. The antenna is electronically disconnected only for a few milliseconds to mi*-1mi= the chance of missing too much of a signal from a'wireless transmitter. In adciition, inte7nal calibration is typically performed immediately after external calibration to minimize the possibility that the any component in the SCS 10 drifts during thc interval between external and intemal calibration. The antenna is disconnected finm the wideband receiver using two electronically controlle.d RF relays (not shown). An RF relay cannot provide perfect isolation between input and output even w=hen in the "off"position, but it can provide up to 70 dB of isolation. Two relays may be tised in series to increase the amount of isolation and to further assure that no signal is leaked from the antenna to the wideband receiver during calibration. Similarly, whe:n the internal calibration function is not being used, the internal calibration signal is turaed of~ and the two RF relays are also turned off to prevcnt leakage of the internal calibration signals into the wideband receiver when the receiver is collecting signals from wirelcx,s transmitters.
The exteraal calibration method provides an absolute calibration of a single channel and the interaal calibration method then calibrates each other channel relative to the channel that had been absolutely calibrated. The comb signal is particularly suited as a stable wideband signal because it can be easily generated using a stored replica of the signal and a digital to analog converter.
External Calibration Using Wideband Calibration Signal The external calibration method described, next may be used in connection with an SCS
10 receiver system characterized by a timi.- and frequency-varying transfer function, which preferably includes the antennas, filte:rs, amplif ers, duplexors, multi-couplers, splittcrs, and cabling associated with the SCS receiver system. The method includes the step of transmitting a stable; known wideband calibration signal from an external uansmitter. The wideband calibration sigual is then used to estimate the transfer function across a prescribed bandwidth of the SCS receiver system. The estimate of the transfer WO 00/41403 .CT/US99/29505 function is subsequently employed to mitigate the effects of variation of che transfer function on subsequent TDOA/FDOA measurements. The external transrnission is preferably of short duration and low poweT to avoid interference with the wireless communications system hosting the Wire;.ess Location System.
In the preferred method, the SCS receiver system is synchronized with the external transmitter. Such synchronization may be performed using GPS timing units.
Moreover, the receiver system may be programmed to receive and process the entire wideband of the calibration signal only at the time that the calibration sigaal is being sent. The receiver system will not perform calibration processing at any time other than when in synchronization with the extetnal calibrat.on transmissions. In addition, a wireless communications link is used between the receiver system and the ext:,rnal calibration transmitter to exchange commands and responses. The external transmitter may use a directional antenna to direct the wideband signal only at the antennas of the SCS receiver system. Such as directional antenna may be a Yagi antenna (i.e. linear end-fire array).
The calibration method preferably includes making the external transmission only when the directional antenna is aimed at the rexaiver system's antennas and the risk of multipath reflection is low.
Calibrating for Station Biases Another aspect of the present invention concerns a calibration method to correct for station biases in a SCS receiver system. The "station bias" is defined as the finite delay betwetm when an RF signal from a wireless transmitter reaches the antenna and when that same signal reached the wideband receiver. The inventive method includes the step of measuring the length of the cable from tha; antennas to the filters and determining the corresponding delays associated with the ;,able length. In addition, the method includes injecting a known signal into the filter, duplexor, multi-coupler, or RF
splitter and measuring the delay and phase response versus frequency re sponse from the input of each device to the wideband receiver. The delay and phase valu.ea are then combined and used to correct subsequent location measurements. When used w:th the GPS based timing generation described above, the method preferably includes correcting for the GPS cable lengths. Moreover, an externally generated reference signal is preferably used to monitor changes in station bias that may arise due to aging and weather. Finally, the station bias by RF channel and for each receiver system in the Wireless Location System is preferably stored in tabular form in the Wireless Location System for use in correcting subsequent location processing.
Performance Monitoring The Wireless Location System uses meti:ods similar to calibration for performance monitoring on a regular and ongoing basis. These methods are depicted in the flowcharts of Figure 2K and 2L. Two methods of performance monitoring are used: fixed phones and drive testing of surveyed points. The :ixed phone method comprises the following steps (see Figure 2K):
standard wireless transmitters are perrzanently placed at various points within the coverage area of the Wireless Locadon System (these are then known as the fixed phones) (step S-30);
the points at which the fixed phones have been placed are surveyed so that their location is precisely known to with:n a predetermined distance, for example ten feet (step S-31);
the surveyed locations are stored in a table in the AP 14 (step S-32);
the fixed phones are permitted to register on the wireless conununications system, at the rate and interval set by the wireless communications system for all wireless transmitters on the system (step S-:;3);
at each registration transmission by a:axed phone, the Wireless Location System locates the fixed phone using normal location processing (as wiLh the calibration trazismitters, the Wireless Location System can identify a transmission as being from a fixed phone by storing the identides in a table) (step S-34);
the Wireless Location System computes an error between the calculated location determined by the location process:.ag and the stored location dcte-,.nined by survey (step S-35);
the location, the error value, and othe= measured parametLrs are stored along with a time stamp in a database in the AP 14 (stcp S-36);
the AP 14 monitors the instant error and other measured parameters (collectively referred to as an extended location: record) and additionally computes various statistical values of the error(s) and other measured parameters (step S-37);
and if any of the error or other values ex;eed a pre-determined threshold or a historical statistical value, either instaataneously or after performing statistical filtering over a prescribed number of location estimates, the AP 14 signals an alarm to the operator of the Wireless Location System (step S-38).
The extended location record includes a large number of ineasured parameters usefully for analyzing the instant and historical performance of the Wireless Location System.
These parameters include: the RF channel used by the wireless transmitter, the antenna port(s) used by the Wireless Location System to demodulate the wireless transmission, the antenna ports from which the Wirelc:ss Location System requested RF data, the peak, average, and variance in power of the Ir.3nsmission over the interval used for location i5 processing, the SCS 10 and antenna port chosen as the reference for location processing, the correlation value from the cross-spe,tra correlation between every other SCS 10 and antenna used in location processing and the reference SCS 10 and antenna, the delay value for each baseline, the multipath mitigation parazneters, and the residual values remaining after the multipath mitigation. calculations. Any of these measured parameters can be monitored by the Wireless Location System for the pu=pose of determining how the Wireless Location System is performing. One example of the type of monitoring performed by the Wireless Location Sys-tem may be the variance between the instant value of the correlation on a baseline and the historical range of the correlation value.
Another may be the variance between the instant value of the received power at a particular antenna and the historical range of the received power. Many other statistical values can be calculated and this list is not exhaustive.
The ntunber of fixed phones placed inta the coverage area of the Wireless Location System can be determined based upon the density of the cell sites, the difficulty of the terrain, and the historical ease with which wireless communications systems have performed in the area. Typically the rati.o is about one fixed phone for every six cell sites, however in some areas a ratio of one to one may be required. The fixed phones provide a continuous means to monitor the perfor.nance of the Wireless Location System.
as well as the monitor any changes in the frequ:mcy plan that the carrier may have made. Many times, changes in the frequency plan will cause a variatioa in the performance of the Wireless Location System and the perfennance monitoring of the fixed phones provide an isnniediate indication to the Wireless Location System operator.
Drive testing of surveyed points is very similar to the fixed phone monitoring. Fixed phones typically can only be located incioors where access to power is available (i.e. the 1o phones must be continuously powered on to be effective). To obtain a more complete measurement of the performance of the location performance, drive testing of outdoor test points is also performed. Referring :o Figure 2L, as with the fixed phones, prescribed test points throughout the coverage area of the Wireless Location System are surveyed to within ten feet (step S-40). Each test po:int is assignesi a code, where the code consists of either a"*" or a'W", followed by a sequence number (step S-41). For example, "*1001"
through "* 1099" may be a sequence of 99 codes used for test points. These codes should be sequences, that when dialed, are meaningless to the wireless communications system (i.e. the codes do not cause a feaittre or other translation to occur in the MSC, except for an intercept message). The AP 14 stores the code for each test point along with the surveyed location (step S-42). Subsequimt to these initial steps, any wireless transmitter dialing any of the codes wil1be triggered and located using normal location processing (steps S-43 and S-44). The Wireless Location System automatically,computes an error betwecn the caleulated location determined by the location processing and the stored =
location detennined by survey, and the location and the error value are stored along with a time statap in a database in the AP 14 (steps S-45 and S-46). The AP 14 monitors the instant error, as well as various historicad statistical values of the error.
If the error values exceed a pre-determined threshold or a historical statistical value, either instantaneously or afterperforming statistical filtering over a prescribed nttmber of location estimates, the AP 14 signals an adarm to the operator of the Wireless Location System (step S-47).
WO 00/41403 PC :'/US99/295t75 TDOA Location Processor (TLP) The TLP 12, depicted in Figures 1, 1A and 3, is a centralized digital signal processing system that manages many aspects of ihe Wireless Location System, especially the SCS's 10, and provides control over the location processing. Because location proccssing=is DSP intensive; one of the major advantages of the TLP 12 is that the DSP
resources can be shared among location processing initiated by transmissions at any of the SCS's 10 in a Wireless Location System. That is, the additional cost of DSP's at the SCS's 10 is reduced by having the resource centrally available. As shown in Figure 3, there are three major components of the TLP 12: DSF, modulcs 12-1, T1/EI communications modules 12-2 and a controller module 12-3.
The T1/E1 communications modules 12-2 provide the communications interface to the SCS's 10 (Ti and El are standard communications speeds availablc throughout the world). Each SCS 10 communicates to a TLP 12 using one or more DSO's (which are typically 56Kbps or 64 Kbps). Each SCS 10 typically connects to a frfracr;onal TI or E1 cirtuit, using, e.g., a drop and insert urit or channel bank at the cell site.
Frequently, this circuit is shared with the base station, which communicates with the MSC. At a central site, the DSO's assigned to the base station are separated from the DSO's assigned to the SCS's 10. This is typically accomplished extenzal to the TLP 12 using a;Iigital access and control system (DACS) 13A that r..ot only separates the DSO's but a!so grooms the DSO's from multiple SCS's 10 onto fu lI TI or El circuits. These circuits-then connect from the DACS 13A to the DACS 13E. and then to the TI/El communications module on the TLP 12. Each TI/El communications module contains sufficient digital memory to buffer packets of data to and from each SCS 10 communicating with the module.
A
single TLP chassis may support one or more TI/E1 communications modules.
The DSP modules 12-1 provide a pool.d resource for location processing. A
single module may typically contain two to eight digital signal processors, each of which are equally available for location processiuzg. Two types of location processing are supported:
central based and station based, which are described in further detail below.
The TLP
controller 12-3 manages the DSP modiile(s)12-1 to obtain optimal thro::ghput.
Each DSP
module contains sufficient digital memori to store all of the data necessary for location processing. A DSP is not engaged until al l of the data necessary to begin location processing has been moved from each of ihe involved SCS's 10 to the digiL.l memory on the DSP module. Only then is a DSP give;a the specif c task to locate a specific wireless transmitter. Using this technique, the DSP's , which are an expensive resource, are never kept waiting. A single TLP chassis may support one or more DSP modules.
The controller module 12-3 provides the r.al time management of all location processing within the Wireless Location System. The AP 14 is the top-level management entity io within the Wireless Location System, however its database architecture is not sufficiently fast to conduct the real time decision ma:'ting when transmissions occur. The controller module 12-3 receives messages from the ~SCS's 10, including: status, spectral energy in various channels for various antennas, deniodulated messages, and diagnosacs.
This enables the controller to continuously determine events occurring in the Wi:
:less Location System, as well as to send commands to take certain actions. Whc.i a controller module receives demodulated messages &3m SCS's 10, the controller moc:-:ile decides whether location processing is required for a particular wireless transnzission. The controller module 12-3 also determines which SCS's 10 and antennas to use in location processing, including whether to use centril based or station based location processing.
The controller module commands SCS's 10 to return the necessary data, aad commands the communications modules and DSP modules- to sequentially perform their necessary roles in location processing. These steps ai-e described below in further detail.
The controller module 12-3 maintains a table lmown as the Signal of Interest Table (SOIT}. This table contains all of the criteiia that may be used to trigger location processing on a parucular wireless transmission. The criteria may include, for example, the Mobile Identity Number, the Mobile Sration ID, the Electronic Serial Number, dialed digits, System ID, RF channel number, cell site number or sector number, type of transmission, and other types of data elcmcnts. Some of the trigger events may have higher or lower priority levels associated ariththem for use in determining the order of processing. Higher priority location triggeas will always be processing bef~re lower prioriry location triggers. However, a Iovrer priority trigger that has already begun location processing will complete the processing before being assigned to a higher priority task. The master Tasking List for the Wireless Location System is maintained on the AP 14, and copies of the Tasking Lis;: are automarically downloaded to the Signal of Interest Table in each TLP 12 in the Wire:less Location System. The full Signal of Interest Table is downloaded to a TLP 12 when the TLP 12 is reset or first starts.
Subsequent to those two events, only changes are down:oaded from the AP 14 to each TLP 12 to conserve communications bandwidth. The TLP 12 to AP 14 communications protocol preferably contains sufficient redundancy and error checking to prevent incorrect data from ever being entered into the Signal o.: Interest Table. When the AP 14 and periodically have spare processing capacity available, the AP 14 reconfirms entries in the Signal of Interest Table to ensure that all Signal of Interest Table entries in the Wireless Location System are in full synchronizati:)n.
Each TLP chassis has a maximum capaci-.y associated with the chassis. For example, a single TLP chassis may only have sufficient capacity to support between 48 and SCS's 10. When a wireless communications system is larger that the capacity of a single TLP chassis, multiple TLP chassis are coimected together using Ethernet networking.
The controller module 12-3 is responsible. for inter-TLP communications and networking, and communicates with the controller modules in other TLP chassis and with Application Processors 14 over the Ethernet network. Inter-TLP communications is required when location processing requires the use of SC'S's 10 that are connected to differcnt TLP
chassis. Location processing for each wireless transmission is assigned to a single DSP
module in a single TLP chassis. The controller modules 12-3 in TLP chassis select the DSP module on which to pexform location processing, and then route all of the RF data =
used in location processing to that DSP module. If RF data is required fro,n the SCS's 10 connected to more that one TLP 12, then ihe controller modules in all necessary TLP
chassis communicate to move the RF data. from all necessary SCS's 10 to their respective connected TLP's 12 and then to the DSP inodule and TLP chassis assigned to the location processing. The controller module supports two fully independent Ethernet nerworks for redundancy. A break or failure in any one network causes the affected TLP's 12 to immediately shift all comrriunications to the other network.
The controller modules 12-3 maintain a complete network map of the Wireless Location System, including the SCS's 10 associa:ed with each TLP chassis. The network map is a table stored in the controller module containing a list of the candidate SCS/antennas that may be used in location processing, and various parameters associated with each of the SCS/antennas. The structure of an exemplary network map is depicted in Figure 3A.
There is a separate entry in the table for each antenna connected to an SCS
10. When a wireless transmission occurs in an area that is covered by SCS's 10 communicating with more than one TLP chassis, the controllcr modules in the involved TLP chassis determine which TLP chassis will be the "master" TLP chassis for the purpose of managing location processing. Typically, the TLP chassis associated with the SCS 10 that has the primary channel assignment for the wireless transmission is assigned to be the master.
However, another TLP chassis may be assigned iartead if that TLP temporarily has no DSP
resources available for location processilg, or if most of the SCS's 10 involved in location processing are connected to ancther TLP chassis and the controller modules are minimizing inter-TLP communications. This decision making process is fully dynamic, but is assisted by tables in the TLP 12 that pre-determine the preferred TLP
chassis for every primary channel assignment. The -:ables are created by the operator of the Wireless Location System, and programmed usinl; the Network Operations Console.
The networking described herein functions for both TLP chassis associated with the same wireless carrier, as well as for chassis th.it overlap or border the coverage area between two wireless carriers. Thus it is possible for a TLP 12 belonging to a fust wireless carrier to be networked and therefore receive Rl? data from a TLP 12 (and the SCS's 10 associated with that TLP 12) belonging to a second wireless cairier. This networking is particularly valuable in rural areas, where the performance of the Wireless Location System can be enhanced by deploying SCS's 10 at cell sites of multiple wireless carriers.
Since in many cases wireless carriers do not collocate cell sites. this feature enables the Wireless Location System to access more geographically diverse antennas than might be available if the Wireless Location Syst,yrtt used only the cell sites from a single wireless carrier. As described below, the proper selection and use of antennas for location processing can enhance the perfonnanre of the Wireless Location System.
The controller module 12-3 passes mary messages, including location records, to the AP
14, many of which are described below. Usually, however, demodulated data is not passed from the TLP 12 to the AP 14. I& however, the TLP 12 receives der.zodulated data from a particular wireless transmitter aitd the TLP 12 identifies the wireless transmitter as being a registered customer of a second wireless carrier in a different coverage area, the TLP 12 may pass the demodulated data to the first (serving) AP 14A. This will enable the first AP 14A to communicate with a second AP 14B associated with the second wireless carrier, and determine whether the particular wireless transmitter has registered for any type of location services. If so, the second AP 14B may instruct the first AP
14A to place the identity of the particular wireless trwsmitter into the Signal of Interest Table so that the particular wireless transmitter will be located for as long as the particular wireless transmitter is in the coverage area of thr, first Wireless Location System associated with the first AP 14A. When the first Wirele ss Location System has detected that the particular wireless transmitter has not registered in a time period exceeding a pre-determined threshold, the first AP 14A may instruct the second AP 14B that the identity of the particular wireless transmitter is being removed from the Sismal of Interest Table for the reason of no longer being present in the coverage area associated with the first AP
14A.
Diagnostic Port The TLP 12 supports a diagnostic port that is highly useful in the operation and diagnosis of problems within the Wireless Location Systenz. This diagnostic port can be accessed either locally at a TLP 12 or remotely over the Ethernet network connecting the TLP's 12 to the AP's. The diagnostic port enable:, an operator to write to a file all of the demodulation and RF data received froin the SCS's 10, as well as the intcrmediate and final results of all location processing. This data is erased from the TLP 12 after processing a location estimate, and then:fore the diagnostic port provides the means to save the data for later post-processing arid analysis. The inventor's experience in operating large scale wireless location systems is that a very small number of location estimates can occasionally have very larõe errors, and these large errors can dominate the overall operating statistics of the Wirele:,s Location System over any measurement period. Therefore, it is important to provide the operator with a set of tools that enable the Wireless Location System to detect and irap the cause of the very large errors to diaenose and mitigate those errors. The diagnostic port can be set to save the above information for all location estimates, for location estimates from particular wireless transmitters or at particular test points, or for location estimates that meet a certain criteria. For example, for fixed phones or drive testing of surveyed points, the diagnostic port can determine the error in the location estimate in real time and then write the above des;,-libed information only for those location estimates whose error exceeds a predetermineci i:ireshold. The diagnostic p= determines the error in re.al time by storing the surveycL' latitude, longitude coordLrate of each fixed phone and drive test point in a tabl-1., ynd then calculating a radial error when a location estimate for the correspond:.:~
tcst point is made.
Redundancy The TLP's 12 implement redundancy usiag several inventive techniqL,~s, allowing the Wireless Location System to support an 14 plus N redundancy method. M plus N
redundancy means that N redundant (or standby) TLP chassis are used to provide full redundant backup to M online TLP chassis. For example, M may be t:,r_ and N
may be two.
First, the controller modules in different TLP chassis continuously exchange status and "heartbeat" messages at pre-detemzined time intervals between themselves and with every AP 14 assigned to monitor the TLF chassis. Thus, every controller module has continuous and full status of every other controller module in the Wireless Location System. The controller modules in differcmt TLP chassis periodically select one controller module in one TLP 12 to be the master controller for a group of TLP chassis.
The master controller may decide to place a first TLF' chassis into off-line status if the first TLP 12A
WO 00/41403 PCT/'JS99/29505 reports a failed or degraded condition in its status message, or if the first TLP 12A fails to report any status or heartbeat messages within its assigned and pre-determincd time. If the master controller places a first TLP 12A into off-line status, the master controller may assign a second TLP 12B to perform a redundant switchover and assume the tasks of the off-line first TLP 12A. The second TLP MB is automatically sent the configuration that had been loaded into the first TI.P 12A; this configuration may be downloaded from either the master controller or from an AP 14 connected to the TLP's 12. The master controller may be a controller module on z,ny one of the TLP's 12 that is not in off-line status, however there is a preference that tie master controller be a controller module in a stand-by TLP 12. When the master contro:,Ier is the controller module in a stand-by TLP
12, the time required to detect a failed firsi: TLP 12A, place the first TLP
12A into of1=
Iine status, and then perform a redundant switchover can be accelerated.
Second, all of the Ti or El communications between the SCS's 10 and each of the TLP
i5 TI/EI communications modules 12-2 are ;Preferably routed through a high-reliability DACS that is dedicated to redundancy cozitrol. The DACS 13B is connected to every groomed TI/EI circuit containing DSO's from SCS's 10 and is also connected to every Tl/E1 commuaications module 12-2 of every TLP 12. Every controller module at every TLP 12 contains a map of the DACS 13B that describes the DACS' connection list and port assignments. This DACS 13B is conr;ected to the Etheraet network described above and can be controlled by any of the controller modules 12-3 at any of the TLP's 12.
When a second TLP 12 is placed into off-::ine status by a master controller, the master controller sends commands to the DACS ::3B to switch the groomed Ti/EI circuit communicating with the first TLP 12A to a second TLP 12B which had been in standby status. At the same time; the AP 14 downloads the complete configuration file that was being used by the second (and now off l.ine) TLP 12B to the third (and now online) TLP
12C. The time from the first detection of a failed first TLP chassis to the complete switch-over and assumption of processing responsibilities by a third TZ.P
cliassis is typically less than few seconds. In many cases, no RF data is lost by the SCS's 10 associated with the failed first TLP chassis, and location processing can continue without intetTUption. At the time of a TLP fail- vc:r when a first TLP 12A is placed into off-line status, the NOC 16 creates an alert to notify the Wireless Location System operator that the event has occurred.
Third, each TLP chassis contains redunciant power supplies, fans, and other components.
s A TLP chassis can also support multiple: DSP modules, so that the failure of a single DSP
module or even a single DSP on a DSP :nodule reduces the overall amount of processing resources available but does not cause the failure of the TLP chassis. In all of the cases described in this paragraph, the failed camponent of the TLP 12 can be replaced without placing the entire TLP chassis into off-line status. For example, if a single power supply fails, the redundant power supply has sufficient capacity to singly support the load of the chassis. The failed power supply contairis the necessary circuitry to remove itself from the load of the chassis and not cause furiher degradation in the chassis.
Similarly, a failed DSP module can also remove itself frotn the active portions of the chassis, so as to not cause a failure of the backplane or other modules. This enables the remainder of the chassis, including the second DSP modc.Ieti to continue to function normally.
Of course, the total processing throughput of the chassis is reduced but a total failure is avoided.
Application Processor (AP) 14 The AP 14 is a centralized database system, comprising a number of software processes that manage; the entire Wireless Location System, provide interfaces to external users and applications, store location records and c:onfigurations, and support various application-related functionality. The AP 14 uses a commercial hardware platform that is sized to match the throughput of the Wireless Lccation System. The AP 14 also uses a commercial relational database system (ltDBMS), which has been significantly customized to provide the functionality described herein. While the SCS 10 and TLP 12 preferably operate together on a purely real time basis to detennine location and create location records, the AP 14 can ope:rate on both a real time basis to store and forward location records and a non-real time bas:is to post-process location records and provide access and reporting over time. The ability to store, retrieve, and post-process location records for various types of system and ,application analysis has proven to be a powerful advantage of the present invention. The inain collection of software processes is known as the ApCore, which is shown in Figure 4 and includes the following functions:
The AP Perfornaance Guardian (ApPerf(iuard) is a dedicated software process that is responsible for starting, stopping, and monitoring most other.ApCore processes as well as ApCore conzmunications with the NOC 16. Upon receiving a configuration update command from the NOC, ApPerfUuard =ipdates the database and notifies all other processes of the change. ApPerfGuard starts and stops appropriate processes when the NOC directs the ApCore to enter specifi. run states, and constantly monitors other lo software processes scheduled to be runn::ng to restart them if they have exited or stopping and restarting any process that is no longer properly responding. ApPerfGuard is assigned to one of the highest processing priorities so that this process cannot be blocked by another process that has "rua away". ApPerfGuard is also assigned dedicated memory that is not accessible by other software Frocesses to prevent any possible co:ruption from other software processes.
The AP Dispatcher (ApMnUsptch) is a:coftware process that receives location records from the TLP's 12 and forwards the loc:ttion records to other processes. This process contains a separate thread for each phys:ical TLP 12 configured in the system, and each thread receives location records from that TLP 12. For system reliability, the ApCore maintaias a list containing the last location record sequence number received from each TLP 12, and sends this sequence number to the TLP 12 upon initial connection.
Thereafter, the AP 14 and the TLP 12 rL;aintain a protocol whereby the TLP 12 sends each location record with a unique identifier. ApMnDsptch forwards location records to multiple processes, including Ap911, ApDbSend, ApDbRecvLoc, and ApDbFileRecv.
The AP TasIQng Process (ApDbSend) controls the Tasking List within the Wireless Location System. The Tasldng List is ttte master list of all of the trigger criteria that determines which wireless traansmitters will be located, which applications created the critcria, and which applications can recaive location record information. The ApDbSend process contains a separate thread for c.ich TLP 12, over which the ApDbSend synchronizes the Tasking List with the S ignal of Interest Table on each TLP
12.
ApDbSend does not send application information to the Signal of Interest Table , only the trigger criteria. Thus the TLP 12 does nc t know why a wireless transmitter must be located. The Tasidng List allows wireless transmitters to be located based upon Mobile Identity Number (MIN), Mobile Station Identifier (MSID), Electronic Serial Number (ESN) and other identity numbers, dialeci sequences of characters and / or digits, home System ID (SID), originating cell site and sector, originating RF channel, or message type. The Taslcing List allows multiple applications to receive location records from the same wireless transmitter. Thus, a single location record from a wireless transmitter that has dialed "911" can be sent, for example, to a 911 PSAP, a fleet management application, a traffic management application, and to an RF
optimization,application.
The Tasking List also contains a variety of flags and field for each trigger criteria, some of which are described elsewhere in this specification. One flag, for example, specifies i5 the maximum time limit before which the Wireless Location System must provide a rough or final estimaic of the wireless trinsmitter. An4ther flag allows location processing to be disabled for a particular trigger criteria such as the identity of the wireless transmitter. Another field contains the authcntication required to make changes to the criteria for a particular trigger, aulhentication enables the operator of the Wireless Location System to specify which applications are authorized to add, delete, or make changes to any trigger criteria and associated fields or flags. Another field contains the Location Grade of Service associated with the trigger criteria; Grade, of Service indicates to the Wireless Location System the accuracy level and priority level desired for the location processing associated with a particular trigger criteria. For example, some applications may be satisfied with a rough location estimate (perhaps for a reduced location processing fee), while other applications may be satisfied with low priority processing that is not guaranteed to cotrplete for any given transmission (and which may be pre-empted for high priority processing tasks). The Wireless Locatioii System also includes means to support the use of wiidcards for trigger criteria in the Tasking List. For example, a trigger criteria can be entere3 as "MIN = 215555**"'*". This will cause the Wireless Location System to trigger location processing for any wireless transmitter whose MIN begins with the six digits 215555 and ends with any following four digits.
The wildcard characters can be placed into any position in a trigger criteria.
This feature can save on the number of inemory locations required in the Tasking List and Signal of Interest Table by grouping blocks of relatcd wireless transmitters together.
ApDbSend also supports dynamic tasking. For example, the MIN, ESN, MS]D, or other identity of any wurelsss +.rssmitter that !+?s dialed "911" will automatically be placed onto the Tasking List by ApDbSend for one hour. Thus, any further transmissions by the wireless transmitter that dialed "911" will also be located in case of further emergency.
For example, if a PSAP calls back a wireless transu;itter that had dialed "911" within the last hour, the Wireless Location System vvill trigger on the page rcsponse message from the wireless transmitter, and can make this new location record zvzilable to the PSAP.
This dynamic tasking can be set for any interval of time after an initiation event, and for any type of trigger criteria. The ApDbSend process is also a server for receiving tasking requests fronm other applications. These 2.pplications, such as fleet management, can send tasking requests via a socket connection, for examp'.e. These applications can either place or remove uigger criteria. ApDbSend co:nducts an authentication process with each application to verify that that the application has bcc,,n authorized to place or remove trigger criteria, and each application can only change trigger criteria related to that application:
The AP 911 Process (Ap911) manages each interface between the Wireless Location System and E9-1-1 network elements, stch as tandem switches, selective routers, ALI
databases and/or PSAPs. The Ap911 process contaias a separate thread for each connection to a E9-1-1 network element, and can support more thaiz one thread to each network element. TheAp9I I process can simultaneously operate in many modes based upon userconfiguration, and as described herein. The timely processing of E9-1-location records is one of the highest prcicessing priorities in the AP 14, and therefore the Ap911 executes entirely out of random access memory (RAM) to avoid the delay associated with first storing and then ret:ieving a location record from any type of disk.
When ApMnDsptch forwards a location record to aap9l 1, Ap911 immediately makes a WO 00/41403 PCilU599/29505 routing detemzination and forwards the location record over the appropriate interface to a E9-1-1 network element. A separate process, operating in parallel, records the location record into the AP 14 database.
The AP 14, through the Ap911 process and other processes, supports two modes of providing location records to applications, including E9-1-1: "push" and "pull" modes.
Applications requesting push,mode receive a location record as soon as it is available from the AP 14. This mode is especially effective for E9-1-1 which has a very time critical need for location records, since E9-1-1 networks must route wireless 9-1-1 calls to the correct PSAP within a few seconds: aRer a wireless caller has dialed "91 I".
Applications requesting pull mode do no:: automatically receive location records, but rather must send a query to the AP 14 regarding a particular wireless transmittex in order to receive the last, or any other location n:cord, about the wireless transmitter. The query from the application can specify the last location record, a series of location records, or all location records meeting a specific tiurce or other criteria, such as type of transmission.
An example of the use of pul2 mode in thc; case of a"91I call is the E9-1-1 network first receiving the voice portion of the "911" call and then querying the AP 14 to receive the location record associated with that calL
' When the Ap9I I process is connected to :aany E9-1-1 networks elements, Ap9I
1 must determine to which E9-1-1 network element ta push the location record (assuming that "push" mode has been selected). The AP 14 malces this dctermination using a dynamic routing table. The dynaniic routing table is used to divide a geographic region into cells.
Each cell, or cntry, in the dynamic routing table contains the routing instructions for that cell. It is well known that one minute of latitude is 6083 feet, which is about 365 feet per millidegree. Additionally, one minute of longitude is cosine(latitude) times 6083 feet, which for the Philadelphia area is about 4659 feet, or about 280 feet per nullidegrec. A
table of size one thousand by one thousanc3, or one million cells, can contain the routing instructions for an area that is about 69 miles by 53 nziles; which is larger than the area of Philadelphia in this example, and each cel:: could contain a geographic arca of 365 feet by 280 fect. The number of bits allocated to each entry in the table must only be enough to support the maximurn number of routing possibilities. For example, if the total number of routing possibilities is sixteen or less, then the memory for the dynamic routing table is one million times four bits, or one-half megabyte. Using this scheme, an area the size of Pennsylvania could be contained in a table of approximately twenty megabytes or less, with ample routing possibilities available. Given the relatively inexpensive cost of memory, this inventive dynaniic routing table provides the AP 14 with a means to quickly push the location records for "911" calls only to the appropriate E9-1-1 network element.
The AP 14 allows each entry in dynamic routing to be populated using manual or automated means. Using the automated muans, for example, an electronic map application can create a polygon definitior.. of the coverage area of a specific E9-1-1 network element, such as a PSAP. The polygon definition is then translated into a list of latitude, longitude points contained within the polygon. The dynamic routing table cell corresponding to each latitude, longitude point is then given the routing instruction for that E9-1-1 network element'that is respor.,sible for that geographic polygon.
When the Ap911 process receives a "911" location record for a specific wireless transmitier, Ap911 converts the latitude, longitude into the address of a specinc cell in the dynamic routing table. Ap911 then quaies the call to determine the routing instructions, which may be push or pull mode and the identity of the E9-I -1 network element responsible for serving the geographic area in which the "911" call occurred. If push mode has been selected, then Ap9I 1 automatically pushes the location record to that E9-1-1 network element. If pull mode has been selected, then Ap911 places the location record into a circular table of "911" location records and awaits a query.
The dynamic routing means described above entails the use of a geographically defined database that may be applied to other app:iications in addition to 911, and is therefore supported by other processes in addition to Ap911. For example, the AP 14 can automatically determine the=billing zone iiom which a wireless call was pla,;ed for a Location Sensitive Billing application. In addition, the AP 14 may automatically send an alert when a particular wireless transmitter has entered or exited a prescribed geographic area defined by an application. The use of particular geographic databases, dynamic routing actions, any other location triggixed actions are defined in the fields and flags associated with each trigger criteria. The Wireless Location System includes means to easily manage these geographically defined databases using an electronic map that can create polygons encompassing a prescribed geographic area. The Wireless Location System extracts from the electronic map a table of latitude, longitude points contained with the polygon. Each application can iise its own set of polygons, and can define a set of actions to be taken when a location re:cord for a triggered wireless transmission is contained within each polygon in the set..
The AP Database Receive Process (ApDbRecvLoc) receives all location records from ApMnDsptch via shared memory, and places the location records into the AP
location database. ApDbRecvLoc starts ten threads that each retrieve location records from shared i s memory, validate each record before inserting the records into the database, and then inserts the records into the correct location record partition in the database. To preserve integrity, location records with any type of error are not written into the location record database but are instead placed into an error file that can be reviewed by the Wireless Location System operator and then manaally entered into the database after error resolution. If the location database has failed or has becn placed into off-Iine status, location records are written to a flat file where they can be later processed by ApDbFileRecv.
The AP File Receive Process (ApDbFilc:Recv) reads flat files containing location records and inserts the records into the location -iatabase. Flat files are a safe mechanism used by the AP 14 to completely preserve the integrity of the AP 14 in all cases except a complete failure of the hard disk drives. There are several different types of flat files read by ApDbFileRecv, including Database Down, Synchronization; Overflow, and Fixed Error.
Database Down flat files are written by -che ApDbRecvLoc process if the location database is temporarily inaccessible; thi,i file allows the AP 14 to ensure that location records are preserved during the occurrence of this type of problem.
Synchronization flat WO 00/41403 PCT1i1S99/29505 files are written by the ApLocSync process (described below) when transferring location records between pairs of redtmdant AP :ystems. Overflow flat files are written by ApMnDsptch when location records are arriving into the AP 14 at a rate faster than ApDbRecvLoc can process and insert the records into the location database.
This may occur during very high peak rate periodLs. The overflow files prevent any records from being lost during peak periods. The Fixed Error flat files contain location records that had errors but have now been fixed, and can now be inserted into the location database.
Because the AP 14 has a critical centralized role in the Wireless Location System, the AP
14 architecture has been designed to be :ully redundant. A redundant A.P 14 system includes fully redundant hardware platfc nns, fully redundant RDBMS, redundant disk drives, and redundant networks to each other, the TLP's 12, the NOC's 16, and external applications. The software architecture af the AP 14 has also been designed to support fault tolerant redundancy. The following examples illustrate functionality supported by the redundant AP's. Each TLP 12 sends location records to both the primary and the redundant AP 14 when both AP's are in an online state. Only the primary AP 14 will process incoming tasking requests, and only the pri:.~my AP 14 will accept configuration change rex}uests from the NOC 16. The primary AP 14 then synchronizes the redundant AP 14 under careful control. Both the primary and redundant AP's will accept basic startup and shutdown commands from the NOC. Both AP's constantly monitor their own system parameters and application healtli and monitor the corresponding pa,--ameters for the other AP 14, and then decide which AP 14 will be primary and which will be redundant based upon a composite score. This composite score is determined by compiling errors reported by various processes to a shared memory area, and monitoring swap space and disk space. There are several processes dedicated to supporting redundancy.
The AP Location Synchronizaiion Process (ApLocSync) runs on each AP 14 and detects the need to synchronize location records between AP's, and then eicates "sync records"
that list the location records that need to be transferred from one AP 14 to another AP 14.
The location records are then transferred between AP's using a socket connection.
ApLocSync compares the location record.partitions and the location record sequence numbers stored in each location database. :vormally, if both the priinary and redundant AP 14 are operating properly, syncbronizaaon is not needed because both AP's are receiving location records simultaneously :Erom the TLP's 12. However, if one fails or is placed in an off-line mode, then synchronization will later be required.
ApLocSync is notified whenever ApMnDsptch connects to a TLP 12 so it can determine whether synchronization is required.
The AP Tasking Synchronization Process iApTaskSync) runs on each AP 14 and synchronizes the taslang information between the primary AP 14 and the redundant AP
14. ApTaskSync on the primary AP 14 receives tasking information from ApDbSend, and then sends the tasking information to the ApTaskSync process on the redundant AP
14. If the primary AP 14 were to fail before ApTaskSync had completed replicating tasks, then ApTaskSync will perform a complete tasking database synchronization when the failed AP 14 is placed back into an online state.
The AP Configutation Synchronization Prxess (ApConfigSync) rtms on each AP 14 and synchronizes the configuration informatio:a between the primary AP 14 and the redundant AP 14. ApConfigSync uses a RDBMS replication facility. The configuration information includes all information needed by the SCS's 10, TLP's 12, and AP's 14 for proper operation of the Wireless Location Systent in a wireless canier's network.
In addition to the core functions described above, the AP 14 also supports a large number of processes, functions, and interfaces useful in the operation of the Wireless Location Systen=, as well as uscful for various applications that desire location information. While the processes, functions, and interfaces described herein are in this section pertaining to the AP 14, the implementation of many of'these processes. functions, and interfaces permeates the entire V'7ireless Location System and therefore their inventive value should be not read as being limited only to the A? 14.
I I
Roazning The AP 14 supports "roaming" between -wireless location systems located in different cities or operated by differcnt wireless caaiers. If a first wireless transmitter has subscribed to an application on a first Wireless Location System, and therefore has an entry in the Tasking List in the first AP 14 in the first Wireless Location System, then the first wireless traasmitter may also subscribe to roaming. Each AP 14 and TLP
12 in each Wireless Location System contains a tab ie in which a list of valid "home"
subscriber identities is maintained. The list is typically a range, and for example, for current cellular telephones, the range can be determined by the NPA/NXX codes (or area code and exchange) associated with the MIAt or MSID of cellular telephones. When a wireless transmitter meeting the "home" criteria riakes a trazmission, a TLP 12 receives demodulated data from one or more SCS's 10 and checks the trigger information in the Signal of Interest Table. If any trigger citerion is met, the location processing begins on that transmission; otherwise, the transmission is not processed by the Wireless Location is System.
When a first wireless transmitter not meeting the "home" critc:rion makes a transmission in a second Wireless Location System, tlie second TLP 12 in he second Wireless Location System checks the Signal of Interest Table for a trigger. One of three actions then occurs: (i) if the transmission meets an already existing criteria in the Signal of Interest Table , the transmitter is located and'the location record is forwarded from the second AP 14 in the second Wireless Location System to the firn AP 14 in the first Wireless Location System; (ii) if the first wireless ttanstnitter has a"roamer" entry in the Signal of Interest Table indicating that the first wireless nansmitter has "registered" in the second Wireless Location System btt has no trigger criteria, then the iransmission is-not processed by the second Wireless Location System and the expiration timestamp is adjusted as described below; (iii) if the first wireless transmitter has no "roamer" entry and therefore has not "registered", then the demodulated data is passed from the TLP 12 to the second AP 14.
In the third case above, the second AP 14 uses the identity of the first wireless transmitter to identify the first AP 14 in the first Wireless Location System as the "home" Wireless Location System of the first wireless transmitter. The second AP 14 in the second Wireless Location System sends a query to the first AP 14 in the first Wireless Location System to determine whzther the first wireless transmitter has subscribed to any location application and therefore has any trigger criteria in the Tasking List of the first A.P 14. If a trigger is present in the first AP 14, the trigger criteria, along with any associated fields and flags, is sent from the first A.P 14 to the second AP 14 and entered in the Tasking List and the Signal of Interest Table as a"roamer" entry with trigger criteria. If the first AP 14 responds to the second AP 14 indicating that the first wireless transmitter has no trigger criteria, then the second AP 14 "registers" the first wireless transmitter in the Tasking List and the Signal of Interest Table as a "roamer" with no trigger criteria.
Thus both current and future transmissions from the first wireless transmitter can be positively identified by the TLP 12 in the second Wireiess Location System as being registered without trigger criteria, and the second AP 14 is not required to make additional queries to the first AP 14.
When the second AP 14 registers the fus: wireless transmitter with a roamer cntry in the Taslcing List and the Signal of Interest Tg:ble with or without trigger criteria, the roamer entry is assigned an expiration timestamp. The expiration timestamp is set to the current time,plus a predetermined first interval. Every time the first wireless transmitter makes a transmission, the expiration timestamp oi'the roamer entry in the Tasking List and the Signal of Interest Table is adjusted to the current time of the most recent m-ismission plus the predetermined first interval. If the first wireless transmitter makes no further transmissions prior to the expiration time:stamp of its roamter entry, then the roamer entry. =
is automatically deleted. If, subsequent to the deletion, the first wireless tran.,mitter makes another transmission, then the process of registcring occurs again.
The first AP 14 and second AP 14 maintain communications over a wide area network.
The network may be based upon TCP/IP or upon a protocol similar to the most recent version of IS-41. Each AP 14 in communications with other AP's in other wireless ' I I CA 02494886 1999-12-13 location systems maintains a table that provides.the identity of each AP 14 and Wireless Location System corresponding to each valid range of identities of wireless transmitters.
Multiple Pass Location Records s Certain applications may require a very fast estimate of the general location of a wireless transmitter, followed by a more accurate estimate of the location that can be sent subsequently. This can be valuable, for cacample, for E9-1-1 systems that handle wireless calls and must make a call routing decision very quickly, but can wait a little longer for a more exact location to be displayed upon the E9-1-1 call-taker's electronic map terminal.
i.o. The Wireless Location System supports these applications with an inventive multiple pass location processing mode, described later. The AP 14 supports this mode with multiple pass location records. For eertai:i entries, the Tasking List in the AP 14 contains a flag indicating the maximum time limit before which a particular application must receive a rough estimate of location, and a second maximum time limit in which a 15 particular application must receive a final location estunate. For these certain applications, the AP 14 includes a flag in the location record indicating the status of the location estimate contained in the record, which may, for example, be set to first pass estimate (i.e. rough) or final pass estimate. The Wireless Location System will generally determine the best location estimate witbin the time limit set by the application, that is the 20 Wireless Location System wili process the most amount of.RF data that can be supported in the time Iimit. Given that any particular wireless transmission can trigger a location record for one or more applications, the'JVireless Location System supports multiple modes simultaneously. For example, a wireless transmitter with a particular MIN can dial "911". This may trigger a two-pass location record for the E9-1-1 application, but a 25 single pass location record for a fleet management application that is monitoring that particular MIN. This can be extended to any number of applications.
Multiple Demodulation and Triggers In wireless communications systems in urban or dense suburban areas, frequencies or 30 channels can be re-used several times within relatively close dis=mes.
Since the Wireless Location System is capable of :mdependently detecting and demod=alating wireless transmissions without the aid of the wireless communications system.
a single wireless transmission can frequently be detected and successfully demodulated at multiple SCS's 10 within the Wireless Location System. This can happen both intentionally and unintentionally. An unntentional occurrence is caused by a close frequency re-u'se, such that a particular v,rireless transmission can be received above a predetermined threshold at more than one SCS 10, when each SCS 10 believes it is monitoring only transmissions that occui- only within the cell site collocated with the SCS
10. An intentional occurrence is caused by progranuning more than one SCS 10 to detect and demodulate transmissions that occur at a particular cell site and on a particular frequency. As described earlier, this is gi:nerally used with adjacent or nearby SCS's 10 to provide system demodulation redundancy to further increase the probability that any particular wireless transnussion is succe:sful detected and demodulated.
Either type of event could potentia.IIy lead to multiple triggers within the Wireless Location System, causing location processing to be initiated several times for the same transmission. This causes an excess and :.nefficient use of processing and communications resources. Therefore, the Wireless Location System includes means to detect when the same transmission has b:en detected and demodulated more than once, and to select the best demodulating SCS 10 as the starting point for location processing.
When the Wireless Location System detects and successfully demodulates the same transmission multiple times at multiple SCS/antennas, the Wireless Location System uses the following criteria to select the one demodulating SCS/antenna to.use to continue the process of determining whether to trigge- and possibly initiate location processing (again, these criteria may be weighted in determ:;ning the final decision): (i) an SCS/antenna collocated at the cell site to which a particular frequency has been assigned is preferred over another SCS/antenna, but this preference may be adjusted if there is no operating and on-line SCS/antenna collocated at th.e cell site to which the particular frcquency has been assigned, (ii) SCS/antennas with higher average SNR are preferred over those with lower average SNR, and (iii) SCS/antenr.as with fewer bit errors in demodulating the transmission are preferred over those with higher bit etrors. The weighting applied to each of these preferences may be adjusted by the operator of the Wireless Location System to suit the particular design of each system;
Interface to Wireless Communications ~~ sy tem The Wireless Location System contains means to communicate over an interface to a wireless communications system, such zs a mobile switching center (MSC) or mobile positioning controller (MPC). This interface may be based, for example, on a standard secure protocol such as the most recent,rersion of the IS-41 or TCP/IP
protocols. The fonnats, fields, and authentication aspects of these protocols are well known.
The Wireless Location System supports a vazety of command / response and informational messages over this interface that are des:.gned to aid in the successful detection, demodulation, and triggering of wireless transmissions, as well as providing means to pass location records to the wireless corrmunications system. In particular, this interface provides means for the Wireless Location System to obtain information about which wireless transtnitters have been assigned to particular voice channel pararneters at particular cell sites. Example messages supported by the Wireless Location System over this interface to the wireless commtuiicz:ions system include the following:
Query on MIN / MDN / MSID / IMS I/ TMSI Mapping - Certain types of wireless transmitters will transmit their identi-.y in a familiar form that can be dialed over the telephone networlc. Other types of wirelesi transmitters transmit an identity that cannot be dialed, but which is translated into a number that can be dialed using a table inside of the wireless communications system. The transmitted identity is permanent in most cases, but can also be temporary. Users of location applications connected to the AP 14 typically prefer to place triggers onto the Tasldng List using identities that can be dialed. Identities that can be dialed are typically known as Mobile Directory Numbers (1VIDN). The other types of identities for which translation may be required includes Mobile Identity Number (M[N), Mobile Subscriber Identity (MSID), International Mobile Subscriber ldeniity (IMSI), and Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI). If the wireless comnzunications system has enabled the use of encryption for any of the data fields iz the messages tiansmitted by wireless =
transmitters, the Wireless Location System may also query for encryption information along with the identity information. 7he Wireless Location System includes means to query the wireless communications system for the altenzate identities for a trigger identity that has been placed onto the Tasking List by a location application, or to query the wireless communications system for alternate identities for an identity that has been demodulated by an SCS 10. Other events can also trigger this type of query.
For this type of query, typically the V'lireless Location System initiates the command, and the wireless communications system responds.
Query / Command Change on Voice :2F Channel Assignment - Many wireless transmissions on voice channels do not contain identity information.
Therefore, when the Wireless Location System is triggered to perform location processing on a voice channel transmission, the Wireless Location System queries the wireless coinmunication system to obtain the current voice channel assignment information for the particular u=ansmitter for which the Wireless Location System has becn triggered.
For an AlVII'S transmission, for example, the Wireless Location System preferably requires the cell site, sector, and RF channel number currently in use by the wireless transmitter. For a TDMA transmission, for example, the Wireless Location System preferably requires the cell site, sectorr, RF channel number, and timeslot currently in use by the wireless uansmitter. Other information elements that may be needed includes long code mask and encryption keys. In generat, the Wireless Location System will initiate the conunand, and. the wireless conununications system will respond. However, the Wireless Location System will also accept a trigger command from the wireless communications system that contains the information detailed herein.
The timing on this command I response message set is very critical since voice channel handoffs can occur quite frequently in wireless communications systems.
That is, the Wireless Location System will locate any wireless transmitter that is transmitting on a particular channel -iherefore the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system must jointly be certain that the identity of the wireless transmitter and the voice i:hannel assignment information are in perfect synchronization. The Wireless Location System uses several means to achieve this objective. The Wireless Location 11-ystem may, for example, query the voice channel assignment information for a particular wireless transmitter, receive the necessary RF
data, then again query the voice channel assignment information for that same wireless transmitter, and then verify that the status of the wireless transmitter did not change during the time in which the RF data was being collected by the Wireless Location System. Location processing is not required to complete before the second query, since it is only important to verify that the correct RF data was received: The = 10 Wireless Location System nlay also, for example, as part of the first query command the wireless communications system to prevent a handoff from occurring for the particular wireless umLsmitter duriitg the time period in which the Wireless Location System is receiving the RF data. Tlten, subsequent to collccting the RF data, the Wireless Location System will a,,7a;n query the voice channel assignment information for that same wireless transmit[er, c:ommand the wireless communications system to again peraiit handoffs for said wireless transmitter and then verify that the status of the wireless t-msnitter did not change during the time in which the RF data was being collected by the Wireless Location System.
For various reasons, either the Wirc:less Location System or the wireless communications system may prefe:= that the wireless transmitter be assigned to another voice RF channel prior to performing location processing. Therefore, as part of the command / response sequence, the wireless communications system may instruct the Wireless Location Sysu:rn to temporarily suspend location processing until the wireless communications system has completed a handoff sequence with the wireless tramsmitter, and the wireless conununications system has notified the Wireless Location System that RF ciata can be received, and the voice RF
channel upon which the data can be receiveci. Alternately, the Wireless Location System may determine that the particular voice 1tF channel which a particular wireless transmitter is currently using is unsuitable for obtaining an acceptable location estimate, and request that the wireless communications system command the wireless transmitter to handoff. Alternately, the Wireless I.ocation System may request that the wireless conununications system command the wireless transmitter to handoff to a series of voice RF channels in sequence in oider to perform a series of location estimates, whereby the Wireless Location System can improve upon the accuracy of the location estimate through the series ofhandoffs; this method is further described later.
The Wireless Location System can Llso use this command / response message set to query the wireless communications system about the identity of a wireless transmitter that had been using a particular voic: channel (and tuneslot, etc.) at a particular cell site at a particular time. This enables the Wireless Location System to first perform location processing on transmissions without Iatowing the identities, and then to later determine the identity of the wireless, tt-ansmitters making the transmissions and append this information to the location record. This particular inventive feature enables the use of automatic sequential location of voice channel transmissions.
Receive Triggers - The Wireless Location System can receive triggers from the wireless communications system to perform location processing on a voice channel transmission without knowing the identity of the wireless transmitter. This message set bypasses the Tasidng List, and does not use the triggering mechanisms within the Wireless Location Systcm. Rather, the wireless communications system alone determines which wireless transtnissions to locate, and then send a cotnmand to the Wireless Location System to coliect RF data from a particular voice channel at a particular cell site and to perfortn loGition processing. The Wireless Location System responds with a con5rrnation containing a timestamp when the RF data was collected.
The Wireless Location System also remponds with an appropriate format location record whea location processing has completed. Based upon the time of the command to Wireless Location System and the response with the RF data collection timestamp, the wireless communications system determines whether the wireless transmitter status changed subsequent to the command and whetherthere is a good probability of successful RF data collection.
WO 00/41403 PC":; JS99/29505 Make Transmit - The Wireless Location System can command the wseless communications system to force E. particular wireless transmitter to n:.: ke a transmission at a particular time, or within a prescribed range of time.s. The wireless communications system responds with a confumation and a time or time range in which to expect the uwsmission. The types of t7-ansmissions that the -Wireless Location System can force include, for example, audit responses and ~:ge responses.
Using this message set, the Wireless Location System can also comrr_-:1d the wireless communications system to force the wireless transmitter to transmit v.sing a higher power level setting. In many cases, wireless transmitters will attempt to use the lowest power level settings when transmitting in order to conscrve ba:.ery life. In order improve the accuracy of the location estimate, the Wireless Lo:.:ation System may prefer that the wireless transniitter use a higher power level settiThe wireless communications system will respcnd to the Wireless Location Systeia with a confirmation that the higher power level setting will be used and a tii :w or time range in which to expect the transmissio:z.
Delay Wireless Communications System Response to Mobile Access - Some air interface protocols, such as CDMA, use a mechanism in which the w ireless tiansmitter initiates transmissions on a channel, such as an Access C:.a:nnel, for example, at the lowest or a very low power level setting, and thrn en:::rs a sequence of steps in which (i) the wireless transmitter makes an access transmi::s-ion;
(ii) the wireless transmitter waits for a res:)onse from the wireless communications system;
(iii) if no response is received by the wireless transmitter from the wireless communications system within a predetemined time, the wireless trzinsmitter increases its power level setting by a predetermined amount, and the:; returns to step (i); (iv) if a response is received by the wireless transmitter from the -wireless communications system within a predetermined time, the wireless =smitter then enters a normal message exchange. This mechanism is useful to ensure that the wireless transmitter uses only the lowest useful power level setting for transmitting and does not further waste energy or battery life. It is possible, however, that the lowest power level setting at which the wireless tiansmitter can succassfully communicate with the wireless communications system is not sufficient to obtain an acceptable location estirnate. Therefbre, the Wireless Location Systenc can command the wireless communications systenc to delay its response to these trar:smissions by a predetermined time or amount. This delaying action will cause the wi:eless transmitter to repeat the sequence of'steps (i) through (iii) one or more ,;mes than normal with the result that one or more of the access transmissions will be at a higher power level than normal. The higher= power level may preferably enable the Wireless Location System to determine a more accurate location estimate. The Wireless Location System may command this type of delaying action for either a particular wireless transmitter, for a particular type of wireless transmission (for example, for all '911' calls), for wireless transmitter:c that are at a specified range frol_i the base station to which the transmitter is attempting to communicate, or for all wireless transmitters in a particular area.
Send Confirmation to Wireless Transmitter- The Wireless Location "ystem does not include means within to notify the wireless transmitter of an action bccause the Wireless Location Systcm cannot transmit; as described earlier the Wireless Location System can only receive transmissio:ns. Therefore, if the Wireless Loe..,don System desires to send, for example, a corfumation tone upon the compiction of a certain action, the Wireless Location Systeni commands the wireless commuiucations system to transmit a particular message. The= mesiage may include, for exam;,le, an audible confirmation tone, spoken message, or synthesized message to the w:reless.
transmitter, or a text message sent via a short messaging service or a._,age.
The Wireless Location Systern receives confirmation from the wireless cornmunications system that the message has been accepted and sent to the wireless transmitter.'This command / response message set is important in mabling the Wireless Location System to support ccrtain end-user application fiuictions such as f'rol>ibit Location Processing Report Location Records - The Wire:less Location System autornatically reports location records to the wireless comraunications system for those wi;-eless WO 00/41403 PC -L,"/US99/29505 transmitters tasked to report to the wireless communications system, as well as for those transmissions that the wireless communications system initiated triggers. The Wireless Location System also reports on any historical location record queried by the wireless communications system and which the wireless communications system is authorized to receive.
Monitor Internal Wireless Communica.tions System Interfaces, State Table In addition to this above interface between the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system, the Wireless Location System also includes means to monitor lo existing interfaces within the wireless communications system for the purpose of intercepting messages important to the Wireless Location System for identifying wireless transmitters and the RF channels in use by these transmitters. These interfaces may include, for example, the "a-interface" and "a-bis interface" used in wireless communications systems employing the GSM air interface protocol. These interfaces are well-known and published in various standards. By monitoring the bi-directional messages on these interfaces between base stations (BTS), base station controllers (BSC), and mobile switching centers (MSC), 2md other points, the Wireless Location System can obtain the same information about the assignment of wireless transmitters to specific channels as the wireless communications system itself knows. The Wireless Location System includes means to monitor the;;e interfaccs at various points. For example, the SCS 10 may monitor a BTS to BSC in:erface. Alternately, a TLP 12 or AP 14 may also monitor a BSC where a number of BT;i to BSC interfaces have been concentrated.
The interfaces intemal to the wireless comr.aunications system are not encrypted and the layered protocols are known to those fsuniliarwith the art. The advantage to the Wireless Location Symrn to monitoring these interfaces is that the Wireless Location System may not be required to independently deteci: and demodulate control channel messages from wireless transiaitters. In addition, the NVireiess Location System may obtain all necessary voicc channel assignment information from these interfaces.
Using these means for a control channi.-I transmission, the SCS 10 :eceives the transmissions as described earlier and ;-ecords the control channel n,F data into memory WO 00/41403 PCT;ii~;99/29505 without performing detection and demodulation. Separately, the Wireless Location Svstem monitors the messages occurring over prescribed interfaces within the wireless communications system, and causes a trigger in the Wireless Location Sys:en when the Wireless Location System discovers a message containing a trigger event.
Initiated by the trigger event, the Wireless Location System detetmines the approximately time at which the wireless transmission occurred, and commands a first SCS 10 and a second SCS l OB
to each search its memory for the start of transmission. This fzrst SCS I OA
chosen is an SCS that is either collocated with the t-ase station to which the wireless transmitter had communicated, or an SCS which is adjacent to the base station to which the wireless transmitter had communicat:ed. That is., the first SCS 10A is an SCS which would have been assigned the control channel as a primary channel. If the first SCS l0A
successfully determines and reports the start of the transmission, then location processing proceeds normally, using the means described beIow. If the first SCS l0A cannot successfully detennine the start of transmission, then the second SCS lOB reports the start of transmission, and then location processing proceeds normally.
The Wireless Location System also uses these means for voice channel transmissions.
For all triggers contained in the Taskin:3 List, the Wireless Location System monitors the prescribed interfaces for messages pertniining to those triggers. The messages of interest include, for example, voice channel assignment messages, handoff messages, frequency hopping messages, power up / power down messages, directed re-try messages, termination messages, and other simila3- action and status messages. The Wireless Location Svstem continuously maintairs a copy of the state and status of these wireless transmitters in a State Table in the AP 14. Each time that the Wireless Location System detects a message pertaining to one of tne entries in the Tasking List, the Wireless Location System updates its own State 'Table. Thereafter, the Wireless Location System may trigger to perform location processing, such as on a regular time interval, and access the State Table to determine precisely which cell site, sector, RF channel, and timestot is presently being used by the wireless traasmitter. The example contained' herein described the means by which the Wireless Locataon System interfaces to a GSM based wireless %V 00/41403 PCTi US99/29505 communications system. The Wireless Location System also supports similar functions with systems based upon other air intexfaces.
For certain air interfaces, such as CDI-ZA, the Wireless Location System also keeps certain identity information obtained from Access bursts in the control channel in the State Table; this information is later u:ced for decoding the masks used for voice channels.
For example, the CDMA air interface protocol uses the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) of a wireless transmitter to, in part, determine the long code mask used in the coding of voice channel transmissions. The Wireless Location System maintains this information in the State Table for entries in the Taskiztg List because many wireless transmitters may transmit the information only once; for example, many CDMA mobiles will only transmit their ESN during the first Access burst after the wireless transmitter become active in a geographic area. This ability to independently determine the long code mask is very useful in cases where an interface betwaen the Wirelcss Location System and the wireless conununications system is not operativi; andlor the Wireless Locatior~ System is not able to monitor one of the interfaces intenlal to the wireless conununications system. The operator of the Wircless Location System may optionally set the Wireiess Location System to maintain the identity information for all wireless transmitters. In addition to the above reasons, the Wireless Location Svstem can provide the voice channel tracking for all wireless transmitters that trigger loca.tion processing by calling "911 ".
As described earlier, the Wireless Location System uses dynamic tasking to provide Iocation to a wireless transmitter for a prescribed time after dialing "911 ", for example.
By maintaining the identity information for all wireless transmitters ir. the State Table, the Wireless Location System is able to provide voice channei tracking for all transmitters in the event of a prescribed triggcr event, aad not just those with prior entries in the Tasking List.
Applications Interface Using the AP 14, the Wireless Location ;iystem supports a variety of standards based interfaces to end-user and carrier location applications using secure protocols such as TCP/IP, X.25, SS-7, and IS-41. Each inte:rface between the AP 14 and an extcrn.al application is a secure and authenticated connection that permits the AP 14 to positivelv verify the identity of the application ttLat is connected to the AP 14. This is necessary because each connected application is granted only limited access to location records on a real-time and/or historical basis. In addition, the AP 14 supports additional command /
response, real-time, and post-processiiig functions that are further detailed below. Access to these additional functions also requires authentication. The AP 14 maintains a user list and the authentication means associated with each user. No application can gain access to location records or functions for whictt the application does not have proper authentication or access rights. In addiaon, the AP 14 supports full logging of all actions taken by each application in the event -:hat problems arise or a later investigation into actions is required. For each command or function in the list below, the AP 14 preferably supports a protocol in which each action or the result of each is confirmed, as appropriate.
Edit Tasldng List - This command pe:rmits external applications to add, remove, or edit entries in the Tasidng List, ine;:uding any fields and flags associated with each entry. This command can be supported on a single entry basis, or a batch entry basis where a list of entries is included irL a single command. The Iatter is useful, for example, in a bulk application sucb. as location sensitive billing whereby larger volumes of wireless transmitters ar. being supported by the external application, and it is desired to minimize protocol o-verhead. This command can add or delete applications for a particular entry in the Tasking List, however, this command cannot delete an entry entirely if the entry also contains other applications not associated with or authorized by the application issuing the command.
Set Location interval - The Wirele;cs Location System can be set to perform location processing at any interval for a particular wireless transmitter, on eithc;;
control or voice channels. For example, certain applications may require the location of a wireless transmitter every few seco:ads when the transmitter is engaged on a voice channel. When the wireless transnnittermake an initial transtnission, the Wireless Location System initially triggers using a standard entry in the Tasking List.
If one of WO 00/41403 PCr/LJS99/29505 the fields or flags in this entry specifies updated location on a set interval, then the Wireless Location System creates ,i dynamic task in the Tasking List that is triggered by a timer instead of an identity or other transmitted ctiteria Each time the timer expires, which can range from 1 second to several hours, the Wireless Location System will automatically trigger ti) locate the wireless transmitter. The Wireless Location System uses its interface i:o the wireless communications system to query status of the wireless transmitter, ir.cluding voice call parameters as described earlier.
If the wireless transnitter is engage.d on a voice channel, then the Wireless Location System performs location processuig. If the wireless transmitter is not engaged in any existing transmissions, the Wireless Location System will command the wireless communications system to make the wireless transmitter immediately transmit.
When the dynamic task is set, the Wireless Location System also sets an expiration time at which the dynamic task ceasex.
End-User Addition / Deletion - This command can be executed by an end-user of a wireless transmitter to place the ideatity of the wireless transrnitter onto the Tasking List with location processing enabled, to remove the identity of the wireless transmitter from the Tasking List atui thetefore ciiminate identity as _-trigger, or to place the identity of the wireless transmitter onto the Tasking List with location proccssing disabled. When location processing has been disabled by the end-user, known as Prohibit Location Processing then no location processing will be performed for the wireless uansmitter. The ope=or of the Wireless Location System can optionally select one of several actions by the Wireless Location System in response to a Prohibit Location Processing command by the end user. (i) the disabling action can override all other triggers in the Tasking List, including a trigger due to an emergency call such as "911", (ii) tlie disabling.action can override any other trigger in the Tasldng List, eatcept a trigger due to an emergency call such as "911 ", (iii) the disabling action can be overridden by other select triggers in the Tasking List. In the first case, the end user is granted complete control over the privacy of the aansmissions by the wireless transmitter, as no location processing will be performed on that transmitter for any reason. In the second case, the end usrr may still receive the benefits of location during an cmergency, but at no other times. In an example of the third case, an employer who is the real owner of a particular wireless transmitter can override an end-user action by an employee who is using the wireless transmitter as part of the job but who may not desire to be located. The Wireless Location System may query the wireless co-,nmunications system, as describLd above, to obtain the mapping of the identity contaiited in the wireless transmission to other identities.
The additions and deletions by the end-user are effected by dialed sequences of characters and digits and pressing the "SEND" or equivalent button on the wireless transmitter. These sequences may be optionally chosen and made known by the operator of the Wireless Location :3ystem. For exatnple, one sequence may be "*55 SEND" to disable location processing. Other sequences are also possible. When the ena-user can dialed this prescribed. sequence, the wireless transmitter will transmit the' sequence over one of the prescribed control channels of the wireless communications system. Since the Wireless Location System independently detects and demodulates all reverse control channel ttansmissions, the Wireless Location System can independently interpret the prescribed dialed sequence and make the appropriate feature updates to the Tasldng List; as described above. When the urireless Location System has completed the update to the Tasking List, the Wireless Location System commands the wireless communications system to send a confirrnation to the end-user. As described earlier, this ma e take the form of an audible tone, recorded or synthesized voice, or a text message: This command is executed over the interface between the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system.
Command Transmit - This command allows exteraal applications to cause the Wireless Location System to send a command to the wireless cc:nmunications system to make a particular wireless transmitter, or group of wireless trartsmitters, transmit.
This command may contain a flag or field that the wireless transmitter(s) should transnit immediately or at a presc.dbed time. This comnzand has the effort of locating the wireless transmitter(s) upon ccammand, since the transnnissions will be detected, demodulated, and triggered, causing location processing and the generation of a location record. This is useful in eliminating or reducing any delay in determining location such as waiting for the next registration time period for the wireless traasmitter or waiting for an independent transmission to occur.
External Database Query and Update - The Wireless Location Systtr.l includes means to access an external databiLse, to query the said external database using the identity of the wireless transmittet' or other parameters contained in the transmission or the trigger criteria, and to merg,, the data obtained from the external database with the data generated by the Wireless Location Systern to create a new enhanced = 10 location record. The enhanced location record may then be forwarded to requesting applications. The extemal database may contain, for example, data elements such as customer information, medical infarmation, subscribed features, application related information, customer account inf ormation, contact information, or sets of prescribed actions to take upon a location trigger event. The Wireless Location System may also cause updates to the external database, for example, to increment or decrement a billing counter associated with the provision of location services, or to update the external database with the latest iacation record associated with the particular wireless transmitter. The Wireless Location System contains means to performed the actions described herein on more ihan one external database. The list and sequence of extemal databases to access and the subsequent actions to take are contained in one of the fields contained in the trigger c.riteria in the Tasking List.
Random Anonymous Location Pmcessing - The Wireless Location System includes means to perform large scale random anonymous location processin~. This function is valuable to certai.n types of applic.ations that require the gathering of a large volume' of data about a population of wireless transmitters without consideration to the specific identities of the individual transmitters. Applications of this type include: RF
Optimization, which enables wireless ca:riers to measure the performance of the wireless communications system by simultaneously deternining location and other parameters of a transmission; Traffic Management, which enables government agencies and commercial concerns to monitor the flow of traffic on various highways WO 00/41403 PC'i'/US99/29505 using statistically significant santples of wireless transmitters travelling in vehicles;
and Local Traffic Estimation, wfiich enables commercial enterp:iZes to estimate the flow of traffic around a particular area which may help detennine the viability of particular businesses.
Applications requesting random anonymous location processing optionally receive location records from two sources: (i) a copy of location records generated for other applications, and (ii) location records which have been triggered randomly by the Wireless Location System without regard to any specific criteria. All of the location records generated from either source are forwarded with all of the identity and trigger criteria information removed from the location records; however, t1hc requesting application(s) can determine whether the record was =enerated from the fully random process or is a copy from anothei= trigger criteria. The random location records are generated by a low priority task within the. Wireless Location System that performs location processing on randomly selected transmissions whenever processing and communications resources are available and would otherwise be unused at a particular instant in time. The rec.uesiing application(s) can specify whether the random location processing is performed over the entire coverage arca of a Wireless Location System, over specific gcographic areas such as along prescribed highways, or by the coverage areas of speci:5c cell sites. Thus, the requestir;
application(s) can direct the resources of the Wireless Location System to those arr--- of greatest interest to each application. Depending o:n the randomness desired by the application(s), the Wireless Location System can adjust preferences for randomly selecting certain types of transmissions, for example, rejostration messages, origination messages, page response messages, or voice chaznel transrnissions.
AnonymmLs Tracking of a Geographic Group - The Wireless Location System includes mcans to trigger locataon processing on a repetitive basis for anonymous groups of s,+ireless transmitters within a prescribed geographic area. For example, a particular -_xation application may desire to monitor the trave4 route of a wireless transmitte.~ over a prescribed period of time, but without the Wireless Location WO 00/41403 PCT/US99/2.9505 System disclosing the particular idE:nrity of the wireless transmitter. The period of time may be many hours, days, or weeks. Using the means, the Wireless Location System: randomly selects a wireless transmitter that initiates a transmission in the geographic area of interest to the application; performs location processing on the transmission of interest; irreversibly translates and encrypts the identity of the wireless transmitter into a new codad identifier, creates a location record using only the new coded identifier as an identifying means; forwards the location record to the requesting location application(s); ~md creates a dynamic task in the Tasking List for the wireless transmitter, where the tiynamic task has an associated expiration time.
Subsequently, whenever the prescribed wireless transmitter initiates transmission, the Wireless Location System shall triÃ;ger using the dynamic task, perform location processing on the transmission of interest, irreversibly translate and encrypt the identity of the wireless transmitter into the new coded idendfier using the same means as prior such that the coded identifier is L%e same, create a location record using the coded identifier, and forward the location record to the requesting location application(s). The means describecl herein can be combined with other functions of tha. Wireless Location System to perform this type of monitoring use either control or voice chaunel transmissions. Further, the means desccibed herein completely preserve the private identity of the wireless traasmitter, yet enables another class of applications that can monitor the travel patterns of wireless transmitters.
This class of applications can be of great value in dete:mining the planning and design of new roads, alternate route planning, or tae construction of commercial and retail space.
Location Record Grouping, Sorting, and Labeling - The Wireless Location System include means to post-process the location records for certain requesting applications to group, sorz; or label the location records. For each interface supported by the Wireless Location System, the Wireless Location System stores a profile of the types of data for which the application is both authoti.zed and requesting, and the types of filters or post-processing actions desired by the appiication. Many applications, such as the examples contained herein, c;o not require individual location records or the specific identities of individual trarLsmitters. For example, an RF
optimization application derives more value from a large data set of location records for a particular cell site or channel than it can from any individual location record. For another example, a traffic monitoring application requires only location records from tran.smitters that are on prescribed roads or highways, and additionally requires that these records be grouped by secticn of road or highway and by direction of travel.
Other applications may request th<u the Wireless Location System forward location records that have been formatted t:) enba.nce visual display appeal by, for example, adjusting the location estimate of !he transmitter so that the transmitter's location appears on an electronic map directly on a drawn road segment rather than adjacent to the road segment. Therefore, the SJireless Location System preferably "snaps"
the location estimate to the nearest drawn road segment.
The Wireless Location System can filter and report location records to an application for wireless transmitters communicating only on a particular cell site, sector, RF
channel, or group of RF channels. Before forwarding the record to the requesting application, the Wireless I.ocation. System first verifies that the appropriate fields in the record satisfy the requiretnenm Records not matching the requirements are not forwarded, and records matching the requirements are forwarded. Some filters are geographic and must be calculated by the Wireless Location System. For example, the Wireless Location System can process a location record to determine the closest road segment and direction of travel of the wireless transmitter on the road segment.
The Wireless Location System c-iz then forward only records to the application that are determined to be on a particular road segment, and can further enhance the location record by adding a field containing the determined road segment. In order to determine the closest road segmazlt, the Wireless Location System is provided with a database of road segments of intemst by the requesting application. This database is stored in a table where each road ;segment is stored with a latitude and longitude coordinate defining the end point of each segment. Each road segment can be modeled as a straight or curved Iine, and can be modeled to support one or two directions of travel. Then for eacl=; location record detetmined by the Wireiess Location System, the Wireless Lc cation System compares the latitude and longitude ao in the location record to each road segment stored in the database, and determines the shortest distance from a modeled line connecting the end points of the segment to the latitude and longitude of the locatian record. The shortest distance is a calculated imaginary line orthogonal to the line connecting the two end points of the stored road segment. When the closest road segment has been determined, the Wireiess Locauon System can further determine the d:rection of travel on the road segment by comparing the direction of travel oi'the wireless transmitter reported by the location processing to the orientation of the road segment. The direction that produces the smallest error with respect to the orientation of the road segments is then reported by the Wireless Location System.
Network Operations Console (NOC) 1 ti The NOC 16 is a network management system that permits operators of the Wireless Location System easy access to the pragramming parameters of the Wireless Location is System. For example, in some cities, the Wireless Location System may contain many hundreds or even thousands of SCS's 10. The NOC is the most effective way to manage a large Wireless Location System, using graphical user interface capabilities.
The NOC
will also receive real time alerts if cert<<in functions within the Wireless Location System are not operating propcrly. These real time alerts can be used by the operator to take conwdve action quickly and prevent a degradation of location service.
Experience with trials of the Wireless Location Systcm .;how that the ability of the system to maintain good location accuracy over time is dirxtly related to the operator's ability to kecp the system operating within its predetemiried parameters.
Location Processing The Wireless Location System is capable of performing location processing i sing two different methods known as central based processing and station based processing. Both techniques were first disclosed in Patei:.t Number 5,327,144, and are fin=ther enhanced in this specification. Location processing depends in part on the ability to accurately determine certain phase characteristics of the signal as received at multiple antennas and at multiple SCS's 10. Therefore, it is an object of the Wireless Location System to si CA 02494886 1999-12-13.
identify and remove sources of phase: error that impede the ability of the location processing to determine the phase characteristics of the received signal. One source of phase error is inside of the wireless =smitter itself, namely the oscillator (typically a crystal oscillator) and the phase lock loops that allow the phone to tune to specific channels for transmitting. Lower cost crystal oscillators will generally have higher phase noise. Some air interface specificaticns, such as IS-136 and IS-95A, have specifications covering the phase noise with which a wireless telephone can transmit. Ott=,er air interface specifications, such as IS-553A, do riot closely specify phase noise. It is therefore an object of the present invention to automatically reduce and/or eliminate a wireless . 1o transmitter's phase noise as a source of phase error in location processing, in part by automatically selecting the use of ce:itral based processing or station based processing.
The automatic selection will also consider the efficiency with which thc communications link between the SCS 10 and the TLP 12 is used, and the availability of DSP
resources at each of the SCS 10 and TLP 12.
When using central based processing, the TDOA and FDOA determination and the multipath processing are performed in thc TLP 12 along with the position and speed deterinination. This method is prefeized when the wireless transmitter has a phase noise that is above a predetermined threshold. In these cases, central based processing is most effective in reducing or eliminating the phase noise of the wireless transmitter as a source of phase error because the TDOA estimate is performed using a d:gital representation of the actual RF transrnission from twc- antennas, which may be at thc; same SCS
10 or different SCS's 10. In this method, those skilled in the an will recognize that the phase noise of the transmitter is a common mode noise in the TDOA processing, and therefore is self-canceling in the TDOA determination process. This method works best, for example, with many very low cost 4WS cellular telephones that havc a high phase noise. The basic steps in central based processing include the steps recited below and represented in the flowchart of Figure 6:
a wireless transmitter initiates a ttansmission on either a control channel or a voice channel (step S50);
the transmission is received at multiple antennas and at multiple SCS's 10 in the Wireless Location System (step S:i 1);
the transmission is converted into a digital format in the receiver connected to each SCS/antenna (step S52);
the digital data is stored in a memory in the receivers in each SCS 10 (step S53);
the transmission is demodulated (step S54);
the Wireless Location System detennines whether to begin location processing for the aansmission (step S55);
if triggered, the TLP 12 requescs copies of the digital data from the memory in receivers at multiple SCS's 10 (step S56);
digital data is sent from multiple SCS's 10 to a selected TLP 12 (step S57);
the TLP 12 performs TDOA, FDOA., and multipath mitigation on the digital data from pairs of antennas (step S58);
the TLP 12 performs position and speed determination using the TDOA data, and then creates a location record and forwards the location record to the AP 14 (step S59).
The Wireless Location System uses a variable number of bits to represent the transmission when sending digital data from the SCS's 10 to the TLP 12. As discussed earlier, the SCS receiver digitizes wireless tcansmissions with a high resolution, or a high number of bits per digital sample in order to achieve a sufficient dynamic range. This is especially required when using wideband digital receivers, which may be simultaneously receiving signals near to the SCS 10A. and far from the SCS I OB. For example, up to 14 bits may be required to represent a dynamic range of 84 dB. Location processing does not always require the high resolution per digital sample, however. Frequently, locations of sufficient accuracy are achievable by the Wireless Location System using a fewer number of bits per digital sample. Therefore, -:o minimize the implementation cost of the Wireless Location System by conserving bandvvidth on the communication Iir.ks between each SCS 10 and TLP 12, the Wireless Lo:ation System determines the f4west number of bits required to digitally represent a tranmnission while still maintaining a desired accuracy level. This determination is based, fo:c example, on the particular air interfa-,e protocol used by the wireless umLsmitter, the SNR of the transmission, the degree to, which the I. . .
transmission has been perturbed by fading and/or multipath, and the current state of the processing and communication queues in each SCS 10. The number of bits sent from the SCS 10 to the TLP 12 are reduced in tnvo ways: the number of bits per sample is minimized, and the shortest length, or iewest segments, of the u-ansmission possible is used for location processing. The TLP 12 can use this minimal RF data to perfonm location processing and then compare the result with the desired accuracy level. This comparison is performed on the basis af a confidence interval calculation. If the location estimate does not fall within the desiral accuracy limits, the TLP 12 will recursively request additional data from selected S CS's 10. The additional data may include an to additional number of bits per digital sample and/or may include more segments of the transmission. This process of requesting additional data may continue recursively until the TLP 12 has achieved the prescribecl location acettracy.
There are additional details to the basic: steps described above. These details are described in prior Patent Numbers 5,327,144 and. 5,608,410 in other parts of this specification. One enhancement to the processes described in earlier patents is the selection of a single reference SCS/anteima that is used for each baseline in the location processing. In prior art, baselines,were determined using pairs of antenna sites around a ring. In the present Wireless Location System, the single reference SCS/antenna used is generally the highest SNR signal, although other criteria are also used as described below. The use of a high SNR reference aids central based location processing when the other SCS/anteanas used in the location processing are very wm1c, such as at or below the noise floor (i.e. zero or negative signal to noise ratio). When s;ation based location processing is used, the reference signal is a re-modulated signal, which is intentionally created to have a very high signal to noise ratio, further aiding location processing for very weak signals at other SCS/antenuas. The actual selection of the reference SCS/antenna is described below.
The Wireless Location System mitigates multipath by first recursively estimating the components of multipath received in addition to the direct path component and then subtracting thc5e components from the: received signal. Thus the Wireless Location System models the received signal ancl compates the model to the actual received signal and attempts to minimize the difference between the two using a weighted least square difference. For each transmitted signa:, x(t) from a wireless transmitter, the received signal y(t) at each SCS/antenna is a complex combination of signals:
y(t)=Ex(t-Tõ)aõforaIln==0toN;
where x(t) is the signal as traasmitted by the wireless transmitter, aõ and ~r,, are the complex amplitude and delays of the multipath components;
N is the total number of multipath contponents in the received signal; and ao and zo are constants for the most dir-eet path component.
The operator of the Wireless Location System empirically determines a set of constraints for each component of multipath that applies to the specific environment in which each Wireless Location Systeui is operatin& The purpose of the constraints is to limit the amount of processing time that the Wireless Location System spends optimizing the results for each multipath mitigation calculation. For example, the Wireless Location System may be set to determine only ibur components of muitipath: the first component may be assumed to have a time delay :in the range ilA to T1Bi the second component may be assumed to have a time delay in the: range T2A to z2B; the third component may be assumed to have a time delay in the range t3A to z38; and similar for the fourth component; however the fourth component is a single value that effectively represents a complex combination of many tens of individual (and somewhat diffuse) multipath components whose time delays exceed the range of the third- component. For ease of processing, the Wireless Location System transforms the prior equation into the frequency domain,'and then solves for the individual components such that a weighted least squares differeatce is minimized.
When using station based processing, the TDOA and FDOA detenninatic:: and multipath mitigation are performed in the SCS's 10, while the position and speed ":.tennination are typically performed in the TLP 12. Tl:.e main advantage of station based processing, as described in Patent Number 5,327,14-4, is reducing the'aznount of data that is sent on the WO 00/41403 PCT/LiS99/29505 communication link between each SCS-10 and TLP 12. However, there may be other advantages as well. One new objective of the present invention is increasing the effective signal processing gain during the TDOA processing. As pointed.out earlier, central based processing has the advantage of elimin,ating or reducing phase error caused by the phase s noise in the wireless=transmitter. However, no previous disclosure has addressed 'now to eliminate or reduce the same phase noise error when using station based processing. The present invention reduces the phase error and increases the effective signal processing gain using the steps recited below and ;lhown in Figure 6:
a wireless transmitter initiates a transmission on either a control channel or a voice channel (step S60);
the transmission is received at multiFile antennas and at multiple SCS's 10 in the Wireless Location Sysum (step S61);
the transmission is converted into a ciigital format in the receiver connected to each antenna (step S62);
the digital data is stored in a memory in the SCS 10 (step S63);
the transmission is demodulated (steo S64);
the Wireless Location System deterniines whether to begin location processing for the transmission (step S65);
if triggered, a first SCS 10A demodulatos the transmission and detemines an appropriate phase correction inten-A (step S66);
for each such phase correction inten-al, the first SCS l0A calculates an appropriate phase con-ection and amplitude carrection, and encodes this phase correction parameter and amplitude correction parameter along with the demodulated data (step S67);
the demodulated data and phase con=ection and amplitude con-ection parameters are sent from the f rst SCS 10A to a TLP 12 (step S68);
the TLP 12 determines the SCS's 10 and receiving antennas to use in the locarion processing (step S69);
I= I i the TLP 12 sends the demodulated data and phase correction and amplitude correction parameters to each second SCS l OB that will be used in the location processing (step S70);
the first SCS 10 and each second SCS 10B creates a first re-modulated signal based 5. upon the demodulated data and the phase correction and amplitude correction parameters (step S71);
the first SCS 10A and each second SCS lOB perfonns TDOA, FDOA, and multipath mitigation using the digital data stored in memory in each SCS 10 and the first re-modulated signal (step S72);
the TDOA, FDOA, and multipath initigation data are sent from the first SCS l0A
and each second SCS l OB to the TLF' 12 (step S73);
the TLP 12 perfonns position and speed detennination using the TDOA data (step S74); and the TLP 12 creates a location record, and forwards the location record to the (step S75).
The advantages of deteanining phas,e correction and amplitude correction parameters are most obvious in the location of CD11SA wireless transmitters based upon IS-95A. As is well known, the reverse uaasmissions from an IS-95A transmitter are sent using non-coherent modulation. Most CDMA base stations only integrate over a single bit interval because of the non-coherent modulation. For a CDMA Access Channel, with a bit rate of 4800 bits per second, there are 256 chips sent per bit, which permits an intcaration gain of 24 dB. Using the technique descrbed above, the TDOA processing in each SCS
may integrate, for example, over a fii11160 millisecond burst (196,608 chips) to produce an integration gain of 53 dB. This aciditional processing gain enables the present invention to detect and locate CDM4 transinissions using multiple SCS's 10, even if the base stations collocated with the SCS's 10 cannot detect the same CDMA
transrnission.
For a particular transmission, if either the phasc correction parazneters or the amplitude correction parameters are calculaia. to be zero, or are not needed, then these parameters are not sent in order to conserve on the number of bits transmitted on the communications link between each SCS 10 and TLP 12. In another embodiment of the invention, the Wireless Location System may use a fi:ted phase correction interval for a particular transmission or for all transmissions of a particular air interface protocol, or for all transmissions made by a particular type of wireless transaiitter. This may, for example, be based upon empirical data gathered 43ver some period of time by the Wireless Location System showing a reasonable consistency in the phase noise exhibited by various classes of transmitters. In these cases, the SCS 10 may save the processing step of dctermining the appropriate phase correction intervz:l.
Those skilled in the art will recognize tzat there are many ways of measuring the phase noise of a wireless transmitter. In one embodiment, a pure, noiseless re-modulated copy of the signal received at the first SCS l 0A may be digitally generated by DSP's in the SCS, then the received signal may be compared against the pure signal over each phase correction interval and the phase differimce may be measured directly. In this embodiment, the phase correction paraneter will be calculated as the negative of the phase difference over that phase correction interval. Thc number of bits required to represent the phase correction pararneter will vary with the magnitude of the phase correction parameter, and the number c-f bits may vary for each phase correction interval.
It has been observed that some transmissions, for example, exhibit greater phase noise early in the transmission, and less phase noise in the middle of and later in the transmissioa Station based processing is most usefu:i for wireless transmittcrs that have relatively low phase noise. Although not necessarily required by their respective air interface standards, wireless telephones that use the TDW-, CDMA, or GSM protocols will typically exhibit lower phase noise. As the phase noise of a wireless transmitter increases, the length of a phase corrextion interval may decrease and/or the number of bits required to represent the phase correction parameters increases. Station based processing is not effective when the number of bits required to represent the demodulated data plus the phase correction and amplitude parameters exceeds a predetermined proportion of the number of bits required to perform central based processing. It is therefore an object of the present invention to I I
automatically determine for each transniission for which a location is dcsired whether to process the location using central based processing or station based processing. The steps in maidng this determination are recited below and shown in Figure 7:
a wireless transmitter initiates a tranmiission on either a control channel or a voice channel (step S80);
the transmission is received at a first S CS l0A (step S81);
the transmission is converted into a di?.;ital format in the receiver com-.ected to each.
antenna (step S82);
the Wireless Location System detenni:ies whether to begin location p:ocessing for the transmission (step S83);
if triggered, a first SCS I OA demodulates the umLsmission and estirnates an appropriate phase correction interval and the nunaber of bits required to encode the phase correction and amplitude correction parameters (step S84);
i5 the first SCS 10A then estimates the muaber of bits required for ceri:.al based processing;
based upon the number of bits requirec, for each respective method, the SCS 10 or the TLP 12 determine whether to use ceiural based processing or station based processing to perform the Iocapion processing for this transmission (step S85).
In another embodiment of the invention, the Wireless Location System may always use central based processing or station based processing for all transmissions of a particular air interface protocol, or for all transmissions made by a particular kind of w=.reIess transmitter. This may, for example, be b2sed upon empirical data gathered over some period of time by the Wireless Location System showing a reasonable consistency in the phase noise exhibited by various classes of transmitters. In these cases, the SCS 10 and/or the TLP 12 may be saved the processing step of deteanining the appropriate processing method_ A further enhancement of the pre.saat invention, used for both central based processing and station based processing, is the use o f threshold ciiteria for including baselines in the final determination of location and velocity of the wireless transmitter. For each baseline, the'JVireless Location System calculates a number of parameters that include:
the SCS/antenna port used with the refemzce SCS/antenna in calculating the baseiine, the peak, avcrage, and variance in the power of the transmission as received at the SCS/antenna port used in the baseline and over the interval used for location processing, the correlation value from the cross-spectra correlation between the SCS/antenna used in the baseline and the reference SCS/antcnna, the dciay value for the baseline, the multipath mitigation parameters, the residual values remaining after th:, multipath mitigation calculations, the contributicn of the SCS/antenna to the weighted GDOP in the final location solution, and a measure of the quality of fit of the baseline if included in the fuzal location solution. Each baseline i:s included in the final location solution is each meets or exceeds the threshold criteria for each of the parameters described herein. A
baseline may be excluded from the location solution if it fails to meet one or more of the threshold criteria. Therefore, it is freqL.ently possible that the number of SCS/antennas actually used in the final location solution is less than the total number considered.
Previous Patent Numbers 5,327,144 and 5,608,410 disclosed a method by which the location processing n,inimi2ed the leas.t square difference (LSD) value of the following equation:
LSD = [Q12(Delay_T12-Deiay_OIZ)''+ QI3(D'elay_T23-DeIay_013)2+...+
Qx,,(Delay_Txy-Delay_Oxy)Z
In the present implementation, this eqt.ation has been rearranged to the following form in order to make the location processing code more efficient:
LSD = E(TDO&- - ti + ia)Zw;'; over idl i=1 to N-1 whcre N number of SCS/antennas used in the location processing;
TDOAo; = the TDOA to the i~' site frotn reference site 0;
z; = the theoretical line of sight propagation time from the wireless transmitter to the i'h site;
Ta = the theoretical line of sight propagation time from the transautter to the reference;
and w; = the weight, or quality factor, applied to the i'h baseline.
In the present impleTnentation, the Wireless Location System also uses another alternate form of the equation that can aid in de:ermining location solutions when the reference signal is not very strong or when it is likely that a bias would exist in the location solution using the prior form of the equation:
LSD' = (TDOAo; - t;)Zw;Z - b2 E w;Z ; over all i=O to N-1 Where N = number of SCS/antennas used in the location processing;
TDOAoi = the TDOA to the ih site froin reference site 0;
TDOAoo = is assumed to be zero;
Ti = the theoretical line of sight propagation time from the wireless transmitter to the i~' site;
b = a bias that is separately calculated for each theoretical point that minimizes LSD' at that theoretical point; and wi ==the weight, or quality factor, applied to the i'h baseline The LSD' form of the equation offers an easier means of removing a bias in location solutions at the reference, site by maldt:g wo equal to the maximum value of the other weights or basing wo on the relative signal strength at the reference site.
Note that if wo is much larger than the other weights, then b is approximately equal to to. In general, the weights, or quality factors are based or.i similar criteria to that discussed above for the threshold criteria in including baselines. That is, the results of the criteria calculations are used for weights and when the criteria falls below threshold the weight is then set to zero and is effectively not included in the daernvnation of the final location solution.
Antenna Selection Process for Locatiort Processing Previous inventions and disclosures, su ,h as those listed above, have described techniques in which a first, second, or possibly third antenna site, celI
site, or base station are required to determine location. Patent number 5,608,410 further discloses a Dynamic Selection Subsystan (DSS) that is respimsible for determining which data frames from which antenna site locations will be used to calculate the location of a responsive transaiitter. In the DSS, if data frames are received from more than a threshold number of sites, the DSS determines which are candidates for retention or exclusion, and then dynamically organizes data frames for location processing. The DSS prefers to use more than the minimum number of antenna sites so that the solution is over-determined.
Additionally, the DSS assures that all transmissions used in the location processing were received from the same transmitter and from the same transmission.
The prefeired embodiments of the prior inventions had several limitations, however.
First, either only one antenna per antemia site (or cell site) is used, or the data from two orfour diversity antennas were first consbined at the antenna site (or cell site) prior to transmission to the central site. Additionaily, aII antenna sites that rcceived the iransmission sent data frames to the central site, even if the DSS later discarded the data frames. Thus, some communications bandwidth may have been wasted sending data that was not used.
The present inventors have determined that while a minimum of two, or three sites are required in order determine location, the actual selection of antennas and SCS's 10 to use in location processing can have a signifi.cant effect on the results of the location processing. In addition, it is advantageous to include the means to use more than one antenna at each SCS 10 in the location processing. The reason for using data from multiple antennas at a cell site independently in the location processing is that the signal received at each antenna is uniquely affxud by multipath, fading, and other disturbances. It is well known in the fie:.d that when two antenaas are separated in distance by more than one wavelength, then each antenna will receive the signal on an independent path. Therefore, there is frequently additional and unique information to be gained about the location of the wireless umismitter by using multiple antennas, and the ability of the Wireless Location Syster.z to mitigate multipath is enhanced accordingly.
It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide an improved method for using the signals received from more than or.:e antenna at ar. SCS 10 in the location processing.
It is a further object to provide a methcid to improve the dynamic process used to select the cooperating antennas and SCS's 10 used in the location processing: The first object is achieved by providing means within the SCS 10 to select and use any segment of data collected from any number of antenna;; at an SCS in the location processing.
As described eariier, each antenna at a eel ( site is connected to a receiver intemal to the SCS
10. Each receiver converts signals received from the antenna into a digital forrs, and then stores the digitized signals temporarily in a memory in the receiver. The TLP
12 has been p: ovided with means to direct any SC.S 10 to retrieve segments of data from the temporary memory of any receiver, an+i to provide the data for use in location processing.
The second object is achieved by prov, ding means within the Wireless Location System to monitor a large number of antennas for reception of the traztsmission that the Wireless Location System desires to locate, and then selecting a smaller set of antennas for use in location processing based upon a predeteanined set of parameters. One example of this selection process is represented by the flowchart of Figure 8:
a wireless transmitter initiates a tran:anission on either a control channel or a voice channel (step S90);
the transmission, is received at multiple antennas and at multiple SCS's 10 in the Wireless Location System (step S51);
the transmission is converted into a cligital format in the receiver connected to each antenna (step S92);
the digital data is stored in a memory in each SCS 10 (step S93);
the transmission is demodulated at a: least one SCS 10A and the channel number on which the transmission occurred attd the cell site and sector serving the wireless transmitter is determined (step S94);
I I
based upon the serving cell site and sector, one SCS l0A is designated as the 'primary SCS 10 for processing that transmi;ssion (step S95);
the primary SCS I OA determines a tinnestamp associated with the demodulated data (step S96);
the Wireless Location System deteradnes whether to begin location processing for the tzansmission (step S97);
if location processing is triggered, the Wireless Location System determines a candidate list of SCS's 10 and antennas to use in the location processing (step S98);
each candidate. SCS/antenna measures and reports several parameters in the channel number of the transmission and at the time of the timestanmp detennii.:ed by the primary SCS l0A (step S99);
the Wireless Location System orders the candidate SCS/antennas using specified criteria and selects a reference SCS/antenna and a processing list of SCS/antennas to use in the location processing (step S 100); and the Wireless Location System proceeds with location proccssing as described earlier, using data from the processing list of SCS/antennas (step S101).
Selecting Primarv SCS/Antenna The process for choosing the 'primary' SCS/antenna is critical, because the candidate list of SCS's 10 and antennas 10-1 is determined in part based upon the designation of the primary SCS/antenna.. When a wireles:. transtnitter makes a transmission on a particular RF channel, the transmission frequently can propagate many miles before the signal attenuates below a level at which it can be demodulated. Therefore, there are frequently many SCS/antennas capable of demodulating the signal. This especially occurs is urban and suburban areas where the frequency re-use pattem of many wireless cornmunications systems can be quite dense. For example, because of the high usage rate of wireless and the dense eell site spacing, the present inventors have tested wireless communications systems in which the same RF control channel and digital color code were used on cell sites spaced about one mile apart. Because the Wireless Location System is independently demodulating these transmissions, the Wireless Location System frequently can demodulate the same trinsmission at two, three, or more separate SCS/antennas. The Wireless Location System detects that the same transmission has been demodulated multiple times at multiple SCS/antennas when the Wireless Location System receives multiple demodulated data fratnes sent from different SCS/antenr:as, each with a number of bit errots below a predetermined bit error threshold, and with the demodulated data matching within an acceptable limit of bit errors, and all occurring within a predetermined interval of tinzc:.
When the Wireless Location System detects demodulated data from multiple SCS/antennas, it examines the followirig parameters to determine which SCS/anterina shall be designated the primary SCS: average SNR over the transmission interval used for location processing, the variance in the SNR over the same interval, correlation of the beginning of the received transmission against a pure pre-cursor (i.e. for ANiPS, the dotting and Barker code), the number af bit errors in the demodulated data, and the magnitude and rate of change of the Sr1R from just before the on-set of the transmission to the on-set of the transmission, as well as other similar parameters. The average SNR is typically detcrtnined at each SCS/anteima either over the entire length of the transr:-tission to be used for location processing, or over a shorter interval. The average SNR ovcr the shorter interval can be determined by r erforming a correlation with the dotting secuence and/or Barker code and/or sync word, clepending on the particular air interface protocol, and over a short range of time before, during, and after the timestamp reported by cach SCS 10. The time range may typically be +/-200 microseconds centered at the timestamp, for example. The Wireless Location System will eenerally order the SCS/antennas using the following criteria, each of which may be weighted (multiplied by an appropriate factor) when combining the criteria to determine the final decision:
SCS/antennas with a lower number of bit errors are preferraj to SCS/antennas with a higher number of bit errors, average SNR for a given SCS/aitenna must be greater than a predetemzined threshold to be designattd as the primary; SCS/antennas with highcr average SNR are preferred over those with lower averagc SNR; SCS/antennas with lower SNR
vari..nce are preferred to those with higher SNR variance; and SCS/antennas with a faster SNR
rate of change at the on-set of the transaiission are preferred to those with a slower rate of change. The weighting applied to each of these criteria may be adjusted by the operator of the Wireless Location System to suit the particular design of each system.
The candidate list of SCS's 10 and anteaznas 10-1 are selected using a predetcrmined set of criteria based,= for example, upon knowledge of the types of cell sites, types of antennas at the cell sites, geometry of the antennas, and a weighting factor that weights certain antennas more than other antennas. The weighting factor takes into account knowledge of the terrain in which the VL''ireless Location System is operating, past empirical data on the contribution of each antenna has made to good location estimates, and other factors that may be specific to each different WLS installation. In one embodiment, for example, the Wireless Location System may select the candidate list to include all SCS's 10 up to a maximum r.umber of sites (max number of sites) that are closer than a predefined maximum radius from the primary site (max_radius_fromPrim,ary). For example, in an urban or suburban environment, where there may be a large number of cell sites, the max number of sitcs may be limited to nineteen. Nineteen sites would include the primary, the,frst ring of six sites surrounding the primary (assuming a classic hexagonal distribution of cell sites), and the next ring of twelve sites surrounding the first ring. This is depicted in Figure 9. In another embodiment, in a suburban or rural enviromnent, max tadius from_primary may be set to 40 miles to ensure that the widest possible set of candidate SCS/antennas is available.
The Wireless Location System is providrd with=means to limit the total number of candidate SCS's 10 to a maximum nuinixer (max_number candidates), although each candidate SCS may be permitted to choose the best port from among its available antennas. This lunits the maximum time spent by the Wireless Location System processing a partieular location. Max nrunber candidates may be set to thirty-two, for example, which means that in a typical lhree sector wireless cotnmunications system with diversity, up to 32*6 = 192 total antenwLs could be considered for location processing for a particular transmission. In order to limit the time spent processing a particular location, the Wireless Location System is provided with means to limit the number of antennas used in the location processing to max nttmber antennasprocessed.
Max_number antennas_processed is geiierally less than max number candidates, and is typically set to sixteen.
While the Wireless Location System is provided with the ability to dynamically determine the candidate list of SCS's 10 and antennas based upon the predetermined set of criteria described above, the Wireless Location System can also store a fixed candidate list in a table. Thus, for each cell site anc, sector in the wireless communications system.
the Wireless Location System has a separate table that defines the candidate list of SCS's and antennas 10-1 to use whenever a wireless transmitter initiates a transmission in 10 that cell site and sector. Rather than dynatnically choose the candidate SCSiantennas each time a location request is triggered, the Wireless Location System reads the candidate list directly from the table when location prccessing is initiated.
In general, a large number of candidate SCS's 10 is chosen to provide the Wi~
eless Location System with sufficient opportulity and ability to measure and rritigate multipath. On any given transmission, aiiy one or more particular antennas at one or more SCS's 10 may receive signals that have been affected to varying degrecs by multipath.
Therefore, it is advantageous to provide -:his means within the Wire:ess Location System to dynamically select a set of antennas which may have received less multipath than other antennas. The Wireless Location System uses various techniques to mitigate as much muitipath as possible from any received signal; however it is frequently prudent to choose a set of antennas that contain the least amount of multipath..
Choosing Reference and Cooperating SC'S/Antennas In choosing the set of SCS/anteanas to use in location processi.~g, the Wireless Locatioii System orders the candidate SCS/antennas using several criteria, including for example:
average SNR over the transmission interval used for location processing, the variance in the SNR over the same interval, correlad on of the beginning of the received transmission against a pure pre-cursor (i.e. for AMPS., the dotting and Barker code) and/or demodulated data from the primary SCS/antenna, the time of the on-set of the transmission relative to the on-set report:d at the SCS/antenna at which.the transmission WO 00/41403 PCTiUS99r_9505 was demodulated, and the magnitude aid rate of change of the SNR from just before the on-set of the transmission to the on-set of the transrnission, as well as other similar parameters. The average SNR is typically determined at each SCS, and for each antenna in the candidate list either over the entfi-e length of the transnission to be used for-location processing; or over a shorter interval. The average SNR over the shorter interval can be determined by performing a correlation with the dotting sequence and/or Barker code and/or sync word, depending on the particular air interface protocol, and over a short range of time before, during, and after the timestamp reported by the primary SCS
10. The time range may typically be +/== 200 microseconds centered at the timestamp, for 1.0 example. The Wireless Location Systern will generally order the candidate SCS/antennas using the following criteria, each of which may be weighted when combining the criteria to detennine the final decision: averagt, SNR for a given SCS/antenna must be greater than a predetermined threshold to be used in location processing; SCS/antennas with higher average SNR are preferred over those with lower average SNR;
SCS/antennas with lower SNR variance are preferred to those with higher SNR variance;
SCS/antennas with an on-set closer to the on-set reported by the demodulating SCS/antcnna are prefcrned to those with an on-set more ciistant in time; SCS/antennas with a faster SNR
rate of change are preferred to those with a slower rate of change;
SCS/antennas with lower incremental weighted GDOP are preferred over those with higher incremental weighted GDOP, where the weighting ::s based upon estimated path loss from the primary SCS. The weighting applied to each of these preferences may be adjusted by the operator of the Wireless Location System to sui1. the particuIar design of each system.
The number of different SCS's 10 used in the location processing is maximized up to a predetermined limit; the number of antennas used at each SCS 10 in limited to a predeternined limit;
and the total number of SCS/antennas ttsed is limited to max number antennasnrocessed. The: SCS/antenna with the highest ranking using the above described process is designated ws the reference SCS/antenaa for location processing.
Best Port Selection Within an SCS 10 Frequently, the SCS/antennas in the candidate list or in the list to use in location processing will include only one or two arLtennas at a particular SCS 10. In these cases, the Wireless Location System may permit the SCS 10 to choose the "best port"
from all or some of the antennas at the particular S CS 10. For example, if the Wireless Location System chooses to use only one antenna ai: a first SCS 10, then the first SCS
10 may select the best antenna port from the typical six antenna ports that are connected to that SCS 10, or it may choose the best antenna port from among the two antenna ports ofjust one sector of the cell site. The best antcnn,i port is chosen by using the same process and comparing the same parameters as described above for choosing the set of SCS/antennas to use in location processing, except that all of the antennas being considered for best port are all in the same SCS 10. In comparing z.ntennas for best port, the SCS 10 may also optionally divide the received signal into segments, and then measure the SNR
separately in each segment of the received signal. Thm, the SCS 10 can optionally choose the best antenna port with highest SNR either by (i) using the antenna port with the most segments with the highest SNR, (ii) averal;ing the SNR in all segments and using the antenna port with the highest average SNP:4 or (iii) using the antenna port with the highest SNR in any one segmenL
Detection and Recoverv From Collisions Because the Wireless Location System wil l use data from many SCS/antenna ports in location processing, there is a chance that -he received signal at one or more particular SCS/antenna ports contains energy that is co-channel interference from another wireless transmitter (i.e. a partial or full collision between two separate wireless transmissions has occurred). There is also a reasonable probability that the co-channel interference has a much higher SNR than the signal from the target wireless transmitter, and if not detected by the Wiieless Location System, the co-c:aannel interference may cause an incorrect choice of best antenna port at an SCS 10, teference SCS/antenna, candidate SCS/antenna, or SCS/antenna to be used in location processing. The co-channel interferencL
may also cause poor TDOA and FDOA results, leading to a failed or poor location estimate. The probability of collision increases with the density of cell sites in the host wireless communications system; especially in- dense suburban or rural environments where the frequencies are re-used often and wireless usage by subscribers is high.
Therefore, the Wireless Location System includes means to detect and recover from the s types of coIlisions described above. Foi- example, in the process of selecting a best port, reference SCS/antenna, or candidate SC:S/antenna, the Wireless Location System determines the average SNR of the received signal and the variance of the SNR
over the inteival of the transmission; when the variance of the SNR is above a predetermined threshold, the Wireless Location Systeni assigns a probability that a collision has occurred. If the signal received at an SCS/antenna has increased or decreased its SNR in a single step, and by an amount greater than a predetermined thresrold, the Wireless Location System assigns a probability that a collision has occurred. Further, if the average SNR of the signal received at a renzote SCS is greater than the average SNR that would be predicted by a propagation madel, given the cell site at which the wireless transmitter initiated its transmission and, the known uansrnit power levels and anteana patterns of the transmitter and receive antennas, the Wireless Location System assigns a probability that a collision has occurred. If the probability that a collision has occun-ed is above a predetermined threshold, then ttie Wireless Location System performs the further processing described below to verify whether and to what extent a collision may have impaired the received signal at an SCS/2ntcnna. T"ne advantage of assigning probabilities is to. reduce or eiiminate extra processinl; forthe majority of transmissions for which collisions have not occurred. It should b; noted that the threshold levels, assigned probabilities, and other details of the collision detection and recovery processes described herein are configurable, i.e., selected based on the particular application, environment, system variables, etc., that would affect iheir selection.
For received transrnissions at an SCS/antenna for which the probability of a collision is above the predetermined threshold and before using RF data from a particular antenna port in a reference SCS/antenna determination, best port deterniination or in location processing, the Wireless Location Systerz preferably verifies that the RF data from each antenna port is from the correct wireless transmitter. This is determined, for Oxample, by WO 00/41403 PCT/tiS99/29505 demodulating segments of the received signal to verify, for example, that the MIN, MSID, or other ident7fying information is correct or that the dialed digits or other message characteristics match those rtsceived by the.SCS/antenna that initially demodulated the transmission. The Wireless Location System may also correlate a short segment of the received signal at an aittenna port with the signal received at the primary SCS 10 to verify that the correlation result is above a predetermined threshold. If the Wireless Location System detects that the variance in the SNR over the entire length of the transmission is above a pre-detennined threshold, the Wireless Location System may divide the t:ransmission into segments and test each segment as described herein to determine whether the energy in that segment is primarily from the signal from the wireless transmitter for which -location processing has been selected or from an interfering transmitter.
The Wireless Location System may choose to use the RF data from a particular SCS/antenna in location processing ev:n if the Wireless Location System has detected that a partial collision has occun-ed at that SCS/antenna. In these cases, the SCS 10 uses the means described above to identify,:hat portion of the received transr.ussion which represents a signal from the wireless transmitter for which location processing has been selected, and that portion of the receivtx} transmission which contains co-channel interference. The Wireless Location System may comtnand the SCS 10 to send or use only selected segments of the received transmission that do not contain the co-channel interference. When determining the TDOA and FDOA for a baseline using only selected segments from an SCS/antenna, the Wireless Location System uses only the , corresponding segments of the tTansmission as received at the reference SCS/antenna.
The Wireless Location System may continue to use all segments for baselines in which no collisions were detected. In many c<<ses, the Wireless Location System is able to complete location processing and achieve an acceptable location error using only a portion of the transmission. This inventive ability to select the appropriate subset of the received tm+s**+ission and perform locasion processing on a segment by scg:nent basis enables the Wireless Location System to successfully complete location precessing i.n cases that might have failed using previ ous techniques.
WO 00/41403 PCT/'US99/29505 Multiple Pass Location Processing Certain applications may require a verr fast estimate of the general location of a wireless transmitter, followed by a more accurate estimate of the location that can be sent subsequently. This can be valuable, for example, for E9-1-1 systems that handle wireless calls and must make a call routing decision very quickly, but can wait a little longer for a more exact location to be displayed upon the E9-1-1 call-taker's electronic map terminal.
The Wireless Location System supports these applications with an inventive multiple pass location processing mode.
.10 In many cases, location accuracy is enhanced by using longer segments of the transmission and increasing the processing gain through longer integration intervals. But longer segments of the transmission require longer processing periods in the SCS 10 and TLP 12, as well as longer time periods for transmitting the RF data across the communications interface from the SCS 10 to the TLP 12. Therefore, the Wireless Location System includes means to identify those transmissions that require a fast but rough estimate of the location followed. by more complete location processing that produces a better location estimate. Th+: Signal of Interest Table includes a flag for each Signal of Interest that requires a multiple pass location approach. This flag specifies the maximum amount of time permitted by the requesting location k,;plication for the first estimate to be sent, as well as the maxi~num amount of time permitted by the requesting location application for the final location estimate to be sent. The Wireless Location System performs the rough location estimate by selecting a subset of the transmission for which to perform location processing. "'he Wireless Location System may choose, for example, the segment that was identified at the primary SCS/antenna with the highest average SNR. After the rough location estimate has been determined, using the methods described earlier, but with only a subse: of the transmission, the TLP 12 forwards the location estimate to the AP 14, which then forwards the rough estimate to th;-. requesting application with a flag indicating that the estimate is only rough. The Wirelc::ss Location System then performs its standard location processing using all of the aforci nentioned methods, and forwards this location estimate with a flag_indicating the final status of this WO 00/41403 PCT/'uS99/29505 location estimate. The Wireless Location System may perform the rough location estimate and the final location estimate sequentially on the same DSP in a TLP
12, or may perform the location processing in, parallel on different DSP's. Parallel processing may be necessary to meet the maximu=n time requirements of the requesting location applications. The Wireless Location System supports different maximum time requirements from different location applications for the same wireless transmission.
Very Short Baseline TDOA
The Wireless Location System is dcsigaed to operate in urban, suburban, and rural areas.
io In rural areas, when there are not sufficient cell sites available from a single wireless carrier, the Wireless Location System can be deployed with SCS's 101ocated at the cell sites of other wireless carriers or at othcr types of towers, including AM or FM radio station, paging, and two-way wireless towers. In these cases, rather than sharing the existing antennas of the wireless carrie; the Wireless Location System may require the installation of appropriate antennas, filters, and lownoise amplifiers to match the frequency band of the wireless transmilxers of interest to be located. For example, an AM
radio station tower may require the addition of 800 MHz antennas to locate cellular band transmitters. There may be cases, however, where no additional towers of any type are available at reasonable cost and the Wixless Location System must be deployed on just a few towers of the wireless carrier. In these cases, the Wireless Location System supports an antenna mode known as very short t-asefine TDOA. This antenna mode becomes active when additional anteanas are installed on a single cell site tower, whereby the antennas are placed at a distance of less, than one wavelength apart. This may require the addition ofjust one antenna per cell site: sector such that the Wireless Locat:on System uses one existing receive antenna in a sector and one additional antenna that has been placed next to the existing receive anteama. Typically, the two antennas in the sector are oriented such that the primary axes, or :,ine of direction, of the main beams are parallel and the spacing between the two antenna elements is known with precision. In addition, the two RF paths from the antenna elentents to the receivers in the SCS 10'are calibrated.
WO 00/41403 PCT/L'S99/29505 In its normal mode, the Wireless Location System determines the TDOA and FDOA
for pans of antenna that are separated by rriany wavelengths. For a TDOA on a baseline using antennas from two difference cell sites, the pairs of antennas are separated by thousands of wavelengths. For a TDOA. on a baseline using antennas at the same cell site, the pairs of antennas are separated by tc:ns of wavelengths. In either case, the TDOA
determination effectively results in a hyperbolic line bisecting the baseline and passing through the location of the wireless transnaitter. When antennas are separated by multiple wavelengths, the received signal has taken independent paths from the wireless transmitter to each antenna, including experiencing different multipath and Doppler shifts. However, when two antennas are closer than one wavelength, the two received signals have taken essentially the same .:)ath and experienced the same fading, multipath, and Doppler shift. Therefore, the TDOA, and FDOA processing of the Wireless Location System typically produces a Doppler shift of zero (or near-zero) hertz, and a time difference on the order of zero to one n2nosecond. A time difference that short is equivalent to an unambiguous phase difference between the signals received at the two antetma.s on the very short baseline. For example, at 834 MHz, the wavelength of an AMFS reverse control channel transmission is about 1.18 feet. A time difference of 0.1 nanoseconds is equivalent to a received phase difference of about 30 degees.
In this case, the TDOA measurement produces a hyperbola that is essentially a straight line, still passing through the location of the wire;.ess transmitter, and in a direction that is rotated degrees from the direction of the parallel lines formed by the two antcnnas on the very short baseline. When the results of this very short baseline TDOA at the single cell site are combined with a TDOA measuremeit on a baseline between two cell sites, the Wireless Location System can determine. a location estimate using only two cell sites.
Bandwidth Monitoring Method For InlprovinQ Location Accuracy AMPS cellular transmitters presently co mprise the large majority of the wireless transmitters used in the U.S. and AM.PS reverse voice channel u-ansmissions are generally FM signals modulated by both. voice and a supervisory audio tone (SAT). The voice modulation is standard FM, and is directly proportional to the speaking voice of the person using the wireless transmitter. In a typiczl conversation, each person speaks less that 35% of the time, which means that.most of the time the reverse voice channel is not being modulated due to voice. With or without voice, the reverse channel is continuously modulated by SAT, which is used by tlie wireless communications system to monitor channel status. The SAT modulation rue is only about 6 KHz. The voice channels support in-band nmessages that are usec: for hand-off control and for other reasons, such as for establishing a 3-way call, for answering a second incoming call while already on a first call, or for responding to an 'audil' message from the wireless communications system. All of these messages, though carried on the voice channel, have characteristics similar to the control channel messages. These messages are transmitted infrequently, and i o location systems have ignored these msssages and focused on the more prevalent SAT
transmissions as the signal of interest.
In view of the above-described difficulties presented by the limited bandwidth of the FM
voice and SAT reverse voice channel signals, an object of the present invention is to provide an improved method by whicb reverse voice channel (RVC) signals may be utilized to locate a wireless transmitter, particuiarly in an emergency situation. Another object of the invention is to provide a location method that allows the location system to avoid making location estimates using RVC signals in situations in which it is likely that the measurement will not meet prescribed accuracy and reliability requirements. This saves system resources and improves the location system's overall efficiency.
The improved method is based upon two techniqtus. Figure 1 OA is a flowchart of a first method in accordance with the present invention for measuring location using reverse voice channel signals. The method cor.zprises the following steps:
(i) It is first assumed that a user with a wireless transmitter wishes to be located, or wishes to have his location upc.ated or improved upon. This may be the case, for example; if the wireless user hiL.s dialed "911" and is setlaing emergency assistancm It is therefore also assumed that the user is coherent and in communication with a centrally located dispatcher.
1 I i (ii) When the dispatcher desires a location update for a particular wireless transmitter, the dispatcher sends a location =spdate command with the identity of the wireless transmitter to the Wireless Location Systeni over an application interface.
(iii) The Wireless Location System responds to the dispatcher with a confirmation that the Wireless Location Systsnn has queried the wireless communications system and has obtained the voice channel assignmcnt for the wireless transmitter.
(iv) The dispatcher instructs the wireless user to dial a 9 or more digit number and then the "SEND" button. This s:quence may be something like "123456789" or "911911911 ". Two funetions happen to the reverse voice channel when the wireless user dial a sequence of at least 9 digits and then the "SEND" button.
First, especially for an AMPS collular voice channel, the dialing of digits causes the sending of dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) tones over the voice channel.
The modulation index of DTNIF tones is very high and during the sending of each digit in the DTMF sequence wiLE typically push the bandwidth of the transmitted signal beyond +/- 10 KHz. The :;econd function occurs at the pressing of the "SEND" button. Whether or not the wireless user subscribes to 3-way calling or other special featvres, the wireless transmitterwill send a message over the voice using a"blank and burst" mode where the transmitter briefly stops sending the FM voice and SAT, and instead sends a bursty message modulated in the same manner as the control channel (10 Kbits Manchester). If the wireless user dials less than 9 digits, the message will be comprised of approximately 544 bits.
If the wireless user dials 9 or more digits, the message is comprised of approximately 987 bits.
(v) After notification by the dispatcl:.er, the Wireless Location System monitors the bandwidth of the tiansmitted sig:-lal in the voice channel. As discussed earlier, when only-the SAT is being transmitted, and even if voice and SAT are being transmitted, there may not be suiEcient bandwidth in the transmitted signal to calculate a high quality location estimate: Therefore, the Wireless Location System conserves location processing resources and waits until the transmitted signal exceeds a predetermined tiandwidth. This may be, for example, set somewhere in the range of 8 KHz to 12 KHz. When the DTMF dialed digits are WO 00/41403 PC'T/US99/29505 sent or when the bursty message is sent, the bandwidth would typically exceed the predetermined bandwidth. In fact, if the wireless transmitter does transmit the DTI~g' tones during dialing, the bandwidth would be expected to exceed the predetermined bandwidth multiple times. This would provide multiple opportunities to perfonn a location estimate. If the DTNIF tones are not sent during dialing, the bursty message is still sent at the time of pressing "SEND", and the bandwidth would typicaly exceed the predetermined threshold.
(vi) Only when the transmitted bandwidth of the signal exceeds the predetermined bandwidth, the 'Vireless Location System initiates location processing.
'10 Figure l OB is a flowchart of another method in accordance with the present invention for measuring location using reverse voice -hannel signals. The method comprises the following steps:
(i) It is first assumed that a user with a wireless transmitter wishes to be located, or wishes to have their location upciated or improved upon. This may be the case, for example, if the wireless user has dialed "911" and is seeking emergency assistance. It is assumed that the user may not wish to dial digits or may not be able to dial any digits in accordance with the previous method.
(ii) When the dispatclter desires a location update for a particular wireless transmitter user, the dispatcher sends a locaaon update command to the Wireless Location System over an application intaface with the identity of the wireless transmitter.
(iii) The Wireless Location Systcm :;esponds to the dispatcher with a confirmation.
(iv) The Wireless Location Systcm commands the wireless communications system to make the wireless transmitter trmsnit by sending an "audit" or similar message io the wireless traasmitter. The auclit message is a mechanism by which the wireless communications system can obtain a response from the wireless transmitter without requiring an action by tlie end-user and without causing.the wireless traasmitter to ring or othawise ,tlert. The receipt of an audit message causes the wireless transmitter to respond with an "audit response" message on the voice charmel.!.
(v) After notification by the dispatche:-, the Wireless Location System monitors the bandwidth of the transmitted sign2l in the voice channel. As discussed earlier, when only the SAT is being transazitted, and even if voice and SAT are being transmitted, there may not be sufficient bandwidth in the transmitted signal to calculate a high quality location estimate. Therefore, the radio location conserves location processing resources and -waits until the tiansmitted signal exceeds a predetermined bandwidth. This may be, for example, set somewhere in the range of 8 KHz to 12 KHz. When the audit response message is sent, the bandwidth would typically exceed the predetc:rnzined bandwidth.
(vi) Only when the transmitted bandwidth of the signal exceeds the predetermined bandwidth, the Wireless Location Systetn initiates location processing.
Estimate Combination Method For Improving_Location Accuracy The accuracy of the location estimate provided by the WireIess Location System may be improved by combining multiple statistic,-dly-independaat location estimates made while the wireless transmitter is maintaining its position. Even whea a wireless transmitter is perfectly stationary, the physical and RF emvironment around a wireless transmitter is constantly changing. For example, vehicles may change their position or another wireless transmitter which had caused a collision d.uring one location estimate may have stopped transmitting or changed its position so as to no longer eollide during subsequent location estimates. The location estiinate provided by the=Wireless Location System will therefore change for each transmission, even if con:secutive transmissions are made within a very short period of time, and each location eslimate is statistically independent of the other estimates, particularly with respect to the errors caused by the changing environment.
When several consecutive statistically inc.ependent location estimates are made for a wireless transntitter that has not changed ::ts position, the location estimates will tend to cluster about the true position. The Wireless Location System combines the location estimates using a weighted average or other similar mathematical construct to detennine the improved estimate. The use of a weig;ited average is aided by the assignment of a quality factor to each independent location estimate. This quality factor may be based 1 I- , upon, for example, the correlation values, confidence interval, or other similar measurements derived from the location processing for each independent estimate. The Wireless Location System optionally uses sevcral methods to obtain multiple independent uansmissions from the wireless transmitter, including (i) using its interface to the wireless communieations system for the Make Transmit command; (ii) using multiple consecutive bursts from a time slot basec, air interface protocol, such as TDMA or GSM;
or (iii) dividing a voice channel transmis:sion into multiple segments over a period of time and performing location processing indel3endently for each segment. As the Wirelcss Location System increases the number o:' independent location estimates being combined into the final location estimate, it monitors a statistic indicating the quality of the cluster.
If the statistic is below a prescribed threshold value, then the Wireless Location System assumes that the wireless transmitter is niaintaining its position. If the statistic rises above the prescribed threshold value, the Wireless Location System assume that the wireless transmitter is not maintaining its posit:ion and therefore ceases to perform additional location estimaies..The statistic indicating the quality of the cluster may be, for example, a standard deviation calculation or a root: mean square (RMS) calculation for the individual location estimates being combincd together and with respect to the dynamically calculated combined locatic-n esdmate=. When reporting a location record to a requesting application, the Wireless Location System indicates, using a field in the location record, the number of independ:nt location estimate combined together to produce the reported location estimate_ Another exemplary process for obtaizung and combining multiple location estimates will now be explained with reference to Figures 11A=11D. Figures 11A,11B and 11C
schematically depict the well-known "origination", "page response," and "audit"
sequences of a wireless communication:; systeat. As shown in Figure I lA, the origination sequence (initiated by the wireless phone to make -a call) may require two transmissions from the wireless transmitter, an "originate" signal and an "order confirmation" sipal.
The order confirmation signal is sent in response to a voice channel assignment L-om the wireless communications system (e.g., IriSC). Similarly, as shown in Figure 1 1B, a page sequence may involve two transmissions from the wireless taansmitter. The page WO 00/41403 PCTIti599/29505 sequence is initiated by the wireless communications system, e.g., when the wireless transmitter is called by another.phone. Alter being paged, the wireless transmitter transmits a page response; and then, after being assigned a voice channel, the wireless transmitter transmits an order confumatien signal. The audit process, in conttast, elicits a single reverse transmission, an audit response signal. An audit and audit response sequence has the benefit of not ringing thi. wireless transmitter which is responding.
The manner in which these sequences ma;y be used to locate a phone with improved accuracy will now be explained. According to the present invention, for example, a stolen phone, or a phone with a stolen serial nuniber, is repeatedly pinged with an audit signal, which forces it to respond with multiple audit responses, thus permitting the phone to be located with greater accuracy. To use Lie audit sequence, however, the Wircl,~ss Location System sends the appropriate commands iising its interface to the wireless communications system, which sends the audit message to the wireless transmitter. The is Wireless Location System can also force a call terrnination (hang up) and tiiya call the wireless transmitter back using the standard ANI code. The call can be terr,:iijated either by verbally instructing the mobile user to disconnect the calI, by disconnecti..; the call at the landline end of the call, or by sending an artificial over-the-air disconnect message to the base station. This over-the-air disconnect message simulates the pressing of the "END" button on a mobile unit. The call-back invokes the above-described paging sequence and forces the phone to initiate two transmissions that can be utiliz.-d to make location estimates.
Referring now to Figure I iD, the inventive high accuracy location method vrill now be summarized. First, an initial location estiniate is made. Next, the above-desc:ibed audit or "hang up and call back" process is employed to elicit a responsive transmission from the mobile unit, and then a second location estimate is made. Whether the audit or "hang up and call back" process is used will depend. on whether the wireless communications system and wireless mnsmitter have both implemented the audit functionality.
Steps second and third steps are repeated to obt<<in however many independent location estimates are deemed to be necessary or desirable, and ultimately tha multiple statistically-independent location estima::es are combined in an average, weighted average, or similar mathematical construct to obtain an improved estimate. :
he use of a weighted average is aided by the assignment of a quality factor to each independent location estimate. This quality factor ma,+ be based upon a correlation percentage, confidence interval, or other similar measurements derived from the location calculation process.
Bandwidth Synthesis Method For Improving Location Accuracy The Wireless Location System is further capable of improving the accxacy of location lo estimates for wireless tiransmitters whose bandwidth is relatively narrow using a technique of artificial bandwidth synthesis. This technique can applied, for example, to those transmitters that use the AMPS, NAMPS, TDMA, and GSM air interface protocols and for which there are a large number of individual RF channels available for use by the wireless transmitter. For exemplary purposes, the following description shall refer to AMPS-specific details; however, the desaiption can be easily altered to apply to other protocols. This method relies on the principle that each wireless transmittcr is operative to transnmit only nazrowband signals at frxluencies spanning a predefined wide band of frequencies that is wider than the bandwidth of the individual narrowband signals transmitted by the wireless uananitter. This method also relies on the aforementioned interface between the Wireless Location System and the wireless communications system over which the WLS can command the mireless communications system to make a wireless transmitter handoff or switch to another frequency or RF channe:. By issuing a series of commands, the Wireless Location System can force the wireless transmitter to switch sequentially and in a controllcsl manner to a series of RF channels, allowing the WLS effectively to synthesize a wider band received signal from the series of narrowband transmitted signals for the purpose of location processing_ In a presently preferred embodiment of tlie invention, the bandwidth synthesis means includes means for determining a wideband phase versus frequency characteristic of the tansmissions from the wireless transznitter. For example, the narrowband signals typically have a bandwidth of approximately 20 KHz and the predefined wide band of WO 00/41403 PCTlUS99!29505 frequencies spans approximately 12.5 Nfliz, which in this example, is the spectrum allocated to each cellular carrier by the KIC. With bandwidth synthesis, the resolution of the TDOA measurements can be increa.sed to about 1/12.5 MHz; i.e., the available time resolution is the reciprocal of the effecnvi, bandwidth.
A wireless transmitter, a calibration transmitter (if used), SCS's l 0A, l OB
and 10C, and a TLP 12 are shown in Figure 12A. The location of the calibration transmitter and all three SCS's are accurately known a priori. Signals, represented by dashed arrows in Figure 12A, are transmitted by the wireless tr:}nsmitter and calibration transmitter, and received 1o at SCS's 10A, IOB and IOC, and processed using techniques previously described.
During the location processing, RF data fi-om one SCS (e.g. l OB) is cross-correlated (in the time or frequency domain) with the daa stream from another SCS (e.g. l OC) separately for each transmitter and for each pair of SCS's 10 to generate TDOA
estimates TDOA23 and TDOA13. An intermediate output of the location processing is a set of coefficients representing the complex cross-power as a function of frequency (e.g., R23).
For example, if X(f) is the Fourier transfomi of the signal x(t) received at a first site and Y(f) is the Fourier transform of the signal y(t) received at a second site, then the complex cross-power R(f)=X(f )Y*(f), where Y* is the complex conjugate of Y. The phase angle of R(f) at any frequency f equals the phase of X(f) minus the phase of Y(f).
The phase angle of R(f) may be called the fringe phase. In the absence of noise, interference, and other errors, the fiinge phase is a perfectly linear function of frequency within a (contiguous) frequency band observed; and slope of the line is minus t.ne interferometric group delay, or TDOA; the intercept of th: line at the band center frequency, equal to the average value of the phase of R(f), is called "the" fringe phase of the observation when reference is being made to the whole banc:. Within a band, the fringe phase may be considered to be a function of frequency.
The coefficients obtained for the calibration transmitter are combined with those obtained for the wireless transmitter and the combinations are analyzed to obtain calibrated TDOA
measu=ents TDOA23 and TDOA13, respectively. In the calibration process, the fringe I I
phase of the calibration transmitter is su:Otracted from the fringe phase of the wireless transmitter in order to cancel systematic errors that are common to both.
Since each original fringe phase is itself the diffexerLce between the phases of signals received at two SCS's 10, the calibration process is often called double-dff~'erencing and the calibrated result is said to be doubly-dffferenced. TDOA estimate T-ij is a maximum-likelihood estimate of the time difference of arrival (TDOA), between sites i and j, of the signal transmitted by the wireless transmitter, calibrate:d and also corrected for multipath propagation effects on the signals. TDOA estimates from different pairs of cell sites are combined to derive the location estimate. It is well known that more accurate TDOA
estimates can be obtained by observing a. wider bandwidth. It is generally not possible to increase the "instantaneous" bandwidth of the signal transmitted by a wireless transmitter, but it is possible to command a wireless sansmitter to switch from one frequency channel to another so that, in a short time, a wide bandwidth can be observed.
In a typical non-wireline cellulai system, for example, channels 313-333 are control channels and the remaining 395 chamteL, are voice chaanels. The center frequency of a wireless transmitte:r transmitting on voici: RF channel number 1(RVC 1) is 826.030 MHz and the center-to-center frequency spaciitg of successive channels of 0.030 MHz. The number of voice channels assigned to each cell of a typical s--ven-cell frequency-reuse block is about 57 (i.e., 395 divided by 7) and these channels a,re distributed throughout the 395-channel range, spaced every 7 ctmmels. Note then that each cell site used in an AMPS system. has channels that span the entire 12.5 MHz band allocated by the FCC. If, for example, we designate cells of each frequency set in a re-use pattern as cells "A"
through "G", the channel numbers assigned to the "A" cell(s) might be 1, 8, 15, 22, ..., 309; the numbers of the channels assigned to the "B" cells are determined by adding 1 to the "A" channel numbers; and so on thro ugh G.
The method begins when the wireless transmitter has been assigned to a voice RF
channel, and the Wireless Location System has triggeaed location processing for the transmissions from the wireless transmitter. As part of the location processing, the TDOA
estimates TDOA13 and TDOA23 combine:d may have, for example, a standard deviation I I
error of 0.5 microsecond. The method combining measurements from different RF
channels exploits the relation between TDOA, fringe.phase, and radio frequency. Denote the "true" value of the group delay or TE OA, i.e., the value that would be observed in the absence of noise, multipath, and any inst:uniental error, by r; similarly, denote the true value of fringe phase by 0; and denote the radio frequency by f The fringe phase 0 is related to t and f by:
-ft + n (Eq. 1) 1 o where 0 is measured in cycles, f in Hz an.d T in seconds; and n is an integer representing the intrinsic integer-eycle ambiguity of a doubly-differenced phase measurement. The value of n is unknown a priori but is the same for observations at contiguous frequencies, i.e., within any one frequency channel. The value of n is generally different for observations at separated frequencies. t can be estimated from observations in a single frequency channel- is, in effect, by fitting a straight line to the fringe phase observed as a function of frequency within the channel. The slope of the best-fitting line equals minus the desired esiimate of t. In the single-ck.annel case, n is constant and so Eq. 1 can be differentiated to obtain:
do/df = -t (Eq. 2).
Independent estimates of t are obtainabb, by straight-line fitting to ttie observations of vs. f separately for each channel, but whim two separate (non-contiguous) frequency channels are observed, a single straight line will not generally fit the observations of 0 vs.
f from both channels because, in general, the integer n has different vaiues for the two channels. However, under certain conditions, it is possible to detennine and remove the difference between these two integer values and then to fit a single straight line to the entire set of phase data spanning both cbannels. The slope of this straight line will be much better determined because it is based on a wider range of frequencies.
Under certain conditions, the uncertainty of the slope estimate is inversely proportional to the frequency span.
In this example, suppose that the wireies,i transmitter has been assigned to voice RF
channel 1. The radio frequency difference between channels 1 and 416 is so great that initially the differeace between the integt:rs n, and n416 corresponding to these channels cannot be determined. However, from the observations in either or both channels taken separately, an initial TDOA estimate zQ can be derived. Now the Wireless Location System commands the wireless communications system to make the wireless transmitter 1 o to switch from channel 1 to channel8. Tlte wireless transmitter's signal is received in channel 8 and processed to update or refine the estimate Ta. From to, the "theoretical"
fringe-phase Oo as a function of frequency can be computed, equal to (-fra).
T'ne difference between the actually observed phase 0 and the theoretical function Oo can be computed, where the actually observed pliase equals the true phase within a very small fraction, typica.tly 1/50th, of a cycle:
~-~ _-f (t-to) + nt or n8s depending on the chaazmel (Eq. 3) or 0o =-afr-nt or n8, depending on the channel (Eq. 4) wheie ~~ a ~-+ and Ot $ t-To. Equation (4) is graphed in Figure 12B, depicting the difference, Ao, betweea the observed fnn;;e phase 0 and the value ~o computed from the initial TDOA estimate to, versus frequency f for channels 1 and S.
For the 20 KHz-wide band of frequencies corresponding to channel 1, a graph of oo vs. f is typically a horizontal straight line. For ihe 20 KHz-wide band of frequencies corresponding to channel 8, the graph of iio vs. f is also horizontal straight line. The slopes of these line segments are generaliy nearly zero because the quantity (fAt) usually does not vary by a significant fraction of ~i cycle within 20 KHz, because Gs is minus the error of the estimate To. The magnitude of this error typically will not exceed 1.5 microseconds (3 times the standard deviation of 0.5 microsc-conds in this example), and the product of 1.5 microseconds and 20 KHz is under 4% o; a cycle. In Figure 12B, the graph of a~ for channel 1 is displaced vertically from the g:aph of A~ for channel 8 by a relatively large amount because the dif[erence between ni a:d n8 can be arbitrarilylarge.
This vertical displacement, or difference between the average values of 0O for channels 1 aiid 8, will (with extremely high probability) be within 0.3 cycle of the true value of the difference, ni and ng, because the product of the maximum likely magnitude of Oz (1.5 microseconds) and the spacing of chamsels 1 and 8 (210 F.:-iz) is 0.315 cycle.
In other words, the difference ni - n8 is equal to the difference betnreen the average values of Ao for channels 1 and 8, rounded to the nearest integer. After he integer difference ni - n$ is determined by this rounding procedure., the integer 0o is a.:ded for channel 8 or subtracted from eo for cha.nnel. 1. The difference between :::e average values of ao for channels 1 and 8 is generally equal to tae error in the initial TDOA estimat, , 'ro, times 210 KHz. The difference between the average values of d~ for channels I and 8 is divided by 210 KHz and the result is acidtd to -ra to obtain un estimate of r, the true value of the TDOA; this new estimate can be significantly more accurate than -to.
This frequency-stepping and TDOA-refining method can be extended to more widely spaced channels to obtain yet more accurate results. If rI is used to represent the refined result obtained from channels i and S, ta can be replaced by t} in the just-described method; and the Wireless Location System can command the wireless communications system to make the wireless transmitter switch, e.g., from channel 8 to channel 36; then ,ti can be used to determine the integer difference n$ - n36 and a TDOA
estimate can be obtained based on the 1.05 MHz freque:ncy span between channels I and 36. The estimated can be labeled t2i and the wi:reless transmitter switched, e.g., from channel 36 to 112, and so on. In principle, the full range of frequencies allocated to the cellular canier can be spanned. The channel numbers (1, 8, 36,112) used in this e-.:atnple are, of course, arbitrary. The generai principle is that an estimate of the TDOA based on a small frequency span (statting with a single channel) is used to resolve the integer ambiguity of the fringe phase difference betweea more widely separated frequeticies. The latter frequency separation should not be too large; it is limited by the uncertainry of the pni or estimate of TDOA. In general, the worst-case errorin the prior estimate multiplied by the frequency difference may not exceed 0.5 cycle.
If the verysmaliest (e.g., 210 KHz) frequency gap between the most closely spaced channels allocated to a particular ceil cannot be bridged because the worst-case uneertainty ofthe single-channel TDO.A estimate exceeds 2.38 microseconds (equal to 0.5 cycle divided by 0.210 MHz), the 'Vireless Location System commands the wireless communications system to force the wseless transmitter hand-off from one cell site to io another (e.g. from one frequency group to another), such that the frequency step is smaller. There is a possibility of misid:ntifying the integer difference between the phase differences (A~'s) for two channels, e. ;., because the wireless transmitter moved during the handoff from one channel to the otti:ier. Therefore, as a check, the Wireless Location System may reverse each handoff (e.g., a.per switching from channel 1 to channel 8, switch from channel 8 back to channel 1) and confirm that the integer-cycle difference determined has precisely the same magnitude and the opposite sign as for the "forward"
hand-off. A significantly nonzero velo-ity astrmate from the single-channel FDOA
observations can be used to extrapolati: across the time interval involved in a channel change. Ordinarily this time interval c.an be held to a small fraction of I
second. The 2o FDOA estimation error multiplied by the time intetval between channels must be small in comparison with 0.5 cycle. The Wireless Location System preferably employs a variety of redundancies and checks against integet-misidentification.
Directed Retry for 911 Another inventive aspect of the Wireless Location System relates to a "directed retry" method for use in connection w;.th a dual-mode wireless communications system supporting at least a first modt;lation method and a second modulation method. In such a situaiion, the first and second modulation methods are assumed to be used on different RF channels (i.e. channels for the wireless communications system supporting a WLS and the PCS system, respectively). It is also as..~umed that the wireless transmitter to be located is capable of suppotting both modulation WO 00/41403 PCT/'uS99/29505 methods, i.e. is capable ofdialing "911" on the wireless communications system having Wireless Location System support.
For example, the directed retry method could be used in a system in which there are an insufficierit number of base stations to support a Wireless Location System, but which is operating in a region served by a Wireless Location System associated with another wireless communications system. The "first" wireless communications systcm could be a cellular telephone sysi:em and the "second" wireless communications system could be a PCS system operating within the same territory as the firsi system. According to the inve:ntion, when the mobile transmitter is currently using the second (PCS) modulation method and attempts to originate a call to 911, the mobile transmitter is cau;ced to switch automatically to the first modulation method, and then to originate the call to 911 using the first modulation method on one of the set of RF channels prescribed for use by the first wireless communications system. In this manner, location services can be provided to customers of a PCS or like system that does is not serverl by its own Wireless Location System.
Conclusion The true scope the present invention is not limited to the presently preferred embodiments disclosed herein. For example, the foregoing disclosure of a presently preferred embodiment of a Wireless Location System uses explanatory terms, such as Signal Collection System (SCS), TDOA Location Processor (TLP), Applications Processor (AP), and the like, which shoti.d not be construed so as to limit the scope of protection of the following claims, or to otherwise imply that the inventive aspects of the Wireless Location System are limited to ,he particular methods and apparat-as disclosed.
Moreover, as will be understood by thost sicilled in the art, many of the inventive aspects disclosed herein may be applied in location systems=that are not based on TDOA
techniques. For example, the processes b;I which the Wireless Location System uses the Tasking List, etc. can be applied to non-IDOA systems. In such non-TDOA
systems, the TLP's described above would not be required to perform TDOA calculations.
Similarly, I I
the invention is not limited to systems employing SCS's constructed as described above, nor to systems employing AP's meeting a;.l of the particulars described above.
The SCS's, TLP's and AP's are, in essence, prograrnmable data collection and processing devices that could take a variety of forms without depzTting from the inventive concepts disclosed herein. Given the rapidly declining cost oi' digital signal processing and other processing functions, it is easily possible, for example, to transfer the processing for a particular function from one of the functional oiemeiits (such as the TLP) described herein to another fimctional element (such as the SC S or AP) without changing the inventive operation of the systeni. In many cases, thi: place of implementation (i.e.
the functional element) described herein is merely a desi,gner's preference and not a hard requiremcnt.
Accordingly, except as they may be expressly so Iiniited, the scope of protection of the following claims is not intended to be limited to the specific embodimen:s described above.
Claims (17)
1. An internal calibration method for a receiver system characterized by a time-and frequency- varying transfer function, wherein the receiver system is used in a wireless location system, comprising the steps of: injecting a stable, known wideband signal into the receiver system; using the wideband signal to estimate the transfer function across a prescribed bandwidth of the receiver system; and using the estimate to mitigate the variation of the transfer function on subsequent time measurements.
2. A method as recited in claim 1, wherein the internally generated wideband signal is a comb signal.
3. A method as recited in claim 2, wherein the comb signal is characterized by multiple discrete frequencies and consistent amplitude and spacing between the discrete frequencies.
4. A method as recited in claim 1, wherein the estimate of the transfer function is weighted by a quality factor prior to mitigation of the effects of the transfer function.
5. A method as recited in claim 4, wherein the estimate of the transfer function is used only if the quality factor exceeds a predetermined threshold value.
6. A method as recited in claim 5, wherein the quality factor is based on a cross correlation function before and after the transfer function.
7. A method as recited in claim 1, wherein an antenna of the receiver system is first isolated from the receiver prior to injection of the known wideband signal.
8. A method as recited in claim 7, wherein an electronically controlled RF
relay is used for isolation.
relay is used for isolation.
9. A method as recited in claim 8, wherein the known wideband signal is routed to the receiver system using the electronic RF relay.
10. An internal calibration method for calibrating a first receiver system, wherein said first receiver system is characterized by a time- and frequency-varying transfer function, said transfer function defining how the amplitude and phase of a received signal will be altered by said first receiver system, and wherein the first receiver system is utilized in a location system that is operative to determine the location of a mobile transmitter by, in part, determining a difference in time of arrival of a signal transmitted by a mobile transmitter and received by said first receiver system and another receiver system, and wherein the accuracy of the location determination is dependent, in part, upon the accuracy of time measurements made by said receiver systems, the method comprising the steps of:
(a) injecting an internally generated stable, known signal into said first receiver system;
(b) utilizing the internally generated stable, known signal to obtain an estimate of the manner in which said transfer function varies across the bandwidth of said first receiver system; and (c) utilizing the said estimate to mitigate the effects of said variation of the first transfer function on the time measurements made by the first receiver system.
(a) injecting an internally generated stable, known signal into said first receiver system;
(b) utilizing the internally generated stable, known signal to obtain an estimate of the manner in which said transfer function varies across the bandwidth of said first receiver system; and (c) utilizing the said estimate to mitigate the effects of said variation of the first transfer function on the time measurements made by the first receiver system.
11. A method as recited in claim 10, wherein the internally generated stable, known signal is a comb signal having multiple discrete frequency elements of consistent amplitude and spacing.
12. A method as recited in claim 10, wherein the estimate of the manner in which the transfer function varies across the bandwidth of the first receiver system is weighted by a quality factor prior to being used to mitigate the effects of the transfer function.
13. A method as recited in claim 12, wherein the estimate of the transfer function is used by the location system to mitigate the effect of the transfer function only if the quality factor exceeds a prescribed threshold value.
14. A method as recited in claim 12, wherein the quality factor is based upon the output of a cross-correlation function of the internally generated stable, known signal and the same signal after it has passed through the transfer function.
15. A method as recited in claim 10, wherein an antenna is first isolated from the receiver system prior to the injection of the internally generated stable, known signal.
16. A method as recited in claim 15, wherein an electronically controlled RF
relay is used to automatically isolate the antenna from the receiver system.
relay is used to automatically isolate the antenna from the receiver system.
17. A method as recited in claim 10, wherein the internally generated stable, known signal is routed to the receiver system using an electronically controlled RF
relay.
relay.
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US09/227,764 | 1999-01-08 | ||
US09/227,764 US6184829B1 (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-01-08 | Calibration for wireless location system |
CA002359797A CA2359797C (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-12-13 | Calibration for wireless location system |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA002359797A Division CA2359797C (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-12-13 | Calibration for wireless location system |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA2494886A1 CA2494886A1 (en) | 2000-07-13 |
CA2494886C true CA2494886C (en) | 2007-08-07 |
Family
ID=22854364
Family Applications (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA002359797A Expired - Lifetime CA2359797C (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-12-13 | Calibration for wireless location system |
CA002494984A Expired - Lifetime CA2494984C (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-12-13 | Calibration for wireless location system |
CA002494719A Expired - Lifetime CA2494719C (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-12-13 | Calibration for wireless location system |
CA002494886A Expired - Lifetime CA2494886C (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-12-13 | Calibration for wireless location system |
Family Applications Before (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA002359797A Expired - Lifetime CA2359797C (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-12-13 | Calibration for wireless location system |
CA002494984A Expired - Lifetime CA2494984C (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-12-13 | Calibration for wireless location system |
CA002494719A Expired - Lifetime CA2494719C (en) | 1999-01-08 | 1999-12-13 | Calibration for wireless location system |
Country Status (14)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (20) | US6184829B1 (en) |
EP (3) | EP1703296B1 (en) |
JP (2) | JP2002534695A (en) |
KR (3) | KR100694738B1 (en) |
CN (3) | CN1696731B (en) |
AT (3) | ATE404880T1 (en) |
AU (1) | AU2359000A (en) |
BR (1) | BR9917166A (en) |
CA (4) | CA2359797C (en) |
DE (3) | DE69942591D1 (en) |
ES (3) | ES2316195T3 (en) |
GB (2) | GB2387084B (en) |
IL (7) | IL144134A0 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2000041403A2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (967)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5835061A (en) | 1995-06-06 | 1998-11-10 | Wayport, Inc. | Method and apparatus for geographic-based communications service |
US8606851B2 (en) | 1995-06-06 | 2013-12-10 | Wayport, Inc. | Method and apparatus for geographic-based communications service |
GB9620082D0 (en) * | 1996-09-26 | 1996-11-13 | Eyretel Ltd | Signal monitoring apparatus |
US6169789B1 (en) * | 1996-12-16 | 2001-01-02 | Sanjay K. Rao | Intelligent keyboard system |
FI110984B (en) * | 1997-08-22 | 2003-04-30 | Nokia Corp | Procedure for detecting home region in mobile station and mobile station |
US7268700B1 (en) | 1998-01-27 | 2007-09-11 | Hoffberg Steven M | Mobile communication device |
US6338727B1 (en) * | 1998-08-13 | 2002-01-15 | Alsius Corporation | Indwelling heat exchange catheter and method of using same |
GB9823396D0 (en) * | 1998-10-27 | 1998-12-23 | Roke Manor Research | Method of and apparatus for power control |
US6229841B1 (en) * | 1998-12-11 | 2001-05-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for energy estimation in a wireless receiver capable of receiving multiple instances of a common signal |
EP1014242A1 (en) * | 1998-12-21 | 2000-06-28 | Nec Corporation | Retrieval method and apparatus for a monitoring system |
AU763571B2 (en) | 1998-12-23 | 2003-07-24 | Chase Manhattan Bank, The | System and method for integrating trading operations including the generation, processing and tracking of and trade documents |
US6463290B1 (en) * | 1999-01-08 | 2002-10-08 | Trueposition, Inc. | Mobile-assisted network based techniques for improving accuracy of wireless location system |
BR9917165A (en) * | 1999-01-08 | 2002-01-22 | Trueposition Inc | Method for use in a wireless location system and method for locating a transmitter |
US6646604B2 (en) * | 1999-01-08 | 2003-11-11 | Trueposition, Inc. | Automatic synchronous tuning of narrowband receivers of a wireless location system for voice/traffic channel tracking |
US6765531B2 (en) * | 1999-01-08 | 2004-07-20 | Trueposition, Inc. | System and method for interference cancellation in a location calculation, for use in a wireless location system |
US6873290B2 (en) * | 1999-01-08 | 2005-03-29 | Trueposition, Inc. | Multiple pass location processor |
US6184829B1 (en) * | 1999-01-08 | 2001-02-06 | Trueposition, Inc. | Calibration for wireless location system |
US7783299B2 (en) | 1999-01-08 | 2010-08-24 | Trueposition, Inc. | Advanced triggers for location-based service applications in a wireless location system |
US6483823B1 (en) * | 1999-02-16 | 2002-11-19 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Cellular/PCS CDMA system with increased sector capacity by using two radio frequencies |
US6459695B1 (en) * | 1999-02-22 | 2002-10-01 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | System and method for determining radio frequency coverage trouble spots in a wireless communication system |
US7782256B2 (en) * | 1999-03-05 | 2010-08-24 | Era Systems Corporation | Enhanced passive coherent location techniques to track and identify UAVs, UCAVs, MAVs, and other objects |
US6493380B1 (en) * | 1999-05-28 | 2002-12-10 | Nortel Networks Limited | System and method for estimating signal time of arrival |
US20010032029A1 (en) * | 1999-07-01 | 2001-10-18 | Stuart Kauffman | System and method for infrastructure design |
US6366781B1 (en) * | 1999-07-08 | 2002-04-02 | Ericsson Inc. | System and method for time of arrival based positioning during handover |
US6618588B1 (en) * | 1999-08-23 | 2003-09-09 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Methods and systems for implementation of the calling name delivery service through use of a location register in a network element in a wireless network |
US6460010B1 (en) * | 1999-09-22 | 2002-10-01 | Alcatel Canada Inc. | Method and apparatus for statistical compilation |
US6542868B1 (en) * | 1999-09-23 | 2003-04-01 | International Business Machines Corporation | Audio notification management system |
US6801762B1 (en) * | 1999-09-29 | 2004-10-05 | Nokia Corporation | Apparatus, and associated method, for placing an emergency call in a radio communication system |
US6718173B1 (en) | 1999-09-30 | 2004-04-06 | Iowa State University Research Foundation | Location information recovery and management for mobile networks |
WO2001037517A2 (en) | 1999-11-03 | 2001-05-25 | Wayport, Inc. | Distributed network communication system which enables multiple network providers to use a common distributed network infrastructure |
US6385458B1 (en) * | 1999-12-10 | 2002-05-07 | Ericsson Inc. | Priority handling of location services in a mobile communications network |
US6526322B1 (en) * | 1999-12-16 | 2003-02-25 | Sirf Technology, Inc. | Shared memory architecture in GPS signal processing |
WO2001050624A1 (en) * | 1999-12-30 | 2001-07-12 | Morphics Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus to support multi standard, multi service base-stations for wireless voice and data networks |
US6404388B1 (en) * | 2000-01-21 | 2002-06-11 | At&T Wireless Services, Inc. | Method and apparatus for enhanced 911 location using power control in a wireless system |
ATE293255T1 (en) | 2000-02-02 | 2005-04-15 | Nokia Corp | POSITIONING DETECTION |
WO2001061863A1 (en) * | 2000-02-17 | 2001-08-23 | Analog Devices, Inc. | Isolation system with analog communication across an isolation barrier |
DE10008917A1 (en) * | 2000-02-25 | 2001-08-30 | Biotronik Mess & Therapieg | Arrangement for monitoring and localizing patients |
US7142863B1 (en) * | 2000-02-25 | 2006-11-28 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method of deploying a fixed wireless access communications network such that a specified level of link performance is maintained |
DE60132078T2 (en) | 2000-03-29 | 2008-12-24 | OpenCell Corp., Houston | OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE ARCHITECTURE FOR A DISTRIBUTED MULTIPROTOCOL SYSTEM |
US6593885B2 (en) * | 2000-04-27 | 2003-07-15 | Wherenet Corp | Low cost DTOA location processing system based on multiple readers-to-single processor architecture |
US6606561B2 (en) * | 2000-05-17 | 2003-08-12 | Omega Patents, L.L.C. | Vehicle tracker including input/output features and related methods |
US7929928B2 (en) * | 2000-05-18 | 2011-04-19 | Sirf Technology Inc. | Frequency phase correction system |
US8489669B2 (en) | 2000-06-07 | 2013-07-16 | Apple Inc. | Mobile data processing system moving interest radius |
US6456234B1 (en) | 2000-06-07 | 2002-09-24 | William J. Johnson | System and method for proactive content delivery by situation location |
US8060389B2 (en) * | 2000-06-07 | 2011-11-15 | Apple Inc. | System and method for anonymous location based services |
FI108372B (en) * | 2000-06-30 | 2002-01-15 | Nokia Corp | Method and apparatus for position measurement |
US6675017B1 (en) * | 2000-06-30 | 2004-01-06 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Location blocking service for wireless networks |
US8041817B2 (en) | 2000-06-30 | 2011-10-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Anonymous location service for wireless networks |
US6738808B1 (en) * | 2000-06-30 | 2004-05-18 | Bell South Intellectual Property Corporation | Anonymous location service for wireless networks |
GB0017460D0 (en) * | 2000-07-18 | 2000-08-30 | Hewlett Packard Co | Message passing to a known location |
US7343303B2 (en) * | 2000-07-19 | 2008-03-11 | Ijet International, Inc. | Global asset risk management system and methods |
US6842737B1 (en) * | 2000-07-19 | 2005-01-11 | Ijet Travel Intelligence, Inc. | Travel information method and associated system |
US7783500B2 (en) | 2000-07-19 | 2010-08-24 | Ijet International, Inc. | Personnel risk management system and methods |
AU2001276992A1 (en) * | 2000-07-20 | 2002-02-05 | Aeptec Microsystems, Inc. | Method, system, and protocol for location-aware mobile devices |
US7796998B1 (en) | 2000-08-01 | 2010-09-14 | At&T Intellectual Property, I, L.P. | Method and system for delivery of a calling party's location |
US6625454B1 (en) | 2000-08-04 | 2003-09-23 | Wireless Valley Communications, Inc. | Method and system for designing or deploying a communications network which considers frequency dependent effects |
US7680644B2 (en) | 2000-08-04 | 2010-03-16 | Wireless Valley Communications, Inc. | Method and system, with component kits, for designing or deploying a communications network which considers frequency dependent effects |
US7039098B2 (en) * | 2000-08-07 | 2006-05-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for base station and mobile station time calibration |
AU2001284877A1 (en) * | 2000-08-15 | 2002-02-25 | University Of Maryland, College Park | Method, system, and computer program product for positioning and synchronizing wireless communications nodes |
US6587781B2 (en) * | 2000-08-28 | 2003-07-01 | Estimotion, Inc. | Method and system for modeling and processing vehicular traffic data and information and applying thereof |
DE10045547A1 (en) * | 2000-09-14 | 2002-04-04 | Infineon Technologies Ag | Method for the system-independent digital generation of mobile communication transmission signals of various mobile radio standards |
US6701329B1 (en) * | 2000-09-14 | 2004-03-02 | Microsoft Corporation | Aging and scavenging of DNS resource records |
US6973622B1 (en) | 2000-09-25 | 2005-12-06 | Wireless Valley Communications, Inc. | System and method for design, tracking, measurement, prediction and optimization of data communication networks |
US7177827B1 (en) * | 2000-10-06 | 2007-02-13 | I2 Technologies Us, Inc. | Generating an order plan for a supply chain network |
US6873998B1 (en) * | 2000-10-18 | 2005-03-29 | Navteq North America, Llc | System and method for updating a geographic database using satellite imagery |
US6414635B1 (en) | 2000-10-23 | 2002-07-02 | Wayport, Inc. | Geographic-based communication service system with more precise determination of a user's known geographic location |
US7110774B1 (en) * | 2000-10-27 | 2006-09-19 | Intel Corporation | Dual mode uplink/downlink location measurement and multi-protocol location measurement |
US6772169B2 (en) | 2000-11-09 | 2004-08-03 | Expand Beyond Corporation | System, method and apparatus for the wireless monitoring and management of computer systems |
US20020146129A1 (en) | 2000-11-09 | 2002-10-10 | Kaplan Ari D. | Method and system for secure wireless database management |
BR0115959A (en) * | 2000-11-14 | 2005-05-03 | Symbol Technologies Inc | Method and apparatus for identifying object location in communication networks |
US7296088B1 (en) * | 2000-11-17 | 2007-11-13 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for determining the geographic location of internet hosts |
JP4409749B2 (en) * | 2000-11-20 | 2010-02-03 | パイオニア株式会社 | Map display system |
US7277727B1 (en) * | 2000-11-22 | 2007-10-02 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | System and method for processing a signal |
US7383191B1 (en) * | 2000-11-28 | 2008-06-03 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for predicting causes of network service outages using time domain correlation |
US20020066038A1 (en) * | 2000-11-29 | 2002-05-30 | Ulf Mattsson | Method and a system for preventing impersonation of a database user |
US20030013415A1 (en) * | 2000-12-01 | 2003-01-16 | Takahiro Shoji | Communication terminal and method of wireless communication |
US6750818B2 (en) | 2000-12-04 | 2004-06-15 | Tensorcomm, Inc. | Method and apparatus to compute the geolocation of a communication device using orthogonal projections |
US6856945B2 (en) | 2000-12-04 | 2005-02-15 | Tensorcomm, Inc. | Method and apparatus for implementing projections in singal processing applications |
CN1159878C (en) * | 2000-12-07 | 2004-07-28 | 华为技术有限公司 | Macrodiversity-based direct retry method for CDMA system |
US20020072376A1 (en) * | 2000-12-08 | 2002-06-13 | Hans Carlsson | Systems and methods for improving positioning in a communications network |
US6845240B2 (en) | 2000-12-11 | 2005-01-18 | Grayson Wireless | System and method for analog cellular radio geolocation |
US6952158B2 (en) * | 2000-12-11 | 2005-10-04 | Kennedy Jr Joseph P | Pseudolite positioning system and method |
US7181225B1 (en) | 2000-12-19 | 2007-02-20 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | System and method for surveying wireless device users by location |
US7116977B1 (en) | 2000-12-19 | 2006-10-03 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | System and method for using location information to execute an action |
US7085555B2 (en) | 2000-12-19 | 2006-08-01 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Location blocking service from a web advertiser |
US7428411B2 (en) | 2000-12-19 | 2008-09-23 | At&T Delaware Intellectual Property, Inc. | Location-based security rules |
US7130630B1 (en) * | 2000-12-19 | 2006-10-31 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Location query service for wireless networks |
US7110749B2 (en) | 2000-12-19 | 2006-09-19 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Identity blocking service from a wireless service provider |
US7224978B2 (en) | 2000-12-19 | 2007-05-29 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Location blocking service from a wireless service provider |
US7245925B2 (en) * | 2000-12-19 | 2007-07-17 | At&T Intellectual Property, Inc. | System and method for using location information to execute an action |
US7080144B2 (en) * | 2000-12-22 | 2006-07-18 | Bell South Intellectual Property Corp. | System enabling access to obtain real-time information from a cell site when an emergency event occurs at the site |
US7995989B2 (en) * | 2000-12-29 | 2011-08-09 | Globalstar, Inc. | Method and apparatus providing suppression of system access by use of confidence polygons, volumes and surfaces in a mobile satellite system |
US7006835B2 (en) * | 2001-01-11 | 2006-02-28 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Method of and system for providing position information |
US7133909B2 (en) | 2001-01-12 | 2006-11-07 | Microsoft Corporation | Systems and methods for locating mobile computer users in a wireless network |
US6920329B2 (en) * | 2001-01-16 | 2005-07-19 | Allen Telecom | Method and system for applying wireless geolocation technology |
US7027820B2 (en) * | 2001-01-31 | 2006-04-11 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Location data validation by static entities receiving location data items by short-range communication |
US6678510B2 (en) * | 2001-02-05 | 2004-01-13 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd. | Method, apparatus and system for GPS time synchronization using cellular signal bursts |
US7164883B2 (en) * | 2001-02-14 | 2007-01-16 | Motorola. Inc. | Method and system for modeling and managing terrain, buildings, and infrastructure |
US7127272B1 (en) * | 2001-02-27 | 2006-10-24 | Sprint Communications Company, L.P. | Designing antenna systems |
US6473030B1 (en) * | 2001-02-28 | 2002-10-29 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Infrastructure-aiding for satellite navigation receiver and method |
US7170864B2 (en) * | 2001-03-08 | 2007-01-30 | Bmc Software, Inc. | System and method for WAP server management using a single console |
AU2002252294A1 (en) * | 2001-03-09 | 2002-09-24 | Radianse, Inc. | A system and method for performing object association at a tradeshow using a location tracking system |
US7424002B2 (en) * | 2001-03-20 | 2008-09-09 | Arraycomm, Llc | Resource allocation in a wireless network |
US20020138396A1 (en) * | 2001-03-21 | 2002-09-26 | Brown A. Demetrius | Methods and apparatus for exchanging ferrous, non-ferrous and platinum group metals |
JP4349758B2 (en) * | 2001-03-27 | 2009-10-21 | パイオニア株式会社 | Positioning device |
KR100548899B1 (en) * | 2001-05-11 | 2006-02-02 | 교세라 가부시키가이샤 | Portable communication terminal and wireless communication system therefor |
US7104534B2 (en) | 2001-06-08 | 2006-09-12 | Broadcom Corporation | System and method for detecting collisions in a shared communications medium |
EP1267541A1 (en) * | 2001-06-11 | 2002-12-18 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Location determination method and system using location data items received by short-range communication |
EP1267175A3 (en) * | 2001-06-11 | 2003-10-15 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Location determination using location data items received by short-range communication |
US6608593B2 (en) | 2001-06-25 | 2003-08-19 | Harris Corporation | System and method for determining the location of a transmitter using passive reflectors or refractors as proxy receivers |
US6580393B2 (en) | 2001-06-25 | 2003-06-17 | Harris Corporation | System and method for determining the location of a transmitter using passive reflectors or refractors as proxy receivers and using database querying |
US6522296B2 (en) * | 2001-06-25 | 2003-02-18 | Harris Corporation | Method and system for calibrating wireless location systems |
US20050043036A1 (en) * | 2001-07-05 | 2005-02-24 | Ioppe Igor V | Apparatus and method for obtaining location information of mobile stations in a wireless communications network |
US20030103475A1 (en) * | 2001-07-09 | 2003-06-05 | Heppe Stephen B. | Two-way timing and calibration methods for time division multiple access radio networks |
JP4552366B2 (en) * | 2001-07-09 | 2010-09-29 | 日本電気株式会社 | Mobile portable terminal, position search system, position search method and program thereof |
US20030018451A1 (en) * | 2001-07-16 | 2003-01-23 | Level 3 Communications, Inc. | System, method and computer program product for rating enterprise metrics |
US6876859B2 (en) | 2001-07-18 | 2005-04-05 | Trueposition, Inc. | Method for estimating TDOA and FDOA in a wireless location system |
US20030153338A1 (en) * | 2001-07-24 | 2003-08-14 | Herz Frederick S. M. | Autoband |
US7463890B2 (en) * | 2002-07-24 | 2008-12-09 | Herz Frederick S M | Method and apparatus for establishing ad hoc communications pathways between source and destination nodes in a communications network |
US7962162B2 (en) * | 2001-08-07 | 2011-06-14 | At&T Intellectual Property Ii, L.P. | Simulcasting OFDM system having mobile station location identification |
US6670848B2 (en) * | 2001-08-15 | 2003-12-30 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for implementing autonomous automatic gain control in a low noise broadband distribution amplifier |
WO2003017476A1 (en) * | 2001-08-15 | 2003-02-27 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for implementing autonomous automatic gain control in a low noise broadband distribution amplifier |
US7013391B2 (en) * | 2001-08-15 | 2006-03-14 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for secure distribution of mobile station location information |
US6658260B2 (en) * | 2001-09-05 | 2003-12-02 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Inter-carrier short messaging service providing phone number only experience |
US7030814B2 (en) * | 2001-09-07 | 2006-04-18 | Sirf Technology, Inc. | System and method to estimate the location of a receiver in a multi-path environment |
US6941144B2 (en) | 2001-09-14 | 2005-09-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for detecting excess delay in a communication signal |
US7158559B2 (en) * | 2002-01-15 | 2007-01-02 | Tensor Comm, Inc. | Serial cancellation receiver design for a coded signal processing engine |
US8085889B1 (en) | 2005-04-11 | 2011-12-27 | Rambus Inc. | Methods for managing alignment and latency in interference cancellation |
US8977284B2 (en) | 2001-10-04 | 2015-03-10 | Traxcell Technologies, LLC | Machine for providing a dynamic data base of geographic location information for a plurality of wireless devices and process for making same |
US6871077B2 (en) | 2001-10-09 | 2005-03-22 | Grayson Wireless | System and method for geolocating a wireless mobile unit from a single base station using repeatable ambiguous measurements |
US20090168719A1 (en) * | 2001-10-11 | 2009-07-02 | Greg Mercurio | Method and apparatus for adding editable information to records associated with a transceiver device |
US6882315B2 (en) * | 2001-10-18 | 2005-04-19 | Multispectral Solutions, Inc. | Object location system and method |
US7079613B2 (en) * | 2001-10-25 | 2006-07-18 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N. V. | Apparatus and method for using training sequences to estimate timing error in a digital signal receiver |
AUPR863401A0 (en) | 2001-11-02 | 2001-11-29 | Qx Corporation Pty Ltd | A method & device for precision time-lock |
US20060019712A1 (en) * | 2001-11-14 | 2006-01-26 | Seung-Won Choi | Calibration apparatus for smart antenna and method thereof |
CN100385814C (en) | 2001-11-16 | 2008-04-30 | 张量通讯公司 | Construction of an interference matrix for a coded signal processing engine |
US7099380B1 (en) | 2001-11-16 | 2006-08-29 | Marvell International Ltd. | Apparatus for antenna diversity for wireless communication and method thereof |
US20050101277A1 (en) * | 2001-11-19 | 2005-05-12 | Narayan Anand P. | Gain control for interference cancellation |
US7260506B2 (en) * | 2001-11-19 | 2007-08-21 | Tensorcomm, Inc. | Orthogonalization and directional filtering |
US7346032B2 (en) * | 2001-12-07 | 2008-03-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for effecting handoff between different cellular communications systems |
US7013148B1 (en) * | 2001-12-21 | 2006-03-14 | Verizon Corporate Services Group Inc. | Method for providing a current location of a wireless communication device |
US6748324B2 (en) * | 2002-01-07 | 2004-06-08 | Motorola, Inc. | Method for determining location information |
US7058668B2 (en) * | 2002-01-11 | 2006-06-06 | International Business Machines Corporation | System for estimating the temporal validity of location reports through pattern analysis |
US20030171391A1 (en) * | 2002-01-25 | 2003-09-11 | Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg | Ambroxol for the treatment of chronic pain |
US7161996B1 (en) * | 2002-02-05 | 2007-01-09 | Airgo Networks, Inc. | Multi-antenna wireless receiver chains with vector decoding |
US6891500B2 (en) * | 2002-03-18 | 2005-05-10 | Christopher J. Hall | Method and apparatus for geolocating a wireless communications device |
US20040203845A1 (en) * | 2002-03-22 | 2004-10-14 | Lal Amrish K. | Method and system for associating location specific data with data in a mobile database |
GB0207129D0 (en) * | 2002-03-26 | 2002-05-08 | Nokia Corp | Positioning-triggered handover |
US7702775B2 (en) * | 2002-04-08 | 2010-04-20 | Airmagnet Inc. | Monitoring a local area network |
US20050003828A1 (en) * | 2002-04-09 | 2005-01-06 | Sugar Gary L. | System and method for locating wireless devices in an unsynchronized wireless environment |
US6823284B2 (en) * | 2002-04-30 | 2004-11-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Geolocation subsystem |
US6993592B2 (en) * | 2002-05-01 | 2006-01-31 | Microsoft Corporation | Location measurement process for radio-frequency badges |
US20030214949A1 (en) * | 2002-05-16 | 2003-11-20 | Nadim Shaikli | System for reordering sequenced based packets in a switching network |
US6959191B2 (en) * | 2002-06-03 | 2005-10-25 | Andrew Corporation | System for GSM interference cancelling |
GB2389741A (en) * | 2002-06-11 | 2003-12-17 | Roke Manor Research | Transmission of location information in the form of user defined identifiers |
US7224981B2 (en) | 2002-06-20 | 2007-05-29 | Intel Corporation | Speech recognition of mobile devices |
US20040208238A1 (en) * | 2002-06-25 | 2004-10-21 | Thomas John K. | Systems and methods for location estimation in spread spectrum communication systems |
FI20021299A0 (en) * | 2002-07-01 | 2002-07-01 | Nokia Corp | A method and arrangement for fine-tuning position-related time measurements in a radio system |
TW589596B (en) * | 2002-07-19 | 2004-06-01 | Au Optronics Corp | Driving circuit of display able to prevent the accumulated charges |
ATE416552T1 (en) | 2002-07-26 | 2008-12-15 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | SECURING ACCESS TO MULTIMEDIA CONTENT THROUGH AUTHENTICATED DISTANCE MEASUREMENT |
US6950628B1 (en) * | 2002-08-02 | 2005-09-27 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method for grouping 802.11 stations into authorized service sets to differentiate network access and services |
US6873826B2 (en) * | 2002-08-06 | 2005-03-29 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and mobile station for reporting multi-path signals based on minimum separation |
US7254643B1 (en) | 2002-08-08 | 2007-08-07 | At&T Corp. | System and method for providing multi-media services to communication devices over a communications network |
US6646595B1 (en) * | 2002-08-09 | 2003-11-11 | Motorola, Inc. | Scalable, reconfigurable GPS receiver |
DE10237134A1 (en) * | 2002-08-13 | 2004-03-11 | Siemens Ag | Positioning procedure |
US7573863B2 (en) * | 2002-08-22 | 2009-08-11 | Bae Systems Information And Electronic Systems Integration Inc. | Method for real time control of transmit chain for software radios |
US7026918B2 (en) * | 2002-08-26 | 2006-04-11 | David Douglas Briick | Motor vehicle verification and control system |
US7519373B2 (en) * | 2002-08-29 | 2009-04-14 | Andrew Llc | System and method for geo-location of mobile appliances using diverse standard tasking and reporting |
US8032149B2 (en) | 2002-08-29 | 2011-10-04 | Andrew Llc | Tasking and reporting method and implementation for wireless appliance location systems |
US6996392B2 (en) * | 2002-09-03 | 2006-02-07 | Trueposition, Inc. | E911 overlay solution for GSM, for use in a wireless location system |
US7463609B2 (en) * | 2005-07-29 | 2008-12-09 | Tensorcomm, Inc | Interference cancellation within wireless transceivers |
US7808937B2 (en) | 2005-04-07 | 2010-10-05 | Rambus, Inc. | Variable interference cancellation technology for CDMA systems |
US7577186B2 (en) * | 2002-09-20 | 2009-08-18 | Tensorcomm, Inc | Interference matrix construction |
US20050180364A1 (en) * | 2002-09-20 | 2005-08-18 | Vijay Nagarajan | Construction of projection operators for interference cancellation |
US8761321B2 (en) * | 2005-04-07 | 2014-06-24 | Iii Holdings 1, Llc | Optimal feedback weighting for soft-decision cancellers |
US7876810B2 (en) * | 2005-04-07 | 2011-01-25 | Rambus Inc. | Soft weighted interference cancellation for CDMA systems |
US7787572B2 (en) | 2005-04-07 | 2010-08-31 | Rambus Inc. | Advanced signal processors for interference cancellation in baseband receivers |
US8005128B1 (en) | 2003-09-23 | 2011-08-23 | Rambus Inc. | Methods for estimation and interference cancellation for signal processing |
US8179946B2 (en) | 2003-09-23 | 2012-05-15 | Rambus Inc. | Systems and methods for control of advanced receivers |
US20050123080A1 (en) * | 2002-11-15 | 2005-06-09 | Narayan Anand P. | Systems and methods for serial cancellation |
CN100423466C (en) | 2002-09-23 | 2008-10-01 | 张量通讯公司 | Method and apparatus for selectively applying interference cancellation in spread spectrum systems |
US7116993B2 (en) * | 2002-09-27 | 2006-10-03 | Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. | System and method for providing location based information |
WO2004030392A1 (en) * | 2002-09-27 | 2004-04-08 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Requesting and controlling access in a wireless communications network |
US7298275B2 (en) * | 2002-09-27 | 2007-11-20 | Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. | Machine associating method and apparatus |
US7019646B1 (en) | 2002-10-08 | 2006-03-28 | Noel Woodard | Combination smoke alarm and wireless location device |
JP4210649B2 (en) * | 2002-10-15 | 2009-01-21 | テンソルコム インコーポレイテッド | Method and apparatus for channel amplitude estimation and interference vector construction |
WO2004036811A2 (en) * | 2002-10-15 | 2004-04-29 | Tensorcomm Inc. | Method and apparatus for interference suppression with efficient matrix inversion in a ds-cdma system |
US7761501B1 (en) * | 2002-10-24 | 2010-07-20 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for providing data distribution that supports auditing |
US8326257B2 (en) | 2002-10-28 | 2012-12-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Utilizing speed and position information to select an operational mode in a wireless communication system |
US7295857B2 (en) * | 2002-10-30 | 2007-11-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for performing acquisition in power save mode for wireless communication systems |
WO2004042948A1 (en) * | 2002-10-31 | 2004-05-21 | Tensorcomm, Incorporated | Systems and methods for reducing interference in cdma systems |
WO2004073159A2 (en) * | 2002-11-15 | 2004-08-26 | Tensorcomm, Incorporated | Systems and methods for parallel signal cancellation |
JP3776872B2 (en) * | 2002-11-21 | 2006-05-17 | Necインフロンティア株式会社 | Noise reduction apparatus and wireless LAN base station apparatus using the same |
WO2004052027A2 (en) * | 2002-11-27 | 2004-06-17 | Cognio, Inc | System and method for locating sources of unknown wireless radio signals |
US6816111B2 (en) | 2002-12-13 | 2004-11-09 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Calibration and correction system for satellite position location systems |
EP1573353A2 (en) * | 2002-12-16 | 2005-09-14 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Using multiple receive antennas to determine the location of a transmitter with respect to a receiver in ultra wideband systems |
US7162252B2 (en) * | 2002-12-23 | 2007-01-09 | Andrew Corporation | Method and apparatus for supporting multiple wireless carrier mobile station location requirements with a common network overlay location system |
US7574233B2 (en) * | 2002-12-30 | 2009-08-11 | Intel Corporation | Sharing a radio frequency interface resource |
US7180912B1 (en) | 2003-01-06 | 2007-02-20 | At&T Corp. | System and method for providing a plurality of multi-media services using a number of media servers to form a preliminary interactive communication relationship with a calling communication device |
US20040235423A1 (en) * | 2003-01-14 | 2004-11-25 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method and apparatus for network management using perceived signal to noise and interference indicator |
US7738848B2 (en) * | 2003-01-14 | 2010-06-15 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Received signal to noise indicator |
US7224985B2 (en) | 2003-01-16 | 2007-05-29 | Lockheed Martin, Corp. | Antenna segment system |
US7272456B2 (en) * | 2003-01-24 | 2007-09-18 | Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. | Position based machine control in an industrial automation environment |
US7307666B2 (en) * | 2003-01-30 | 2007-12-11 | Her Majesty The Queen In Right Of Canada As Represented By The Minister Of Industry Through The Communications Research Centre Canada | Transmitter identification system |
US7379019B2 (en) * | 2003-01-31 | 2008-05-27 | Andrew Corporation | Method for angle of arrival determination on frequency hopping air interfaces |
US7358898B2 (en) * | 2003-01-31 | 2008-04-15 | Andrew Corporation | Method for calibrating an AOA location system for all frequencies in a frequency hopping signal |
US7405696B2 (en) * | 2003-01-31 | 2008-07-29 | Andrew Corporation | Method for calibrating and AOA location system for frequency hopping air interfaces |
US9818136B1 (en) | 2003-02-05 | 2017-11-14 | Steven M. Hoffberg | System and method for determining contingent relevance |
US7043316B2 (en) | 2003-02-14 | 2006-05-09 | Rockwell Automation Technologies Inc. | Location based programming and data management in an automated environment |
US7392015B1 (en) * | 2003-02-14 | 2008-06-24 | Calamp Corp. | Calibration methods and structures in wireless communications systems |
US8743837B2 (en) * | 2003-04-10 | 2014-06-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Modified preamble structure for IEEE 802.11A extensions to allow for coexistence and interoperability between 802.11A devices and higher data rate, MIMO or otherwise extended devices |
US7916803B2 (en) | 2003-04-10 | 2011-03-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Modified preamble structure for IEEE 802.11a extensions to allow for coexistence and interoperability between 802.11a devices and higher data rate, MIMO or otherwise extended devices |
US20040203926A1 (en) * | 2003-04-14 | 2004-10-14 | Ville Ruutu | Selection of measurement apparatus for location of user equipment |
US7133498B2 (en) * | 2003-04-18 | 2006-11-07 | At&T Corp. | Method for confirming end point location of calls |
KR101600372B1 (en) * | 2003-05-14 | 2016-03-07 | 인텔 코포레이션 | Network management using periodic measurements of indicators |
US6879918B2 (en) * | 2003-05-30 | 2005-04-12 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Method and apparatus for measuring the transmission loss of a cable |
US7429914B2 (en) * | 2003-06-04 | 2008-09-30 | Andrew Corporation | System and method for CDMA geolocation |
GB2402553B (en) * | 2003-06-06 | 2007-06-20 | Westerngeco Seismic Holdings | A segmented antenna system for offshore radio networks and method of using the same |
CN100559722C (en) * | 2003-06-10 | 2009-11-11 | 诺基亚公司 | In comprising the equipment of transmitter, carry out the method and apparatus that signal receives |
US7313402B1 (en) * | 2003-06-24 | 2007-12-25 | Verizon Corporate Services Group Inc. | System and method for evaluating accuracy of an automatic location identification system |
US8483717B2 (en) | 2003-06-27 | 2013-07-09 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Local area network assisted positioning |
US8971913B2 (en) | 2003-06-27 | 2015-03-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for wireless network hybrid positioning |
US20050010663A1 (en) * | 2003-07-11 | 2005-01-13 | Tatman Lance A. | Systems and methods for physical location self-awareness in network connected devices |
US6990428B1 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2006-01-24 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Radiolocation using path loss data |
US7293088B2 (en) | 2003-07-28 | 2007-11-06 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Tag location, client location, and coverage hole location in a wireless network |
US7286515B2 (en) * | 2003-07-28 | 2007-10-23 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method, apparatus, and software product for detecting rogue access points in a wireless network |
US7251491B2 (en) * | 2003-07-31 | 2007-07-31 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System of and method for using position, velocity, or direction of motion estimates to support handover decisions |
US7283046B2 (en) * | 2003-08-01 | 2007-10-16 | Spectrum Tracking Systems, Inc. | Method and system for providing tracking services to locate an asset |
US20080129497A1 (en) * | 2003-09-11 | 2008-06-05 | Jon Woodard | Reconfigurable alarm apparatus |
US20050071498A1 (en) * | 2003-09-30 | 2005-03-31 | Farchmin David W. | Wireless location based automated components |
US20050070304A1 (en) * | 2003-09-30 | 2005-03-31 | Farchmin David W. | Distributed wireless positioning engine method and assembly |
EP1673957B1 (en) * | 2003-09-30 | 2007-12-12 | Telecom Italia S.p.A. | Method for generating triggers based on the position of a terminal in a mobile communication network, related network and computer program product therefor |
US7209710B2 (en) * | 2003-10-31 | 2007-04-24 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Bandwidth management in a wireless measurement system using statistical processing of measurement data |
GB0325622D0 (en) * | 2003-11-03 | 2003-12-10 | Cambridge Consultants | System for determining positional information |
US7190271B2 (en) * | 2003-11-07 | 2007-03-13 | Wherenet Corp | Location system and method that achieves time synchronized network performance using unsynchronized receiver clocks |
DE10352774A1 (en) * | 2003-11-12 | 2005-06-23 | Infineon Technologies Ag | Location arrangement, in particular Losboxen localization system, license plate unit and method for location |
US6903683B1 (en) * | 2003-11-19 | 2005-06-07 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method for delivering assistance data in an unsynchronized wireless network |
GB0328202D0 (en) | 2003-12-05 | 2004-01-07 | Westinghouse Brake & Signal | Railway vehicle detection |
US7042391B2 (en) * | 2003-12-12 | 2006-05-09 | Xerox Corporation | Mobile device and method for determining location of mobile device |
US6927725B2 (en) * | 2003-12-12 | 2005-08-09 | The Boeing Company | System and method for radar detection and calibration |
FR2863814B1 (en) * | 2003-12-16 | 2006-04-28 | Cit Alcatel | METHOD OF UPDATING THE BIT OF CLOCK EXISTING BETWEEN A BTS STATION OF A GSM NETWORK AND THE SATELLITES OF A GPS SYSTEM |
US7532880B2 (en) * | 2003-12-17 | 2009-05-12 | General Motors Corporation | Telematics unit having interactive radio features |
DE60304721T2 (en) * | 2003-12-18 | 2006-11-09 | Evolium S.A.S. | A method for calculating the position of a mobile station in a cellular communication network |
WO2005060669A2 (en) * | 2003-12-19 | 2005-07-07 | Kennedy Joseph P | E-otd augmentation to u-tdoa location system |
US7440762B2 (en) * | 2003-12-30 | 2008-10-21 | Trueposition, Inc. | TDOA/GPS hybrid wireless location system |
US7356618B2 (en) * | 2003-12-31 | 2008-04-08 | Intel Corporation | Method and system for synchronizing platform clocks in a distributed wireless platform |
US7266713B2 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2007-09-04 | Intel Corporation | Apparatus and method for adaptation of time synchronization of a plurality of multimedia streams |
US20050175038A1 (en) * | 2004-01-12 | 2005-08-11 | John Carlson | Method and apparatus for synchronizing wireless location servers |
US7477710B2 (en) * | 2004-01-23 | 2009-01-13 | Tensorcomm, Inc | Systems and methods for analog to digital conversion with a signal cancellation system of a receiver |
US20050169354A1 (en) * | 2004-01-23 | 2005-08-04 | Olson Eric S. | Systems and methods for searching interference canceled data |
US7251535B2 (en) * | 2004-02-06 | 2007-07-31 | Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. | Location based diagnostics method and apparatus |
US7403783B2 (en) * | 2004-02-17 | 2008-07-22 | Jadi, Inc. | Navigation system |
US7260408B2 (en) * | 2004-02-20 | 2007-08-21 | Airespace, Inc. | Wireless node location mechanism using antenna pattern diversity to enhance accuracy of location estimates |
US7315735B2 (en) * | 2004-02-24 | 2008-01-01 | P.G. Electronics Ltd. | System and method for emergency 911 location detection |
US7286833B2 (en) * | 2004-02-27 | 2007-10-23 | Airespace, Inc. | Selective termination of wireless connections to refresh signal information in wireless node location infrastructure |
GB2411793A (en) * | 2004-03-02 | 2005-09-07 | Agilent Technologies Inc | Disseminating control information to a wireless communications device |
US7205938B2 (en) * | 2004-03-05 | 2007-04-17 | Airespace, Inc. | Wireless node location mechanism responsive to observed propagation characteristics of wireless network infrastructure signals |
US8645569B2 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2014-02-04 | Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. | Juxtaposition based machine addressing |
US7116988B2 (en) * | 2004-03-16 | 2006-10-03 | Airespace, Inc. | Location of wireless nodes using signal strength weighting metric |
US8914383B1 (en) | 2004-04-06 | 2014-12-16 | Monster Worldwide, Inc. | System and method for providing job recommendations |
JP4039389B2 (en) * | 2004-04-28 | 2008-01-30 | 船井電機株式会社 | Digital television broadcast signal receiver |
JP2005318139A (en) * | 2004-04-28 | 2005-11-10 | Funai Electric Co Ltd | Digital television broadcast signal receiving device |
US7908041B2 (en) * | 2004-04-29 | 2011-03-15 | Munro & Associates, Inc. | Self-leveling laser horizon for navigation guidance |
KR101122359B1 (en) | 2004-05-07 | 2012-03-23 | 인터디지탈 테크날러지 코포레이션 | Supporting emergency calls on a wireless local area network |
US8145182B2 (en) * | 2004-05-07 | 2012-03-27 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Supporting emergency calls on a wireless local area network |
US8682279B2 (en) * | 2004-05-07 | 2014-03-25 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Supporting emergency calls on a wireless local area network |
US7433696B2 (en) | 2004-05-18 | 2008-10-07 | Cisco Systems, Inc. | Wireless node location mechanism featuring definition of search region to optimize location computation |
HUE031812T2 (en) * | 2004-05-27 | 2017-08-28 | Qualcomm Inc | Modified preamble structure for ieee 802.11a extensions to allow for coexistence and interoperability between 802.11a devices and higher data rate, mimo or otherwise extended devices |
US7319878B2 (en) | 2004-06-18 | 2008-01-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for determining location of a base station using a plurality of mobile stations in a wireless mobile network |
US7209077B2 (en) * | 2004-06-29 | 2007-04-24 | Andrew Corporation | Global positioning system signal acquisition assistance |
US7609650B2 (en) | 2004-07-08 | 2009-10-27 | Carrier Iq, Inc. | Collection of data at target wireless devices using data collection profiles |
US20060023642A1 (en) * | 2004-07-08 | 2006-02-02 | Steve Roskowski | Data collection associated with components and services of a wireless communication network |
US7551922B2 (en) * | 2004-07-08 | 2009-06-23 | Carrier Iq, Inc. | Rule based data collection and management in a wireless communications network |
US7519351B2 (en) * | 2004-07-09 | 2009-04-14 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Emergency mode operation in a wireless communication network |
US20060087425A1 (en) * | 2004-07-12 | 2006-04-27 | William Marsh University | System and method for localization over a wireless network |
WO2006022900A2 (en) * | 2004-07-27 | 2006-03-02 | Jp Morgan Chase Bank | System and method for measuring communication-system infrastructure usage |
CA2577887A1 (en) * | 2004-08-19 | 2006-02-23 | Cingular Wireless Ii, Llc | Testing for mobile device locator systems, such as for e911 |
US7292189B2 (en) * | 2004-09-10 | 2007-11-06 | Worcester Polytechnic Institute | Methods and apparatus for high resolution positioning |
US7590589B2 (en) | 2004-09-10 | 2009-09-15 | Hoffberg Steven M | Game theoretic prioritization scheme for mobile ad hoc networks permitting hierarchal deference |
US7286835B1 (en) * | 2004-09-10 | 2007-10-23 | Airespace, Inc. | Enhanced wireless node location using differential signal strength metric |
US20110034122A1 (en) * | 2004-09-17 | 2011-02-10 | Andrew, Llc | System and Method of Operation For Network Overlay Geolocation System With Repeaters |
US7643987B2 (en) * | 2004-09-21 | 2010-01-05 | Lsi Corporation | Voice channel chaining in sound processors |
US20060095312A1 (en) * | 2004-10-28 | 2006-05-04 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method, system, and storage medium for using comparisons of empirical system data for testcase and workload profiling |
CN101438270B (en) | 2004-10-29 | 2010-11-17 | 探空气球无线公司 | Method for constructing location beacon database and location beacon server |
US8369264B2 (en) | 2005-10-28 | 2013-02-05 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Method and system for selecting and providing a relevant subset of Wi-Fi location information to a mobile client device so the client device may estimate its position with efficient utilization of resources |
KR100633047B1 (en) * | 2004-12-02 | 2006-10-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Smart Antenna Communication System Employing Apparatus And Method For Signal Calibration |
US8855596B2 (en) * | 2004-12-03 | 2014-10-07 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Methods and apparatus for placement of an emergency call |
US20060125689A1 (en) * | 2004-12-10 | 2006-06-15 | Narayan Anand P | Interference cancellation in a receive diversity system |
DE102004059957A1 (en) * | 2004-12-13 | 2006-06-14 | Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e.V. | Synchronization device and device for generating a synchronization signal |
JP4641791B2 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2011-03-02 | パイオニア株式会社 | Remote playback system, remote playback method, and computer program |
EP1850734A4 (en) | 2005-01-13 | 2009-08-26 | Welch Allyn Inc | Vital signs monitor |
US20060187963A1 (en) * | 2005-02-18 | 2006-08-24 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method for sharing single data buffer by several packets |
EP2503832B1 (en) | 2005-02-22 | 2019-08-21 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Method for calculating the position of WiFi-enabled devices |
US20060217944A1 (en) * | 2005-03-11 | 2006-09-28 | Newfield Wireless, Inc. | Methods for accurate use of finite dynamic range measurement data in radio path loss propagation model calibration |
US20060223447A1 (en) * | 2005-03-31 | 2006-10-05 | Ali Masoomzadeh-Fard | Adaptive down bias to power changes for controlling random walk |
US7353034B2 (en) | 2005-04-04 | 2008-04-01 | X One, Inc. | Location sharing and tracking using mobile phones or other wireless devices |
US20060229051A1 (en) * | 2005-04-07 | 2006-10-12 | Narayan Anand P | Interference selection and cancellation for CDMA communications |
US7826516B2 (en) | 2005-11-15 | 2010-11-02 | Rambus Inc. | Iterative interference canceller for wireless multiple-access systems with multiple receive antennas |
US7489270B2 (en) * | 2005-04-15 | 2009-02-10 | Novariant, Inc. | GNSS line bias measurement system and method |
KR100857019B1 (en) * | 2005-04-19 | 2008-09-05 | 주식회사 엘지화학 | Mechanically and Electrically Connecting Member |
US7636061B1 (en) | 2005-04-21 | 2009-12-22 | Alan Thomas | Method and apparatus for location determination of people or objects |
JP4755441B2 (en) * | 2005-04-25 | 2011-08-24 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Design support method and system |
JP4900891B2 (en) | 2005-04-27 | 2012-03-21 | キヤノン株式会社 | Communication apparatus and communication method |
US7710322B1 (en) * | 2005-05-10 | 2010-05-04 | Multispectral Solutions, Inc. | Extensible object location system and method using multiple references |
US7430425B2 (en) * | 2005-05-17 | 2008-09-30 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Inter-carrier digital message with user data payload service providing phone number only experience |
WO2006124907A2 (en) | 2005-05-17 | 2006-11-23 | Andrew Corporation | Method and apparatus for determining coupled path loss |
US8375067B2 (en) | 2005-05-23 | 2013-02-12 | Monster Worldwide, Inc. | Intelligent job matching system and method including negative filtration |
US8527510B2 (en) | 2005-05-23 | 2013-09-03 | Monster Worldwide, Inc. | Intelligent job matching system and method |
US20060265270A1 (en) * | 2005-05-23 | 2006-11-23 | Adam Hyder | Intelligent job matching system and method |
US8433713B2 (en) * | 2005-05-23 | 2013-04-30 | Monster Worldwide, Inc. | Intelligent job matching system and method |
US7603141B2 (en) * | 2005-06-02 | 2009-10-13 | Qualcomm, Inc. | Multi-antenna station with distributed antennas |
US7848769B2 (en) | 2005-06-06 | 2010-12-07 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | System and methods for providing updated mobile station location estimates to emergency services providers |
US7653400B2 (en) * | 2005-06-28 | 2010-01-26 | Research In Motion Limited | Probabilistic location prediction for a mobile station |
US7526073B2 (en) * | 2005-07-01 | 2009-04-28 | At&T Intellectual Property L.L.P. | IVR to SMS text messenger |
US20070008108A1 (en) * | 2005-07-07 | 2007-01-11 | Schurig Alma K | Unsynchronized beacon location system and method |
WO2007009008A2 (en) * | 2005-07-13 | 2007-01-18 | Andrew Corporation | System and method for data maintenance and integration including interpolation |
US7283091B1 (en) | 2005-08-08 | 2007-10-16 | Trimble Navigation Limited | Radio positioning system for providing position and time for assisting GPS signal acquisition in mobile unit |
US7295156B2 (en) * | 2005-08-08 | 2007-11-13 | Trimble Navigation Limited | Cellphone GPS positioning system |
US8204974B1 (en) * | 2005-08-30 | 2012-06-19 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Identifying significant behaviors within network traffic |
US8028337B1 (en) | 2005-08-30 | 2011-09-27 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Profile-aware filtering of network traffic |
US20070124395A1 (en) * | 2005-09-22 | 2007-05-31 | Stephen Edge | Geography-based filtering of broadcasts |
US20070078535A1 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2007-04-05 | Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. | System and method for identifying particularized equipment information of interest to varied users in an industrial automation environment |
US7433741B2 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2008-10-07 | Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. | Hybrid user interface having base presentation information with variably prominent supplemental information |
US8874477B2 (en) | 2005-10-04 | 2014-10-28 | Steven Mark Hoffberg | Multifactorial optimization system and method |
US7787892B2 (en) | 2005-10-05 | 2010-08-31 | Via Technologies, Inc. | Method and apparatus for adaptive multi-stage multi-threshold detection of paging indicators in wireless communication systems |
KR100981495B1 (en) * | 2005-10-12 | 2010-09-10 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for transmitting data in a communication system |
EP1938488B1 (en) | 2005-10-21 | 2015-09-09 | T-Mobile, USA, Inc | System and method for determining device location in an ip-based wireless telecommunications network |
KR101031205B1 (en) * | 2005-11-07 | 2011-04-27 | 퀄컴 인코포레이티드 | Positioning for wlans and other wireless networks |
RU2390791C2 (en) * | 2005-11-07 | 2010-05-27 | Квэлкомм Инкорпорейтед | Positioning for wlan and other wireless networks |
US7689240B2 (en) * | 2005-11-16 | 2010-03-30 | Trueposition, Inc. | Transmit-power control for wireless mobile services |
US7623886B2 (en) * | 2005-12-14 | 2009-11-24 | NDSSI Holdings, LLC | Method and apparatus for transmitter calibration |
US10834531B2 (en) | 2005-12-15 | 2020-11-10 | Polte Corporation | Multi-path mitigation in rangefinding and tracking objects using reduced attenuation RF technology |
US10281557B2 (en) | 2005-12-15 | 2019-05-07 | Polte Corporation | Partially synchronized multilateration/trilateration method and system for positional finding using RF |
US8055270B1 (en) | 2005-12-23 | 2011-11-08 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | System and method for providing location information for a mobile handset |
US7583654B2 (en) * | 2005-12-28 | 2009-09-01 | Honeywell International Inc. | Sub-frame synchronized multiplexing |
US7593738B2 (en) * | 2005-12-29 | 2009-09-22 | Trueposition, Inc. | GPS synchronization for wireless communications stations |
US8150421B2 (en) | 2005-12-30 | 2012-04-03 | Trueposition, Inc. | User plane uplink time difference of arrival (U-TDOA) |
US20070155489A1 (en) * | 2005-12-30 | 2007-07-05 | Frederic Beckley | Device and network enabled geo-fencing for area sensitive gaming enablement |
US20090005061A1 (en) * | 2005-12-30 | 2009-01-01 | Trueposition, Inc. | Location quality of service indicator |
US8195657B1 (en) | 2006-01-09 | 2012-06-05 | Monster Worldwide, Inc. | Apparatuses, systems and methods for data entry correlation |
GB2436413B (en) * | 2006-01-20 | 2008-06-11 | Motorola Inc | Reconfiguration in radio communication systems |
US9274207B2 (en) | 2006-02-01 | 2016-03-01 | Zih Corp. | System and method for determining signal source location in wireless local area network |
US7471954B2 (en) * | 2006-02-24 | 2008-12-30 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Methods and systems for estimating a user position in a WLAN positioning system based on user assigned access point locations |
US7933612B2 (en) * | 2006-02-28 | 2011-04-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Determining physical location based upon received signals |
US7519734B1 (en) * | 2006-03-14 | 2009-04-14 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | System and method for routing service requests |
US8600931B1 (en) | 2006-03-31 | 2013-12-03 | Monster Worldwide, Inc. | Apparatuses, methods and systems for automated online data submission |
CA2619648C (en) | 2006-04-13 | 2013-12-31 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | Mobile computing device geographic location determination |
US7719994B2 (en) * | 2006-04-26 | 2010-05-18 | Honeywell International Inc. | Sub-frame synchronized ranging |
US7551929B2 (en) * | 2006-05-08 | 2009-06-23 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Estimation of speed and direction of travel in a WLAN positioning system using multiple position estimations |
US7835754B2 (en) | 2006-05-08 | 2010-11-16 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Estimation of speed and direction of travel in a WLAN positioning system |
US8019339B2 (en) | 2006-05-16 | 2011-09-13 | Andrew Llc | Using serving area identification in a mixed access network environment |
US8000702B2 (en) * | 2006-05-16 | 2011-08-16 | Andrew, Llc | Optimizing location services performance by combining user plane and control plane architectures |
US8000701B2 (en) | 2006-05-16 | 2011-08-16 | Andrew, Llc | Correlation mechanism to communicate in a dual-plane architecture |
US20070273909A1 (en) * | 2006-05-25 | 2007-11-29 | Yahoo! Inc. | Method and system for providing job listing affinity utilizing jobseeker selection patterns |
WO2008049132A2 (en) | 2006-10-20 | 2008-04-24 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | System and method for determining a subscriber's zone information |
US7365682B2 (en) * | 2006-06-26 | 2008-04-29 | The Boeing Company | System and method for distributed signal compression for cooperative geolocation |
US8315233B2 (en) | 2006-07-07 | 2012-11-20 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | System and method of gathering WLAN packet samples to improve position estimates of WLAN positioning device |
US7783303B1 (en) | 2006-07-14 | 2010-08-24 | Carrier Iq, Inc. | Systems and methods for locating device activity in a wireless network |
US8010081B1 (en) | 2006-07-14 | 2011-08-30 | Carrier Iq, Inc. | Auditing system for wireless networks |
US10210071B1 (en) | 2006-07-14 | 2019-02-19 | At&T Mobility Ip, Llc | Delta state tracking for event stream analysis |
US7826847B1 (en) | 2006-07-14 | 2010-11-02 | Carrier Iq, Inc. | Neighbor list generation in wireless networks |
US8036202B2 (en) * | 2006-07-27 | 2011-10-11 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Physical layer transceiver with integrated time synchronization |
US7885296B2 (en) * | 2006-07-27 | 2011-02-08 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Maintaining consistency among multiple timestamp counters distributed among multiple devices |
JP5103816B2 (en) * | 2006-07-27 | 2012-12-19 | 株式会社デンソー | Signal processing device |
US7688747B2 (en) * | 2006-08-30 | 2010-03-30 | Honeywell International Inc. | Sub-frame synchronized residual ranging |
US20080262669A1 (en) * | 2006-09-22 | 2008-10-23 | Jadi, Inc. | Autonomous vehicle controller |
US7616555B2 (en) * | 2006-10-03 | 2009-11-10 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Minimum variance location estimation in wireless networks |
US7835749B1 (en) | 2006-10-03 | 2010-11-16 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Location inspector in wireless networks |
US7626969B2 (en) * | 2006-10-04 | 2009-12-01 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Relative location of a wireless node in a wireless network |
US7983667B2 (en) | 2006-10-05 | 2011-07-19 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Radio frequency coverage map generation in wireless networks |
US8103293B2 (en) | 2006-10-17 | 2012-01-24 | Itt Manufacturing Enterprises, Inc. | System and related circuits and methods for detecting and locating wireless communication device use within a geographical area or facility |
WO2008049131A2 (en) | 2006-10-20 | 2008-04-24 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | Two stage mobile device geographic location determination |
US8953567B2 (en) * | 2006-10-20 | 2015-02-10 | T—Mobile USA, Inc. | System and method for utilizing IP-based wireless telecommunications client location data |
US7522090B2 (en) * | 2006-10-31 | 2009-04-21 | Honeywell International Inc. | Systems and methods for a terrain contour matching navigation system |
US9226257B2 (en) * | 2006-11-04 | 2015-12-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Positioning for WLANs and other wireless networks |
KR100775858B1 (en) * | 2006-11-07 | 2007-11-13 | 한국전자통신연구원 | System and method for environment analysis for indoor wireless location |
US7856234B2 (en) | 2006-11-07 | 2010-12-21 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | System and method for estimating positioning error within a WLAN-based positioning system |
CN101192881A (en) * | 2006-11-30 | 2008-06-04 | 昂达博思公司 | System and method for air interface synchronization of quick uplink link |
US8761718B2 (en) * | 2006-11-30 | 2014-06-24 | West Corporation | Verification of communications network-derived location information |
WO2008067346A2 (en) * | 2006-11-30 | 2008-06-05 | Adaptix, Inc. | Systems and methods for rapid uplink air interface synchronization |
US20080129444A1 (en) * | 2006-12-01 | 2008-06-05 | Shary Nassimi | Wireless Security System |
US7844280B2 (en) | 2006-12-12 | 2010-11-30 | Trueposition, Inc. | Location of wideband OFDM transmitters with limited receiver bandwidth |
US7797000B2 (en) * | 2006-12-01 | 2010-09-14 | Trueposition, Inc. | System for automatically determining cell transmitter parameters to facilitate the location of wireless devices |
US8452275B2 (en) * | 2006-12-19 | 2013-05-28 | Research In Motion Limited | Methods and systems for increasing wireless traffic capacity in the vicinity of an event site |
US20080153501A1 (en) * | 2006-12-20 | 2008-06-26 | Motorola, Inc. | Smart antenna for common channel incremental redundancy |
US7904092B2 (en) * | 2007-01-04 | 2011-03-08 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Locally adjusted radio frequency coverage maps in wireless networks |
US20080167083A1 (en) * | 2007-01-07 | 2008-07-10 | Wyld Jeremy A | Method, Device, and Graphical User Interface for Location-Based Dialing |
US20100295731A1 (en) * | 2007-01-11 | 2010-11-25 | Chia-Chin Chong | Method for optimum bandwidth selection of time-of-arrival estimators |
US7515092B2 (en) * | 2007-01-17 | 2009-04-07 | Honeywell International Inc. | Sub-frame synchronized residual radar |
GB2480191A (en) | 2007-02-02 | 2011-11-09 | Ubiquisys Ltd | Determining the location of a base station |
EP2118810B1 (en) * | 2007-02-05 | 2012-08-15 | Andrew Corporation | System and method for optimizing location estimate of mobile unit |
US8208939B2 (en) * | 2007-02-05 | 2012-06-26 | Aeroscout Ltd. | Dual bandwidth time difference of arrival (TDOA) system |
US20080200196A1 (en) * | 2007-02-19 | 2008-08-21 | Tarik Muharemovic | Transmission of prioritized information in the proximity of reference signals |
US20080220780A1 (en) * | 2007-03-07 | 2008-09-11 | Honeywell International Inc. | Method for the automatic calibration of location anchors |
WO2008116168A1 (en) * | 2007-03-21 | 2008-09-25 | Jadi, Inc. | Navigation unit and base station |
US8159961B1 (en) | 2007-03-30 | 2012-04-17 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Load balancing utilizing adaptive thresholding |
US8140092B2 (en) * | 2007-04-18 | 2012-03-20 | Trueposition, Inc. | Sparsed U-TDOA wireless location networks |
US8242959B2 (en) * | 2007-04-18 | 2012-08-14 | Trueposition, Inc. | Sparsed U-TDOA wireless location networks |
US8045506B2 (en) * | 2007-04-18 | 2011-10-25 | Trueposition, Inc. | Sparsed U-TDOA wireless location networks |
US8041367B2 (en) * | 2007-04-18 | 2011-10-18 | Trueposition, Inc. | Sparsed U-TDOA wireless location networks |
US8996681B2 (en) * | 2007-04-23 | 2015-03-31 | The Mitre Corporation | Passively attributing anonymous network events to their associated users |
US8019356B2 (en) * | 2007-04-26 | 2011-09-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Location based tracking |
US8331953B2 (en) * | 2007-05-01 | 2012-12-11 | Andrew Llc | System and method for estimating the location of a mobile device |
US20080285505A1 (en) * | 2007-05-15 | 2008-11-20 | Andrew Corporation | System and method for network timing recovery in communications networks |
US7933610B2 (en) * | 2007-05-21 | 2011-04-26 | Andrew Llc | Method and apparatus to select an optimum site and/or sector to provide geo-location data |
US8275352B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2012-09-25 | Apple Inc. | Location-based emergency information |
US9109904B2 (en) * | 2007-06-28 | 2015-08-18 | Apple Inc. | Integration of map services and user applications in a mobile device |
US8204684B2 (en) * | 2007-06-28 | 2012-06-19 | Apple Inc. | Adaptive mobile device navigation |
US8762056B2 (en) * | 2007-06-28 | 2014-06-24 | Apple Inc. | Route reference |
US20090005964A1 (en) * | 2007-06-28 | 2009-01-01 | Apple Inc. | Intelligent Route Guidance |
US8108144B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2012-01-31 | Apple Inc. | Location based tracking |
US8774825B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2014-07-08 | Apple Inc. | Integration of map services with user applications in a mobile device |
US8175802B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2012-05-08 | Apple Inc. | Adaptive route guidance based on preferences |
US8332402B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2012-12-11 | Apple Inc. | Location based media items |
US8180379B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2012-05-15 | Apple Inc. | Synchronizing mobile and vehicle devices |
US9066199B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2015-06-23 | Apple Inc. | Location-aware mobile device |
US8385946B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2013-02-26 | Apple Inc. | Disfavored route progressions or locations |
US8311526B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2012-11-13 | Apple Inc. | Location-based categorical information services |
US8290513B2 (en) | 2007-06-28 | 2012-10-16 | Apple Inc. | Location-based services |
US7715996B1 (en) * | 2007-09-27 | 2010-05-11 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Director Of The National Security Agency | Method of estimating digital signal frequency |
KR20090033658A (en) * | 2007-10-01 | 2009-04-06 | 삼성전자주식회사 | A method of transmission and receiving digital broadcasting and an apparatus thereof |
US8849183B2 (en) * | 2007-10-05 | 2014-09-30 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Location and time based filtering of broadcast information |
US8892112B2 (en) | 2011-07-21 | 2014-11-18 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Selection of a radio access bearer resource based on radio access bearer resource historical information |
KR101435803B1 (en) * | 2007-10-15 | 2014-08-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Communication and method of transmitting moving information therein |
US8170585B2 (en) * | 2007-11-14 | 2012-05-01 | Andrew, Llc | Ranging in UMTS networks |
US8447319B2 (en) * | 2007-11-15 | 2013-05-21 | Andrew Llc | System and method for locating UMTS user equipment using measurement reports |
US8548488B2 (en) * | 2007-11-30 | 2013-10-01 | Trueposition, Inc. | Automated configuration of a wireless location system |
US7800530B2 (en) * | 2007-12-07 | 2010-09-21 | Andrew, Llc | Method and system for providing assistance data for A-GPS location of handsets in wireless networks |
US7667649B2 (en) * | 2007-12-10 | 2010-02-23 | Trueposition, Inc. | Detection of time of arrival of CDMA signals in a wireless location system |
US8059028B2 (en) | 2008-08-14 | 2011-11-15 | Trueposition, Inc. | Hybrid GNSS and TDOA wireless location system |
US8463297B2 (en) * | 2007-12-27 | 2013-06-11 | Trueposition, Inc. | Subscriber selective, area-based service control |
US8622308B1 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2014-01-07 | Jpmorgan Chase Bank, N.A. | System and method for processing transactions using a multi-account transactions device |
US8046169B2 (en) | 2008-01-03 | 2011-10-25 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for determining the geographic location of a device |
US8355862B2 (en) * | 2008-01-06 | 2013-01-15 | Apple Inc. | Graphical user interface for presenting location information |
DE602008004075D1 (en) * | 2008-01-18 | 2011-02-03 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | Multiple object localization using a network of recipients |
US20090198558A1 (en) * | 2008-02-04 | 2009-08-06 | Yahoo! Inc. | Method and system for recommending jobseekers to recruiters |
US20090227254A1 (en) * | 2008-03-05 | 2009-09-10 | West Corporation | System and method for collecting information relating to a calling instrument |
US20090227253A1 (en) * | 2008-03-05 | 2009-09-10 | West Corporation | System and method for locating a dual-mode calling instrument in a plurality of networks |
US8639267B2 (en) | 2008-03-14 | 2014-01-28 | William J. Johnson | System and method for location based exchanges of data facilitating distributed locational applications |
US8566839B2 (en) | 2008-03-14 | 2013-10-22 | William J. Johnson | System and method for automated content presentation objects |
US8634796B2 (en) | 2008-03-14 | 2014-01-21 | William J. Johnson | System and method for location based exchanges of data facilitating distributed location applications |
US8923806B2 (en) | 2008-03-14 | 2014-12-30 | William J. Johnson | System and method for presenting application data by data processing system(s) in a vicinity |
US8600341B2 (en) | 2008-03-14 | 2013-12-03 | William J. Johnson | System and method for location based exchanges of data facilitating distributed locational applications |
US8761751B2 (en) | 2008-03-14 | 2014-06-24 | William J. Johnson | System and method for targeting data processing system(s) with data |
US8494466B2 (en) * | 2008-03-26 | 2013-07-23 | Broadcom Corporation | Selecting receiver chains of a mobile unit for receiving wireless signals |
US9826344B2 (en) * | 2008-03-28 | 2017-11-21 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Systems and methods for determining previous occupation in or proximate to an alert area |
US8805415B2 (en) * | 2008-03-28 | 2014-08-12 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Systems and methods for determination of mobile devices in or proximate to an alert area |
WO2009151778A2 (en) * | 2008-04-14 | 2009-12-17 | Mojix, Inc. | Radio frequency identification tag location estimation and tracking system and method |
US10387837B1 (en) | 2008-04-21 | 2019-08-20 | Monster Worldwide, Inc. | Apparatuses, methods and systems for career path advancement structuring |
US8213955B2 (en) | 2008-05-01 | 2012-07-03 | Andrew, Llc | Network measurement report caching for location of mobile devices |
US20090326815A1 (en) * | 2008-05-02 | 2009-12-31 | Apple Inc. | Position Fix Indicator |
US8314683B2 (en) * | 2008-05-09 | 2012-11-20 | The Israelife Foundation | Incident response system |
US9250092B2 (en) | 2008-05-12 | 2016-02-02 | Apple Inc. | Map service with network-based query for search |
US8644843B2 (en) | 2008-05-16 | 2014-02-04 | Apple Inc. | Location determination |
US8805400B2 (en) | 2008-05-23 | 2014-08-12 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for locating WIMAX or LTE subscriber stations |
US8731457B2 (en) | 2008-05-23 | 2014-05-20 | Andrew Llc | System and method for locating WiMAX or LTE subscriber stations |
CA2726627C (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2014-01-21 | Research In Motion Limited | System and method for managing emergency requests |
US8478226B2 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2013-07-02 | Research In Motion Limited | Updating a request related to an IMS emergency session |
US20090296689A1 (en) | 2008-06-02 | 2009-12-03 | Research In Motion Limited | Privacy-Related Requests for an IMS Emergency Session |
US9602552B2 (en) * | 2008-06-02 | 2017-03-21 | Blackberry Limited | Coding and behavior when receiving an IMS emergency session indicator from authorized source |
US8635335B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2014-01-21 | Headwater Partners I Llc | System and method for wireless network offloading |
US8391834B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2013-03-05 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Security techniques for device assisted services |
US8832777B2 (en) | 2009-03-02 | 2014-09-09 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Adapting network policies based on device service processor configuration |
US8275830B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2012-09-25 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Device assisted CDR creation, aggregation, mediation and billing |
US8402111B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2013-03-19 | Headwater Partners I, Llc | Device assisted services install |
US8406748B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2013-03-26 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Adaptive ambient services |
US8626115B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2014-01-07 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Wireless network service interfaces |
US8548428B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2013-10-01 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Device group partitions and settlement platform |
US8250207B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2012-08-21 | Headwater Partners I, Llc | Network based ambient services |
US8589541B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2013-11-19 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Device-assisted services for protecting network capacity |
US8340634B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2012-12-25 | Headwater Partners I, Llc | Enhanced roaming services and converged carrier networks with device assisted services and a proxy |
US8346225B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2013-01-01 | Headwater Partners I, Llc | Quality of service for device assisted services |
US8369867B2 (en) | 2008-06-30 | 2013-02-05 | Apple Inc. | Location sharing |
WO2010006651A1 (en) | 2008-07-17 | 2010-01-21 | Nokia Corpaoration | Data packet processing for estimation of a direction towards a transmitter |
IL192917A (en) * | 2008-07-20 | 2013-07-31 | Verint Systems Ltd | Method and system for border control |
US7924224B2 (en) | 2008-08-15 | 2011-04-12 | Trueposition, Inc. | Variable coherence integration for the location of weak signals |
US8136240B2 (en) * | 2008-08-19 | 2012-03-20 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method of forming a substrate having a plurality of insulator layers |
US20140094135A1 (en) * | 2012-10-03 | 2014-04-03 | West Corporation | System and method for providing continued answering of special number calls when a primary answering position is effecting call diversion |
US8532747B2 (en) * | 2008-08-22 | 2013-09-10 | Devicor Medical Products, Inc. | Biopsy marker delivery device |
US8193987B2 (en) * | 2008-08-25 | 2012-06-05 | DRS Soneticom. Inc. | Apparatus and method for determining signal quality in a geolocation system |
US8325661B2 (en) * | 2008-08-28 | 2012-12-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Supporting multiple access technologies in a wireless environment |
US8130141B2 (en) | 2008-09-10 | 2012-03-06 | Commlabs, Inc. | Wide area positioning system |
US9035829B2 (en) | 2008-09-10 | 2015-05-19 | Nextnav, Llc | Wide area positioning systems and methods |
US8917209B2 (en) | 2009-09-10 | 2014-12-23 | Nextnav, Llc | Coding in a wide area positioning system (WAPS) |
US9057606B2 (en) | 2009-09-10 | 2015-06-16 | Nextnav, Llc | Wide area positioning system |
US8359643B2 (en) * | 2008-09-18 | 2013-01-22 | Apple Inc. | Group formation using anonymous broadcast information |
US8073463B2 (en) | 2008-10-06 | 2011-12-06 | Andrew, Llc | System and method of UMTS UE location using uplink dedicated physical control channel and downlink synchronization channel |
US8249619B2 (en) * | 2008-10-07 | 2012-08-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatuses for use in mobile device positioning systems |
US8332264B1 (en) * | 2008-10-22 | 2012-12-11 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Method and system for visualizing and analyzing spectrum assets |
US8762519B2 (en) * | 2008-10-28 | 2014-06-24 | Andrew Llc | System and method for providing location services for multiple access networks from a single location server |
US7974627B2 (en) * | 2008-11-11 | 2011-07-05 | Trueposition, Inc. | Use of radio access technology diversity for location |
US8260320B2 (en) * | 2008-11-13 | 2012-09-04 | Apple Inc. | Location specific content |
US8125377B2 (en) * | 2008-11-17 | 2012-02-28 | Andrew Llc | System and method for determining the location of a mobile device |
US8035557B2 (en) * | 2008-11-24 | 2011-10-11 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for server side detection of falsified satellite measurements |
US7800533B2 (en) * | 2008-11-24 | 2010-09-21 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for determining falsified geographic location of a mobile device |
US7940213B2 (en) * | 2008-11-24 | 2011-05-10 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for determining falsified satellite measurements |
US8380222B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2013-02-19 | Andrew Llc | System and method for multiple range estimation location |
US8249622B2 (en) * | 2008-11-26 | 2012-08-21 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for multiple range estimation location |
US8160609B2 (en) * | 2008-11-26 | 2012-04-17 | Andrew Llc | System and method for multiple range estimation location |
US7956803B2 (en) | 2008-12-01 | 2011-06-07 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for protecting against spoofed A-GNSS measurement data |
US8977760B2 (en) | 2008-12-05 | 2015-03-10 | Commscope, Inc. Of North Carolina | System and method for routing SUPL proxy-mode traffice when multiple nodes are deployed in a network |
US9280778B2 (en) | 2008-12-15 | 2016-03-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Location logging and location and time based filtering |
US7916071B2 (en) * | 2008-12-23 | 2011-03-29 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for determining a reference location of a mobile device |
US8138975B2 (en) | 2008-12-30 | 2012-03-20 | Trueposition, Inc. | Interference detection, characterization and location in a wireless communications or broadcast system |
US8436768B2 (en) | 2008-12-30 | 2013-05-07 | Trueposition, Inc. | Diversity time and frequency location receiver |
US8457013B2 (en) * | 2009-01-13 | 2013-06-04 | Metrologic Instruments, Inc. | Wireless dual-function network device dynamically switching and reconfiguring from a wireless network router state of operation into a wireless network coordinator state of operation in a wireless communication network |
US20100177749A1 (en) * | 2009-01-13 | 2010-07-15 | Metrologic Instruments, Inc. | Methods of and apparatus for programming and managing diverse network components, including electronic-ink based display devices, in a mesh-type wireless communication network |
US8326319B2 (en) | 2009-01-23 | 2012-12-04 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Compensation of propagation delays of wireless signals |
US8793758B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2014-07-29 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Security, fraud detection, and fraud mitigation in device-assisted services systems |
US10326800B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2019-06-18 | Headwater Research Llc | Wireless network service interfaces |
US10841839B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2020-11-17 | Headwater Research Llc | Security, fraud detection, and fraud mitigation in device-assisted services systems |
US9565707B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-02-07 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Wireless end-user device with wireless data attribution to multiple personas |
US10779177B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2020-09-15 | Headwater Research Llc | Device group partitions and settlement platform |
US10200541B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2019-02-05 | Headwater Research Llc | Wireless end-user device with divided user space/kernel space traffic policy system |
US10237757B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2019-03-19 | Headwater Research Llc | System and method for wireless network offloading |
US11218854B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2022-01-04 | Headwater Research Llc | Service plan design, user interfaces, application programming interfaces, and device management |
US9755842B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-09-05 | Headwater Research Llc | Managing service user discovery and service launch object placement on a device |
US9253663B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2016-02-02 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Controlling mobile device communications on a roaming network based on device state |
US9572019B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-02-14 | Headwater Partners LLC | Service selection set published to device agent with on-device service selection |
US9351193B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2016-05-24 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Intermediate networking devices |
US10783581B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2020-09-22 | Headwater Research Llc | Wireless end-user device providing ambient or sponsored services |
US10064055B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2018-08-28 | Headwater Research Llc | Security, fraud detection, and fraud mitigation in device-assisted services systems |
US10264138B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2019-04-16 | Headwater Research Llc | Mobile device and service management |
US9954975B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2018-04-24 | Headwater Research Llc | Enhanced curfew and protection associated with a device group |
US9557889B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-01-31 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Service plan design, user interfaces, application programming interfaces, and device management |
US8745191B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2014-06-03 | Headwater Partners I Llc | System and method for providing user notifications |
US10484858B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2019-11-19 | Headwater Research Llc | Enhanced roaming services and converged carrier networks with device assisted services and a proxy |
US9647918B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-05-09 | Headwater Research Llc | Mobile device and method attributing media services network usage to requesting application |
US10798252B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2020-10-06 | Headwater Research Llc | System and method for providing user notifications |
US9578182B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-02-21 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Mobile device and service management |
US10492102B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2019-11-26 | Headwater Research Llc | Intermediate networking devices |
US10248996B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2019-04-02 | Headwater Research Llc | Method for operating a wireless end-user device mobile payment agent |
US9980146B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2018-05-22 | Headwater Research Llc | Communications device with secure data path processing agents |
US9392462B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2016-07-12 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Mobile end-user device with agent limiting wireless data communication for specified background applications based on a stored policy |
US9858559B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2018-01-02 | Headwater Research Llc | Network service plan design |
US9571559B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-02-14 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Enhanced curfew and protection associated with a device group |
US10715342B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2020-07-14 | Headwater Research Llc | Managing service user discovery and service launch object placement on a device |
US10057775B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2018-08-21 | Headwater Research Llc | Virtualized policy and charging system |
US9955332B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2018-04-24 | Headwater Research Llc | Method for child wireless device activation to subscriber account of a master wireless device |
US9706061B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2017-07-11 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Service design center for device assisted services |
US9270559B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2016-02-23 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Service policy implementation for an end-user device having a control application or a proxy agent for routing an application traffic flow |
WO2010092673A1 (en) * | 2009-02-12 | 2010-08-19 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Calibration device |
US9220016B2 (en) | 2009-03-04 | 2015-12-22 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Position monitoring for a coverage area |
US8457148B2 (en) * | 2009-03-12 | 2013-06-04 | Lockheed Martin Corporation | Method for maintaining vital guideway operation in high-demand areas |
US8098200B1 (en) | 2009-03-12 | 2012-01-17 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Method and system for locating signal emitters using residual values |
US8049668B1 (en) * | 2009-03-12 | 2011-11-01 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Method and system for locating signal emitters using iterative residual weighting |
US7986266B2 (en) | 2009-03-13 | 2011-07-26 | Andrew, Llc | Method and system for selecting optimal satellites in view |
US8301160B2 (en) * | 2009-03-16 | 2012-10-30 | Andrew Llc | System and method for SUPL roaming using a held client |
US8239483B2 (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2012-08-07 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for generic application of location determination for network attached devices |
US20100234022A1 (en) * | 2009-03-16 | 2010-09-16 | Andrew Llc | System and method for supl roaming in wimax networks |
US9392521B2 (en) * | 2009-03-18 | 2016-07-12 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | System and method for concurrently determining locations of mobile device in wireless communication network |
US8160610B2 (en) * | 2009-03-18 | 2012-04-17 | Andrew Llc | System and method for locating mobile device in wireless communication network |
US8391884B2 (en) * | 2009-03-26 | 2013-03-05 | Andrew Llc | System and method for managing created location contexts in a location server |
US8462769B2 (en) | 2009-03-26 | 2013-06-11 | Andrew Llc | System and method for managing created location contexts in a location server |
US8630592B2 (en) * | 2009-04-14 | 2014-01-14 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for triggering a wireless connection |
US8213957B2 (en) * | 2009-04-22 | 2012-07-03 | Trueposition, Inc. | Network autonomous wireless location system |
US8670748B2 (en) | 2009-05-01 | 2014-03-11 | Apple Inc. | Remotely locating and commanding a mobile device |
US8666367B2 (en) | 2009-05-01 | 2014-03-04 | Apple Inc. | Remotely locating and commanding a mobile device |
US8660530B2 (en) | 2009-05-01 | 2014-02-25 | Apple Inc. | Remotely receiving and communicating commands to a mobile device for execution by the mobile device |
US8467805B2 (en) * | 2009-05-08 | 2013-06-18 | Andrew Llc | System and method for determining a reference location using cell table data mining |
US8548492B2 (en) | 2009-05-12 | 2013-10-01 | Andrew Llc | System and method for locating WiMAX or LTE subscriber stations |
US8311557B2 (en) * | 2009-05-15 | 2012-11-13 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | Facility for selecting a mobile device location determination technique |
US8718592B2 (en) * | 2009-05-15 | 2014-05-06 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | Mobile device location determination using micronetworks |
US8290510B2 (en) * | 2009-06-11 | 2012-10-16 | Andrew Llc | System and method for SUPL held interworking |
US8022877B2 (en) | 2009-07-16 | 2011-09-20 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Systems and methods for using a satellite positioning system to detect moved WLAN access points |
EP2462461A1 (en) | 2009-08-05 | 2012-06-13 | Andrew LLC | System and method for hybrid location in an lte network |
US8730932B2 (en) | 2009-08-05 | 2014-05-20 | Andrew Llc | System and method for hybrid location in a CDMA 2000 network |
US8406785B2 (en) * | 2009-08-18 | 2013-03-26 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Method and system for estimating range of mobile device to wireless installation |
US8494695B2 (en) * | 2009-09-02 | 2013-07-23 | General Electric Company | Communications system and method for a rail vehicle |
US9291712B2 (en) | 2009-09-10 | 2016-03-22 | Nextnav, Llc | Cell organization and transmission schemes in a wide area positioning system (WAPS) |
US9372266B2 (en) | 2009-09-10 | 2016-06-21 | Nextnav, Llc | Cell organization and transmission schemes in a wide area positioning system (WAPS) |
US8340683B2 (en) | 2009-09-21 | 2012-12-25 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for a high throughput GSM location solution |
US8217832B2 (en) * | 2009-09-23 | 2012-07-10 | Andrew, Llc | Enhancing location accuracy using multiple satellite measurements based on environment |
CN101699915B (en) * | 2009-10-13 | 2015-01-28 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Mainboard, method for realizing network locking/ card locking function and mobile terminal |
US8259010B2 (en) * | 2009-10-14 | 2012-09-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Qualifying coarse position injection in position determination systems |
US8188920B2 (en) * | 2009-10-15 | 2012-05-29 | Andrew, Llc | Location measurement acquisition optimization with Monte Carlo simulation |
US8289210B2 (en) * | 2009-10-15 | 2012-10-16 | Andrew Llc | Location measurement acquisition adaptive optimization |
DE102009049672A1 (en) | 2009-10-16 | 2011-04-28 | Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Förderung der angewandten Forschung e.V. | Concept for generating experiences to update a reference database |
TWI447420B (en) * | 2009-10-20 | 2014-08-01 | Inst Information Industry | Method and system for indoor positioning, and computer program product using the method thereof |
JP5419637B2 (en) * | 2009-11-04 | 2014-02-19 | キヤノン株式会社 | Management device, method and program |
EP2499748A4 (en) * | 2009-11-13 | 2017-03-01 | Zoll Medical Corporation | Community-based response system |
US8922421B2 (en) * | 2009-12-10 | 2014-12-30 | Lockheed Martin Corporation | Method and system for use of GPS disciplined oscillators for coherent timing reference in distributed radar systems |
US8306552B2 (en) * | 2009-12-10 | 2012-11-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Pattern filtering for mobile station position estimation |
US8849254B2 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2014-09-30 | Trueposition, Inc. | Location intelligence management system |
US20110148708A1 (en) * | 2009-12-18 | 2011-06-23 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Method for accuracy improvement of time measurement and position tracking apparatus using the same |
US7990317B2 (en) * | 2009-12-18 | 2011-08-02 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Signal path delay determination |
KR101317340B1 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2013-10-11 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Method for accuracy improvement of time measurement and position tracking apparatus using the same |
US9386421B2 (en) | 2009-12-18 | 2016-07-05 | Trueposition, Inc. | Location intelligence management system for border security |
US8224348B2 (en) * | 2009-12-18 | 2012-07-17 | Trueposition, Inc. | Location intelligence management system |
US8467309B2 (en) * | 2009-12-23 | 2013-06-18 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Packet based location provisioning in wireless networks |
US8106817B2 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2012-01-31 | Polaris Wireless, Inc. | Positioning system and positioning method |
US8106818B2 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2012-01-31 | Polaris Wireless, Inc. | Positioning system and positioning method |
US8013785B2 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-09-06 | Ntt Docomo, Inc. | Positioning system and positioning method |
US9331798B2 (en) * | 2010-01-08 | 2016-05-03 | Commscope Technologies Llc | System and method for mobile location by proximity detection |
US20110170693A1 (en) * | 2010-01-13 | 2011-07-14 | Andrew Llc | Stateless method and system for providing location information of target device |
US8689277B2 (en) * | 2010-01-13 | 2014-04-01 | Andrew Llc | Method and system for providing location of target device using stateless user information |
US20110208668A1 (en) * | 2010-02-22 | 2011-08-25 | Google Inc. | Server Provider Recommendation Engine |
US8224349B2 (en) | 2010-02-25 | 2012-07-17 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Timed fingerprint locating in wireless networks |
US9053513B2 (en) | 2010-02-25 | 2015-06-09 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Fraud analysis for a location aware transaction |
US9008684B2 (en) | 2010-02-25 | 2015-04-14 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Sharing timed fingerprint location information |
US9196157B2 (en) | 2010-02-25 | 2015-11-24 | AT&T Mobolity II LLC | Transportation analytics employing timed fingerprint location information |
US8400292B2 (en) * | 2010-03-01 | 2013-03-19 | Andrew Llc | System and method for location of mobile devices in confined environments |
US9374677B2 (en) | 2010-03-01 | 2016-06-21 | Commscope Technologies Llc | System and method for location of mobile devices in confined environments |
US9253605B2 (en) | 2010-03-24 | 2016-02-02 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | System and method for resolving multiple location estimate conflicts in a WLAN-positioning system |
EP2559014A4 (en) | 2010-04-14 | 2016-11-02 | Mojix Inc | Systems and methods for detecting patterns in spatio-temporal data collected using an rfid system |
US9094927B2 (en) | 2010-04-28 | 2015-07-28 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | Location continuity service for locating mobile devices using multiple access networks including wireless telecommunication networks |
US8472974B2 (en) | 2010-04-28 | 2013-06-25 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | Location continuity service for locating mobile devices using multiple access networks including wireless telecommunication networks |
CN103125133B (en) | 2010-05-10 | 2016-03-23 | 瑞典爱立信有限公司 | For measuring the method and apparatus that configuration is supported |
US8548449B2 (en) * | 2010-05-20 | 2013-10-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Mobile contact notes |
US8718673B2 (en) | 2010-05-21 | 2014-05-06 | Maple Acquisition Llc | System and method for location assurance of a mobile device |
US9112683B2 (en) | 2010-05-27 | 2015-08-18 | Maple Acquisition Llc | Maintaining triggered session state in secure user plane location (SUPL) enabled system |
WO2011156549A2 (en) | 2010-06-11 | 2011-12-15 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Methods of and systems for measuring beacon stability of wireless access points |
KR101411120B1 (en) * | 2010-06-18 | 2014-06-25 | 미쓰비시덴키 가부시키가이샤 | Data processing apparatus, data processing method, and computer readable recording medium having program recorded therein |
EP2585846B1 (en) | 2010-06-25 | 2016-08-03 | Innovationszentrum für Telekommunikationstechnik GmbH IZT | Method and system for determining a time difference, method and system for finding a position of a transmitter |
US8526391B2 (en) | 2010-07-23 | 2013-09-03 | Trueposition, Inc. | Network based location of mobile transmitters |
US9538493B2 (en) * | 2010-08-23 | 2017-01-03 | Finetrak, Llc | Locating a mobile station and applications therefor |
US8204503B1 (en) | 2010-08-25 | 2012-06-19 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Base station identification to indicate mobility of a wireless communication device |
US8660057B2 (en) * | 2010-08-26 | 2014-02-25 | Golba, Llc | Method and system for distributed communication |
US8447328B2 (en) | 2010-08-27 | 2013-05-21 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Location estimation of a mobile device in a UMTS network |
US8812728B2 (en) | 2010-09-15 | 2014-08-19 | Andrew Llc | Routing requests for location-to-service translation (LoST) services using proxy server |
US8958754B2 (en) | 2010-09-29 | 2015-02-17 | Andrew, Llc | System and method for sub-coherent integration for geo-location using weak or intermittent signals |
US8606294B2 (en) | 2010-10-05 | 2013-12-10 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Method of and system for estimating temporal demographics of mobile users |
WO2012046318A1 (en) * | 2010-10-06 | 2012-04-12 | 富士通株式会社 | Wireless station, communication system, and communication method |
US8204510B2 (en) * | 2010-10-08 | 2012-06-19 | Trueposition, Inc. | Detection and selection of a reference signal for network-based wireless location |
TWI419086B (en) * | 2010-10-15 | 2013-12-11 | Chung Shan Inst Of Science | An exchangeable radio transmitting device and its working method |
US8179816B1 (en) * | 2010-11-02 | 2012-05-15 | Diani Systems, Inc. | System and method for high resolution indoor positioning using a narrowband RF transceiver |
US9009629B2 (en) | 2010-12-01 | 2015-04-14 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Motion-based user interface feature subsets |
US8489122B2 (en) | 2010-12-09 | 2013-07-16 | Andrew Llc | System and method for total flight time ratio pattern matching |
EP2652523B1 (en) | 2010-12-13 | 2019-07-03 | Telecom Italia S.p.A. | Method and system for localizing mobile communications terminals |
US8384595B2 (en) | 2010-12-16 | 2013-02-26 | Trueposition, Inc. | Position estimation through iterative inclusion of measurement data |
JP5760425B2 (en) * | 2010-12-17 | 2015-08-12 | 富士通株式会社 | Control device, radar detection system, radar detection method |
CN102684797B (en) | 2010-12-22 | 2015-01-28 | 宏达国际电子股份有限公司 | Method of constructing spectrum map by using compressed sensing and related communication device |
US8331955B2 (en) | 2010-12-28 | 2012-12-11 | Trueposition, Inc. | Robust downlink frame synchronization schemes in CDMA wireless networks for geo-location |
US9462563B2 (en) * | 2011-01-17 | 2016-10-04 | Optis Cellular Technology, Llc | Method and apparatus for compensating signal timing measurements for differences in signal frequencies |
US20120197902A1 (en) * | 2011-01-28 | 2012-08-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | Data ingest optimization |
WO2012112555A1 (en) | 2011-02-14 | 2012-08-23 | Andrew Llc | Method for mobile location by dynamic clustering |
US9485108B2 (en) | 2011-03-14 | 2016-11-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and apparatus for using multichannel file delivery over unidirectional transport (“FLUTE”) protocol for delivering different classes of files in a broadcast network |
KR101948348B1 (en) * | 2011-04-01 | 2019-02-14 | 인터디지탈 패튼 홀딩스, 인크 | Method and apparatus for controlling connectivity to a network |
US9154826B2 (en) | 2011-04-06 | 2015-10-06 | Headwater Partners Ii Llc | Distributing content and service launch objects to mobile devices |
US8768293B1 (en) * | 2011-05-09 | 2014-07-01 | Google Inc. | Automatically establishing a telephonic connection between devices |
US8744370B2 (en) * | 2011-05-18 | 2014-06-03 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | System for characterizing mixer or converter response |
US9451401B2 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2016-09-20 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Application transport level location filtering of internet protocol multicast content delivery |
US9715001B2 (en) | 2011-06-13 | 2017-07-25 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Mobile location in a remote radio head environment |
US20120331561A1 (en) | 2011-06-22 | 2012-12-27 | Broadstone Andrew J | Method of and Systems for Privacy Preserving Mobile Demographic Measurement of Individuals, Groups and Locations Over Time and Space |
US9462497B2 (en) | 2011-07-01 | 2016-10-04 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Subscriber data analysis and graphical rendering |
US9020523B2 (en) | 2011-07-12 | 2015-04-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Position estimating for a mobile device |
US9519043B2 (en) | 2011-07-21 | 2016-12-13 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Estimating network based locating error in wireless networks |
US8897802B2 (en) | 2011-07-21 | 2014-11-25 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Selection of a radio access technology resource based on radio access technology resource historical information |
US8761799B2 (en) | 2011-07-21 | 2014-06-24 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Location analytics employing timed fingerprint location information |
US9176217B2 (en) | 2011-08-02 | 2015-11-03 | Nextnav, Llc | Cell organization and transmission schemes in a wide area positioning system (WAPS) |
US11125850B2 (en) | 2011-08-03 | 2021-09-21 | Polte Corporation | Systems and methods for determining a timing offset of emitter antennas in a wireless network |
US11835639B2 (en) | 2011-08-03 | 2023-12-05 | Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. | Partially synchronized multilateration or trilateration method and system for positional finding using RF |
US8923134B2 (en) | 2011-08-29 | 2014-12-30 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Prioritizing network failure tickets using mobile location data |
US8762048B2 (en) | 2011-10-28 | 2014-06-24 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Automatic travel time and routing determinations in a wireless network |
US8909247B2 (en) | 2011-11-08 | 2014-12-09 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Location based sharing of a network access credential |
IL216282A (en) | 2011-11-10 | 2015-05-31 | Rafael Advanced Defense Sys | Mobile ad-hoc network |
US8554246B2 (en) | 2011-11-21 | 2013-10-08 | Trueposition, Inc. | Combination of multiple baselines for location estimation |
US8970432B2 (en) | 2011-11-28 | 2015-03-03 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Femtocell calibration for timing based locating systems |
US9026133B2 (en) | 2011-11-28 | 2015-05-05 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Handset agent calibration for timing based locating systems |
US8922430B2 (en) | 2011-12-22 | 2014-12-30 | Trueposition, Inc. | Optimization of variable coherence integration for the location of weak signals |
US8660015B2 (en) | 2011-12-27 | 2014-02-25 | Trueposition, Inc. | Location of mobile devices served by a relay node |
US9423508B2 (en) | 2012-01-12 | 2016-08-23 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Autonomous Transmit Chain Delay Measurements |
IL217506A (en) * | 2012-01-12 | 2016-06-30 | Rafael Advanced Defense Sys | Mobile ad-hoc network with reduced guard time |
US8897813B2 (en) | 2012-02-03 | 2014-11-25 | Andrew Llc | LTE user equipment positioning system and method |
FR2986680B1 (en) * | 2012-02-07 | 2014-04-25 | Sigfox Wireless | METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING TIME MEASUREMENTS CARRIED OUT IN A RADIOCOMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR GEOLOCATION |
CA2879180A1 (en) | 2012-03-07 | 2013-09-12 | Snap Trends, Inc. | Methods and systems of aggregating information of social networks based on geographical locations via a network |
WO2013151993A1 (en) * | 2012-04-02 | 2013-10-10 | Noveda Technologies, Inc. | Devices, methods and systems for monitoring distributed energy conservation measures |
US8925104B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2014-12-30 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Event driven permissive sharing of information |
AU2013271771B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2016-07-28 | Nextnav, Llc | Systems and methods for location positioning of user device |
US9094929B2 (en) | 2012-06-12 | 2015-07-28 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Event tagging for mobile networks |
US9326263B2 (en) | 2012-06-13 | 2016-04-26 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Site location determination using crowd sourced propagation delay and location data |
US9046592B2 (en) | 2012-06-13 | 2015-06-02 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Timed fingerprint locating at user equipment |
US8938258B2 (en) | 2012-06-14 | 2015-01-20 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Reference based location information for a wireless network |
US8897805B2 (en) | 2012-06-15 | 2014-11-25 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Geographic redundancy determination for time based location information in a wireless radio network |
US9408174B2 (en) | 2012-06-19 | 2016-08-02 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Facilitation of timed fingerprint mobile device locating |
US8798207B2 (en) * | 2012-06-20 | 2014-08-05 | National Instruments Corporation | Synchronizing receivers in a signal acquisition system |
US9941707B1 (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2018-04-10 | Energous Corporation | Home base station for multiple room coverage with multiple transmitters |
US10211674B1 (en) | 2013-06-12 | 2019-02-19 | Energous Corporation | Wireless charging using selected reflectors |
US9891669B2 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2018-02-13 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for a configuration web service to provide configuration of a wireless power transmitter within a wireless power transmission system |
US10224982B1 (en) | 2013-07-11 | 2019-03-05 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power transmitters for transmitting wireless power and tracking whether wireless power receivers are within authorized locations |
US9825674B1 (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2017-11-21 | Energous Corporation | Enhanced transmitter that selects configurations of antenna elements for performing wireless power transmission and receiving functions |
US10124754B1 (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2018-11-13 | Energous Corporation | Wireless charging and powering of electronic sensors in a vehicle |
US9812890B1 (en) | 2013-07-11 | 2017-11-07 | Energous Corporation | Portable wireless charging pad |
US9824815B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2017-11-21 | Energous Corporation | Wireless charging and powering of healthcare gadgets and sensors |
US9831718B2 (en) | 2013-07-25 | 2017-11-28 | Energous Corporation | TV with integrated wireless power transmitter |
US10103582B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-10-16 | Energous Corporation | Transmitters for wireless power transmission |
US9867062B1 (en) | 2014-07-21 | 2018-01-09 | Energous Corporation | System and methods for using a remote server to authorize a receiving device that has requested wireless power and to determine whether another receiving device should request wireless power in a wireless power transmission system |
US10050462B1 (en) | 2013-08-06 | 2018-08-14 | Energous Corporation | Social power sharing for mobile devices based on pocket-forming |
US10206185B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2019-02-12 | Energous Corporation | System and methods for wireless power transmission to an electronic device in accordance with user-defined restrictions |
US9900057B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-02-20 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for assigning groups of antenas of a wireless power transmitter to different wireless power receivers, and determining effective phases to use for wirelessly transmitting power using the assigned groups of antennas |
US10193396B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2019-01-29 | Energous Corporation | Cluster management of transmitters in a wireless power transmission system |
US9871398B1 (en) | 2013-07-01 | 2018-01-16 | Energous Corporation | Hybrid charging method for wireless power transmission based on pocket-forming |
US10211680B2 (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2019-02-19 | Energous Corporation | Method for 3 dimensional pocket-forming |
US9973021B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-05-15 | Energous Corporation | Receivers for wireless power transmission |
US10224758B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2019-03-05 | Energous Corporation | Wireless powering of electronic devices with selective delivery range |
US9941747B2 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2018-04-10 | Energous Corporation | System and method for manually selecting and deselecting devices to charge in a wireless power network |
US10075008B1 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2018-09-11 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for manually adjusting when receiving electronic devices are scheduled to receive wirelessly delivered power from a wireless power transmitter in a wireless power network |
US9899861B1 (en) | 2013-10-10 | 2018-02-20 | Energous Corporation | Wireless charging methods and systems for game controllers, based on pocket-forming |
US9954374B1 (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2018-04-24 | Energous Corporation | System and method for self-system analysis for detecting a fault in a wireless power transmission Network |
US10063064B1 (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2018-08-28 | Energous Corporation | System and method for generating a power receiver identifier in a wireless power network |
US10128699B2 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2018-11-13 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of providing wireless power using receiver device sensor inputs |
US9438045B1 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2016-09-06 | Energous Corporation | Methods and systems for maximum power point transfer in receivers |
US10218227B2 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2019-02-26 | Energous Corporation | Compact PIFA antenna |
US9887584B1 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2018-02-06 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for a configuration web service to provide configuration of a wireless power transmitter within a wireless power transmission system |
US9899873B2 (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2018-02-20 | Energous Corporation | System and method for generating a power receiver identifier in a wireless power network |
US20140008993A1 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2014-01-09 | DvineWave Inc. | Methodology for pocket-forming |
US10223717B1 (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2019-03-05 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for payment-based authorization of wireless power transmission service |
US9143000B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2015-09-22 | Energous Corporation | Portable wireless charging pad |
US10230266B1 (en) | 2014-02-06 | 2019-03-12 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power receivers that communicate status data indicating wireless power transmission effectiveness with a transmitter using a built-in communications component of a mobile device, and methods of use thereof |
US11502551B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2022-11-15 | Energous Corporation | Wirelessly charging multiple wireless-power receivers using different subsets of an antenna array to focus energy at different locations |
US9843213B2 (en) | 2013-08-06 | 2017-12-12 | Energous Corporation | Social power sharing for mobile devices based on pocket-forming |
US9859797B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2018-01-02 | Energous Corporation | Synchronous rectifier design for wireless power receiver |
US9948135B2 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-04-17 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for identifying sensitive objects in a wireless charging transmission field |
US10243414B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2019-03-26 | Energous Corporation | Wearable device with wireless power and payload receiver |
US9847677B1 (en) | 2013-10-10 | 2017-12-19 | Energous Corporation | Wireless charging and powering of healthcare gadgets and sensors |
US10141791B2 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2018-11-27 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for controlling communications during wireless transmission of power using application programming interfaces |
US10211682B2 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2019-02-19 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for controlling operation of a transmitter of a wireless power network based on user instructions received from an authenticated computing device powered or charged by a receiver of the wireless power network |
US10199849B1 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2019-02-05 | Energous Corporation | Method for automatically testing the operational status of a wireless power receiver in a wireless power transmission system |
US9893768B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-02-13 | Energous Corporation | Methodology for multiple pocket-forming |
US10965164B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2021-03-30 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of wirelessly delivering power to a receiver device |
US9838083B2 (en) | 2014-07-21 | 2017-12-05 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for communication with remote management systems |
US10291055B1 (en) | 2014-12-29 | 2019-05-14 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for controlling far-field wireless power transmission based on battery power levels of a receiving device |
US10439448B2 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2019-10-08 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for automatically testing the communication between wireless power transmitter and wireless power receiver |
US10063106B2 (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2018-08-28 | Energous Corporation | System and method for a self-system analysis in a wireless power transmission network |
US10256657B2 (en) | 2015-12-24 | 2019-04-09 | Energous Corporation | Antenna having coaxial structure for near field wireless power charging |
US10199835B2 (en) | 2015-12-29 | 2019-02-05 | Energous Corporation | Radar motion detection using stepped frequency in wireless power transmission system |
US9843201B1 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2017-12-12 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power transmitter that selects antenna sets for transmitting wireless power to a receiver based on location of the receiver, and methods of use thereof |
US9787103B1 (en) | 2013-08-06 | 2017-10-10 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for wirelessly delivering power to electronic devices that are unable to communicate with a transmitter |
US9124125B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2015-09-01 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power transmission with selective range |
US10008889B2 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2018-06-26 | Energous Corporation | Method for automatically testing the operational status of a wireless power receiver in a wireless power transmission system |
US9882430B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2018-01-30 | Energous Corporation | Cluster management of transmitters in a wireless power transmission system |
US10381880B2 (en) | 2014-07-21 | 2019-08-13 | Energous Corporation | Integrated antenna structure arrays for wireless power transmission |
US9876394B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2018-01-23 | Energous Corporation | Boost-charger-boost system for enhanced power delivery |
US10205239B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2019-02-12 | Energous Corporation | Compact PIFA antenna |
US9876648B2 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2018-01-23 | Energous Corporation | System and method to control a wireless power transmission system by configuration of wireless power transmission control parameters |
US10270261B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2019-04-23 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of object detection in wireless power charging systems |
US10063105B2 (en) | 2013-07-11 | 2018-08-28 | Energous Corporation | Proximity transmitters for wireless power charging systems |
US9882427B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2018-01-30 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power delivery using a base station to control operations of a plurality of wireless power transmitters |
US9853692B1 (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2017-12-26 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for wireless power transmission |
US10090886B1 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2018-10-02 | Energous Corporation | System and method for enabling automatic charging schedules in a wireless power network to one or more devices |
US10992187B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2021-04-27 | Energous Corporation | System and methods of using electromagnetic waves to wirelessly deliver power to electronic devices |
US9912199B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-03-06 | Energous Corporation | Receivers for wireless power transmission |
US9806564B2 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2017-10-31 | Energous Corporation | Integrated rectifier and boost converter for wireless power transmission |
US9941754B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-04-10 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power transmission with selective range |
US9793758B2 (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2017-10-17 | Energous Corporation | Enhanced transmitter using frequency control for wireless power transmission |
US10992185B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2021-04-27 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of using electromagnetic waves to wirelessly deliver power to game controllers |
US9859757B1 (en) | 2013-07-25 | 2018-01-02 | Energous Corporation | Antenna tile arrangements in electronic device enclosures |
US9966765B1 (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2018-05-08 | Energous Corporation | Multi-mode transmitter |
US10186913B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2019-01-22 | Energous Corporation | System and methods for pocket-forming based on constructive and destructive interferences to power one or more wireless power receivers using a wireless power transmitter including a plurality of antennas |
US9853458B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2017-12-26 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for device and power receiver pairing |
US10141768B2 (en) | 2013-06-03 | 2018-11-27 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for maximizing wireless power transfer efficiency by instructing a user to change a receiver device's position |
US9252628B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2016-02-02 | Energous Corporation | Laptop computer as a transmitter for wireless charging |
US9893554B2 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2018-02-13 | Energous Corporation | System and method for providing health safety in a wireless power transmission system |
US10148097B1 (en) | 2013-11-08 | 2018-12-04 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for using a predetermined number of communication channels of a wireless power transmitter to communicate with different wireless power receivers |
US9939864B1 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2018-04-10 | Energous Corporation | System and method to control a wireless power transmission system by configuration of wireless power transmission control parameters |
US9887739B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-02-06 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for wireless power transmission by comparing voltage levels associated with power waves transmitted by antennas of a plurality of antennas of a transmitter to determine appropriate phase adjustments for the power waves |
US9876379B1 (en) | 2013-07-11 | 2018-01-23 | Energous Corporation | Wireless charging and powering of electronic devices in a vehicle |
US9991741B1 (en) * | 2014-07-14 | 2018-06-05 | Energous Corporation | System for tracking and reporting status and usage information in a wireless power management system |
US9859756B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-01-02 | Energous Corporation | Transmittersand methods for adjusting wireless power transmission based on information from receivers |
US20150326070A1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2015-11-12 | Energous Corporation | Methods and Systems for Maximum Power Point Transfer in Receivers |
US10291066B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2019-05-14 | Energous Corporation | Power transmission control systems and methods |
US10038337B1 (en) | 2013-09-16 | 2018-07-31 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power supply for rescue devices |
US10128693B2 (en) | 2014-07-14 | 2018-11-13 | Energous Corporation | System and method for providing health safety in a wireless power transmission system |
US9923386B1 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-03-20 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for wireless power transmission by modifying a number of antenna elements used to transmit power waves to a receiver |
US9893555B1 (en) | 2013-10-10 | 2018-02-13 | Energous Corporation | Wireless charging of tools using a toolbox transmitter |
US9906065B2 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2018-02-27 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of transmitting power transmission waves based on signals received at first and second subsets of a transmitter's antenna array |
US10090699B1 (en) | 2013-11-01 | 2018-10-02 | Energous Corporation | Wireless powered house |
US10263432B1 (en) | 2013-06-25 | 2019-04-16 | Energous Corporation | Multi-mode transmitter with an antenna array for delivering wireless power and providing Wi-Fi access |
US9368020B1 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2016-06-14 | Energous Corporation | Off-premises alert system and method for wireless power receivers in a wireless power network |
US10312715B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2019-06-04 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for wireless power charging |
US9847679B2 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2017-12-19 | Energous Corporation | System and method for controlling communication between wireless power transmitter managers |
US8892054B2 (en) | 2012-07-17 | 2014-11-18 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Facilitation of delay error correction in timing-based location systems |
US9351223B2 (en) | 2012-07-25 | 2016-05-24 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Assignment of hierarchical cell structures employing geolocation techniques |
US9094788B2 (en) | 2012-08-03 | 2015-07-28 | Blackberry Limited | Centralized data store for providing all place-related data to applications on a mobile device |
US10440512B2 (en) | 2012-08-03 | 2019-10-08 | Polte Corporation | Angle of arrival (AOA) positioning method and system for positional finding and tracking objects using reduced attenuation RF technology |
US10863313B2 (en) | 2014-08-01 | 2020-12-08 | Polte Corporation | Network architecture and methods for location services |
US10845453B2 (en) | 2012-08-03 | 2020-11-24 | Polte Corporation | Network architecture and methods for location services |
US9173055B2 (en) | 2012-08-03 | 2015-10-27 | Blackberry Limited | Managing of application access to centrally stored place-related data on a mobile device |
US9049547B2 (en) | 2012-08-31 | 2015-06-02 | Blackberry Limited | Displaying place-related content on a mobile device |
US9390279B2 (en) | 2012-09-11 | 2016-07-12 | Nextnav, Llc | Systems and methods for providing conditional access to transmitted information |
US9286490B2 (en) | 2013-09-10 | 2016-03-15 | Nextnav, Llc | Systems and methods for providing conditional access to transmitted information |
US9014974B2 (en) | 2012-10-16 | 2015-04-21 | Qualcomm, Incorporated | Predictive scheduling of navigation tasks |
US8805297B2 (en) | 2012-10-16 | 2014-08-12 | Raytheon Company | Band stitching electronic circuits and techniques |
US8995228B2 (en) | 2012-10-22 | 2015-03-31 | Symbol Technologies, Inc. | Ultrasonic locationing using only time difference of arrival measurements |
US9559793B2 (en) | 2012-10-25 | 2017-01-31 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Wireless device test station calibration |
US9841501B1 (en) * | 2012-10-29 | 2017-12-12 | The Boeing Company | Use of blink counts to locate movable tagged assets |
US9161172B2 (en) | 2012-11-06 | 2015-10-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Map-based adaptive sampling of orientation sensors for positioning |
CN104396321B (en) * | 2012-11-07 | 2019-04-05 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method of locating terminal and positioning device |
CN102955161A (en) * | 2012-11-15 | 2013-03-06 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Power-saving wireless positioning method of mobile terminal |
FI125462B (en) * | 2013-01-29 | 2015-10-15 | Inverpolis Oy | Procedures and systems for using a phased antenna array |
WO2014120012A1 (en) | 2013-01-31 | 2014-08-07 | Nederlandse Organisatie Voor Toegepast-Natuurwetenschappelijk Onderzoek Tno | Determining a position of a mobile communication device |
DE202013002107U1 (en) * | 2013-03-06 | 2013-06-19 | Amv Networks Gmbh | AMV system |
WO2014159862A1 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2014-10-02 | Headwater Partners I Llc | Automated credential porting for mobile devices |
US9526074B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-12-20 | Google Technology Holdings LLC | Methods and apparatus for determining a transmit antenna gain and a spatial mode of a device |
US9111156B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2015-08-18 | Mojix, Inc. | Systems and methods for compressive sensing ranging evaluation |
EP2973245A4 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2017-01-11 | Factual Inc. | Crowdsouorcing domain specific intelligence |
US9407317B2 (en) * | 2013-04-03 | 2016-08-02 | Umm Al-Qura University | Differential ultra-wideband indoor positioning method |
US9538382B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2017-01-03 | Energous Corporation | System and method for smart registration of wireless power receivers in a wireless power network |
US9819230B2 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2017-11-14 | Energous Corporation | Enhanced receiver for wireless power transmission |
US9866279B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2018-01-09 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for selecting which power transmitter should deliver wireless power to a receiving device in a wireless power delivery network |
US9843763B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2017-12-12 | Energous Corporation | TV system with wireless power transmitter |
US9419443B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2016-08-16 | Energous Corporation | Transducer sound arrangement for pocket-forming |
US9537357B2 (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2017-01-03 | Energous Corporation | Wireless sound charging methods and systems for game controllers, based on pocket-forming |
US9338819B2 (en) * | 2013-05-29 | 2016-05-10 | Medtronic Minimed, Inc. | Variable data usage personal medical system and method |
US10103552B1 (en) | 2013-06-03 | 2018-10-16 | Energous Corporation | Protocols for authenticated wireless power transmission |
WO2014203118A1 (en) * | 2013-06-10 | 2014-12-24 | Aka Advanced Technologies Ltd. | Weighing systems having location calibration capability |
US10003211B1 (en) | 2013-06-17 | 2018-06-19 | Energous Corporation | Battery life of portable electronic devices |
US10021523B2 (en) | 2013-07-11 | 2018-07-10 | Energous Corporation | Proximity transmitters for wireless power charging systems |
US9979440B1 (en) | 2013-07-25 | 2018-05-22 | Energous Corporation | Antenna tile arrangements configured to operate as one functional unit |
IL227858A (en) | 2013-08-08 | 2015-06-30 | Elbit System Bmd And Land Ew Elisra Ltd | System and method for directionally classifying radio signals |
US9477991B2 (en) | 2013-08-27 | 2016-10-25 | Snap Trends, Inc. | Methods and systems of aggregating information of geographic context regions of social networks based on geographical locations via a network |
US9609469B2 (en) | 2013-09-19 | 2017-03-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Seeding an estimator when receiving assistance data on a slow link |
US9894489B2 (en) | 2013-09-30 | 2018-02-13 | William J. Johnson | System and method for situational proximity observation alerting privileged recipients |
US9191916B1 (en) * | 2013-09-30 | 2015-11-17 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Method and system for skewing location determinations |
US9058626B1 (en) | 2013-11-13 | 2015-06-16 | Jpmorgan Chase Bank, N.A. | System and method for financial services device usage |
US9935482B1 (en) | 2014-02-06 | 2018-04-03 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power transmitters that transmit at determined times based on power availability and consumption at a receiving mobile device |
US10075017B2 (en) | 2014-02-06 | 2018-09-11 | Energous Corporation | External or internal wireless power receiver with spaced-apart antenna elements for charging or powering mobile devices using wirelessly delivered power |
US9941925B1 (en) * | 2014-02-21 | 2018-04-10 | Rockwell Collins, Inc. | Communication system supporting high-precision measurements utilizing reference sequence re-modulation |
US10158257B2 (en) | 2014-05-01 | 2018-12-18 | Energous Corporation | System and methods for using sound waves to wirelessly deliver power to electronic devices |
US9966784B2 (en) | 2014-06-03 | 2018-05-08 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for extending battery life of portable electronic devices charged by sound |
US10153645B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2018-12-11 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for designating a master power transmitter in a cluster of wireless power transmitters |
US9973008B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2018-05-15 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power receiver with boost converters directly coupled to a storage element |
US10153653B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2018-12-11 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for using application programming interfaces to control communications between a transmitter and a receiver |
US10170917B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2019-01-01 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for managing and controlling a wireless power network by establishing time intervals during which receivers communicate with a transmitter |
US9800172B1 (en) | 2014-05-07 | 2017-10-24 | Energous Corporation | Integrated rectifier and boost converter for boosting voltage received from wireless power transmission waves |
US9876536B1 (en) | 2014-05-23 | 2018-01-23 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for assigning groups of antennas to transmit wireless power to different wireless power receivers |
EP3151617B1 (en) * | 2014-06-24 | 2019-05-29 | Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. | Locating method, user equipment and base station |
US9227579B1 (en) * | 2014-07-02 | 2016-01-05 | GM Global Technology Operations LLC | Hybrid wireless-wired architecture based on power lines for intra-vehicular communication |
US9357369B2 (en) | 2014-07-03 | 2016-05-31 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Reducing provider costs related to E911 service |
US10068703B1 (en) | 2014-07-21 | 2018-09-04 | Energous Corporation | Integrated miniature PIFA with artificial magnetic conductor metamaterials |
US9871301B2 (en) | 2014-07-21 | 2018-01-16 | Energous Corporation | Integrated miniature PIFA with artificial magnetic conductor metamaterials |
US10116143B1 (en) | 2014-07-21 | 2018-10-30 | Energous Corporation | Integrated antenna arrays for wireless power transmission |
US9965009B1 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2018-05-08 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for assigning a power receiver to individual power transmitters based on location of the power receiver |
US9917477B1 (en) | 2014-08-21 | 2018-03-13 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for automatically testing the communication between power transmitter and wireless receiver |
WO2016065368A1 (en) * | 2014-10-24 | 2016-04-28 | Felix Markhovsky | Partially synchronized multilateration or trilateration method and system for positional finding using rf |
US9660772B2 (en) * | 2014-12-16 | 2017-05-23 | The Boeing Company | Detecting and processing weak signals using an array of antennas |
US10122415B2 (en) | 2014-12-27 | 2018-11-06 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for assigning a set of antennas of a wireless power transmitter to a wireless power receiver based on a location of the wireless power receiver |
US9386414B1 (en) * | 2015-01-26 | 2016-07-05 | Apple Inc. | Location support for emergency calls |
US9893535B2 (en) | 2015-02-13 | 2018-02-13 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for determining optimal charging positions to maximize efficiency of power received from wirelessly delivered sound wave energy |
US9392417B1 (en) | 2015-03-03 | 2016-07-12 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Managing activities performed by a plurality of collocated mobile devices |
US9351111B1 (en) | 2015-03-06 | 2016-05-24 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Access to mobile location related information |
US9883337B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2018-01-30 | Mijix, Inc. | Location based services for RFID and sensor networks |
SE540154C2 (en) * | 2015-05-05 | 2018-04-17 | Scania Cv Ab | Device and method for managing communication for a vehicle |
WO2017014011A1 (en) * | 2015-07-17 | 2017-01-26 | 株式会社村田製作所 | Position detection system and computer program |
KR101689628B1 (en) * | 2015-07-30 | 2016-12-26 | 국방과학연구소 | Apparatus and method for estimating passive emitter location |
US10523033B2 (en) | 2015-09-15 | 2019-12-31 | Energous Corporation | Receiver devices configured to determine location within a transmission field |
US9906275B2 (en) | 2015-09-15 | 2018-02-27 | Energous Corporation | Identifying receivers in a wireless charging transmission field |
US10158259B1 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-12-18 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for identifying receivers in a transmission field by transmitting exploratory power waves towards different segments of a transmission field |
US10211685B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2019-02-19 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for real or near real time wireless communications between a wireless power transmitter and a wireless power receiver |
US9941752B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-04-10 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of object detection in wireless power charging systems |
US9893538B1 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-02-13 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of object detection in wireless power charging systems |
US10186893B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2019-01-22 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for real time or near real time wireless communications between a wireless power transmitter and a wireless power receiver |
US10008875B1 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-06-26 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power transmitter configured to transmit power waves to a predicted location of a moving wireless power receiver |
US9871387B1 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-01-16 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of object detection using one or more video cameras in wireless power charging systems |
US11710321B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2023-07-25 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of object detection in wireless power charging systems |
US10199850B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2019-02-05 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for wirelessly transmitting power from a transmitter to a receiver by determining refined locations of the receiver in a segmented transmission field associated with the transmitter |
US10778041B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2020-09-15 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for generating power waves in a wireless power transmission system |
US10020678B1 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-07-10 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for selecting antennas to generate and transmit power transmission waves |
US10153660B1 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-12-11 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for preconfiguring sensor data for wireless charging systems |
US10128686B1 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-11-13 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for identifying receiver locations using sensor technologies |
US10135295B2 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-11-20 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for nullifying energy levels for wireless power transmission waves |
US10027168B2 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-07-17 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for generating and transmitting wireless power transmission waves using antennas having a spacing that is selected by the transmitter |
US10135294B1 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-11-20 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for preconfiguring transmission devices for power wave transmissions based on location data of one or more receivers |
US10050470B1 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-08-14 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power transmission device having antennas oriented in three dimensions |
US10033222B1 (en) | 2015-09-22 | 2018-07-24 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for determining and generating a waveform for wireless power transmission waves |
CN105703848B (en) * | 2015-10-09 | 2019-03-29 | 武汉中元通信股份有限公司 | Based on the system for carrying out online aging simultaneously to multi-section radio station with monitoring automatically |
RU2696603C1 (en) * | 2015-10-13 | 2019-08-05 | Сименс Акциенгезелльшафт | Method, apparatus and system for determining an internal location |
US10734717B2 (en) | 2015-10-13 | 2020-08-04 | Energous Corporation | 3D ceramic mold antenna |
US10333332B1 (en) | 2015-10-13 | 2019-06-25 | Energous Corporation | Cross-polarized dipole antenna |
US9899744B1 (en) | 2015-10-28 | 2018-02-20 | Energous Corporation | Antenna for wireless charging systems |
US9853485B2 (en) | 2015-10-28 | 2017-12-26 | Energous Corporation | Antenna for wireless charging systems |
US10027180B1 (en) | 2015-11-02 | 2018-07-17 | Energous Corporation | 3D triple linear antenna that acts as heat sink |
US10063108B1 (en) | 2015-11-02 | 2018-08-28 | Energous Corporation | Stamped three-dimensional antenna |
US10135112B1 (en) | 2015-11-02 | 2018-11-20 | Energous Corporation | 3D antenna mount |
US10218207B2 (en) | 2015-12-24 | 2019-02-26 | Energous Corporation | Receiver chip for routing a wireless signal for wireless power charging or data reception |
US10320446B2 (en) | 2015-12-24 | 2019-06-11 | Energous Corporation | Miniaturized highly-efficient designs for near-field power transfer system |
US10256677B2 (en) | 2016-12-12 | 2019-04-09 | Energous Corporation | Near-field RF charging pad with adaptive loading to efficiently charge an electronic device at any position on the pad |
US10079515B2 (en) | 2016-12-12 | 2018-09-18 | Energous Corporation | Near-field RF charging pad with multi-band antenna element with adaptive loading to efficiently charge an electronic device at any position on the pad |
US10038332B1 (en) | 2015-12-24 | 2018-07-31 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods of wireless power charging through multiple receiving devices |
US10027159B2 (en) | 2015-12-24 | 2018-07-17 | Energous Corporation | Antenna for transmitting wireless power signals |
US11863001B2 (en) | 2015-12-24 | 2024-01-02 | Energous Corporation | Near-field antenna for wireless power transmission with antenna elements that follow meandering patterns |
US10008886B2 (en) | 2015-12-29 | 2018-06-26 | Energous Corporation | Modular antennas with heat sinks in wireless power transmission systems |
US9699611B1 (en) | 2016-01-04 | 2017-07-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Relative forward link calibration estimation |
CN106940703B (en) * | 2016-01-04 | 2020-09-11 | 腾讯科技(北京)有限公司 | Pushed information rough selection sorting method and device |
US10897686B2 (en) | 2016-03-24 | 2021-01-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Determining a time calibration value for a user equipment |
US9846228B2 (en) | 2016-04-07 | 2017-12-19 | Uhnder, Inc. | Software defined automotive radar systems |
US10261179B2 (en) | 2016-04-07 | 2019-04-16 | Uhnder, Inc. | Software defined automotive radar |
WO2017175190A1 (en) | 2016-04-07 | 2017-10-12 | Uhnder, Inc. | Adaptive transmission and interference cancellation for mimo radar |
US9791551B1 (en) | 2016-04-25 | 2017-10-17 | Uhnder, Inc. | Vehicular radar system with self-interference cancellation |
WO2017187299A2 (en) | 2016-04-25 | 2017-11-02 | Uhnder, Inc. | Successive signal interference mitigation |
WO2017187278A1 (en) | 2016-04-25 | 2017-11-02 | Uhnder, Inc. | Pmcw – pmcw interference mitigation |
US10573959B2 (en) | 2016-04-25 | 2020-02-25 | Uhnder, Inc. | Vehicle radar system using shaped antenna patterns |
WO2017187242A1 (en) | 2016-04-25 | 2017-11-02 | Uhnder, Inc. | On-demand multi-scan micro doppler for vehicle |
US9575160B1 (en) | 2016-04-25 | 2017-02-21 | Uhnder, Inc. | Vehicular radar sensing system utilizing high rate true random number generator |
WO2017187306A1 (en) | 2016-04-25 | 2017-11-02 | Uhnder, Inc. | Adaptive filtering for fmcw interference mitigation in pmcw radar systems |
WO2017187304A2 (en) | 2016-04-25 | 2017-11-02 | Uhnder, Inc. | Digital frequency modulated continuous wave radar using handcrafted constant envelope modulation |
EP3449272B1 (en) | 2016-04-25 | 2022-11-02 | Uhnder, Inc. | Vehicle radar system with a shared radar and communication system, and method for managing such a system in a vehicle |
US10459013B2 (en) * | 2016-06-17 | 2019-10-29 | Analog Devices Global | Apparatus for and method of providing measurements of uncertainty in respect of a transfer function |
US9753121B1 (en) | 2016-06-20 | 2017-09-05 | Uhnder, Inc. | Power control for improved near-far performance of radar systems |
US10869165B2 (en) * | 2016-08-04 | 2020-12-15 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Base station apparatus, location server, and communication method |
EP3651433A1 (en) | 2016-08-26 | 2020-05-13 | Intrinsic Value, LLC | Systems, devices, and methods for emergency responses and safety |
US11259165B2 (en) | 2016-08-26 | 2022-02-22 | Intrinsic Value, Llc | Systems, devices, and methods for emergency responses and safety |
US10506413B2 (en) | 2017-08-28 | 2019-12-10 | Intrinsic Value, Llc | Systems, devices, and methods for emergency responses and safety |
CN106255064A (en) * | 2016-08-29 | 2016-12-21 | 北斗羲和科技发展(北京)有限公司 | A kind of position error detection method and device |
WO2018051288A1 (en) | 2016-09-16 | 2018-03-22 | Uhnder, Inc. | Virtual radar configuration for 2d array |
BR112019005563A2 (en) * | 2016-09-30 | 2019-06-04 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | narrowband positioning reference signal |
US10923954B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2021-02-16 | Energous Corporation | Wireless power receiver with a synchronous rectifier |
US10743274B2 (en) * | 2016-11-15 | 2020-08-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Prioritizing synchronization channel frequencies in wireless communications |
CN106950533A (en) * | 2016-12-05 | 2017-07-14 | 南京理工大学 | A kind of sane beam forming combined positioning-method of self adaptation for suppressing interference |
KR102349607B1 (en) | 2016-12-12 | 2022-01-12 | 에너저스 코포레이션 | Methods of selectively activating antenna zones of a near-field charging pad to maximize wireless power delivered |
JP2018096799A (en) * | 2016-12-12 | 2018-06-21 | ヤンマー株式会社 | Communication system |
US10439442B2 (en) | 2017-01-24 | 2019-10-08 | Energous Corporation | Microstrip antennas for wireless power transmitters |
US10680319B2 (en) | 2017-01-06 | 2020-06-09 | Energous Corporation | Devices and methods for reducing mutual coupling effects in wireless power transmission systems |
US10389161B2 (en) | 2017-03-15 | 2019-08-20 | Energous Corporation | Surface mount dielectric antennas for wireless power transmitters |
US11454697B2 (en) | 2017-02-10 | 2022-09-27 | Uhnder, Inc. | Increasing performance of a receive pipeline of a radar with memory optimization |
US10866306B2 (en) | 2017-02-10 | 2020-12-15 | Uhnder, Inc. | Increasing performance of a receive pipeline of a radar with memory optimization |
WO2018146530A1 (en) | 2017-02-10 | 2018-08-16 | Uhnder, Inc. | Reduced complexity fft-based correlation for automotive radar |
WO2018183892A1 (en) | 2017-03-30 | 2018-10-04 | Energous Corporation | Flat antennas having two or more resonant frequencies for use in wireless power transmission systems |
EP3404440B1 (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2021-09-15 | Semtech Corporation | Positioning system and method with multipath mitigation |
US10258295B2 (en) | 2017-05-09 | 2019-04-16 | LifePod Solutions, Inc. | Voice controlled assistance for monitoring adverse events of a user and/or coordinating emergency actions such as caregiver communication |
US10511097B2 (en) | 2017-05-12 | 2019-12-17 | Energous Corporation | Near-field antennas for accumulating energy at a near-field distance with minimal far-field gain |
US11462949B2 (en) | 2017-05-16 | 2022-10-04 | Wireless electrical Grid LAN, WiGL Inc | Wireless charging method and system |
US10770928B2 (en) * | 2017-06-06 | 2020-09-08 | Apple Inc. | Wireless charging device with multi-tone data receiver |
IL252861B (en) | 2017-06-12 | 2018-10-31 | Elbit System Bmd And Land Ew Elisra Ltd | Method and system for identifying transmitter usage characteristics |
CN109362244B (en) * | 2017-06-16 | 2022-02-22 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Data scheduling method and device |
US10848853B2 (en) | 2017-06-23 | 2020-11-24 | Energous Corporation | Systems, methods, and devices for utilizing a wire of a sound-producing device as an antenna for receipt of wirelessly delivered power |
DE102017117498A1 (en) * | 2017-08-02 | 2019-02-07 | Airbus Defence and Space GmbH | System and method for calibrating a transmitting unit and watercraft with a system for calibrating a transmitting unit |
US10122219B1 (en) | 2017-10-10 | 2018-11-06 | Energous Corporation | Systems, methods, and devices for using a battery as a antenna for receiving wirelessly delivered power from radio frequency power waves |
US11342798B2 (en) | 2017-10-30 | 2022-05-24 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for managing coexistence of wireless-power signals and data signals operating in a same frequency band |
TWI650958B (en) | 2017-11-28 | 2019-02-11 | 財團法人工業技術研究院 | Wireless receiver device, wake-up receiver, and band correction method |
US11105890B2 (en) | 2017-12-14 | 2021-08-31 | Uhnder, Inc. | Frequency modulated signal cancellation in variable power mode for radar applications |
US10325423B1 (en) * | 2017-12-20 | 2019-06-18 | ANI Technologies Private Limited | Method and system for validating states of components of vehicle |
US10615647B2 (en) | 2018-02-02 | 2020-04-07 | Energous Corporation | Systems and methods for detecting wireless power receivers and other objects at a near-field charging pad |
US11159057B2 (en) | 2018-03-14 | 2021-10-26 | Energous Corporation | Loop antennas with selectively-activated feeds to control propagation patterns of wireless power signals |
US11255945B2 (en) | 2018-03-27 | 2022-02-22 | Polte Corporation | Multi-path mitigation in tracking objects using compressed RF data |
CN108594284B (en) * | 2018-04-26 | 2021-03-30 | 上海市无线电监测站 | TDOA (time difference of arrival) positioning performance detection method and system |
US10516972B1 (en) | 2018-06-01 | 2019-12-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Employing an alternate identifier for subscription access to mobile location information |
US11515732B2 (en) | 2018-06-25 | 2022-11-29 | Energous Corporation | Power wave transmission techniques to focus wirelessly delivered power at a receiving device |
EP3591805A1 (en) * | 2018-07-03 | 2020-01-08 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Power transmitter and method of operation therefor |
TWI690231B (en) * | 2018-09-07 | 2020-04-01 | 財團法人工業技術研究院 | Wireless positioning calibration system and method thereof |
CN109450563B (en) * | 2018-10-16 | 2021-04-30 | 电子科技大学 | WiFi chip phase offset correction method |
US11474225B2 (en) | 2018-11-09 | 2022-10-18 | Uhnder, Inc. | Pulse digital mimo radar system |
US11437735B2 (en) | 2018-11-14 | 2022-09-06 | Energous Corporation | Systems for receiving electromagnetic energy using antennas that are minimally affected by the presence of the human body |
CN109541532A (en) * | 2018-11-22 | 2019-03-29 | 中电科仪器仪表有限公司 | A kind of TDOA time difference estimation method under the gradual channel of large scale |
CN109639783B (en) * | 2018-11-30 | 2021-08-03 | 苏州达家迎信息技术有限公司 | Method, server and client for determining position information |
CN111323803B (en) * | 2018-12-14 | 2023-07-04 | 深圳市中兴微电子技术有限公司 | Wireless signal processing method, device and terminal |
KR20210117283A (en) | 2019-01-28 | 2021-09-28 | 에너저스 코포레이션 | Systems and methods for a small antenna for wireless power transmission |
JP2022519749A (en) | 2019-02-06 | 2022-03-24 | エナージャス コーポレイション | Systems and methods for estimating the optimum phase for use with individual antennas in an antenna array |
CN111629399B (en) * | 2019-02-28 | 2022-01-14 | 华为技术有限公司 | Message processing method and device and terminal |
US11681017B2 (en) | 2019-03-12 | 2023-06-20 | Uhnder, Inc. | Method and apparatus for mitigation of low frequency noise in radar systems |
KR102226683B1 (en) * | 2019-05-17 | 2021-03-11 | 한국과학기술원 | Position estimation method and apparatus for ue based on multi-downlink information of multi-frequencies |
CN112230256B (en) * | 2019-07-15 | 2024-04-09 | 苏州宝时得电动工具有限公司 | Autonomous robot, positioning calibration method and device thereof, and storage medium |
US11399262B2 (en) * | 2019-07-28 | 2022-07-26 | Polaris Wireless, Inc. | Estimating the location of a reference radio in a multi-story building and using the estimated location of the reference radio to estimate the location of a wireless terminal |
US11624837B2 (en) * | 2019-10-16 | 2023-04-11 | Superpedestrian, Inc. | Multi-receiver satellite-based location estimation refinement |
GB2588966A (en) * | 2019-11-16 | 2021-05-19 | Unipart Group Ltd | Time difference of arrival calculation |
CN111130653A (en) * | 2019-11-19 | 2020-05-08 | 北京航天测控技术有限公司 | Automatic calibration method, system, terminal device and computer readable storage medium |
FR3105835B1 (en) * | 2019-12-26 | 2021-11-26 | Zodiac Data Systems | Locating a transmitter by means of several geographically distant receiving stations using known object trajectories |
WO2021144711A2 (en) | 2020-01-13 | 2021-07-22 | Uhnder, Inc. | Method and system for intefrence management for digital radars |
WO2022027073A1 (en) * | 2020-07-31 | 2022-02-03 | Cohere Technologies, Inc. | Localization and auto-calibration in a wireless network |
US11337177B2 (en) | 2020-09-23 | 2022-05-17 | Glowstik, Inc. | System and method for generating amorphous dynamic display icons |
CN113030842B (en) * | 2021-03-05 | 2022-11-01 | 电子科技大学 | Angle super-resolution DOA estimation method based on broadband signals |
CN113259025B (en) * | 2021-04-08 | 2023-03-21 | 中国电子科技集团公司第二十九研究所 | Calibration system and method for broadband radio frequency receiving device |
CN113253310B (en) * | 2021-06-28 | 2021-10-08 | 中国人民解放军国防科技大学 | Method and system for measuring group delay of high-precision GNSS receiver of carrier phase |
US11410655B1 (en) | 2021-07-26 | 2022-08-09 | LifePod Solutions, Inc. | Systems and methods for managing voice environments and voice routines |
US11404062B1 (en) | 2021-07-26 | 2022-08-02 | LifePod Solutions, Inc. | Systems and methods for managing voice environments and voice routines |
CN114200395B (en) * | 2021-12-16 | 2024-01-16 | 长沙铭航智能科技有限公司 | Data quality monitoring method and device for multi-point positioning system and electronic equipment |
CN116184318B (en) * | 2023-05-04 | 2023-07-21 | 苏州大学 | Real-time sound source positioning method based on transient double-time sequence triggering method |
Family Cites Families (106)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4169245A (en) * | 1972-07-26 | 1979-09-25 | E-Systems, Inc. | Spectral correlation |
US3921076A (en) | 1973-03-08 | 1975-11-18 | Int Navigation Corp | Method of and apparatus for locating predetermined portions of a radio-frequency pulse, particularly adapted for leading edge location of loran and similar navigational pulses |
US4083003A (en) * | 1973-11-05 | 1978-04-04 | Products Of Information Technology, Inc. | Vehicle location system |
US3876980A (en) * | 1973-11-05 | 1975-04-08 | Products Of Information Techno | Vehicle location systems |
US4053890A (en) * | 1976-05-25 | 1977-10-11 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy | Internal calibration system |
USRE31254E (en) * | 1978-08-28 | 1983-05-24 | Sanders Associates, Inc. | Self calibration of a LORAN-C navigation receiver |
US5191342A (en) * | 1981-08-06 | 1993-03-02 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy | Fix-tracking system |
US4894662A (en) * | 1982-03-01 | 1990-01-16 | Western Atlas International, Inc. | Method and system for determining position on a moving platform, such as a ship, using signals from GPS satellites |
US5619212A (en) * | 1982-03-01 | 1997-04-08 | Western Atlas International, Inc. | System for determining position from suppressed carrier radio waves |
US4667203A (en) * | 1982-03-01 | 1987-05-19 | Aero Service Div, Western Geophysical | Method and system for determining position using signals from satellites |
US5194871A (en) * | 1982-03-01 | 1993-03-16 | Western Atlas International, Inc. | System for simultaneously deriving position information from a plurality of satellite transmissions |
JPS61294382A (en) * | 1985-06-24 | 1986-12-25 | Radio Res Lab | Method and device for measuring direction with high precision |
US4734702A (en) * | 1986-02-25 | 1988-03-29 | Litton Systems, Inc. | Passive ranging method and apparatus |
US4728958A (en) * | 1986-02-25 | 1988-03-01 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Coherent electromagnetic energy emitter locator |
US4740792A (en) * | 1986-08-27 | 1988-04-26 | Hughes Aircraft Company | Vehicle location system |
CA1290020C (en) * | 1987-02-09 | 1991-10-01 | Steven Messenger | Wireless local area network |
US4912475A (en) * | 1987-03-20 | 1990-03-27 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Techniques for determining orbital data |
US4899117A (en) * | 1987-12-24 | 1990-02-06 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Army | High accuracy frequency standard and clock system |
US5155590A (en) | 1990-03-20 | 1992-10-13 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | System for data channel level control |
JPH0278907A (en) * | 1988-09-16 | 1990-03-19 | Hitachi Ltd | Navigation system using map data and location system for moving body |
GB2285537B (en) | 1989-09-28 | 1995-11-08 | Marconi Co Ltd | Calibration of distributed receiver system for antenna array |
US5265121A (en) | 1989-10-17 | 1993-11-23 | Juanita H. Stewart | Spread spectrum coherent processor |
US5119104A (en) * | 1990-05-04 | 1992-06-02 | Heller Alan C | Location system adapted for use in multipath environments |
US5058200A (en) * | 1990-06-04 | 1991-10-15 | General Electric Company | Transmitter location searching system |
EP0473373A3 (en) * | 1990-08-24 | 1993-03-03 | Rockwell International Corporation | Calibration system for direct conversion receiver |
US5208756A (en) | 1991-01-28 | 1993-05-04 | Song Han L | Vehicle locating and navigating system |
JP2749456B2 (en) | 1991-03-06 | 1998-05-13 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Wireless communication equipment |
CA2064646A1 (en) * | 1991-04-02 | 1992-10-03 | Kipling W. Fyfe | Automatic number assignment module selection for mobile telephone |
US5216429A (en) * | 1991-04-17 | 1993-06-01 | Ricoh Company, Ltd. | Position measuring system using pseudo-noise signal transmission and reception |
US5365516A (en) | 1991-08-16 | 1994-11-15 | Pinpoint Communications, Inc. | Communication system and method for determining the location of a transponder unit |
US5248982A (en) * | 1991-08-29 | 1993-09-28 | Hughes Aircraft Company | Method and apparatus for calibrating phased array receiving antennas |
JP2776094B2 (en) | 1991-10-31 | 1998-07-16 | 日本電気株式会社 | Variable modulation communication method |
US5235341A (en) * | 1992-04-16 | 1993-08-10 | Effland John E | Method and system for measuring the position of lightning strokes |
US5515419A (en) * | 1992-06-01 | 1996-05-07 | Trackmobile | Tracking system and method for tracking a movable object carrying a cellular phone unit, and integrated personal protection system incorporating the tracking system |
JP2818077B2 (en) * | 1992-06-02 | 1998-10-30 | キャメリク ヘラー アラン | Target location system and location method |
AU657853B2 (en) * | 1992-06-16 | 1995-03-23 | Motorola, Inc. | Electronic monitoring system |
US5548809A (en) * | 1992-07-15 | 1996-08-20 | Southwestern Bell Technology Resources, Inc. | Spectrum sharing communications system and system for monitoring available spectrum |
FR2696553B1 (en) * | 1992-10-01 | 1994-11-25 | Alcatel Espace | Near field antenna calibration method for active antenna. |
US5596330A (en) | 1992-10-15 | 1997-01-21 | Nexus Telecommunication Systems Ltd. | Differential ranging for a frequency-hopped remote position determination system |
US5428667A (en) | 1993-03-11 | 1995-06-27 | Harris Corporation | Multi-channel cellular communications intercept system |
JP3302432B2 (en) * | 1993-03-12 | 2002-07-15 | 日本無線株式会社 | Satellite navigation receiver |
US5490073A (en) * | 1993-04-05 | 1996-02-06 | Caterpillar Inc. | Differential system and method for a satellite based navigation |
US5327144A (en) * | 1993-05-07 | 1994-07-05 | Associated Rt, Inc. | Cellular telephone location system |
US5442806A (en) * | 1993-06-08 | 1995-08-15 | Oki Telecom | Preferred carrier selection method for selecting any available cellular carrier frequency when neither home nor preferred cellular carrier frequencies are available |
US5402347A (en) | 1993-07-22 | 1995-03-28 | Trimble Navigation Limited | Satellite search methods for improving time to first fix in a GPS receiver |
US5500648A (en) * | 1993-08-11 | 1996-03-19 | Motorola, Inc. | Geolocation responsive radio telecommunication system and method therefor |
US5515062A (en) * | 1993-08-11 | 1996-05-07 | Motorola, Inc. | Location system and method with acquisition of accurate location parameters |
US5668837A (en) | 1993-10-14 | 1997-09-16 | Ericsson Inc. | Dual-mode radio receiver for receiving narrowband and wideband signals |
US5570099A (en) * | 1993-10-15 | 1996-10-29 | Loral Federal Systems Company | TDOA/FDOA technique for locating a transmitter |
CA2150938C (en) | 1993-10-28 | 1999-09-07 | Ricardo Lim | Demodulator logic unit adaptable to multiple data protocols |
US5606575A (en) * | 1993-10-29 | 1997-02-25 | Airnet Communications Corporation | FFT-based channelizer and combiner employing residue-adder-implemented phase advance |
US5469409A (en) * | 1994-03-14 | 1995-11-21 | Motorola, Inc. | Method for clock calibration in a position determination system |
US6157343A (en) * | 1996-09-09 | 2000-12-05 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Antenna array calibration |
US5463400A (en) * | 1994-06-30 | 1995-10-31 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for synchronizing to a multi-beam satellite TDMA communication system |
US5512908A (en) * | 1994-07-08 | 1996-04-30 | Lockheed Sanders, Inc. | Apparatus and method for locating cellular telephones |
US5602903A (en) * | 1994-09-28 | 1997-02-11 | Us West Technologies, Inc. | Positioning system and method |
JP3474942B2 (en) * | 1994-10-19 | 2003-12-08 | 富士通株式会社 | Positioning system |
US5629707A (en) * | 1995-01-06 | 1997-05-13 | Motorola, Inc. | Flexible signal source location apparatus and method therefor |
FI100921B (en) * | 1995-01-19 | 1998-03-13 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Spectral measurement receiver |
US5623414A (en) * | 1995-01-24 | 1997-04-22 | Massachusetts Inst Technology | Clock-aided satellite navigation receiver system for enhanced position estimation and integrity monitoring |
US6101399A (en) * | 1995-02-22 | 2000-08-08 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. University | Adaptive beam forming for transmitter operation in a wireless communication system |
US5812522A (en) | 1995-03-31 | 1998-09-22 | Airtouch Communications, Inc. | Location-ruled radio-integrated network |
JP3842819B2 (en) | 1995-04-27 | 2006-11-08 | トゥルム エス エー | Screw press |
US5701600A (en) | 1995-07-17 | 1997-12-23 | Motorola, Inc. | Radio receiver and method of calibrating same |
US5844522A (en) | 1995-10-13 | 1998-12-01 | Trackmobile, Inc. | Mobile telephone location system and method |
US5732387A (en) * | 1995-12-04 | 1998-03-24 | Motorola | Method and apparatus for call establishment in a satellite communication system |
US5729235A (en) * | 1995-12-13 | 1998-03-17 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Coherent GPS translator with spread spectrum pilot tone |
US5918180A (en) * | 1995-12-22 | 1999-06-29 | Dimino; Michael | Telephone operable global tracking system for vehicles |
US5874916A (en) * | 1996-01-25 | 1999-02-23 | Lockheed Martin Corporation | Frequency selective TDOA/FDOA cross-correlation |
US5774802A (en) * | 1996-04-10 | 1998-06-30 | Motorola Inc. | Apparatus and method for billing in a wireless communication system |
US6047192A (en) * | 1996-05-13 | 2000-04-04 | Ksi Inc. | Robust, efficient, localization system |
GB2313523B (en) * | 1996-05-23 | 2000-06-07 | Motorola Ltd | Self-calibration apparatus and method for communication device |
US6034635A (en) | 1996-06-06 | 2000-03-07 | Gilhousen; Klein S. | Method for using only two base stations for determining the position of a mobile subscriber in a CDMA cellular telephone system |
US5859612A (en) | 1996-06-06 | 1999-01-12 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method for using an antenna with a rotating beam for determining the position of a mobile subscriber in a CDMA cellular telephone system |
US5812609A (en) * | 1996-07-02 | 1998-09-22 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The National Security Agency | Communication intercept device using digital drop receivers in multiple tiers |
US5926763A (en) * | 1996-08-09 | 1999-07-20 | Gte Mobile Communications Service Corporation | Cellular communication system with voice channel usage biasing |
GB2354387B (en) | 1996-09-09 | 2001-05-09 | Dennis J Dupray | Wireless location using multiple simultaneous location estimators |
US6236365B1 (en) | 1996-09-09 | 2001-05-22 | Tracbeam, Llc | Location of a mobile station using a plurality of commercial wireless infrastructures |
US6249252B1 (en) | 1996-09-09 | 2001-06-19 | Tracbeam Llc | Wireless location using multiple location estimators |
US5918172A (en) * | 1996-09-27 | 1999-06-29 | Highwaymaster Communications, Inc. | Multiple number assignment module communication |
US5890068A (en) | 1996-10-03 | 1999-03-30 | Cell-Loc Inc. | Wireless location system |
US5936571A (en) * | 1997-01-31 | 1999-08-10 | Lockheed Martin Corporation | Integrated GPS/interference location system |
US5786790A (en) | 1997-02-27 | 1998-07-28 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | On-the-fly accuracy enhancement for civil GPS receivers |
US5973643A (en) * | 1997-04-11 | 1999-10-26 | Corsair Communications, Inc. | Method and apparatus for mobile emitter location |
US5920278A (en) * | 1997-05-28 | 1999-07-06 | Gregory D. Gibbons | Method and apparatus for identifying, locating, tracking, or communicating with remote objects |
US6061631A (en) * | 1997-07-03 | 2000-05-09 | Trimble Navigation, Ltd. | Hybrid approach for antenna baseline self-survey and line bias calibration using GPS carrier phase |
US5926133A (en) * | 1997-07-21 | 1999-07-20 | Denso Corporation | Differentially corrected position location system and method for mobile communication networks |
US5861842A (en) * | 1997-08-29 | 1999-01-19 | Space Systems/Loral, Inc. | Spacecraft disciplined reference oscillator |
US6148211A (en) * | 1997-09-05 | 2000-11-14 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and system for estimating a subscriber's location in a cluttered area |
FR2772927B1 (en) | 1997-12-18 | 2002-04-26 | Aqsacom | METHOD FOR LOCATING A MOBILE TELEPHONE AND EQUIPMENT FOR IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD |
US6035202A (en) * | 1997-12-19 | 2000-03-07 | Ericsson Inc. | Method and apparatus for locating a mobile unit |
US6014102A (en) * | 1998-04-17 | 2000-01-11 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for calibrating location finding equipment within a communication system |
US6133868A (en) * | 1998-06-05 | 2000-10-17 | Metawave Communications Corporation | System and method for fully self-contained calibration of an antenna array |
US6385185B1 (en) * | 1998-06-25 | 2002-05-07 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Methods and apparatus for coherent detection of signals with orthogonal data modulation |
US6321090B1 (en) | 1998-11-06 | 2001-11-20 | Samir S. Soliman | Mobile communication system with position detection to facilitate hard handoff |
US6298050B1 (en) * | 1998-11-25 | 2001-10-02 | Nortel Networks Limited | System and method for cancelling the extra interference created during position location in a CDMA cellular system |
BR9917164A (en) * | 1999-01-08 | 2002-01-22 | Trueposition Inc | Bandwidth synthesis for wireless location system |
US6184829B1 (en) * | 1999-01-08 | 2001-02-06 | Trueposition, Inc. | Calibration for wireless location system |
BR9917165A (en) * | 1999-01-08 | 2002-01-22 | Trueposition Inc | Method for use in a wireless location system and method for locating a transmitter |
WO2001071927A2 (en) | 2000-03-21 | 2001-09-27 | Telcordia Technologies, Inc. | Combined adaptive spatio-temporal processing and multi-user detection for cdma wireless systems |
US7072329B2 (en) | 2000-05-22 | 2006-07-04 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Combining differing transport technologies in a telecommunications system |
US7315567B2 (en) * | 2000-07-10 | 2008-01-01 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for partial interference cancellation in a communication system |
US6792034B1 (en) | 2000-10-06 | 2004-09-14 | Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. | Adaptive multi-users interference reduction and cancellation in a CDMA network |
SE524493C2 (en) | 2002-02-25 | 2004-08-17 | Telia Ab | Estimator and method for determining the position of a mobile station in a mobile communication system |
FI20021299A0 (en) * | 2002-07-01 | 2002-07-01 | Nokia Corp | A method and arrangement for fine-tuning position-related time measurements in a radio system |
GB0223498D0 (en) | 2002-10-09 | 2002-11-13 | Nokia Corp | Provision of information regarding a mobile station |
-
1999
- 1999-01-08 US US09/227,764 patent/US6184829B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-01-11 US US09/228,362 patent/US6266013B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-01-12 US US09/228,373 patent/US6091362A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-01-12 US US09/229,130 patent/US6172644B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-01-12 US US09/229,056 patent/US6097336A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-01-22 US US09/235,734 patent/US6115599A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 AU AU23590/00A patent/AU2359000A/en not_active Abandoned
- 1999-12-13 EP EP06012011A patent/EP1703296B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 CN CN2005100739052A patent/CN1696731B/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1999-12-13 DE DE69942591T patent/DE69942591D1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 GB GB0314325A patent/GB2387084B/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1999-12-13 EP EP99967282A patent/EP1145032A4/en not_active Ceased
- 1999-12-13 CN CNB2005100739048A patent/CN100473221C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1999-12-13 CN CNB998155195A patent/CN1230688C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1999-12-13 ES ES99965231T patent/ES2316195T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 KR KR1020017008666A patent/KR100694738B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-12-13 AT AT99965231T patent/ATE404880T1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-12-13 DE DE69939333T patent/DE69939333D1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1999-12-13 ES ES06012012T patent/ES2346993T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 KR KR1020017008675A patent/KR100775151B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 1999-12-13 AT AT06012011T patent/ATE450803T1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-12-13 IL IL14413499A patent/IL144134A0/en active IP Right Grant
- 1999-12-13 GB GB0116706A patent/GB2363293B/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1999-12-13 BR BR9917166-0A patent/BR9917166A/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 1999-12-13 CA CA002359797A patent/CA2359797C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 JP JP2000593031A patent/JP2002534695A/en active Pending
- 1999-12-13 DE DE69941742T patent/DE69941742D1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 AT AT06012012T patent/ATE474234T1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1999-12-13 CA CA002494984A patent/CA2494984C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 WO PCT/US1999/029505 patent/WO2000041403A2/en active Application Filing
- 1999-12-13 CA CA002494719A patent/CA2494719C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 EP EP06012012A patent/EP1701177B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 KR KR1020017008669A patent/KR100716683B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 1999-12-13 CA CA002494886A patent/CA2494886C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1999-12-13 ES ES06012011T patent/ES2336693T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2000
- 2000-01-31 US US09/495,423 patent/US6281834B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2000-01-31 US US09/495,417 patent/US6351235B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2000-01-31 US US09/495,421 patent/US6317081B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2000-03-31 US US09/539,352 patent/US6317604B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2000-08-10 US US09/635,703 patent/US6492944B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2000-08-24 US US09/648,404 patent/US6400320B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2000-08-24 US US09/645,802 patent/US6285321B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2001
- 2001-07-03 IL IL144133A patent/IL144133A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2001-07-03 IL IL144134A patent/IL144134A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2001-07-03 IL IL144132A patent/IL144132A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2001-12-05 US US10/005,068 patent/US6563460B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2001-12-05 US US10/004,895 patent/US6483460B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2002
- 2002-03-25 US US10/106,081 patent/US6603428B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 2002-05-21 US US10/154,176 patent/US20020172223A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2002-05-29 US US10/158,522 patent/US6661379B2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
2005
- 2005-05-05 US US11/122,735 patent/US7271765B2/en not_active Ceased
-
2006
- 2006-05-10 IL IL175538A patent/IL175538A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2006-05-10 IL IL175537A patent/IL175537A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
-
2007
- 2007-11-06 IL IL187185A patent/IL187185A0/en not_active IP Right Cessation
-
2009
- 2009-09-18 US US12/562,924 patent/USRE42285E1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2009-12-21 JP JP2009288640A patent/JP4971418B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
CA2494886C (en) | Calibration for wireless location system | |
KR101025654B1 (en) | Multiple pass location processor | |
EP1327312B1 (en) | Mobile-assisted network based techniques for improving accuracy of wireless location system | |
CA2454111C (en) | Monitoring of call information in a wireless location system | |
CA2454161C (en) | Improved method for estimating tdoa and fdoa in a wireless location system | |
EP1275209B1 (en) | Modified transmission method for improving accuracy for e-911 calls | |
EP1488251B1 (en) | Automatic synchronous tuning of narrowband receivers of a wireless location system for voice/traffic channel tracking | |
EP1145034A1 (en) | Bandwidth synthesis for wireless location system | |
CA2360136C (en) | Method for improving the accuracy of the wireless location system | |
WO2000040992A1 (en) | Location method for a wireless location system | |
WO2000041404A2 (en) | Efficient demodulation techniques for a wireless location system | |
WO2000041417A1 (en) | Directed retry method for use in a wireless location system |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
EEER | Examination request | ||
MKEX | Expiry |
Effective date: 20191213 |